Technical manual-PC400

Clinical Chemistry Analyzer
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Ref: 1300021859
Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN


Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN
Contents
Section 1: Introduction .....................................................................1 - 1
1. Document update ......................................................................................... 1 - 2
2. Legal information .......................................................................................... 1 - 4
3. Operational conditions ................................................................................. 1 - 6
Section 2: Specifications ..................................................................2 - 1
1. Technical specifications ............................................................................... 2 - 2
2. Physical specifications ................................................................................. 2 - 6
Section 3: Technology ......................................................................3 - 1
1. Optical principles .......................................................................................... 3 - 2
2. Fluidic principles ........................................................................................... 3 - 8
3. Temperature control ................................................................................... 3 - 12
4. Level detection and shock detection ........................................................ 3 - 22
5. Pressure detection ...................................................................................... 3 - 28
Section 4: Electric and electronic principles ..................................4 - 1
1. Mother board ................................................................................................. 4 - 3
2. Optical acquisition ...................................................................................... 4 - 14
3. Level detection ............................................................................................ 4 - 18
4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) .......................................... 4 - 25
5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280) ......................................................... 4 - 27
6. Internal computer 1300013734 .................................................................. 4 - 29
7. Power supply ............................................................................................... 4 - 30
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual i

8. Connectors .................................................................................................. 4 - 34
9. Instrument synoptic .................................................................................... 4 - 82
Section 5: Software description.......................................................5 - 1
1. Services menu overview ............................................................................... 5 - 2
2. Software architecture ................................................................................... 5 - 3
3. Diagnostics menu description ..................................................................... 5 - 7
4. Initialization phases .................................................................................... 5 - 25
Section 6: Troubleshooting ..............................................................6 - 1
1. Error messages ............................................................................................. 6 - 2
2. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 6 - 42
Section 7: ISE module.......................................................................7 - 1
1. ISE module description ................................................................................ 7 - 2
2. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7 - 38
3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 7 - 42
Section 8: Exploded views................................................................8 - 1
1. Reagent tray .................................................................................................. 8 - 3
2. Reagent tray closing assy ............................................................................ 8 - 6
3. Sample tray .................................................................................................... 8 - 7
4. Optical bench ................................................................................................ 8 - 8
5. Reaction tray ................................................................................................. 8 - 9
6. Cuvette changer .......................................................................................... 8 - 11
7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly ......................................................... 8 - 15
ii ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

8. Cuvette changer load rack ......................................................................... 8 - 16
9. Cuvette changer unload rack .................................................................... 8 - 17
10. Ventilation .................................................................................................. 8 - 18
11. Arms assembly .......................................................................................... 8 - 19
12. Sample arm ................................................................................................ 8 - 23
13. Reagent arm .............................................................................................. 8 - 24
14. Arms assembly kits ................................................................................... 8 - 25
15. Mixer assembly ......................................................................................... 8 - 26
16. Syringe assy .............................................................................................. 8 - 28
17. Wash cup assy .......................................................................................... 8 - 29
18. Fluid part .................................................................................................... 8 - 30
19. Covering ..................................................................................................... 8 - 32
20. ISE module ................................................................................................. 8 - 34
21. ISE module electrode holder ................................................................... 8 - 36
22. ISE module syringes ................................................................................. 8 - 37
23. Computer ................................................................................................... 8 - 38
24. Cooling unit ............................................................................................... 8 - 40
Section 9: Additional spare parts ....................................................9 - 1
1. Tools ............................................................................................................... 9 - 2
2. Kits ................................................................................................................. 9 - 3
3. Fuses .............................................................................................................. 9 - 3
4. Stickers .......................................................................................................... 9 - 4
5. Other consumables ....................................................................................... 9 - 5
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual iii

Section 10: Host connection ..........................................................10 - 1
1. Physical connection .................................................................................... 10 - 2
2. Connection configuration on the instrument ........................................... 10 - 3
3. Connection protocol ................................................................................... 10 - 5
4. ASTM format ............................................................................................... 10 - 6
5. Bidirectional connection ............................................................................ 10 - 9
6. Data exchange examples ......................................................................... 10 - 11
7. Connection test ......................................................................................... 10 - 16
8. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 10 - 27
Section 11: Maintenance ................................................................11 - 1
1. Preventive maintenance ............................................................................. 11 - 2
2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ..................................... 11 - 4
3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 11 - 7
iv ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Section 1: Introduction
1. Document update ......................................................................................... 1 - 2

1.1. Revisions.................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2
1.2. What’s new? .............................................................................................................................. 1 - 2
2. Legal information .......................................................................................... 1 - 3

2.1. Declaration of Conformity.......................................................................................................... 1-3
2.2. Notice of liability ........................................................................................................................ 1-3
2.3. Trademarks ................................................................................................................................ 1-3
2.4. Graphics .................................................................................................................................... 1-3
2.5. Document symbols .................................................................................................................... 1-3
2.6. Copyright © 2016 by HORIBA ABX SAS ................................................................................... 1-4
3. Operational conditions ................................................................................. 1 - 5

3.1. Environment............................................................................................................................... 1-5
3.2. Location ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5
3.3. Grounding .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
3.4. Humidity and temperature conditions ....................................................................................... 1-6
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check ......................................................................................... 1-6
3.6. Main power supply .................................................................................................................... 1-7
3.7. Environmental protection........................................................................................................... 1-7
3.8. Storage conditions and transportation ...................................................................................... 1-8
3.9. Package ..................................................................................................................................... 1-8
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual 1-1

Introduction
Document update
1. Document update
1.1. Revisions
Reference Internal reference Software version Document date issued

ABX Pentra 400 Pentra C400
RAA023A RAA023A 1.0.0 N/A August 2003
RAA023B RAA023B 2.0.0 N/A January 2004
RAA023C RAA023C 3.0.0 N/A December 2004
RAA023DEN RAA023DEN 4.4.0 N/A December 2007
RAA023EEN RAA023EEN 5.0.0 N/A June 2008
RAA023FEN RAA023FEN 5.0.5 N/A May 2010
RAA023GEN RAA023GEN 5.0.7 1.1.X September 2013
RAA023HEN RAA023HEN 5.0.8 1.1.X February 2014
1300021859 RAA023JEN 5.0.9 1.2.X June 2016
This document applies to the latest software version listed and higher versions.
All information included in this document is current as of the date of creation of this version. Changes
that may occur will be available on ITS Web site http://its-information.horiba-abx.com/.
This manual applies to both ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400.
For the ABX Pentra 400, this manual is intended for use on instruments with serial numbers
above 2999 (V3).
In some procedures, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware
versions:
■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.
■ V2 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers between 2000 and 2999.
1.2. What’s new?
Here is the list of major updates in this document release:
Item Description Chapter

Section 2: Specifications
Connections and characteristics of the new
RAS376: Installation
computer.
New computer RAS392: Internal computer
Spare parts replacement and Windows master
RAS533: Windows master
installation for the new computer.
installation
Electrical diagram of the new cooling unit
New cooling unit
models 115 V / 60 Hz with built-in power cable Section 3: Technology
models 115 V / 60 Hz
and circuit breakers.
New reagent needle Drawing of the new reagent needle. Section 3: Technology
1-2 ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Introduction
Document update
Item Description Chapter

Section 4: Electric and
electronic principles
Spare parts
Update of the spare parts references. Section 8: Exploded views
references
Section 9: Additional spare
parts
Modification of the warnings #620, 624, 650,
Warnings Section 6: Troubleshooting
654 and 655.
"Low pressure" Addition of the "low pressure" alarms in the
Section 6: Troubleshooting
alarms troubleshooting guide.
Replacement of the isolator and the ISE waste
ISE module tubing every six months. RAS388: ISE module
maintenance Replacement of the ISE syringes pistons once maintenance
a year.
New ISE syringe blocks with two covers and RAS388: ISE module
New ISE syringe four O-rings. maintenance
blocks Maintenance and replacement of the new ISE RAS538: ISE module spare part
syringe blocks. replacement
Addition of one spring on each ISE syringe RAS538: ISE module spare part
ISE syringe motors
motor. replacement
New lamp reference Modification of the lamp reference. RAS376: Installation
Addition of the procedure to clean and
C:\ and D:\ drives RAS378: 6 month maintenance
defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives.
New quality control Update of the procedure to check pipetting RAS393: Check up after
solution accuracy and precision. intervention
New pressure Update of the procedure to replace the
RAS442: Pressure sensors
sensors and board pressure sensors and board.
Windows master CD- Addition of the procedure to prepare the RAS533: Windows master
ROM Windows master CD-ROM. installation

Introduction
Legal information
2. Legal information
2.1. Declaration of Conformity
This product complies with the Standards and Directives named in the Declaration of Conformity.
The latest version of the EC Declaration of Conformity for this product is available on www.horiba-
abx.com/documentation.
2.2. Notice of liability
The information in this manual is distributed on an "As Is" basis, without warranty. While every
precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, HORIBA Medical will not assume any
liability to any persons or entities with respect to loss or damage, caused or alleged to be caused directly
or indirectly by not following the instructions contained in this manual, or by using the computer software
and hardware products described herein in a manner inconsistent with our product labelling.
2.3. Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Other product names mentioned within this publication may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective owners.
2.4. Graphics
All graphics including screens, printouts and photographs are for illustration purposes only and are not
contractual.
2.5. Document symbols
To alert the operator of potentially hazardous conditions, symbols described in this chapter are provided
wherever necessary throughout the manual.
Emphasizes information that must be followed to avoid hazard to either the operator or the
environment, or both.

Introduction
Legal information
Emphasizes information that must be followed to avoid possible damage to the instrument
or erroneous test results.
Emphasizes information that can be helpful to the operator before, during or after a specific
operational function.
Gives a summary of what can be achieved if the task is performed.
2.6. Copyright © 2016 by HORIBA ABX SAS
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of HORIBA Medical.
HORIBA ABX SAS

Parc Euromédecine - Rue du Caducée
B.P. 7290
34184 MONTPELLIER Cedex 4 - FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0)4 67 14 15 16
Fax: +33 (0)4 67 14 15 17

Introduction
Operational conditions
3. Operational conditions
3.1. Environment
The operation of the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 should be restricted to indoor location use only.
The instrument is operational at an altitude of maximum 3000 m (9840 ft).
The instrument is designed for safety from voltage surges according to INSTALLATION CATEGORY II
and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 (IEC 61010-1).
3.2. Location
Keep in mind that the instrument weighs approximately 120 kg (265 lb).
To move the instrument, four persons are required.
The lifting handles provided in the installation kit must be used.
■ Place your instrument on a clean and leveled table or workbench.

■ Avoid exposure to sunlight.
■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.
■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to dust.
■ Avoid direct exposure to air conditioner.
■ Place your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.
■ Place your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.
■ Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise such as a
centrifuge, etc.
■ Provide a space of at least 20 cm (7.9 in) at the back of the instrument for a proper ventilation.
■ Make sure to provide enough space to open the main cover easily. The instrument height is
approximately 63 cm (24.8 in) closed cover and 105 cm (41.3 in) open cover.
■ Make sure to provide enough space on both sides of the instrument to access the computer
connections and power supply connection.

Introduction
The Power switch and Power supply connection should always be accessible. When
positioning the system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy
access to these items.
3.3. Grounding
Proper grounding is required when installing the system. Check the wall outlet ground (earth) for proper
grounding to the facilities electrical ground. If you are unsure of the outlet grounding, contact your
facilities engineer to verify the proper outlet ground.
3.4. Humidity and temperature conditions
■ Instrument operating temperature: from +15°C (+59°F) to +32°C (+90°F). If the instrument is stored
at a temperature lower than 10°C (50°F), it should stand for one hour at normal room temperature
before use.
■ Humidity Conditions: Relative humidity of 20% - 85% maximum, without condensation.
■ Temperature gradient: 2°C (3.6°F) per hour.
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check
The instrument has been designed to produce less than the accepted level of electromagnetic
interference in order to operate in conformity with its destination, allowing the correct operation of other
instruments also in conformity with their destination.

Introduction
In case of suspected electromagnetic noise, make sure that the instrument has not been placed in the
proximity of electromagnetic fields or short wave emissions, e.g. Radar, X-rays, Scanners, Cell phones,
etc.
Do not perform analysis while cover is open or not correctly fixed. Electromagnetic noise can
affect the data or disrupt a nearby instrument.
3.6. Main power supply
It is recommended to install the system on UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
Grounding is required. Make sure the earth wall-plug is correctly connected to the laboratory grounding
system. If there is no such system, a ground stake should be used.
Use only the main supply cable delivered with the instrument.
Main power supply voltage fluctuations must not exceed +/- 10% of the nominal voltage.
■ Always disconnect the system from the supply before servicing.

■ To prevent the risk of electrical shock, do not remove the covers or the back panel.
3.7. Environmental protection
Used accessories and consumables disposal

Disposable used accessories and consumables must be collected by a laboratory specialized in
elimination and recycling of this kind of material according to the local legislation.
Instrument disposal
This product should be disposed of and recycled at the end of the useful life in accordance
with European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
and/or European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries and accumulators.

Introduction
3.8. Storage conditions and transportation
Instrument storage and transportation temperatures: from -20°C (-4°F) to +50°C (+122°F).
Analyzer exposure to rainfall and extended sunlight must be avoided. The outdoors storage of the
analyzer is prohibited.
Before the shipping of an instrument by transporter, whatever the destination, an external

decontamination of the instrument must be carried out.
Before instrument removal from use, transportation or disposal, perform a general cleaning and a
draining of your instrument.
3.9. Package
Factory package of the analyzer ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 and its implements consists of firm
corrugated cardboard, polyethylene foil and inner foam plastic framework. Package protects analyzer
and its implements from adverse factors of outside environment.
Analyzer must be transported in its original factory package.

Introduction
1 - 10 ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Section 2: Specifications
1. Technical specifications............................................................................... 2 - 2
1.1. Intended use .............................................................................................................................. 2-2
1.2. Analysis methods....................................................................................................................... 2-2
1.3. Throughput ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
1.4. Reagent...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
1.5. Sample....................................................................................................................................... 2-3
1.6. Calibrator and control ................................................................................................................ 2-4
1.7. Computer characteristics .......................................................................................................... 2-4
1.8. Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2. Physical specifications ................................................................................. 2 - 6

2.1. Power requirements................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2. Dimension and weight ............................................................................................................... 2-6
2.3. Sound level ................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.4. Water requirement ..................................................................................................................... 2-7

Specifications
Technical specifications
1. Technical specifications
1.1. Intended use
The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 system is a fully automated chemistry analyzer using colorimetry,
turbidimetry and potentiometry technologies. It is mostly meant to be used for in vitro diagnostic
analyses based on homogeneous samples such as serum, plasma, urine and whole blood.
1.2. Analysis methods
The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 system allows analysis by:
■ Colorimetry
■ Turbidimetry
■ Potentiometry: direct for serum and plasma, indirect for urine (ISE module option)
1.3. Throughput
■ Up to 300 tests per hour without ISE

■ Up to 400 tests per hour with ISE
1.4. Reagent
Packaging accepted
■ Twin compartment cassette 30/10 from HORIBA Medical
■ Single compartment cassette 100 from HORIBA Medical
■ Reagent rack
On board conditions
■ Capacity: 52 cassettes (39 tests with reagent racks)
■ Temperature: 44 positions refrigerated at 4°C - 10°C (39°F - 50°F) and eight positions at room
temperature

Specifications
Reagent management
■ Barcode reagent identification
■ Back-up for same reagent
■ Remaining volume calculation
■ Automated reagent on board stability check
Reagent sampling
■ Volume:
- Minimum: 2 µL with sample needle and 15 µL with reagent needle
- Maximum: 600 µL
■ Capacitive level detection
■ Insufficient volume detection
■ Reagent preheating at 37°C +/- 0.5°C (98.6°F +/- 0.9°F)
1.5. Sample
Sample types
■ Serum
■ Plasma
■ Urine
■ Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF)

■ Whole blood
■ Homogeneous liquid
Sample tube types accepted

■ Primaryand secondary tubes:
- 4 and 5 mL (diameter: 13 mm)
- 7 and 10 mL (diameter: 16 mm)
■ Sample cups (700 µL)
On board conditions
■ Capacity: 60 samples
■ Continuous loading
Sample management
■ Barcode sample identification:
Barcodes from two to 16 digits.
Accepted barcode types:
- ITF 2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved) with or without check digit
- Code 39 with or without check digit
- Code 128
- Codabar
■ Tube presence detector

Specifications
Sampling
■ Volume:
- Minimum: 2 µL
- Maximum: 95 µL for one step and 380 µL for four steps
■ Automatic sample dilution: 1/2 to 1/22500
■ Automatic post-concentration: x2 to x10
■ Capacitive level detection
■ Shock detection
■ Clot detection and insufficient volume detection
1.6. Calibrator and control
Calibrator/Control positioning
Sample tray and reagent tray
Automatic standard dilution series

■ Main direct dilution ratio: 1/2 - 1/150
■ Main indirect dilution ratio: 1/2 - 1/1508
1.7. Computer characteristics
■ Color LCD touch screen: 12 in.

■ Operating System: Windows 7™
■ Processor: Atom™ 1.46 GHz
■ RAM (Random Access Memory): 4 GB
■ Hard drive: 250 GB
■ RS232C, RJ45* LAN (Local Area Network), USB 2.0 (7 ports), Audio
* Not used
1.8. Measurement
Reaction system
■ Reaction cuvettes: disposable acrylic cuvettes
■ Cuvette volume: 150 µL - 600 µL
■ Automatic loading and unloading of cuvettes
■ "New cuvette" holder capacity: 360 cuvettes
■ "Used cuvette" holder capacity: 360 cuvettes
■ Mixing: stirring paddle

Specifications
■ Reaction temperature: 37°C +/- 0.2°C (99°F +/- 0.36°F), air bath controlled
■ Measurement cycle: 12 seconds
■ Sampling cycle: 12 seconds
■ Reaction time: 12 seconds - 20 minutes
Optical system
■ Measurement principle: absorbance measurement (Bichromatic or Monochromatic)
■ Light source: tungsten-halogen lamp
■ Diffraction: concave reflective grating spectrograph
■ Detector: photodiode array
■ Wavelengths: 340, 380, 405, 420, 455, 490, 505, 520, 550, 560, 580, 600, 620, 660, 700 nm
■ Optical linearity:
Linearity Linearity Linearity

Wavelength Wavelength Wavelength
(Absorbance) (Absorbance) (Absorbance)
340 nm 2.95 490 nm 2.5 580 nm 2.5
380 nm 2 505 nm 2.5 600 nm 2.5
405 nm 2.5 520 nm 2.5 620 nm 2.5
420 nm 3.5 550 nm 2.5 660 nm 2
455 nm 2 560 nm 2.5 700 nm 2
Algorithms supported
■ Factor
■ Slope average
■ Linear regression
■ Linear interpolation
■ LOGIT/LOG4
■ LOGIT/LOG5
■ Exponential

Specifications
Physical specifications
2. Physical specifications
2.1. Power requirements
■ Power supply:
- Instrument: from 100 V to 240 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz
- Cooling unit CU401 (depends on models):
100 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz
115 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz
230 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz
230 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz
- Cooling unit CU400 (depends on models):
100 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz
115 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz
230 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz
240 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz
■ Maximum power consumption:
- Instrument: 250 VA
- Cooling unit CU401: 700 W
- Cooling unit CU400: 450 W
■ Maximum heat output:
- Instrument + cooling unit CU401: 1940 BTU/h (2010 kJ/h)
- Instrument + cooling unit CU400: 2080 BTU/h (2160 kJ/h)
■ Printer: refer to your printer manual.
Fuses characteristics:
Slow-blow internal fuses having the following characteristics: 2 x T 6.3 A H 250 V (5x20 mm)
2.2. Dimension and weight
■ Instrument dimensions: 101 x 71 x 63 cm (Width x Depth x Height)

■ Instrument weight: 120 kg (265 lb)
■ Cooling unit CU401:
- Dimensions: 25 x 50 x 60 cm (Width x Depth x Height)
- Weight: 39 kg (86 lb)
■ Cooling unit CU400:
- Dimensions: 29 x 42 x 40 cm (Width x Depth x Height)
- Weight: 35 kg (77 lb)

Specifications
2.3. Sound level
The maximum sound level is < 60 dB (A).
2.4. Water requirement
■ De-ionized/distilled water
■ Water specifications:
- Resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm
- Conductivity < 0.2 µS/cm

Specifications

Section 3: Technology
1. Optical principles .......................................................................................... 3 - 2

1.1. Beer-Lambert law ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
1.2. Optical bench and spectrophotometer description................................................................... 3 - 3
1.3. Spectrophotometer initialization and absorbance measurements ............................................ 3 - 4
2. Fluidic principles ........................................................................................... 3 - 8

2.1. Instrument hydraulic diagram .................................................................................................... 3 - 8
2.2. Valves....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 10
2.3. Cooling system diagram .......................................................................................................... 3 - 11
3. Temperature control................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.1. PID control ............................................................................................................................... 3 - 12
3.2. Reagent tray ............................................................................................................................ 3 - 15
3.3. Reagent needle........................................................................................................................ 3 - 20
3.4. Reaction tray............................................................................................................................ 3 - 21
4. Level detection and shock detection ........................................................ 3 - 22

4.1. Reagent level detection ........................................................................................................... 3 - 22
4.2. Sample level and shock detection........................................................................................... 3 - 26
5. Pressure detection...................................................................................... 3 - 28
5.1. General points.......................................................................................................................... 3 - 28
5.2. High pressure, low pressure and bad sampling detection ...................................................... 3 - 29

Technology
Optical principles
1. Optical principles
1.1. Beer-Lambert law
The biochemistry analysis principle is to mix some reagents with a sample to produce a chemical
reaction. The reactive solution thus produced presents absorption properties at a specific wavelength.
The absorbance measures the reactive solution capacity to absorb the light that travels through it, at a
specific wavelength.
The absorbance is defined as follows:
A = log (I0 / I)
A Absorbance
I0 Intensity of light before it travels through the reactive solution
I Intensity of light that has passed through the reactive solution
Absorption of light as it travels through the reactive solution
Cuvette with
reactive solution
I0, Incident light intensity I, Transmitted light intensity

Lamp Detector
l = 0.6 cm
The Beer-Lambert law states that the measured absorbance at a specific wavelength is
proportional to the length of solution that the light travels through, and also the concentration of
the absorbing substance in the solution.
A=ε*l*c
A Absorbance
ε Absorption coefficient of the absorbing substance at a specific wavelength
l Length of solution that the light travels through
c Concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution
In the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 case, the length of solution that the light travels through is fixed
(l = 0.6 cm) as the absorption coefficient of the absorbing substance at a specific wavelength. So, the
measured absorbance at a specific wavelength is proportional to the concentration of the absorbing
substance in the solution.

Technology
Optical principles
In conclusion, the concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution is a function of the intensity
of light that has passed through the reactive solution, at a specific wavelength.
c = [ 1 / (ε * l) ] * log (I0 / I)
c Concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution

ε Absorption coefficient of the measured substance at the specific wavelength used
l Length of solution that the light travels through
I0 Intensity of light before it travels through the reactive solution
I Intensity of light that has passed through the reactive solution
1.2. Optical bench and spectrophotometer description
1.2.1. General principle
Optical bench Spectrophotometer
■ White light from the halogen tungsten lamp is collected by the condensing lens.
■ Once reflected by the folding mirror and shaped by the second lens, the white light beam passes
through the cuvette where it travels through the reactive solution.
■ White light emerging from the cuvette is then coupled with the spectrograph entrance slit by the third
lens.
■ The concave reflective grating spreads the incoming white light into monochromatic radiations and
reflects them onto the photodiode array.

Technology
Optical principles
1.2.2. Spectrophotometer principle

■ The spectrograph entrance slit and concave reflective grating allow the spectrophotometer resolution.
■ The concave reflective grating is an optical element, with equally spaced grooves on material surface,
which:
- disperses the incident white light into monochromatic radiations
- and reflects them in discrete directions called diffraction orders.
Lamp Photodiode array

order -1 order 0
order +1
order -2 order +2
white light
monochromatic radiations Concave reflective grating
■ For the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the monochromatic radiations of diffraction order +1 are used
and reflected onto the photodiode array.
■ The concave reflective grating focuses all the wavelengths onto the photodiode array.
■ For the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the photodiode array measures the light intensity for 15
wavelengths: 340, 380, 405, 420, 455, 490, 505, 520, 550, 560, 580, 600, 620, 660, 700 nm.
1.3. Spectrophotometer initialization and absorbance measurements
During a complete spectrophotometer initialization, the steps 1 to 6 (described below) are performed.
1. Spectrophotometer gain adjustment and check

For each wavelength, the light intensity is measured on air (without cuvette) and amplified by a multiplier
coefficient. This multiplier coefficient named gain is adjusted to measure a light intensity on air (without
cuvette) included between 57200 and 65535 (~ 61000).
The gains, expressed in % in the Spectro menu (Services > Diagnostics > Spectro), correspond to the
amplification percentages applied for each wavelength (from 0 to 100%). These amplification
percentages are directly proportional to the multiplier coefficients applied for each wavelength.
The gains should be included between 1 and 95%.
■ If one of the gains is > 95% and ≤ 98%, the lamp is still operational but dying and a warning is triggered
(#629 "The lamp is dying, it is still operational but you will need to change it soon.").
■ If one of the gains is < 1% or > 98%, the lamp needs to be replaced at once and an alarm is triggered
(#520 "The lamp has failed the gain check. Please change the lamp.").
1 95 98

Technology
Optical principles
2. Light stability check

The light intensity is measured on air (without cuvette) for each wavelength to check the lamp stability.
Lamp Detector
IA, Light intensity on air
For each wavelength, the two following checks are performed:

■ The absorbance is checked every 12 s during 600 s maximum to ensure that the difference between
2 consecutive absorbances is < 0.00022.
■ IA is checked to ensure that it is included between 57200 and 65535.
3. Black intensity measurement

The black intensity is measured in the black (with the inter-sector located between the sectors 1 and 6
of the reaction tray) for each wavelength.
It is the residual intensity or electronic noise measured in the black.
Inter-sector
Lamp Detector
IB, Black intensity
IB must be included between 1400 and 2000 for all the wavelengths.
No warning or alarm is triggered if IB is out of these ranges.
4. Cuvette cleanness check

The light intensity is measured through the empty cuvettes at 340 and 700 nm to check the presence
and cleanness of one cuvette.
Empty cuvette
Lamp Detector
IC, Light intensity

on empty cuvette
The absorbance is calculated as follows:
A = log [ (IA - IB) / (IC - IB) ]
A Absorbance
IA Light intensity on air
IB Black intensity
IC Light intensity on empty cuvette
The absorbance at 340 and 700 nm is checked to ensure that it is included in the cuvette presence range
as in the cuvette cleanness range.

Technology
Optical principles
Wavelength Cuvette presence range Cuvette cleanness range

(nm) (Absorbance) (Absorbance)
340 0.03 - 10.0 0.060 - 0.120
700 0.03 - 10.0 0.050 - 0.090
5. Reference light intensity measurement

Once the presence and cleanness of one cuvette are checked, the reference light intensity is measured
through a water-filled cuvette (150 µL) for each wavelength.
Water-filled
cuvette
Lamp Detector
IW, Reference light intensity

on water-filled cuvette
6. Reaction tray check

The cuvette cleanness check is performed for all the cuvettes (see Cuvette cleanness check, page 3-5).
One after the other, each reaction tray position is unloaded, then reloaded and the cuvette segment is
checked.
The cuvette segments with at least 4 clean cuvettes are kept on the reaction tray, the other ones are
replaced.
The steps 1 to 6 (described above) are automatically performed every time the instrument is:
■ turned on
■ woken up after a "stand-by"
■ initialized after a lamp replacement from the Customer Services menu (Services >
Customer Services > Cycles) or a modification of spectrophotometer gain adjustment
from the Spectro menu (Services > Diagnostics > Spectro).
Cuvette Exit
Start up or Lamp Measure
Steps Routine segment "Diagnostics"
wake up replacement gain
replacement menu
Gain adjustment
X X X
and check
Light stability check X X X
Light intensity on air
X X X X
(IA)
Black intensity (IB) X X X
Cuvette cleanness
X X X X X X
check (IC)
Reference light
X X X
intensity (IW)

Technology
Optical principles
7. Absorbance measurement (Normal case)

The light intensity is measured through the reactive solution at a specific wavelength.
Cuvette with
reactive solution
Lamp Detector
I, Transmitted light intensity
The absorbance is calculated as follows:
A = log [ (IW - IB) / (I - IB) ]
A Absorbance
IW Reference light intensity on water-filled cuvette
IB Black intensity
I Transmitted light intensity
8. Bichromatism principle
The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 measures the absorbance at two different wavelengths to correct the
absorbance due to a cuvette defect, some sample interferences, etc.
The primary wavelength is used to measure the reactive solution absorbance.
The secondary wavelength is used to measure the absorbance due to a cuvette defect, some sample
interferences, etc.
The absorbance is corrected as follows:
A = A1 - A2
A Absorbance
A1 Measured absorbance at the primary wavelength
A2 Measured absorbance at the secondary wavelength

Technology
Fluidic principles
2. Fluidic principles
2.1. Instrument hydraulic diagram
Refer to the instrument hydraulic diagram on next page.
Sales
Mark on diagram P/n Designation
unit
EBA010A
LV1, LV2, LV3 VALVE, 2 WAYS ELECTROVALVE 1
(1202351010)
EBA011A
LV4, LV5 VALVE, 3 WAYS ELECTROVALVE 1
(1202351011)
NEEDLE MANIFOLD
1300015267 MANIFOLD, WITH VALVES V1 AND V2 1
(LV1-LV2)
XCA194B
MANIFOLD (LV3-LV5) VALVE, 3 VALVES ASSY 1
(1209122194)
9001072
FILTER FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE 1
(1229001072)
XEC202AS
B1 PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET 1
(1209179202)
XCA216BS
B2 PUMP, WASTE ASSY + METAL SHEET 1
(1209129216)
XCA198B
LOW MANIFOLD FLUID, OVERFLOW MANIFOLD 1
(1209122198)
XCA197A
FLUID, CONDENSATION MANIFOLD V1 1
(1209121197)
EAB013A
E1 FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR 1
(1202211013)
EAB015A Pack
E2 FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5
(1202211015) of 5
0.89-xxx EAE004A* TUBING, TYGON 0.889 (0.035) *
C4x6-xxx EAE028A* TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 *
C4x7-xxx EAE043A* TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X7 *
C6x9-xxx A00AM07677* TUBING, PVC 6X9 *
C7x10-xxx 0779145* TUBING, PVC 7X9 *
EAJ003A
EAJ0003A 6.6-8 COLLAR, MEDIUM D=6-8 1
(1202261003)
3027030
3027030 D7 CLAMP, TUBE D7 1
(1223027030)
EAB041A
E3 FLUID, Y FITTING DI=6.25 1
(1202211041)
EAB028A
FLUID, T FITTING TS7 1
(1202211028)

Technology
Fluidic principles
Sales
Mark on diagram P/n Designation
unit
FITTING, H2O/WASTE CONNECT.ASSY
(Contains: 3 x FITTING, ANTI ROTATION WASHER
XCA196AS
WASTE WASTE H2O EAC008A (1202221008), 3 x FITTING, LUER FEMALE 1
(1209129196)
I=3MM EAC010A (1202221010), 3 x FITTING, LUER
MALE/FEMALE I=2.5 EAC018A (1202221018))
XBA568F
FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY 1
(1209114568)
XBA574C
FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY 1
(1209113574)
LBH004A
FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER 1
(1207791004)
* Possible to order under the following references:

- EAE004AS (1202249004) (2 metres)
- EAE008AS (1202249008) (2 metres)
- EAE009AS (1202249009) (2 metres)
- EAE028AS (1202249028) (2 metres)
- EAE043AS (1202249043) (2 metres)
- A00AM07677S (1201907677) (2 metres)
- 0779145S (1229779145) (2 metres)

Technology
Fluidic principles
2.2. Valves
2.2.1. Valves 3, 4 and 5

The valves 3, 4 and 5 are located on a "manifold" block behind the pumps. This block is visible as shown
below. The valves are behind the plate and visible from the rear of the instrument after removing the rear
plate (8 CHC screws).
V4
V5
A
B
E
F
C
D
V3
2.2.2. Valves 1 and 2

The valves 1 and 2 are located right above the syringes and visible from the rear of the instrument after
removing the plate.
V1 V2
V2
V1
Sample syringe Reagent syringe

Technology
Fluidic principles
2.3. Cooling system diagram
Refer to the cooling system diagram on next page.
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual 3 - 11

Technology
Temperature control
3. Temperature control
3.1. PID control
3.1.1. General points

The PIC U44 of the instrument mother board ensures the temperature control of:
■ the cooled area of the reagent tray
■ the reagent needle
■ the reaction tray chamber.
The temperature control system used is a PID controller (Proportional-Integral-Derivative).

The following diagram describes the PID controller principle.
TSetpoint Error Order TMeasured

+ PID System
-
TSetpoint Setpoint temperature

TMeasured Measured temperature
Error Error between the setpoint temperature and the measured temperature
PID PID controller
System Controlled system (cooling unit, heater of the reagent needle or reaction tray chamber)
Order Order in % of the system cooling or heating capacity
■A temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the cooled area of the reagent tray, the
reagent needle or the reaction tray chamber.
■ The error between the setpoint temperature and the measured temperature is calculated.
■ According to the calculated error, the PID controller sends an order to the system. This order is a
percentage of the system cooling or heating capacity.

Technology
Temperature control
The following diagram gives an example of response of a PID controlled system.
Controlled
value
1.4 Zero permanent error

1.3
Excess
1.2
1.1 + 10%
Measured value
1
Setpoint value
0.9 - 10%
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
Time of response to
0.2
reach the setpoint value
0.1
0 Time
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Three parameters are used to adjust the PID controller: Gain (Proportional parameter), Ti (Integral
parameter) and Td (Derivative parameter).
The PID controller is adjusted to reach a compromise between:
■a short time of response (determined by Ti)
■a low excess (determined by Td)
■a zero permanent error (ensured by Ti).
3.1.2. Instrument PID parameters

The instrument PID parameters are displayed in the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics > Heating).

Technology
Temperature control
For each part (reagent needle, reaction tray chamber and cooled area of the reagent tray), the following
temperature control values are given:
Heading Description
Gain Proportional parameter of PID controller.
Te/Ti Integral parameter of PID controller.
Td/Te Derivative parameter of PID controller.
Te (s) Frequency of the order sent by the PID controller to the system.
For each cycle of a time Te, minimum time on which the signal
Minimum T Off (ms)
amplitude can be at 0.
Assigned Value (°C) Setpoint temperature.
Used for the Manual Mode only.
Assigned Value (%)
Order in % of the cooling or heating capacity.
If checked, the temperature control is manually performed by
Manual Mode
using the Assigned Value in %.
NTC Impedance NTC value for the setpoint temperature.
Current (°C) Measured temperature.
Power (%) Order in % of the cooling or heating capacity.
Do not modify the instrument PID parameters.

Only the NTC value for the reaction tray chamber is modifiable by the technician.
The order is sent by the PID controller to the system via a PWM (Pulse-Width Modulation) signal.
This PWM signal is proportional to the order in % of cooling or heating system capacity.
The following diagram gives examples of PWM signals in relation with orders in % of cooling or heating
system capacity.
Amplitude
0
0% 25% 50% 75%
Time
0 Te 2Te 3Te 4Te
■ The PWM signal is sent in cycles of a time Te.

■ For each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the signal amplitude is at 1, is proportional to the order
in percentage of cooling or heating system capacity.
For each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the signal amplitude is at 0 cannot be lower
than the Minimum T Off. In this case, the time (on which the signal amplitude is at 0) is equal
to 0.

Technology
Temperature control
3.2. Reagent tray
3.2.1. Principle
The reagent tray consists of 52 numbered positions of which 44 are refrigerated and 8 are at room
temperature:
■ Cooled area of the reagent tray, page 3-15
■ Temperate area of the reagent tray, page 3-15.
Cooled area of the reagent tray

■ This reagent tray area is refrigerated at 6°C using a cooling unit with a cooling loop inside the reagent
tray.
8 fans (5V), located all along the cooling loop, continuously move the cooled air inside the reagent tray.
■A temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the cooled area of the reagent tray.
According to the measured temperature, the PIC U44 of the instrument mother board controls the
cooling unit via a PWM signal (Te = 20 s).
■ The PWM signal is sent through the cooling unit control cable that connects the cooling unit to the
instrument.
Round DIN Sub-D female

connector Direction connector Signal
(Cooling unit) (Instrument)
Management of cooling unit ON/OFF (via the relay)
Pin 1 Pin 9
+5V
Pin 2 Pin 5 Ground 0 V
Low liquid level alarm
Pin 3 Pin 4
0 V = OK; + 5 V = low level
Compressor overload alarm
Pin 4 Pin 6
0 V = OK; + 5 V = compressor OFF
Pin 5 Pin 3 Solenoid valve control via the PWM signal + 5 V
Housing Pin 1 Shield
Pin 2, 7, 8 Not connected
Temperate area of the reagent tray

■ This reagent tray area is kept at room temperature using a fan. The fan (5 V) periodically moves hot-air
(from the instrument inner area) into the temperate area of the reagent tray to warm it.
■A temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the instrument.
According to the measured temperature, the instrument mother board directly controls the fan via a
PWM signal (Te = 10 s).
For each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the fan is activated is inversely proportional to the
temperature measured within the instrument. This is illustrated by the following diagram.

Technology
Temperature control
% of time on which the fan is activated
100%
10% Temperature
14°C 35°C
The fan is activated only if the reagent tray is in its home position (to warm only the temperate
reagent tray area).
Fan
Reagent tray home position:
1- Position 36 in front of the yellow arrow
2- Temperate area in front of the fan

Technology
Temperature control
3.2.2. Cooling unit description

The cooling unit consists of:
■ a glycol bath (glycol + distilled water) with an integrated recirculation pump that ensures constant
conditions for the reagent tray cooling loop
■a cooling circuit that cools the glycol bath.
The following diagram describes the cooling circuit principle.
Glycol bath
Evaporator 3
Solenoid valve Capillary
tube
Condenser Dessicator
Compressor
Fan
1 2
■ The refrigerant fluid used in the cooling circuit is a refrigerant gas of R-134 type (Freon).
■ The refrigerant fluid circulating in the cooling circuit undergoes a transformation cycle of four steps.
1. The fluid is in a gaseous state. It passes through the compressor where it is compressed and its
temperature and pressure is raised. Its pressure is then controlled by a pressure sensor (only for
cooling unit CU401).
2. The fluid is in a gaseous state, in high pressure. It circulates through the condenser by a fan where
it passes from a gaseous state into a liquid state and its temperature is slightly reduced. Then, the
fluid circulates through the dessicator (where its impurities are eliminated) before passing through
the capillary tube.
3. The fluid is in a liquid state, in high pressure. It passes through the capillary tube where its
temperature and pressure are reduced. This step is called the gas expansion.
4. The fluid is in the beginning state of a liquid/gaseous transformation, in low pressure. It cools the
glycol bath circulating through the evaporator, where it passes into a gaseous state and its
temperature is slightly raised.
■ The temperature control is performed by the solenoid valve that opens a bypass to inject the hot fluid
into the evaporator.
- If the solenoid valve is opened, the cooling capacity is reduced to zero.
- If the solenoid valve is closed, the cooling capacity rises to its maximum.
■ According to the temperature measured within the cooled area of the reagent tray, the PIC U44 of the
instrument mother board controls the solenoid valve via a PWM signal (Te = 20 s).

3 - 18
Cooling unit models with fuses
Technology
Voltage on connectors SK1, SK2,

SK3 and SK4: main power supply
Temperature control
3.2.3. Cooling unit electric diagram
(Top cover for CU400)

Voltage on connector SK5: 5V / >100V
depending on the valve state
Only for CU401

Cooling unit models with circuit breakers
Voltage on connectors SK1, SK2,
SK3 and SK4: main power supply

Voltage on connector SK5: 5V / >115V
depending on the valve state
Temperature control
3 - 19
Technology
Technology
Temperature control
3.3. Reagent needle
■ The reagent needle is a stainless steel needle with an external graphitized teflon coating and an internal
sheathing made up of a teflon capillary tube from one end to the other.
■ The reagent needle preheats the reagents at 37°C (± 0.5°C) during the sampling thanks to a resistive
coil wire located along the reagent needle.
The resistive coil wire is powered by 24 V, its resistance is 36 Ω and its electric power is 16 W.
■A temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the reagent needle.
heater via a PWM signal (Te = 0.5 s).
The NTC resistance is 6.02 kΩ at 37°C and 10 kΩ at 25°C.
■ The PWM signal (5V) is sent from the PIC U44 to the transistor Q3 of the instrument mother board.
Then, the transistor Q3 converts and sends the PWM signal (24V) to power the heater.
■ During the reagent level detection, the reagent needle heater and NTC are respectively switched off
by the relays K1 and K2 of the reagent level detection board in order not to disturb the reagent level
detection.
Heater + NTC connector

To J5 on reagent level detection board
Level detection connector
To J1 on reagent level detection board

Technology
Temperature control
3.4. Reaction tray
■ The reaction tray is located in a chamber heated at 37°C (± 0.2°C) thanks to a heater and a fan.
The heater, located at the bottom of the chamber, is powered by 24 V, its resistance is 4.3 Ω and its
electric power is 140 W.
The fan (24 V), located right above the heater, continuously moves hot-air inside the reaction tray
chamber.
■A temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the reaction tray chamber.
heater via a PWM signal (Te = 2 s).
The NTC resistance is 6.08 kΩ at 37°C and 10 kΩ at 25°C.
■ The PIC U44 of the instrument mother board sends a control signal to the power supply. Then, the
power supply converts the control signal and sends the PWM signal (24V) to power the heater.
Cooled air
Reaction tray NTC
Fan
Heater
Hot air

Technology
Level detection and shock detection
4. Level detection and shock detection
4.1. Reagent level detection
The reagent level detection is a capacitive level detection and is ensured by the reagent level detection
board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20.
Depending on the model of the reagent level detection board you have on your instrument, the reagent
level detection principle slightly differs.
4.1.1. Reagent level detection board XAA500FS (1209109500)

The following diagram describes the reagent level detection principle.
Oscillator
U1
Needle
Detector Data treatment Instrument
mother board
NTC Relay K2
Heater Relay K1
Reagent level
detection board
1. The oscillator, built in the microcontroller U1, sends continuously a frequency of 12 MHz to the
reagent needle.
2. When the reagent arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends the following to the
microcontroller U1 of the reagent level detection board:
- the sensitivity level (see Sensitivity level, page 3-23) set according to the liquid to be detected.
- a start signal to start the capacitive level detection.
3. The microcontroller U1 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 which respectively switch off
the reagent needle heater and NTC in order not to disturb the capacitive level detection.
4. The microcontroller U1 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the
capacitive effect of the heating cable.
5. The microcontroller U1 measures the voltage variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the
capacitance measured between the reagent needle and the ground.
First, a capacitive measurement is done on air. This measurement gives the reference value.
6. When the reagent needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the voltage variation change.
7. The microcontroller U1 compares the voltage variation measured with a threshold value. This
threshold value is calculated from the calibration measurement (see Calibration, page 3-23) and the
reference value.

Technology
8. A counter counts the number of times the threshold value is overrun. When the counter reaches a
value determined by the sensitivity level (impulsion number), the reagent level detection is effective
(the liquid has been detected).
9. The microcontroller U1 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the
reagent arm movement.
10. The microcontroller U1 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 that switch the reagent needle
heater and NTC on.
11. The microcontroller U1 stops the shield signal.
Sensitivity level
On certain liquids, foam could be created. The sensitivity level avoids the mix up, during the reagent level
detection, between bubbles and liquid. It is determined according to the liquid type and the sampling
location (cassette, rack, etc).
Each sensitivity level corresponds to the number of times the threshold value is overrun before the
reagent level detection is effective.
The instrument mother board sends the sensitivity level in the form of an impulsion number, to the
reagent level detection board.
Number of threshold
Sensitivity level Impulsion number
overrun
Default 0 4
1 1 8
2 2 12
3 3 14
4 4 20
Calibration 7 N/A
Calibration
The calibration determines the reagent needle sensitivity which could vary according to the needle.
It is performed after each reagent needle replacement.
The calibration cycle consists in performing, in the wash tower, a capacitive measurement on air then
on water.
The calibration result gives a reference threshold. This threshold will be compared to the measured
voltage variation during the reagent level detection.

Technology
4.1.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS (1209108500)

The following diagram describes the reagent level detection principle.
Oscillator U2
Needle U3
Detector Microcontroller Instrument
Data treatment mother board
NTC Relay K2
Heater Relay K1
Reagent level
detection board
1. The oscillator, built in U2, sends continuously a frequency of 240 kHz to the reagent needle.
2. When the reagent arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends the following to the
microcontroller U3 of the reagent level detection board:
- the sensitivity level (see Sensitivity level, page 3-25) set according to the liquid to be detected.
- a start signal to start the capacitive level detection.
3. The microcontroller U3 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 which respectively switch off
the reagent needle heater and NTC in order not to disturb the capacitive level detection.
4. U2 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the capacitive effect of
the heating cable.
5. U2 measures the voltage variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the capacitance
measured between the reagent needle and the ground.
First, a capacitive measurement is done on air. This measurement gives the reference value.
6. When the reagent needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the voltage variation change.
7. The microcontroller U3 compares the voltage variation measured with a threshold value. This
threshold value is calculated from the calibration measurement (see Calibration, page 3-25) and the
reference value.
8. A counter counts the number of times the threshold value is overrun. When the counter reaches a
value determined by the sensitivity level (impulsion number), the reagent level detection is effective
(the liquid has been detected).
9. The microcontroller U3 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the
reagent arm movement.
10. The microcontroller U3 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 that switch the reagent needle
heater and NTC on.
11. U2 stops the shield signal.

Technology
Sensitivity level
On certain liquids, foam could be created. The sensitivity level avoids the mix up, during the reagent level
detection, between bubbles and liquid. It is determined according to the liquid type and the sampling
location (cassette, rack, etc).
Each sensitivity level corresponds to the number of times the threshold value is overrun before the
reagent level detection is effective.
The instrument mother board sends the sensitivity level in the form of an impulsion number, to the
reagent level detection board.
Number of threshold
Sensitivity level Impulsion number
overrun
Default 0 25
1 1 50
2 2 100
3 3 200
4 4 400
Calibration 7 N/A
Calibration
The calibration determines the reagent needle sensitivity which could vary according to the needle.
It is performed after each reagent needle replacement.
The calibration cycle consists in performing, in the wash tower, a capacitive measurement on air then
on water.
The calibration result gives a reference threshold. This threshold will be compared to the measured
voltage variation during the reagent level detection.
The calibration result is saved on a flash memory (built in U3) on the reagent level detection board.
A reagent level detection could not be performed if a calibration has not been done.
Voltage measurements on the reagent level detection board

See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS
(1209108500), page 4-22.
Configuration Voltage (V)

On air 1.9
On distilled water (2 mL) 1.7
Disconnect the level detection connector (J1) 2.8

Technology
4.2. Sample level and shock detection
The sample level detection is a capacitive level detection and is ensured by the sample level detection
board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS
(1209108486), page 4-18. The sample level detection board ensures also the sample shock detection.
The following diagram describes the sample level detection principle.
Oscillator
PIC U2
Instrument
Needle mother board
Data treatment
Shock detection
switch
Sample level
detection board
1. When the sample arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends a start signal to the PIC U2
of the sample level detection board to start the capacitive level detection.
2. The PIC U2 measures the frequency variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the
capacitance measured between the sample needle and the ground.
3. When the sample needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the frequency variation
change. The PIC U2 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the sample
arm movement.
Frequency measurements on the sample level detection board

■ Plug a multimeter (frequency measurement function) into the PIC U2 between pin 1 (ground) and pin 5.
See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS
(1209108486), page 4-18.
Configuration Frequency (kHz)

On air about 47
On distilled water (2 mL) about 35
Disconnect the level detection connector (J1) > 100
Ground < 10

Technology
The sample shock detection is enabled by the shock detection switch located on the sample arm.
Shock detection switch
In normal cases, the shock detection switch is in low position: the metal plate keeps the switch in low
position.
In case of shock, the shock detection switch is in high position: the metal plate raises and releases the
switch. The shock detection switch sends a shock detection signal to the instrument mother board to
stop the sample arm movement.

Technology
Pressure detection
5. Pressure detection
5.1. General points
The pressure detection is ensured by two pressure sensors (reagent and sample) located in the syringe
block support and the pressure board located behind the syringe block. See Section 4: Electric and
electronic principles, 5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280), page 4-27.
The following diagram describes the pressure detection principle.
Reagent Pressure board Mother board

pressure sensor
Signal measurement,
Sample amplification
pressure sensor Result check
and digitisation
1. When the syringes start, the instrument mother board sends a start signal to the pressure board to
start the pressure detection.
2. The pressure board measures the signals (voltages) sent by the pressure sensors (reagent and
sample). These signals directly depend on the pressures measured by the pressure sensors.
3. The pressure board amplifies and digitizes the signals, then sends the results to the instrument
mother board. Two types of results are sent to the instrument mother board:
- results before amplification
- results after amplification.
4. The instrument mother board checks the results to ensure that they are not out of range.

Technology
Pressure detection
5.2. High pressure, low pressure and bad sampling detection
The pressure sensors ensure the detection of the three following troubles:
- High pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (blockage)
- Low pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure)
- Bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles).
High pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (blockage)

The results before amplification are checked to ensure that the pressure is lower than 2500 mbar.
If the pressure is higher than 2500 mbar, there is a high pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic
system (blockage).
Low pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure)
During rinsing cycles, the results before amplification are checked to ensure that the pressure is higher
than 300 mbar.
If the pressure is lower than 300 mbar during rinsing cycles, there is a low pressure on the sample or
reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure).
Bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles)

To correctly detect a bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles), the pressure sensors are calibrated as follows.
■ For each pressure sensor (reagent and sample), the system primes the fluids, then runs a 10
aspirations repetition with the syringe, alternating between low and high volumes.
■ At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water (y = Ax + B) are calculated.
■ Then, the factors KA and KB are applied on the calibration curve on water to determine the low and
high limits of the acceptable range.
y(KA) = KA * (Ax + B)
y(KB) = KB * (Ax + B)
The factors KA and KB are fixed and must not be changed.

KA: factor of air detection during aspiration
KB: factor of blockage (fibrin, clamped tubing, ...)

Technology
Pressure detection
water KA KB
result after amplification
Fibrin
Acceptable range
Air bubbles
volume
During aspirations, the results after amplification are checked to ensure that they are within the
acceptable range.
If they are out of the acceptable range during aspirations, there is a bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles).
The pressure detection parameters are displayed in the Pressure menu (Services > Diagnostics >
Pressure).
For each pressure sensor (reagent and sample), the following parameters are displayed:
- the high pressure threshold in mbar (A)
- the low pressure threshold in mbar (B)
- the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water as well as the factors KA and KB (C).

Technology
Pressure detection
Press Set Pressure to calibrate each pressure sensor. At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the
calibration curve on water are displayed in the left window.
If the results are correct, press OK to validate the calibration. The new factors are then displayed in the
right window.
If not, press CANCEL to cancel the calibration.
Please refer to the pressure sensors calibration procedure as described in the procedure
RAS442: Pressure sensors, page 1 to calibrate the pressure sensors and make sure that the
results are correct.
Press Read Pressure to display the pressure measured by each pressure sensor at any time. The results
before and after amplification are displayed in the window (D).
If the reading is done when the syringe is not working, the result before amplification should be near 0
and the result after amplification should range between 2000 and 5000. This reading allows you to check
the pressure sensor functioning and the result amplification.

Technology
Pressure detection

Section 4: Electric and electronic principles
1. Mother board................................................................................................. 4 - 3
1.1. Mother board synoptic .............................................................................................................. 4 - 4
1.2. Mother board configuration ....................................................................................................... 4 - 6
1.3. Mother board adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4 - 7
1.4. Mother board connections ........................................................................................................ 4 - 9
1.5. LEDs on mother board............................................................................................................. 4 - 11
1.6. Mother board Inputs & Outputs ............................................................................................... 4 - 12
2. Optical acquisition ...................................................................................... 4 - 14

2.1. Optical acquisition synoptic .................................................................................................... 4 - 14
2.2. Optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457)................................................................... 4 - 16
2.3. Optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483)............................................................... 4 - 16
3. Level detection ............................................................................................ 4 - 18

3.1. Level detection synoptic.......................................................................................................... 4 - 18
3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486)......................................................... 4 - 18
3.3. Reagent level detection board................................................................................................. 4 - 20
4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) .......................................... 4 - 25
5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)......................................................... 4 - 27
6. Internal computer 1300013734 .................................................................. 4 - 29
7. Power supply ............................................................................................... 4 - 30

7.1. Protection ................................................................................................................................ 4 - 30
7.2. Inputs/Outputs connectors...................................................................................................... 4 - 31
7.3. Power supply cables................................................................................................................ 4 - 33
8. Connectors .................................................................................................. 4 - 34
8.1. DAC024A (1201891024): CABLE, PRINTER IEEE1284 SHIELD.............................................. 4 - 36
8.2. DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE ............................................................... 4 - 37
8.3. DAC044A (1201891044): CABLE, USB EXT. CORD L=0.3 M ................................................. 4 - 38
8.4. DAD123A (1201921123): CABLE, PC/PRINT L=1000 5-25 P80 ............................................. 4 - 38
8.5. DAD124A (1201921124): CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80 ................................................... 4 - 39
8.6. DAD134B (1201922134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE V1 .......................................... 4 - 40
8.7. DAD134C (1201923134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE ............................................... 4 - 41
8.8. DAD135A (1201921135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE V1 .......................................... 4 - 42
8.9. DAD135B (1201922135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE ............................................... 4 - 43
8.10. DAL029A (1201961029): MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR .................................................... 4 - 44
8.11. XBA512B (1209112512): CABLE, MOTHER BOARD LEFT CABLE ...................................... 4 - 45
8.12. XBA513C (1209113513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY P400 V1......................................... 4 - 47
8.13. XBA513E (1209115513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY........................................................ 4 - 48
8.14. XBA514B (1209112514): CABLE, ELECTRO-VALVES .......................................................... 4 - 49
8.15. XBA517D (1209114517): CABLE, DET. BOARD CABLE P400.............................................. 4 - 50
8.16. XBA518A (1209111518): SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER ..................................... 4 - 51
8.17. XBA519A (1209111519): SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL..................................... 4 - 52

Electric and electronic principles
8.18. XBA520A (1209111520): CABLE, ARMS/HANDLER CABLE ................................................ 4 - 53

8.19. XBA531B (1209112531): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR....................................... 4 - 54
8.20. XBA532DS (1209119532): SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD ............................................... 4 - 55
8.21. XBA533B (1209112533): FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN.......................................................... 4 - 56
8.22. XBA534C (1209113534): HEATER, REACTION TRAY........................................................... 4 - 57
8.23. XBA535BS (1209119535): SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. ................................. 4 - 58
8.24. XBA536A (1209111536): SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR ..................................... 4 - 59
8.25. XBA543A (3012277056): CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE....................................... 4 - 60
8.26. XBA544C (1209113544): VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY .............................................................. 4 - 61
8.27. XBA545B (1209112545): CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE ........................................................ 4 - 62
8.28. XBA551A (1209111551): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED ............................................................. 4 - 63
8.29. XBA561D (1209114561): MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY...................................... 4 - 64
8.30. XBA563ET (1209119563): NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE.......................................... 4 - 65
8.31. XBA564DT (1209119564): NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE...................................................... 4 - 66
8.32. XBA571A (1209111571): CABLE, LEVEL DETECT TANKS ................................................... 4 - 67
8.33. XBA572A (1209111572): SENSOR, ROOM TEMP.SENSOR................................................. 4 - 68
8.34. XBA573A (1209111573): SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR ....................................... 4 - 69
8.35. XBA587B (1209111587): FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400................................................ 4 - 70
8.36. XBA588A (1209111588): CABLE, NEEDLE PRESS.CABLE .................................................. 4 - 71
8.37. XBA601BS (1209119601): PCB, PC WAKE UP BUTTON ..................................................... 4 - 72
8.38. XBA732AS (1209119732): CABLE, WASTE PUMP ADAPTOR/V1 ........................................ 4 - 73
8.39. XBA734AS (1209119734): CABLE, ADAP NEW RACK SENSOR/V1 .................................... 4 - 74
8.40. XBA756AS (1209119756): CABLE, ADAP OLD RACK SENSOR........................................... 4 - 74
8.41. XBA814A (1209111814): CABLE, INNER ARM CABLE ......................................................... 4 - 75
8.42. XBA815A (1209111815): CABLE, REAG MOTOR ADAPTOR CABLE ................................... 4 - 76
8.43. XBA847AT (1209119847): NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400........................................................... 4 - 77
8.44. XDA820D (1209134820): MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR............................................... 4 - 78
8.45. XDA871B (1209132871): MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY....................................... 4 - 79
8.46. XEC186AS (1209179186): SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR.................................... 4 - 80
8.47. XEC202AS (1209179202): PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET ..................................... 4 - 81
9. Instrument synoptic .................................................................................... 4 - 82

Mother board
1. Mother board
Two mother board references are available depending on the instrument you have:
■ 1300013696 for ABX Pentra 400
■ 1300013697 for Pentra C400

1 probe
Reagent tray
Temperature control Temperature reaction tray control

1 probe
4-4
1.1.
Temperature arm control
1 probe
Photometer amplifier 15 inputs/outputs
Mother board
convertor 20 bits 3 step by step motors

Cuvette changer
SPI bus 3 Home sensors
2 step by step motors (µ step)

RS232 Reagent arm 2 Home sensors V/H
ISE module amplifier 6 inputs/outputs
convertor 16 bits, 1 peristatic pump, 1 level detection
Sample syringe 1 fibrin detection
step by step motor, 1 Home sensor,
1 step by step motor
1 optical sensor for air/liquid detection
1 Home switch
RS232 2 step by step motors (µ step)

Sample arm
IDEE reader 2 Home sensors V/H
Reagent 1 level detection
Mother board
Mother board synoptic
Reagent syringe 1 fibrin detection

1 step by step motor 1 shock detection
1 Home switch
RS232
IDEE reader Reaction tray 1 step by step motor
Sample 1 Home sensor
6 electrovalves
Lamp voltage control 1 step by step motor + encoder

Sample tray 1 Home sensor
2 optical sensors tube/cup
2 draining/rinsing pumps
Power supply voltages control 2 tank empty/full sensors
1 step by step motor

Reagent tray 1 Hall effect Home sensor
2 sensors tank full, tank empty
1 Hall effect sensor for tray door
for water and waste
with solenoid bolt
Mixer
RS232 1 step by step motor
1 continuous motor
1 Home sensor
RS232
Host
Printer
Computer
Keyboard
RS232
Screen

Touch screen
Mouse
Mother board
Mother board synoptic

Mother board
1.2. Mother board configuration
E1
E8 E3 E2
E4
E5
E7
E6
Jumpers:
1 2 4 3 1
E1 = 1 2 E3 = E5 = E8 =
2 1 3 4 2
E2 = 2 4 E4 = 1 2 E7 = 3 1 E6 = 1 2
1 3 3 4 4 2
Jumper Jumper Setting

E3 RTS UART = CTS UART Short 1 - 2 Xon / Xoff Handshake (Default)

E5 RTS UART = RTS COM3 Short 1 - 2 Hardware Handshake
E5 CTS UART = CTS COM3 Short 3 - 4 Hardware Handshake
E5 (Default) RTS UART = CTS UART Short 1 - 3 Xon / Xoff Handshake
E5 (Default) RTS COM3 = CTS COM3 Short 2 - 4 Xon / Xoff Handshake

E2 (Default) RTS COM4 = CTS COM4 Short 2 - 4 Xon / Xoff Handshake

E1 (Default) Pin 9 (Ri) = VCC Short 1 - 2
E4 (Default) Pin 7 & 8 COM5 = NC Xon / Xoff Handshake

Mother board

E8 Pressure Rge = RA0 Short 1 - 2 Measure by Slave #12
E8 PH2 = RA3 Short 3 - 4 Measure by Slave #12
E8 (Default) Pressure Rge = RA3 Short 1 - 3 Trig by Slave #12
E8 (Default) PH2 = RA0 Short 2 - 4 Trig by Slave #12
E7 Pressure Spl = RA0 Short 1 - 2 Measure by Slave #13
E7 PH2 = RA3 Short 3 - 4 Measure by Slave #13
E7 (Default) Pressure Spl = RA3 Short 1 - 3 Trig by Slave #13
E7 (Default) PH2 = RA0 Short 2 - 4 Trig by Slave #13

E6 Main Reset (reserved) Open Default
1.3. Mother board adjustments
Motor Test Point Potentiometer Target Range

Reagent Syringe TP2 R6 1.2 V ±50 mV
Sample Syringe TP7 R38 1V ±50 mV
Reagent Tray TP11 R70 1V ±50 mV
Sample Tray TP14 R100 1V ±50 mV
X/Y Mixer TP16 R128 0.8 V ±50 mV
Mixer TP19 R146 9V ±100 mV
Rot. Reagent Arm TP27 R222 0.6 V ±50 mV
Up/Down Sample Arm TP28 R224 1V ±50 mV
Up/Down Reagent Arm TP29 R225 1V ±50 mV
Rot. Sample Arm TP30 R227 0.6 V ±50 mV
Cuvette motion TP13 R115 0.6 V ±50 mV
Horizontal motion TP9 R87 0.8 V ±50 mV
Vertical motion TP6 R56 1.2 V ±50 mV
Reaction Tray TP1 R25 2V ±50 mV
Test points and potentiometers are located as shown on the following diagram.

Mother board
Reaction tray motor Horizontal motions motor Up\Down sample arm Rotation sample arm motor
(R25 - TP1) (R87 - TP9) motor (R224 - TP28) (R227 - TP30)
Vertical motions motor Rotation reagent arm Up\Down reagent arm

(R56 - TP6) motor (R222 - TP27) motor (R225 - TP29)
Cuvette motions motor

(R115 - TP13)
Mixing motor
(R146 - TP19)
Reagent Syringe motor Reagent Tray motor XY Mixing motor
(R6 - TP2) (R70 - TP11) (R128 - TP16)
Sample Syringe motor Sample Tray motor
(R38 - TP7) (R100 - TP14)

Mother board
1.4. Mother board connections
Refer to the following diagram.

ISE (RS232 #3) Reagent Barcode Computer (RS232 # 4) J2 on Optical
ISE (RS232 #5) Processing board
J3 on Pressure board
4 - 10
J67 Handling Cuvette
Reagent Syringe home J3 J4 J5 J1
J2 Cover sensor
Mother board
Reagent Syringe motor Reaction Tray motor
J6
Sample Syringe home J9 Reaction Tray home
J10 J8
Sample Syringe motor Vertical Motion motor
Low position
Reagent Tray home J11

Vertical Motion motor
J12
J14
Reagent Tray motor
J61 J15 Vertical Motion home
Sample Tray home J16

Reagent Cover Switch J17
Free Rack Used Segment full
XY Mixing motor home

J21 Mixer present switch Motor + Home
J19
Sample Tray motor J20 Translation Cuvette Loader
Optical Encoder J22 Rack Used Segment

Tank sensors
Reagent Refrigerated sensor Not in position
J25
J26
PC Wake up J29 J27 Cuvette Motion motor
XY Mixing motor J30
J31 J28
Arm Cover Switch
J62 J32
J35 Cuvette Motion home
Controled Fan (+5V) J34
J36
J1 on Sample
J33 Relay board J37
J66 New Segment available
Inner Temperature sensor
J39 J40 J38 J41
J42 J43 J44 J45
Valves Sample Arm
Reaction Heating sensor
J46
Rotation Home
Mixing motor J47

J48
J2 on Sample Arm board
J49
Cooling Unit
J2 on Reagent Arm board
J4 on Heating
Needle Board
J65 J63 Reagent Room Fan (+5v)
J53 J54 J51 J52 J55 J56 J57 J58 J59 J50 J60 Sample Arm
Cover Solenoid
Rotation Motor
Waste Water

Permanent Fan (+24V)
+24V Pump Pump Motor Home Motor + Home Motor + Home
Power Supply Fans Reagent Arm Rotation Reagent Arm Vertical Sample Arm Vertical
DUART 2 DUART 1
DS4 DS1 DS2 DS3
1.5.
Reagent Tray Home

DS5

Needle Heating
LEDs on mother board
DS8

Compressor Overload
DS9
Compressor Electrovalve
DS11
Reaction Room Heating

DS10
VCC Cover Waste Water

Mother board
4 - 11
-5V +5V (+5V) +24V solenoid pump pump Tube / Cup Tube height
DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS12 DS17 DS18 DS7 DS6
Mother board
The following table describes the LEDs states.
LED designation LED color LED state

DS2 Green Fixed lighting = normal state
Blinking = RS232 dialog (emission or reception)
DUART 1
DS1 Red Fixed lighting = normal state
Blinking = RS232 dialog (reception or emission)
DS1 Green Fixed lighting = normal state
Blinking = RS232 dialog (emission or reception)
DUART 2
DS4 Red Fixed lighting = normal state
Blinking = RS232 dialog (reception or emission)
Reagent Tray Home DS5 Red Lit if reagent tray is in home position
Needle Heating DS8 Green Lit during needle heating
Lit = compressor OK
Compressor Overload DS9 Red
Switch off = compressor overload
Signal lit by intermittence:
Compressor
DS11 Green Lit = not cooling
Electrovalve
Switch off = cooling
Reaction Room
DS10 Red Lit during reaction room heating
Heating
Power supply -5V DS13 Red Lit if power supply is present
Power supply +5V DS14 Red Lit if power supply is present
Power supply VCC
DS15 Red Lit if power supply is present
(+5V)
Power supply +24V DS16 Red Lit if power supply is present
Cover solenoid DS12 Green Lit if reagent tray cover is locked
Waste pump DS17 Green Lit if waste pump is running
Water pump DS18 Green Lit if water pump is running
Tube/Cup DS7 Red Lit if tube is present
Tube height DS6 Red Lit if sample cup is present1
1.6. Mother board Inputs & Outputs
Refer to the following diagram.

1
2 Waste Full Switch
3 J31
GND
4
Water Low Level Switch
PH4
CS_REG_IN 1
2 Fill Tank Switch (NU)
ENEV 3 J28
GND
CPU&GLU CS_REG_OUT CSR5 4
Mixer Position
Arm_switch +24V PH4
D(015) D(015) 1
VCC R241 2
EV(0.6) VCC 10k VCC 1R 3 J29 Reagent Cover Switch
GND
ULNZ003 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 R237 4
U33
D(0) 2 19 1 U36 16 11 NI
+24V
UR22
UR22
UR22
UR20
UR20
UR20
UR20
UR22
D0 Q0 LE Waste_Full_SW
D(1) 3 18 2 U36 COM 15 D(0) 19 2 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 PH4
D1 Q1 Q0 D0
1 EV(0) D(2) 4 17 3 U36 COM 14 D(1) 18 3 Arms_Cover_SW 1
D2 Q2 Q1 D1
2 D(3) 5 16 4 U36 COM 13 D(2) 12 9 Water_Low_SW 2
D3 Q3 Q2 D2 C182
3 EV(1) D(4) 6 15 5 U36 COM 12 D(3) 13 8 Fill_Tank_SW 3 J30 Arm Cover Switch
Q3
GND
D4 Q4 D3 47p
4 D(5) 8 13 6 U36 COM 11
D(4) 14 7 Reagent_Cover_SW 4
D5 Q5 Q4 D4
5 EV(2) D(6) 9 12 7 U36 COM 10 D(5) 15 6 Arms_Cover_SW
D6 Q6 Q5 D5 GND
COM 16 PC_Wake_up PH4
6 D(7) 7 14 D(6) Q6 5
EV(3) D7 Q7 1 2 3 4 1 3 4 2 D6 1
7 D(7) 17 4 Chiller_Level
J34 Q7 D7
EV Board 8 ENEV 1 OE
1 2
OE
UR27
UR27
UR27
UR27
UR26
UR26
UR26
UR26
GND
9 EV(4) CSR5 11 CLK 3 J62 Hard PC Wake up
8 7 6 5 8 6 5 7 HC573
10 U37 VCC 4
11 EV(5) HC574 10k
GND VCC +24V
12 R151 R161 PH4
EV(6) 470R 470R C213 1

13
14 R147 R123 100n 2
D(8) 2 19 10k 10k 3
D0 Q0 DS6 DS7 C210
PHD14 D(9) 3 18 GND GND

D1 Q1 Red Red 100n 4
D(10) 4 17 Tube_Cup 5
D2 Q2 Tube_Cup
D(11) 5 16
D3 Q3 6
D(12) 6 15 Tube_Heigh Tube_Heigh 7
D4 Q4
D(13) 7 14 8
D5 Q5
D(14) 8 13 Red LED R130 9 J36
D6 Q6 To Relay board
D(15) 9 12
+24V D7 Q7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 330R 10
Green LED R155 11
ENEV 1
OE
UR29
UR29
UR29
UR29
UR28
UR28
UR28
UR28
CSR5 11 CLK 330R 12
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 Barcode 13
R220 R213 10k RxD
C290 VCC U43 CAB_spl_Sensor 14
4k7 4k7 +24V HC574 GND CAB_spl_Sensor
470u VCC Barcode 15
CR3
MURS120 TxD 16
R185 R183 HE10MD16
4k7 4k7 GND
+24V
1 CR2 CR5
DS12 DS17 MURS120 1
J49 2 MURS120
Cover Solenoid Green R214 4k7 2 J55 Waste Pump
R202 R207 D
PH2 Q8 Green C250 C293 C301
BC817 4k7 Q9 HE2
1k IRLL3303 G 100p 100n 100u
R186 S
GND 4k7 GND GND GND
Chiller_Watchdog Chiller_Watchdog
+24V
Chiller On/Off GND
Chiller_Level Chiller_Level
DS18 CR4
Lamp_Stand_By Lamp_Stand_By 1
MURS120
Lamp_ON/OFF Lamp_ON/OFF R215 4k7 2 J56 Water Pump
Power Supply PC_ON/OFF PC_ON/OFF R208
Green D C251 C292 C300
Pwr_Sup_Status Pwr_Sup_Status 4k7 Q10 HE2
IRLL3303 G 100p 100n 100u
VCC R187 S
4k7 GND GND GND
4VCC
3 CHA PHA GND
Optical Encoder J27 2 CHB PHB
1
C455 C456
PH4 GND 100p 100p
Mother board
4 - 13
GND GND
Optical acquisition
2. Optical acquisition
The optical acquisition consists in the treatment of the optical signal from the spectrophotometer. This
signal is digitized and sent to the mother board operating system.
This electronic functionality is run by two boards:

■ the optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457) (on which photodiode array is fixed) makes the
current-power conversion of each wavelength. See 2.2. Optical amplifier board XAA457BS
(1209109457), page 4-16.
■ the optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483) makes the analogic-numeric conversion, the
RAM storage and the data transmission to the mother board operating system. See 2.3. Optical
processing board XAA483CS (1209109483), page 4-16.
2.1. Optical acquisition synoptic
OPTICAL PROCESSING BOARD
BD32 A1_A18
SRAM
MICROPROCESSOR
SPI D0_D15
256 Ko x 16 bits
E CS2 CS7
P
O
T
E
N
T
I ADC BUSY
M
E ADC RD
T
E ADC CONVST
R
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER S CDE MUX
BOARD
D
PRE AMPLI M C
U O
E AMPLI L
T N
T
I V
E
P E
C L R
T E T
O X
E O
R
R R

Optical acquisition
2.1.1. Analogical acquisition part

■ Detector: photodiode system in a range of wavelength from 340 nm to 700 nm.
■ Pre ampli: operational transimpedance amplificator used to perform the current-power conversion for
each wavelength (15). According to the gain in the amplificator (68 millions on 340 nm wavelength)
and the expected precision, only one resistance is placed in the anti-reaction loop. For each
wavelength, the signal is filtered with a "low pass" at approximately 300 Hz.
■ Ampli: the gain is adjusted with a non-inverter assembly. An operational amplificator low noise, low
drift (according to the temperature) and low offset power is used. This adjustment with potentiometers
(E2pot) corrects doubt on luminosity and lamp ageing and doubt on photodiodes and passive
components. It is performed for each wavelength and it is not modified during the measurement. The
E2pot (50 kΩ) allows a gain between 1 and 6 with an adjustment of 0.2%. The signal is filtered with a
"low pass" at approximately 1 KHz.
■ Multiplexer: it combines the 15 wavelengths in one signal.
■ Subtractor assembly: to use the full scale of the analogic/numeric convertor (- 2.5 V > + 2.5 V), 2.5 V
are subtracted to the digitized signal. An ampli-op is assemblied in subtractor.
■ Convertor: performs the analogic-numeric conversion.
2.1.2. Numerical acquisition part

The intelligent part of this numerical acquisition is composed with a microprocessor and a SRAM.
Application:
■A "TOP_MEASURE" signal is generated at each beginning of a cuvette motion in front of the analysis
window. It is provided by the microprocessor managing the reaction tray. This signal is wired on the
microprocessor level 3 IT.
■ The microprocessor orders, by its I/O ports, the multiplexer to direct the signal of wavelength to
measure to an analogic/numeric convertor.
■ The microprocessor runs a conversion by the activation of the convertor "ADC_CONVST" pin wired in
CS2.
■ When the conversion ends, the convertor picks up the "ADC_BUSY" signal and informs the
microprocessor.
■ The microprocessor receives data (16 bits) by activating the convertor "ADC_RD" pin wired in CS7.
■ At the end of a 100 measurements batch on 2 different wavelengths, the microprocessor generates an
"IT_SPI" signal for the master in order to receive measurement information via the SPI link between
the mother board master microprocessor and the slave microprocessor of the optical processing
board.
■ The amplification gain of each wavelength is adjusted by an E2POT. These E2POTs are commanded
by the microprocessor via an internal SPI bus of the optical processing board.
Microprocessor:
■ Functioning frequency = 25 MHz.
SRAM memory:
■ The SRAM memory is constituted by a housing of 256 Ko x 16 bits. Its selection is performed by the
"CSBOOT" signals of the microprocessor.

Optical acquisition
2.2. Optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457)
To J1 on Optical
Processing Board
2.3. Optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483)
The optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483) is meant to be used on both ABX
Pentra 400 and Pentra C400.
For the ABX Pentra 400, instruments must be equipped with the V5.0.6 software version or
higher.

Optical acquisition
To J1 on Optical Amplifier board
To J1 on Mother board

Level detection
3. Level detection
3.1. Level detection synoptic
Mother board
SAMPLE LEVEL DETECTION BOARD

Shock detection switch J2 J40
µCTRL LVL Detect 5

CAPACITIVE DETECTION J1 PIC12C672 Start Scan
10 MHz VCC
VREF
SAMPLE ARM NEEDLE
REAGENT LEVEL DETECTION BOARD

J5 24 V, VCC J4 J47
36 Ω/16 W Relay 4
HEATER Heat Cmd
SENSOR Temp Sig
J2 J45
CAPACITIVE DETECTION J1 µCTRL LVL Detect 5
VREF PIC12C672 Start Scan
REAGENT ARM NEEDLE
10 MHz VCC
3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486)
The sample level detection board, located on the sample arm, has two functions:
■ level detection: detects the liquid level in different containers (sample tube, sample cup)
■ shock detection: detects possible collision between the sample arm and sample cup bottom or any
other obstacle.
To J40 on Mother Board
To Sample Needle 1

Level detection
Sample level detection functioning:

The sample needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and the J1
connection. The component U1 transforms the oscillation in a frequency around 47 kHz (pin 5 of U2).
This frequency and its variation around the central frequency is analyzed by a microprocessor PIC U2.
If a variance of frequency is detected (during level detection), the "LEVEL_DETECT" signal pin 6 is put
to "1" and sent to the instrument mother board.
If the detection is not performed and if the needle touches the sample cup bottom, the "shock detection"
pin 2 of J2 sends a signal "1" to the instrument mother board.
R3
100k
R4
820k
VCC VCC
VCC
Y1
R5
R1 C1 10MHz 2 GP5/OSC1/CLKIN
4k7
100k 100n
8 3 GP4/OSC2/AN3/CLKOUT
J1 v+ GND
2 GND 4 GP3/MCLR/Vpp
-
1 5 GP2/TOCKI/AN2/INT
3+ Level_detect 6 GP1/AN1/VREF
U1 Start_scan 7 GP0/AN0
4 v- LM393
R2
100k U2
PIC12C672
GND GND
Choc detect switch

SW1
NO
NC VCC
GND 1
2
3
J2
4
5
GND
PH5
D 3.2mm
FX2 FX3 FX1
GND
To check the detection functioning:

■ Use a multimeter (Frequency measurement function) and plug it into U2 between chassis (ground) and
pin 5:
- The frequency must be about 47 KHz.
■ Disconnect the sample needle (J1) and check the frequency again:
- The frequency must be >100 KHz.
■ Reconnect the sample needle.

Level detection
3.3. Reagent level detection board
3.3.1. Reagent level detection board XAA500FS (1209109500)

The reagent level detection board, located on the reagent arm, detects the liquid level in different reagent
containers (cassette, reagent vial). It also switches off/on the reagent needle heater and the NTC.
DS2 To Heating Needle To J45 on Mother Board
TP1 (START_SCAN)
TP2 (LEVEL_DETECT)
DS3 DS1 To J47 on Mother Board
Reagent level detection functioning:

The reagent needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and the connection
J1.
■ Theinstrument mother board sends the "START_SCAN" signal (5 V pulse, TP1) to the component U1.
- The K1 and K2 relays cut the needle heating circuit (heater + NTC).
- The component U1 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the
capacitive effect of the heating cable.
■ The component U1 sends a frequency of 12 MHz continuously to the needle.
■ The needle sends a capacitive value to the component U1.
■ The component U1 transforms the capacitive value into a voltage. This voltage and its variation around
the threshold voltage are analyzed by the component U1.
If a variance of voltage is detected, the component U1 sends the "LEVEL_DETECT" signal (5 V pulse,
TP2) to the instrument mother board.
LEDs function:
■ TheLED DS1 is located between the relays K1 and K2. It gives the state of the relays K1 and K2: the
LED is lit when the reagent needle heater and NTC are switched off.
■ The LED DS2 is located close to the microcontroller U1. It gives the state of the reagent level detection
board: the LED is lit permanently when the reagent level detection board detects a default.
■ The LED DS3 is located under J6. It gives the following information:
- the LED is lit when the reference value on air is acceptable,
- the LED is unlit when the liquid is detected.

Level detection
DS3
TP2
TP1
U1
DS2
DS1
K2
K1

Level detection
3.3.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS (1209108500)

The reagent level detection board, located on the reagent arm, detects the liquid level in different reagent
containers (cassette, reagent vial). It also switches off/on the reagent needle heater and the NTC.
Components side
To Heating Needle
R25
+C18 Q1
U1
D1
C14
U2
D2 K1 J5 J4 J2
A LD2
J1 K2
C12
R20
+C17 TP2
K
+C16 TP1
TP2 LD2
TP1
Welding side
TP5 TP4 TP3 TP6

D3 X1
R27
Q2
C28
R31
R22
R18
C22
C24 Q4
U4
R19
U3 C20 R26
R30
R33
R23
R24
C21
R28 R29
R21
C26
Q3
LD1
R17
C25 R32 C19

K
LD1
Reagent level detection functioning:

The reagent needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and J1 connection.
The component U2 (pin 17) sends a frequency of 240 kHz continuously to the needle.
The component U3 (pin 9) receives the "START_SCAN" signal from the instrument mother board.
During the level detection:
- the K1 and K2 relays cut the needle heating circuit (heater + NTC).
- the shield signal (VSSA), sent by the component U2, reaches the heating cable and thus the cable noise
and the capacitive effect of the heating cable are overridden.
The component U2 transforms the capacitive value into a voltage. This voltage and its variation around
the threshold voltage are analyzed by the microcontroller U3.
If a variance of voltage is detected (during level detection), the signal "LEVEL_DETECT" pin 5 is put to
"1" and sent to the instrument mother board.
LEDs function:
■ The LED LD1 is located on the welding side close to the microcontroller U3. It gives the following
information:
- the reagent level detection state: it lits during 0.3 seconds when the liquid is detected.
- the reagent level detection board state: if the reagent level detection board detects a default, the LED
is lit permanently.
■ The LED LD2 is located on the components side between the relays K1 and K2. It gives the state of
the relays K1 and K2: the LED is lit when the reagent needle heater and NTC are switched off.

BAS516
D1 2
U1
1 VOUT CAP+ 5
C12 2
10uF GND
U2 3 CAP-
23 V+ 4
1 LM2767M5
E7 DGND GND LM2767M5
22 3 +
22pF-50V-0603 C29 E6 SHIELDEN
21 4 GND C14 C18
22pF 50V E5 C
20 5 47uF 6V3
22pF-50V-0603 19 E4 B 10uF
2 1 6 GND
22pF
E3 A
18 7 +3.3V
J1 E2 LEVEL C24
GND 17 8 TP1
NEEDLE E1 LPCAP TESTPOINT 2 1 U4
16 9
TEST ROSC S1751-46 1uF-16V-0603 7 IN1 5
15 10 OUT1
GND VDDCAP GND R29
14 11 R33 6K8-1%-0603
SHIELD VPWR 1 8
13 2
2
12 6.8kohm IN2 6
1
AGND VCCCAP R30 OUT2 1 C20
MC3494EG/R2
MC3494EG/R2 1 C21 100nF-16V-0603
MC3494EG/R2 C17 + C16 + 2 4 2
20 kohm
100 ohm
VSSA GND 2 RES GND
20K-1%-0603
2
100R-1%-0603
1
1 3
FB EN
47uF 6V3
47uF 6V3
1nF-16V-0603
R28 TPS77301DGK
GND 3K3-1%-0603 TPS77301DGK GND
R23 TP2 1 2
3.3 kohm
10K-1%-0603 TESTPOINT +5V

1 2 S1751-46 +3.3V
10 kohm
PH5 TO MAIN BOARD
GND
R31 1 +5V
R24
1
1 2 2

10 kohm 4K7-1%-0603 NC
+3.3V R22 Q2 1 2
BAS516 10K-1%-0603 4.7kohm 3 J2 START SCAN
10K-1%-0603 BC817 4
10 kohm
LEVEL DETECT
1
2 R27 +3.3V 5
2
1uF-16v-0603
D3 47K-1%-0603 GND
C26 1 47 kohm
2 TEST TP_SMD
GND
U3 TP3 R18
1
2 1 GND
2.2kohm
1 14 CM415-32.768KHz TP5 TEST TP_SMD

C22 VCC VSS
2K2-1%-0603
TEST TP_SMD
2
2 1 2 P1.0/TACLK/ACLK/A0
13 GND 1 TP4
XIN/P2.6/TA1 R21
1uF-16v-0603 3 12 X1 TP6 TEST TP_SMD
2.2kohm
GND P1.1/TA0/A0/A1 XOUT/P2.7

4 11 2 GND
2K2-1%-0603
2
P1.2/TA1/A2 TEST/SBWTCK
C25 5 P1.3/ADC10CLK/A3/VREF-/VEREF-
10 GND
+3.3V NMI/RST/SBWTDIO
2 1 6 P1.4/SMCLK/A4/VREF+/VEREF+/TCK
9
P1.7/A7/SDI/SDA/TDO/TDI
1uF-16v-0603 7 P1.5/TA0/A5/SCLK/TMS
8
1 P1.6/TA/A6/SDD/SCL/TDI/TCLK
LD1 MSP430F2012IPW Q3
HSMG-C670 MSP430F2012IPW BC817
2
R17 R26
2K2-1%-0603 R32
1 2 10K-1%-0603
2.2kohm
GND 4K7-1%-0603
1 10 kohm
2 +5V Q4 1 4.7kohm 2
C19 BC817
100nF-16V-0603
+5V
2 1 EH4
1
1 TO MAIN BOARD GND

GND 1 2 3 4
+5V R19
2
2.2kohm
K1 3 J4 TEMP_FIG
2K2-1%-0603
D2
2
1 +24V
LD2 8 7 6 5 4
BAS516 HEAT_CDE
2 HSMG-C670
GND
2
1 C28
100nF-50V-0603
1
1 2 3 4 2
R20 VSSA
2.2kohm
K2 GND
2K2-1%-0603
EH4
2
D 3.2mm 8 7 6 5
R25 1
10K-1%-0603 2
FX2 FX3 FX1 HEATER
1 10 kohm
2 Q1 3 J5
BC817 4
NTC
Level detection
4 - 23
GND
GND
Level detection
Voltage measurements on the reagent level detection board

To check the needle excitation frequency:
■ Disconnect the reagent needle (J1). [The position of the reagent arm and needle is unimportant.]
■ Use a multimeter (frequency measurement function) and plug it in between J1 and ground (TP2):
- put the multimeter in frequency position and check the frequency: it must be about 240 KHz (±10%).
- put the multimeter in alternating voltage position and check the voltage: it must be about 100 mV
(±10%).
To check the detection functioning (voltage at U2 output and U3 input):

■ Disconnect the reagent needle (J1). [The position of the reagent arm and needle is unimportant.]
■ Use a multimeter (direct voltage position) and plug it in between TP1 and TP2.
- The voltage must be about 2.8 V (±10%).
■ Reconnect the reagent needle (J1) and check the voltage again [The position of the reagent arm and
needle is unimportant.]:
- The voltage must be about 0 V (< 0.5 V).
■ Disconnect the heating needle connector (J5).
On air:
■ Place the reagent arm in "Wash tower position" (above the wash tower).
■ Plug a multimeter in between TP1 and TP2 then check the voltage:
On water:
■ Place the reagent arm in "Low Position in Wash" (in the reagent wash tower).
■ Plug a multimeter in between TP1 and TP2 then check the voltage:
■ Make sure that the difference between the measurement on air and the measurement on water is
higher than 0.1 V.

Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491)
4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491)
The sample relay board is located on the sample tray.
To Tube Detector
To Sample Barcode To J36 on Mother Board
The sample relay board supplies and transmits information from tube detector (J3), barcode reader (J5),
tube height (not connected J4) and cover LED supply (J2) sensors.
Reflexion sensor
Supply and
J3 info transmission
Tube presence
J4 Supply and
info transmission
Tube height detection
Supply and info transmission
J1 sensors to instrument
mother board
LED
J2
Supply
Cover LED
Supply and
J5 info transmission
Barcode reader
51123
Barcode reader
SAMPLE RELAY BOARD

Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491)
FACTORY CONFIGURATION:
Jumper Jumper setting
E1 Pin 2 J3 = 0 Short 1 - 2
E1 (Default) Pin 2 J3 = 1 Open WL 160
Jumper Jumper setting

E2 (Default) Pin 2 J4 = 0 Short 1 - 2 WL 150
E2 Pin 2 J4 = 1 Open

Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)
5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)
The pressure board is located behind the syringe block.

To Sample pressure sensor To Reagent pressure sensor
TP3 R16 3.8 V

TP6 (ground) To J67 on Mother Board
The pressure board detects fibrin presence or blockage on the sample needle and blockage on the
reagent needle.
After a gain and an offset calibration, the board, according to the pressure on the sensor, digitizes the
analogic signal and sends the digitized information to the instrument mother board.

Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)
Amplification and gain adjustment

Pressure sensor
Sample needle
To ADC µP
P AN1
J1
Offset adjustment
with EEPOT SPI link to
mother board
Microprocessor
16F873
Amplification and
gain adjustment J3
Pressure sensor
Reagent needle
To ADC µP
P AN0
J2
Offset adjustment
with EEPOT
Pressure board

Internal computer 1300013734
6. Internal computer 1300013734
MOTHER
BOARD
To servo-controls

Power supply
7. Power supply
Two power supply references are available depending on the instrument you have:
■ DBN007E (1202165007) for ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number below 4000
and Pentra C400 with an instrument serial number below 112
■ DBN007F (1202166007) for ABX Pentra 400 since instrument serial number 4000 and
Pentra C400 since instrument serial number 112
The instrument power supply is an AC/DC converter, extensive range input, 8 outputs with power of
450 W maximum.
It provides electrical requirements to the entire instrument except for the cooling unit (independently
connected to the receptacle).
All cables are provided with power supply except the TTL flat cable.
MOTHER BOARD
J53
+ 24 V POWER SUPPLY
VCC FAN
+5V 10 2 J1
MAIN SUPPLY
TB1 TB4 50-60 Hz
+ 5 V, + 12 V, GND
GND V1
ON/OFF FILTER 100-240 Vac
-5V + 24 V V2
FUSES 450 VA
V3: 5 V 2 A
DAC011A
24 V4: 0/5 V 7.2 A (OR DAC012A)
V5-V6: 5/- 5 V 0.5 A
J54 V7: 0/5.1/5.6 V 6.6 A
DZZ039A
Heat Room_Cde V8: 12 V 1.5 A

N=2
PC_On/Off J2
Lamp_On/Off 10 DAD091B CONTROLE
Lamp_Stand by
Power Sup_Status
To servo-controls
This table lists the differences between both power supply references.
Mark on diagram DBN007E DBN007F

V1 24 V 7 A 24 V 6.25 A
V2 0/24 V 6.3 A 0/24 V 6.25 A
FUSES F 6.3 A 250 V T 6.3 A H 250 V
7.1. Protection
■ Input: inrush current limitation (≤ 30 A)

■ Input fuses: T 6.3 A H 250 V
■ Outputs: electronic protection against short circuits

Power supply
7.2. Inputs/Outputs connectors
7.2.1. Power outputs

Outputs are done via two connectors embedded on the power supply board:
■a connector with 2 points for the ISE module (CN2)
■a connector with 24 points for other resources (CN3)
24-point connector (CN3)
Output Pin out Function Vnominal Tolerance Imini Inom Imax

DBN007E DBN007F
V11 7 and 19 Analyzer + 24 V ± 6% 0.4 A 4 A <7A < 6.25 A
V2 6 and 18 Reaction tray heater 0 V / + 24 V ± 6% 0A 6.3 A 6.25 A
Numerical:
V3 3 +5V ± 3% 1A 2A 2A
- analyzer
V4 1 and 13 Computer 0V/+5V ± 3% 0A 7.2 A 7.2 A
Analogical:
- optical acquisition module
V5 16 +5V ± 5% 0.2 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
- level detection
- fibrin detection
Analogical:
- optical acquisition module
V6 15 -5V ± 5% 0.2 A 0.5 A 0.5 A
- level detection
- fibrin detection
0 V / + 5.1 V /
V72 2 and 14 Optical bench lamp ± 3% 0A 6.6 A 6.6 A
+ 5.6 V
V8 4 Backlight LCD + 12 V ± 5% 0A 1.5 A 1.5 A
5 - Sense V7
17 + Sense V7
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24 Ground
1Analyzer+ 24 V (V1)
Resources on this way:
■ 14 step-by-step motors
■3 DC motors
■ reagent needle heater
■6 electrovalves
■ ISE module
■ system fans
2Optical bench lamp (V7):

The lamp is a 6 V 33 W under voltage at 5.6 V, i.e. 32 W of nominal effective power.
The lamp is wired with 4 wires so that the enslavement is made close to the lamp and integrates the loss
in connectors and cables.
■ Stand By: a stand by order reduces the voltage to 5.1 V to maintain the strand hot. In this mode,
regulation is not critical.
■ Soft Start: to avoid thermic shocks, voltage increasing (from 0 to 5.6 V, 0 to 5.1 V or 5.1 to 5.6 V) have
to be controlled. A correct increasing time is around 1 V per second. The limitation could be done in
current if it is not above Inom. For a cold strand, the current inrush is 20 to 30 Inom.

Power supply
■ Stop: a stop order cuts the lamp power supply. This functionality is used for an extended analyzer
stand by mode (around few hours).
2-point connector (CN2)
Output Pin out Vnominal

V1 1 + 24 V
2 Ground
7.2.2. TTL orders

A connector with 10 points ensures the TTL orders link with the analyzer.
TTL orders allow the analyzer to manage the V2, V4 and V7 ways. A backup gives the power supply
status to the analyzer.
Input Pin out Function +5V 0 V or open

V2 (enable) 1 Reaction tray heater order ON OFF
V4 (enable) 3 Computer order ON OFF
V7 (enable) 5 On/Off lamp order ON OFF
V7 (standby) 7 Standby lamp order 5.6 V 5.1 V
2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 Ground
Output Pin out Function +5V 0V

PSW 9 Power supply status OK Fail

Power supply
7.3. Power supply cables
7.3.1. Main cable (Cable 1)

The main cable consists of 22 conductors and is divided in 4 arms at the power supply connector level.
V2 (+24 V heating) 1
GND 2 P2
Heating module
1 V4 (+5 V computer)
2 V7 (lamp) V7 (lamp) 1
3 V3 (+5 V analyzer) +Sense V7 2 P3
4 V8 (+12 V computer) GND 3
5 -Sense V7 -Sense V7 4 Spectro. lamp
6 V2 (+24 V heating)
7 V1 (+24 V analyzer)
8 GND
9 GND
10 GND
P1 11 GND
Power 12 GND V4 (+5 V computer) 1
13 V4 (+5 V computer) V4 (+5 V computer) 2
Supply 14 V7 (lamp) V8 (+12 V computer) 3
Unit 15 V6 (-5 V analog) 4 P4
16 V5 (+5 V analog) GND 5 Panel computer
17 +Sense V7 GND 6
18 V2 (+24 V heating) GND 7
19 V1 (+24 V analyzer) 8
20 GND
21 GND
22 GND
23 GND V1 (+24 V analyzer) 1
24 GND V1 (+24 V analyzer) 2
V3 (+5 V analyzer) 3
V5 (+5 V analog) 4
V6 (-5 V analog) 5 P5
GND 6 Mother board
GND 7
GND 8
GND 9
GND 10
7.3.2. ISE module cable (Cable 2)

The ISE module cable consists of 3 conductors.
P1 1 V1 (+24 V analyzer) 1
2 GND EARTH 2 P2
Power Supply Unit 0V 3
EARTH 4 ISE module
Power Supply Unit
Fixing
AWG22-18 Ring Tongue D4

Connectors
8. Connectors
P/n Designation Sales unit Compatibility Page

DAC024A (1201891024) CABLE, PRINTER IEEE1284 SHIELD 1 ALL 36
DAC034A (1201891034) CABLE, CHILLER CABLE 1 ALL 37
DAC044A (1201891044) CABLE, USB EXT. CORD L=0.3 M 1 ALL 38
DAD123A (1201921123) CABLE, PC/PRINT L=1000 5-25 P80 1 ALL 38
DAD124A (1201921124) CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80 1 ALL 39
CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE V1
DAD134B (1201922134) 1 P400 V1 40
(from main board to spectrophotometer)
CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE P400 V2, V3
DAD134C (1201923134) 1 41
(from main board to spectrophotometer) PC400
CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE V1
DAD135A (1201921135) 1 P400 V1 42
(from main board to sample tray relay board)
CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE P400 V2, V3
DAD135B (1201922135) 1 43
(from main board to sample tray relay board) PC400
DAL029A (1201961029) MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR 1 ALL 44
XBA512B (1209112512) CABLE, MOTHER BOARD LEFT CABLE 1 ALL 45
XBA513C (1209113513) CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY P400 V1 1 P400 V1 47
P400 V2, V3
XBA513E (1209115513) CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY 1 48
PC400
XBA514B (1209112514) CABLE, ELECTRO-VALVES 1 ALL 49
XBA517D (1209114517) CABLE, DET. BOARD CABLE P400 1 P400 V2 50
XBA518A (1209111518) SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER 1 ALL 51
XBA519A (1209111519) SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL. 1 ALL 52
XBA520A (1209111520) CABLE, ARMS/HANDLER CABLE 1 ALL 53
XBA531B (1209112531) PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR 1 ALL 54
XBA532DS (1209119532) SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD 1 ALL 55
XBA533B (1209112533) FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN 1 ALL 56
XBA534C (1209113534) HEATER, REACTION TRAY 1 ALL 57
XBA535BS (1209119535) SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. 1 ALL 58
XBA536A (1209111536) SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR 1 ALL 59
XBA543A (3012277056) CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE 1 ALL 60
XBA544C (1209113544) VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY 1 ALL 61
XBA545B (1209112545) CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE 1 ALL 62
XBA551A (1209111551) PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED 1 ALL 63
XBA561D (1209114561) MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY 1 ALL 64
XBA563ET (1209119563) NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE 1 P400 65
XBA564DT (1209119564) NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE 1 ALL 66
XBA571A (1209111571) CABLE, LEVEL DETECT TANKS 1 ALL 67
XBA572A (1209111572) SENSOR, ROOM TEMP.SENSOR 1 ALL 68
XBA573A (1209111573) SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR 1 ALL 69
XBA587B (1209111587) FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400 1 ALL 70
XBA588A (1209111588) CABLE, NEEDLE PRESS.CABLE 1 ALL 71
XBA601BS (1209119601) PCB, PC WAKE UP BUTTON 1 ALL 72
XBA732AS (1209119732) CABLE, WASTE PUMP ADAPTOR/V1 1 P400 V1 73
XBA734AS (1209119734) CABLE, ADAP NEW RACK SENSOR /V1 1 P400 V1 74

Connectors
P/n Designation Sales unit Compatibility Page

P400 V2, V3
XBA756AS (1209119756) CABLE, ADAP OLD RACK SENSOR 1 74
PC400
P400 V3
XBA814A (1209111814) CABLE, INNER ARM CABLE 1 75
PC400
P400 V2, V3
XBA815A (1209111815) CABLE, REAG MOTOR ADAPTOR CABLE 1 76
PC400
XBA847AT (1209119847) NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400 1 PC400 77
XDA820D (1209134820) MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR 1 ALL 78
XDA871B (1209132871) MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY 1 ALL 79
KIT, RIGHT CABLE ASSY FOR V1
XEC063BS (1209179063) (Contains: 1 x XBA513E (1209115513), 1 P400 V1 N/A
1 x XBA756AS (1209119756))
KIT, STRAND TRANSF.ARM & GUIDES
(Contains: 1 x XBA517D (1209114517),
XEC166AS (1209179166) 1 P400 V1 N/A
2 x GBM1204 (1203601204), 1 x GBM1233
(1203601233))
XEC186AS (1209179186) SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR 1 ALL 80
PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET
XEC202AS (1209179202) (Contains: 1 x XBA529D (1209114529), 1 ALL 81
1 x GBM1351 (1203601351))

Connectors
8.1. DAC024A (1201891024): CABLE, PRINTER IEEE1284 SHIELD

Connectors
8.2. DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE

Connectors
8.3. DAC044A (1201891044): CABLE, USB EXT. CORD L=0.3 M
8.4. DAD123A (1201921123): CABLE, PC/PRINT L=1000 5-25 P80

Connectors
8.5. DAD124A (1201921124): CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80

Connectors
8.6. DAD134B (1201922134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE V1

Connectors
8.7. DAD134C (1201923134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE

Connectors
8.8. DAD135A (1201921135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE V1

Connectors
8.9. DAD135B (1201922135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE

Connectors
8.10. DAL029A (1201961029): MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR

Connectors
8.11. XBA512B (1209112512): CABLE, MOTHER BOARD LEFT

CABLE
Mother board XBA512B

connector connector
J35 P35 - - - -> M35 Mixer assy motor DAL029A (1201961029)
J33 P33 - - - -> C33 XY mixer motor home sensor XBA518A (1209111518)
J44 P44 - - - -> M44 Mixing paddle motor assy XBA561D (1209114561)
J52 P52 - - - -> V52 Reaction tray fan XBA533B (1209112533)
Reaction tray temperature sensor XBA535BS
J46 P46 - - - -> B46
(1209119535)
P50 - - - -> V50
J50 Reagent tray fans XBA587B (1209111587)
a...h
Reagent tray temperature sensor XBA535BS
J43 P43 - - - -> CTN
(1209119535)
J66 P66 - - - -> V66 Reagent tray fan XBA587B (1209111587)
J16 P16 - - - -> M16 Reagent tray motor XDA820D (1209134820)
J14 P14 - - - -> CH14 Reagent tray home sensor XEC186AS (1209179186)
J57 P57 - - - -> M57 Reagent arm rotation motor
Reagent arm rotation home sensor XBA518A
J39 P39 - - - -> C39
(1209111518)
J27 P27 - - - -> E27 Optical encoder
J25 P25 - - - -> M25 Sample tray motor XDA871B (1209132871)
J21 P21 - - - -> C21 Sample tray home sensor XBA518A (1209111518)
J60 P60 - - - -> M60 Sample arm rotation motor
Sample arm rotation home sensor XBA518A
J41 P41 - - - -> C41
(1209111518)
J51 P51 - - - -> V51 Not used
J29 P29 - - - -> C29 Reagent tray door sensor XBA573A (1209111573)
J49 P49 - - - -> SW1 Cover solenoid

4 - 46
P43-P44-P46-P49 M57-M60
Connectors
CCA046A PHR-2 (JST)

Terminals AWG 30-24
SPH-002T-P0.5s
CCA044A EHR-6 (JST)
CCA020A
Terminals SEH-001T-P0.6
CCA045A
P50-P51-P52-P66
CCA017A PHR-3 (JST)
Terminals AWG 30-24 M16-M25
SPH-002T-P0.5s
CCA020A
CCA072A HRP-8 (JST)

terminals SHR-001T-P0.6
CCA073A
P14-P21-P27-P29
CCA018A PHR-4 (JST) P33-P39-P41
Terminals AWG 30-24
SPH-002T-P0.5s E27
CCA020A
CCA060A 6471-5
terminals 4161
CAK061A
M44-B46-V50a-V50b-V50c
CCA070A HRP-2 (JST) V50d-V50e-V50f-V50g-V50h
Terminals SHR-001T-P0.6 V51-V64-V66-V66
CCA073A
P16-P25
CAK029A 5102-8
terminals 5103
C21-C29-C33-M35 CAK008A
P35-C39-C41-P57
CCA071A HRP-4 (JST)
P60-CH14
Terminals SHR-001T-P0.6
CCA073A

8.12. XBA513C (1209113513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY P400 V1
4-47
8.13. XBA513E (1209115513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY
4-48
Connectors
8.14. XBA514B (1209112514): CABLE, ELECTRO-VALVES

Connectors
8.15. XBA517D (1209114517): CABLE, DET. BOARD CABLE P400
If the arm cable needs to be replaced on an ABX Pentra 400 V1, please order the KIT,
STRAND TRANSF.ARM & GUIDES XEC166AS (1209179166).
Once you have installed the kit ref. XEC166AS (1209179166) on your instrument, it is not
necessary anymore to order the whole kit to replace the arm cable. Please directly order the
arm cable ref. XBA517D (1209114517).

Connectors
8.16. XBA518A (1209111518): SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/

HANDLER

Connectors
8.17. XBA519A (1209111519): SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/

HANDL.

Connectors
8.18. XBA520A (1209111520): CABLE, ARMS/HANDLER CABLE

Connectors
8.19. XBA531B (1209112531): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE

DETECTOR

Connectors
8.20. XBA532DS (1209119532): SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD

Connectors
8.21. XBA533B (1209112533): FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN

Connectors
8.22. XBA534C (1209113534): HEATER, REACTION TRAY

Connectors
8.23. XBA535BS (1209119535): SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION

TEMP.

Connectors
8.24. XBA536A (1209111536): SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME

SENSOR
When the reaction tray is in home position:

■ the voltage between Pin 1 and 3 should be 5 V
■ the voltage between Pin 2 and 4 should be 1.27 V

Connectors
8.25. XBA543A (3012277056): CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD

ISE

Connectors
8.26. XBA544C (1209113544): VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY

Connectors
8.27. XBA545B (1209112545): CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE

Connectors
8.28. XBA551A (1209111551): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED

Connectors
8.29. XBA561D (1209114561): MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR

ASSY

Connectors
8.30. XBA563ET (1209119563): NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE

Connectors
8.31. XBA564DT (1209119564): NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE

Connectors
8.32. XBA571A (1209111571): CABLE, LEVEL DETECT TANKS

Connectors
8.33. XBA572A (1209111572): SENSOR, ROOM TEMP.SENSOR

Connectors
8.34. XBA573A (1209111573): SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR

SENSOR

Connectors
8.35. XBA587B (1209111587): FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400

Connectors
8.36. XBA588A (1209111588): CABLE, NEEDLE PRESS.CABLE

Connectors
8.37. XBA601BS (1209119601): PCB, PC WAKE UP BUTTON

Connectors
8.38. XBA732AS (1209119732): CABLE, WASTE PUMP ADAPTOR/V1

Connectors
8.39. XBA734AS (1209119734): CABLE, ADAP NEW RACK SENSOR

/V1
8.40. XBA756AS (1209119756): CABLE, ADAP OLD RACK SENSOR

Connectors
8.41. XBA814A (1209111814): CABLE, INNER ARM CABLE

Connectors
8.42. XBA815A (1209111815): CABLE, REAG MOTOR ADAPTOR

CABLE

Connectors
8.43. XBA847AT (1209119847): NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400

Connectors
8.44. XDA820D (1209134820): MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR

Connectors
8.45. XDA871B (1209132871): MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR

ASSY

Connectors
8.46. XEC186AS (1209179186): SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME

SENSOR

Connectors
8.47. XEC202AS (1209179202): PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL

SHEET

Instrument synoptic
9. Instrument synoptic
See synoptic diagrams at the end of this section.

Section 5: Software description
1. Services menu overview............................................................................... 5 - 2
2. Software architecture................................................................................... 5 - 3
2.1. C:\ drive ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 3
2.2. D:\ drive ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5
3. Diagnostics menu description ..................................................................... 5 - 7

3.1. System Parameters ................................................................................................................... 5 - 8
3.2. Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 10
3.3. Arms......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 12
3.4. Syringe ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 16
3.5. Cuvette Changer...................................................................................................................... 5 - 17
3.6. Barcode Test ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 19
3.7. Spectro .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 19
3.8. Heating..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 20
3.9. Sensors .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 20
3.10. Pressure................................................................................................................................. 5 - 21
3.11. ISE.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 21
3.12. Repeatability .......................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
4. Initialization phases .................................................................................... 5 - 25

Software description
Services menu overview
1. Services menu overview
Main menu
Worklist menu* Calibration/Control menu*
Result Validation menu* Services menu*
Archives menu* Quality control menu*
Services menu
Logs menu*
 Calibration  Applications
 Reagent  Sequencing
 Error  Maintenance
 System configuration
Application Configuration menu*
 Applications
 Ratio
 Profiles
Customer Services menu*  Incompatibility
 Cycles  Reagents (only for Sales
 ISE and Manufacturer)
 Analyser
 Barcode
 Test Counter (available on request)
Diagnostics menu**
 System Parameters  Spectro
System Configuration menu*  Tray  Heating
 Analyser  Audible alarm  Arms  Sensors
 Local Settings  Maintenance  Syringe  Pressure
 Host Connection  Users  Cuvette Changer  ISE
 Printer  Channel configuration (only for Sales)  Barcode Test  Repeatability
 Results validation
* Please refer to your user manual for more detailed information.

** See 3. Diagnostics menu description, page 5-7 for more detailed information.

Software architecture
2. Software architecture
The instrument hard drive contains two partitions: the C:\ drive and the D:\ drive.
2.1. C:\ drive
Windows and the instrument software are installed on the C:\ drive.
During the software version installation, the instrument software is installed on C:\Program Files\P400
Software.
The following table describes the most important files of the P400 Software folder.
Folder File Purpose

Management of communication between the computer software and
Exe ComProcess.exe the embedded software.
Launched during instrument start up.
Management of communication with the Host.
Exe ComSil.exe
Main process.
Exe Manitou.exe
Main parameters.
Exe Asp400.ini
Management of user interface.
Exe Ihm.exe

Folder File Purpose

Available language dictionary.
Exe Pentra400.mld
Management of printout.
Exe Printer.exe
Exe Sil.ini Configuration of communication with the Host (speed, parity, ...).
Exe GridParams.ini Column configuration (column order and size).
Embedded software update.
Exe BinLoader.exe
Only used during the software version update.
Database update.
Exe MajP400.exe
Only used during the software version update.
Exe traceCom.log Host communication log file.
Exe Error.log Process log file.
Spectrophotometer initialization log file (light stability check, black
Exe Spectro.log
intensity measurement, ...).
Log file of cuvette absorbance measurements, cuvette cleanness
Exe ReacTray.log
check, loading/unloading of cuvette segments.
Barcode readings log file (racks and tubes).
Exe Barcod.log
Only for the sample tray.
Exe ISEState.log ISE module status log file (not initialized, sleeping, ...).
Exe ActionUtilisateur.log User action log file.
Patient data pass through this folder during the communication with
Exe Rs_Data
the Host.
data Asp400bd.mdb Database.
HORIBA Medical applications database.
data methodes.mdb User channels are saved in the database.
Updated during the Reagent applications installation.
The following folders are also present in the P400 Software folder.
Help files (user manual and reagent

- Help
notices/MSDS).
- Images Software pictures.
- Son Sound files of the sound alarms.
- Tasks Empty folder.

2.2. D:\ drive
During the software version installation, the Backup folder is created on the D:\ drive.
The following table describes the files of the Backup folder.
Folder File Purpose

Results archive file.
- Archive_N°.mdb Created at the instrument start up every six months or when at least
100000 results are saved in the database.
Database backup copy.
Backup_N°_Version_ Saved at each creation of a new worklist.
-
Asp400bd.mdb Up to eight databases are saved and numbered from the most recent
to the oldest. Beyond this number, the oldest is suppressed.
Backup copy of the instrument parameters (motor adjustments, ...).
When you close the Diagnostics menu, the instrument will ask you:
Backup_Date_Time_
- "Do you want to save parameters?" If you press OK, the backup copy
ParamOS9_Version.bin
is created (not necessary if you did not modify the instrument
parameters).
Last backup copy of the instrument parameters (motor adjustments,
- ParamOS9.bin
...).
Backup_Date_Time_ Database backup copy.
-
Asp400bd.mdb Saved at each software version update.
Backup copy of the client parameters (database, system configuration,
column configuration, ...).
User Date_Time_Serial # Created using the Save client parameters function from the System
Configuration menu (Services > System Configuration > Local
Settings).

Folder File Purpose

Empty folder.
Temporary folder necessary for using the Restore database and
Restore
Restore client parameters functions from the System Configuration
menu (Services > System Configuration > Local Settings).
You can also find a Bugs folder on the D:\ drive. This folder contains backup copies of the
database and the Error.log file, created when a "GeneralException" error appears.
When the Bugs folder contains a lot of files, software slowness can appear. It is therefore
advisable to suppress these files.

Diagnostics menu description
3. Diagnostics menu description
Go to Services > Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics menu is divided into 12 tabs:

■ 3.1. System Parameters, page 5-8
■ 3.2. Tray, page 5-10
■ 3.3. Arms, page 5-12
■ 3.4. Syringe, page 5-16
■ 3.5. Cuvette Changer, page 5-17
■ 3.6. Barcode Test, page 5-19
■ 3.7. Spectro, page 5-19
■ 3.8. Heating, page 5-20
■ 3.9. Sensors, page 5-20
■ 3.10. Pressure, page 5-21
■ 3.11. ISE, page 5-21
■ 3.12. Repeatability, page 5-22.
Press one of the tabs to access the various functions.

■ Closing the Diagnostics menu, the instrument turns to "Emergency Stop" status. Then,
you have to press Startup to reinitialize the instrument.
■ When you run a cycle from the Diagnostics menu, you must always wait for the end of the
cycle before running another cycle or pressing a new tab.
Recommendations for use:

■ To adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position:
- enter the number of steps in the Target field and press Check Position
OR
- use the + and - buttons.
■ To validate and save the new adjustment value for this position, press Check Home then
check the position again (press Check Position).
3.1. System Parameters
The System Parameters tab summarizes the instrument parameters (motor adjustments, ...) modifiable
by the technician.
This tab allows you to print, modify, save and restore these instrument parameters.
Moreover, this first tab gives access to the Windows Explorer.
3.1.1. Instrument parameters

The following instrument parameters are displayed:
■ Motor adjustments modifiable by the technician
■ Calibration factors A and B of the sample and reagent pressure sensors
■ NTC value for the reaction tray chamber.
Use the slider to display all data.
Print the instrument parameters
Press Data Print/Send to Host from the generic toolbar to print the list of instrument
parameters displayed in the System Parameters tab.
Modify the instrument parameters

The System Parameters tab opens in Display mode. In this mode, the instrument parameters are not
modifiable. Press Edit to access modification function. After modification of one or several parameters,
press OK to validate.
■ Only the motor adjustments are modifiable from the System Parameters tab.
■ The calibration factors A and B of the sample and reagent pressure sensors and the NTC
value for the reaction tray chamber are not modifiable from this tab; they are respectively
modifiable from the Pressure and Heating tabs.

Save the instrument parameters
Press Export to save the instrument parameters.
■ The following window is displayed:
The instrument parameters are saved:

- on hard disk, by default
- on USB flash drive, if selected.
Press OK.
■ When the message "Export successfully completed" is displayed, press OK.
Restore the instrument parameters
Press Import to restore a backup copy of the instrument parameters.
The backup copies of the instrument parameters are created when you close the
Diagnostics menu and answer OK at the question: "Do you want to save parameters?" (not
necessary if you did not modify the instrument parameters).
■ The following window is displayed:
The last backup copy of the instrument parameters (D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin) is submitted by

default.
If necessary, press Restore File to choose another backup copy of the instrument parameters.
Then, press OK.
■ When the message "Restore successful" is displayed, press OK.

3.1.2. Windows Explorer
■ Press the Windows Explorer button to open the Windows Explorer.

■ The Windows Explorer is automatically closed when you close the
Diagnostics menu.
3.2. Tray
The Tray tab groups the functions concerning the three trays of the instrument:
- Reagent tray
- Sample tray
- Reaction tray.
For each tray (reagent, sample and reaction), the following functions are available:
Heading Format Description

If the tray is at its home position, the light is green.
- Reagent tray: sector 36 in front of the yellow arrow.
Colored - Reaction tray: sector 1, cuvette segment position 1 in front of the
Home
square light beam.
If not, the light is red.
The light is gray when the tray position is unknown.
Offset value (in number of steps).
Offset Field
See Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions, page 5-11.
- Reagent tray: Tray sector (1 to 52) + Rack type.
- Sample tray: Tray sector (1 to 6) / Rack position (1 to 10).
Sector/Position Scrolling lists
- Reaction tray: Tray sector (1 to 6) / Cuvette segment position (1 to
12).


Only for the reagent tray.
Reagent Position Scrolling lists
Reagent rack or calibrator/control reagent rack position.
Target Scrolling list List of the tray positions.
Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position.
Target Field
See Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions, page 5-11.
Check Home Button Moves the selected tray to its home position.
Moves the selected tray to the position chosen in the Target
Check Position Button
scrolling list.
Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in
the Target scrolling list.
+/- Buttons
- If you click once, the selected tray moves 1/4 of a step.
- If you hold the button down, the selected tray moves step by step.
Motor Off Button The selected tray motor is turned off.
Other functionalities:
■ The CAB auto reader adjustment function is used to automatically adjust the reagent tray for the
Reagent Bar Code Reader Position position. To use this function, please refer to the Reagent tray
procedure. See RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1.
■ The Segment function is used to load/unload cuvette segments into the reaction tray:
- automatically using the Load and Unload buttons
- manually using the Forward button.
Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions

Reagent tray
Position Default value Min. value Max. value
Offset (not modifiable) 160 160 160
Reagent Bar Code Reader Position 11711 10000 14000
Central Loading Reagent Position 25870 23200 26500
R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm 35360 33000 38000
R1 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm 35492 33000 38000
R1 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm 35496 33000 38000
R2 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm 35576 33000 38000
R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm 36336 34000 39000
R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm 36361 34000 39000
R2 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm 37824 35000 41000
Sample tray
Sample Bar code reader Position 316 0 5000
Sample Tube Detector Position 3859 3400 4400
External Sampling Pos. 18568 18100 19000
Internal Sampling Pos. 40 0 19200

Reaction tray
Offset 150 50 200
Mixing Position 4755 4000 5000
Reagent Arm Position 948 500 1300
Sample Arm Position (not modifiable) 0 0 0
Automatic Loading 8900 8500 9300
Handling Position 19002 18500 19900
3.3. Arms
The Arms tab groups the functions concerning the reagent and sample arms as the mixer.

3.3.1. Reagent and sample arms functions

For the reagent and sample arms, the following functions are available:

If the arm is at its vertical home position (upper position), the light is
Colored green.
Home
square If not, the light is red.
The light is gray when the arm vertical position is unknown.
VERTICAL
Offset Field
See Range of adjustment values for the arm positions, page 5-13.
Position Scrolling list List of the arm vertical positions.
Position Field
This function is used to automatically adjust the arm vertical
Automatic
Function positions. To use this function, please refer to the Arms procedure.
adjustment
See RAS385: Arms, page 1.
If the arm is at its rotation home position (cuvette position), the light
Colored is green.
Home
ROTATION
The light is gray when the arm rotation position is unknown.

Offset Field
Position Scrolling list List of the arm rotation positions.
Position Field
This function is used to check the level detection. To use this
Colored
Level detection function, please refer to the Arms procedure. See RAS385: Arms,
square
page 1.
Only for the sample arm.
Colored This function is used to check the shock detection. To use this
Shock Detection
square function, please refer to the Arms procedure. See RAS385: Arms,
page 1.
Check Home Button Moves the selected arm to its vertical/rotation home position.
Moves the selected arm to the position chosen in the Position
scrolling list.
the Position scrolling list.
+/- Buttons
- If you click once, the selected arm moves 1/4 of a step.
- If you hold the button down, the selected arm moves step by step.
Motor Off Button The selected arm motor is turned off.
Range of adjustment values for the arm positions

Reagent arm - Vertical

Low Position in Reaction Tray 12070 11300 12700
Low Position in Wash Tower 12600 12000 12800
Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack 13383 11000 14800
Low Position in Cassette 14399 13500 14800

Reagent arm - Rotation

Cuvette Position (not modifiable) 0 0 0
Wash Tower Position 1270 500 2000
R1 Pos. - Reagent Rack 2211 1500 2700
R1 on Cassette 2068 1500 2600
R2 on Cassette 3084 2500 3600
Sample arm - Vertical

Low Position in Cuvette 15386 14500 15800
Low Position in Wash Tower 8300 8000 8700
Low Position in Sample Cup 6936 5500 7700
Low Position in Sample Tube 13912 13000 15000
Low Position in Reagent rack 16642 14700 17400
Low Position in Cassette 17608 16500 18000
Low Position in ISE Tower 4000 3000 6000
Low position CalCs on reagent tray 15010 14500 16000
Sample arm - Rotation

Cuvette Position (not modifiable) 0 0 0
Wash Tower Position 521 200 800
R1 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack 1425 1200 1600
R1 on Cassette 1397 1200 1600
R2 on Cassette 1927 1700 2100
External Sample 2450 2200 2600
Internal Sample 2708 2500 2900
ISE Sample 4383 4000 4500

3.3.2. Mixer functions

For the mixer, the following functions are available:

If the mixer is at its home position (wash tower position), the light is
Colored green.
Home
The light is gray when the mixer position is unknown.
Offset Field
See Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions, page 5-15.
Position Scrolling list List of the mixer positions.
Position Field
See Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions, page 5-15.
This function is used to automatically adjust the mixer vertical
Automatic
Function positions. To use this function, please refer to the Mixer procedure. See
adjustment
RAS386: Mixer, page 1.
Check Home Button Moves the mixer to its home position.
Check Position Button Moves the mixer to the position chosen in the Position scrolling list.
Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in the
Position scrolling list.
+/- Buttons
- If you click once, the selected arm moves 1/4 of a step.
- If you hold the button down, the selected arm moves step by step.
Motor Off Button The mixer motor is turned off.
Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions

Offset 400 400 500
Above Reaction Tray 9656 8900 10200
Cuvette 13728 13200 14300

3.4. Syringe
The Syringe tab groups the functions concerning the instrument hydraulic circuit: reagent and sample
syringes, waste and water pumps, valves.
For each syringe (reagent and sample), the following functions are available:

If the syringe is at its home position (upper position), the light is green.
Colored
Home If not, the light is red.
square
The light is gray when the syringe position is unknown.
Offset Field
Not modifiable.
Check Home Button Moves the selected syringe to its home position.
The waste and water pumps can be turned on and off by using the corresponding buttons. Moreover,
the Water pump output function is used to check the water pump output. To use this function, please
refer to the 6 month maintenance procedure. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the
sample needle throughput, page 8.
The valves can be opened and closed using the corresponding buttons.
Valve Description
V0 Not used.
V1 Sample syringe valve.
V2 Reagent syringe valve.
V3 Mixer wash tower valve.
V4 Reagent wash tower valve.
V5 Sample wash tower valve.
V6 Not used.

3.5. Cuvette Changer
The Cuvette Changer tab groups the functions concerning the cuvette changer.
For each cuvette changer motor (vertical motor, horizontal motor, cuvette motion motor), the following
functions are available:

If the grabber is at its vertical home position (upper position), the
light is green. If not, the light is red.
Colored
Home NOTE: The grabber never stays at its vertical home position, so the
square
light always stays red.
The light is gray if the grabber vertical position is unknown.
VERTICAL

Offset Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor
positions, page 5-18.
Target Scrolling list List of the grabber vertical positions.
Target Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor
If the grabber is at its horizontal home position (backward position),
Colored the light is green.
Home
The light is gray if the grabber horizontal position is unknown.
HORIZONTAL

Target Scrolling list List of the grabber horizontal positions.
Target Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor


If the load rack rail is at its home position (lower position), the light
CUVETTE MOTION
Colored is green.
Home
The light is gray if the load rack rail position is unknown.
Moves the grabber to its vertical/horizontal home position or the
Check Home Button
load rack rail to its home position.
Moves the grabber to the position chosen in the Target scrolling
list.
the Target scrolling list.
+/- Buttons
- If you click once, the grabber moves 1/4 of a step.
- If you hold the button down, the grabber moves step by step.
Motor Off Button The selected motor is turned off.
Other functionalities:
■ The Segment function is used to load/unload cuvette segments into the reaction tray:
- automatically using the Load and Unload buttons
- manually using the Forward button.
Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions

Vertical

Used Cuvette Holder Position 463 0 2000
New Cuvette Holder Position 44708 40000 49000
Pause Position Above Reaction Tray 75757 71000 80000
Low Position on Reaction Tray 102411 98000 107000
Horizontal

Backward Position in Reaction Tray 2758 2300 3300
Load in Reaction Tray Position 4263 3700 4800
Taking New Segment Pos 2665 2000 3300
Load Used Segment Position 2940 2100 3800
Cuvette motion


3.6. Barcode Test
The Barcode Test tab is used to make sure that the reagent and sample barcode readers as well as the
sample tube detector are working correctly.
To use these functions, please refer to the Reagent tray procedure (see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1)
and the Sample tray procedure (see RAS381: Sample tray, page 1).
3.7. Spectro
The Spectro tab groups the functions concerning the instrument optical bench and spectrophotometer.
This tab is divided into three subtabs:

■ Spectro Measure Adjustment
■ Spectro Settings
■ Spectro Measurement.
Press one of the tabs to access the various functions.
The Spectro Measure Adjustment tab is used to adjust the reaction tray home position.
To use this function, please refer to the Reaction tray procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4.3. Home
position, page 21.
The Spectro Settings and Spectro Measurement tabs are used to check the optical bench and the
spectrophotometer.
To use these functions, please refer to the Optical bench procedure. See RAS383: Optical bench, 4.
Optical bench check, page 31.

3.8. Heating
The Heating tab displays the temperature control values for the reagent needle, the reaction tray
chamber and the cooled area of the reagent tray.
These parameters are described in the Section 3: Technology, 3.1. PID control, page 3-12.
3.9. Sensors
The Sensors tab is used to check the state of several instrument sensors.
From the Sensors tab, the following sensors can be checked:
Heading Description
If the reagent cover is closed, the light is green.
Handling cover reagent closed
Handling cover reagent locked No check available.
Handling cover cuvette segment If the reaction tray door is closed, the light is green.
closed If not, the light is red.
If the unload rack of cuvette changer is in position, the light is
Rack used segment in position green.
If the unload rack of cuvette changer is full, the light is green.
Rack used segment full
If a cuvette segment is on the load rack, in position to be loaded
New segment available by the grabber, the light is green.

Heading Description
If the water tank is empty, the light is green.
Water tank empty
If the waste tank is full, the light is green.
Waste tank full
Lamp power standby No check available.
If the lamp is running properly, the light is green.
Lamp power full
If the liquid level in the cooling unit is low, the light is green.
Low liquid level (cooling unit)
If the computer wake up push-button is activated, the light is
PC wake up green.
If the arms main cover is closed, the light is green.
Main cover closed
If the mixer assembly is in position, the light is green.
Mixer present
If the power supply is running properly, the light is green.
Power correct
To check the state of these sensors, please refer to the Sensors check and adjustment procedure.
See RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment, page 1.
3.10. Pressure
The Pressure tab is used to configure and calibrate the reagent and sample pressure sensors.
To use these functions, please refer to the Pressure sensors procedure. See RAS442: Pressure sensors,
page 1.
3.11. ISE
The ISE tab groups the functions concerning the ISE module.
This tab is described in the Section 7: ISE module, page 7-1.

3.12. Repeatability
The Repeatability tab is used to perform repeatability cycles on the different instrument mechanical
assemblies to verify that these mechanical assemblies are functioning properly.
Repeatability cycles can be performed on the following mechanical assemblies:

- Sample arm (vertical and rotation movements)
- Reagent arm (vertical and rotation movements)
- Mixer
- Reagent syringe
- Sample syringe
- Reaction tray
- Reagent tray
- Sample tray
- Cuvette changer (vertical and horizontal movements, cuvette motion movement).
Each repeatability cycle performs a series of back and forth movements between the home position and
several target positions of the mechanical assembly.
Before performing a repeatability cycle, make sure that there is no mechanical assembly in
the way of the mechanical assembly to be checked and move the mechanical assembly to
be checked to its home position:
■ Place the reagent arm in low position in wash tower before moving the sample arm.
■ Move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home position) before moving the
reagent arm.
■ Move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home positions) before
performing rotation movements.
■ Move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home positions) before
moving any tray.
■ Make sure that the mixer paddle and the cuvette changer grabber are not in low position in
the reaction tray before moving the reaction tray.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Move the sample arm, then the reagent arm to its home position (vertical and rotation home positions).
■ Move the mixer to its home position.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe.

■ Move the reagent and sample syringes to their home positions.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Move the reagent, sample and reaction trays to their home positions.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

■ Move each cuvette changer motor (vertical motor, horizontal motor, cuvette motion motor) to its home
position.

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Repeatability.
■ Select the mechanical assembly in the Element scrolling list (A).

■ Enter the number of repeatability cycles (from 2 to 50) in the Number of repetitions field (B).
■ Press Start (C).
■ Thefollowing message will appear:
"This action can damage the mechanic. Could you confirm this action?"
■ Press Yes.
During the repeatability cycle, the following information is displayed in the Statistics part (D):
Heading Description
Number of remaining
Number of remaining cycles.
cycles
Number of results Number of rendered results.
Standard Deviation Standard deviation calculated for all the rendered results.
After the repeatability cycle, the results are displayed in the Statistics/Position table (E).
Heading Description
Position Values in 1/16 of a step of the reached positions during the repeatability cycle.
Number of results Number of rendered results per position.
Standard deviation Standard deviation calculated for the rendered results per position.
Coefficient of variation Coefficient of variation calculated for the rendered results per position.

Target positions per mechanical assembly
Mechanical assembly Target positions (functional position, volume or 16th of steps)

- Low position in reaction tray
- Low position in wash tower
Vertical sample arm
- Low position in cassette on reagent tray
- Low position in ISE mix cup
- Wash tower
- R1 on cassette
Rotation sample arm
- Internal sample
- ISE mix cup
- Low position in reaction tray
Vertical reagent arm - Low position in wash tower
- Low position in cassette on reagent tray
- Wash tower
Rotation reagent arm - R1 on cassette
- R2 on cassette
- Above reaction tray
Mixer
- Cuvette
- 150 µL
- 300 µL
Reagent syringe
- 450 µL
- 600 µL
- 25 µL
- 50 µL
Sample syringe
- 75 µL
- 95 µL
- 10080 (1/4 of turn)
- 20160 (1/2 of turn)
Reaction tray
- 30240 (3/4 of turn)
- 40000 (~ 1 turn)
- 10000 (1/4 of turn)
- 20000 (1/2 of turn)
Reagent tray
- 30000 (3/4 of turn)
- 39000 (~ 1 turn)
- 4800 (1/4 of turn)
- 9600 (1/2 of turn)
Sample tray
- 14400 (3/4 of turn)
- 19100 (~ 1 turn)
- Used cuvette holder position
- New cuvette holder position
Up and down cuvettes
- Pause position above reaction tray
- Low position on reaction tray
- Backward position in reaction tray
Translator cuvettes
- Load in reaction tray position
- 400 (1/4 of turn)
Lambada cuvettes - 800 (1/2 of turn)
- 1200 (3/4 of turn)
You can save the number of repeatability cycles as follows:

■ Type the number of repeatability cycles directly in the Number of repetitions field.
■ Press Back to exit from the Repeatability tab.
■ When the message "Exit without saving?" appears, press Cancel.

Initialization phases
4. Initialization phases
This section describes the different phases of the instrument initialization. If an error appears during
these phases, a warning or an alarm is triggered. See Section 6: Troubleshooting, page 6-1.
1. Manual or automatic start up

■ Computer power supply starting
■ Spectrophotometer lamp starting
■ Heating starting (reaction tray and reagent needle) and temperature regulation
2.
■ Boot of the computer
■ Launch of Windows
3. Launch of instrument software

■ Electronic key check (standard instrument or extended configuration)
4. Computer maintenance
■ Version check
■ Database check
■ Language database check
■ Check for archive file creation
■ Result storage capacity check
■ ABX cassette storage capacity check
■ Log storage capacity check
■ Database compacting
5. ISE module wake up
6. Synchronization Computer software/Embedded software.

■ Loading of instrument software modules (COMPROCESS, PRINTER, COMSIL, IHM)
■ Coherence control between Embedded software version and Computer software version
■ Coherence control between Embedded exchange table version and Computer exchange table version
■ Coherence control with CPLD version

■ Coherence control with ISE version
■ Coherence control with peripherals (CPLD, ISE, barcodes, PIC version)
■ Mechanical initialization
■ Barcode configuration
■ Reagent and sample barcodes reading
■ Spectrophotometer gain adjustment and check
■ Light stability check (on air)
■ Black intensity measurement
■ Cuvette cleanness check
■ Reference light intensity measurement (on water-filled cuvette)
■ Reaction tray check (unload/load)
■ Temperature regulation check

Initialization phases
7. Login

Section 6: Troubleshooting
1. Error messages ............................................................................................. 6 - 2

1.1. System warnings and alarms..................................................................................................... 6 - 2
1.2. Sampling alarms ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 38
2. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 6 - 42
2.1. Chemistry problem .................................................................................................................. 6 - 42
2.2. Windows and computer error .................................................................................................. 6 - 44
2.3. Cooling unit.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 44
2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114?............................................... 6 - 48
2.5. Other ........................................................................................................................................ 6 - 53

Troubleshooting
Error messages
1. Error messages
1.1. System warnings and alarms
System warnings and alarms are listed in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms,
page 6-3.
1. Warnings
Warnings are triggered to warn the user but are not blocking the instrument.
They are displayed on the Warning tab of the System Warnings menu.
When a warning is triggered, the instrument is not stopped but turns to "Ready" status.
If a warning appears, follow the instructions given in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and
alarms, page 6-3.
2. Alarms
Alarms are blocking the instrument.
They are displayed on the Alarm tab of the System Warnings menu.
The Alarm tab is re-set at each start. To access the previous alarms, press CTRL + F8.
When an alarm is triggered, the instrument is stopped and turns to "Emergency Stop" status.
If an alarm appears, follow the instructions given in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and
alarms, page 6-3.

1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms
Level Code Message Error type / Description Action

Instrument/ISE module communication
Warning 001 ISE Module Initialization Problem Check the ISE module connections and fuse.
failed.
Mother board/sample barcode reader Check the connector J5 on the sample relay
Alarm 002 Sample Barcode Reader Initialization Problem
communication failed. board.
Mother board/reagent barcode reader
Alarm 003 Reagent Barcode Reader Initialization Problem Check the connector J4 on the mother board.
communication failed.
Reload the embedded software version on the
Communication failed on PIC of mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Alarm 004 Temperature Regulation Initialization Problem
temperature regulation. installation, page 1.
Replace the mother board.
Mother board/acquisition board Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition
Alarm 005 Measurement Module Initialization Problem

communication failed. board, and the bus.
Communication failed on PIC of sample

Alarm 006 Sample Vertical Motor Initialization Problem
arm vertical motor.
Alarm 007 Sample Rotation Motor Initialization Problem
arm rotation motor.
Communication failed on PIC of reagent
Alarm 008 Reagent Vertical Motor Initialization Problem
arm vertical motor.
Alarm 009 Reagent Rotation Motor Initialization Problem
arm rotation motor.
Communication failed on PIC of sample Reload the embedded software version on the
Alarm 010 Sample Tray Motor Initialization Problem
tray motor. mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Communication failed on PIC of reagent installation, page 1.
Alarm 011 Reagent Tray Motor Initialization Problem Replace the mother board.
tray motor.
Communication failed on PIC of reaction
Alarm 012 Reaction Tray Motor Initialization Problem
tray motor.
Communication failed on PIC of mixer XY
Alarm 013 Mixer Initialization Problem
motor.
Alarm 014 Sample Syringe Motor Initialization Problem
syringe motor.
Alarm 015 Reagent Syringe Motor Initialization Problem
syringe motor.
Troubleshooting
6-3
Error messages
6-4
Communication failed on PIC of cuvette
Alarm 016 Cuvette Vertical Motor Initialization Problem
changer vertical motor. Reload the embedded software version on the
Communication failed on PIC of cuvette mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Alarm 017 Cuvette Horizontal Motor Initialization Problem
changer horizontal motor. installation, page 1.
Error messages
Communication failed on PIC of cuvette Replace the mother board.

Troubleshooting
Alarm 018 Cuvette Motion Initialization Problem

motion motor.
Check the sample arm vertical motion, vertical
motor connectors.
Sample arm vertical home position is not
Alarm 019 Sample Vertical Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28
reached on time during the initialization.
(1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J59 Pin1-3 (home
position 5 V, other 0 V).
Check the sample arm rotation motion, rotation
motor connectors.
Sample arm rotation home position is not
Alarm 020 Sample Rotation Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30
(0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J41 Pin1-3 (home
Check the reagent arm vertical motion, vertical
motor connectors.
Reagent arm vertical home position is not
Alarm 021 Reagent Vertical Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29
Check the reagent arm rotation motion, rotation
Reagent arm rotation home position is motor connectors.
Alarm 022 Reagent Rotation Motor Reference Position Error not reached on time during the Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27
initialization. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J39 Pin1-3 (home
Check the sample tray motion, motor connectors,
optical encoder connectors.
Sample tray home position is not reached
Alarm 023 Sample Tray Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14
on time during the initialization.
Check the reagent tray motion, motor connectors,
home flag adjustment.
Reagent tray home position is not
Alarm 024 Reagent Tray Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11
position 0 V LED DS5 OFF, other 5 V).

Check the reaction tray motion, motor connectors,
Reaction tray home position is not
Alarm 025 Reaction Tray Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1
Check the mixer XY motion, motor connectors,
Mixer home position is not reached on
Alarm 026 Mixer Initialization Problem Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16
time during the initialization.
Check the sample syringe, the sample syringe
Sample syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors.
Alarm 027 Sample Syringe Motor Reference Position Error
reached on time during the initialization. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP7
(1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J9.

Check the reagent syringe, the reagent syringe
Reagent syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors.

Alarm 028 Reagent Syringe Reference Position Error
reached on time during the initialization. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP2
(1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J2.
Check the cuvette changer vertical motion,
vertical motor connectors.
Cuvette changer vertical home position is
Check the voltages on the mother board: TP6
Alarm 029 Cuvette Vertical Motor Reference Position Error not reached on time during the
(1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3
initialization.
(home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector
(bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V, other 0 V).
Check the cuvette changer horizontal motion,
Cuvette changer horizontal home horizontal motor connectors.
Cuvette Horizontal Motor Reference Position
Alarm 030 position is not reached on time during the Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9
Error
initialization. (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J20 Pin1-3 (home
Check the cuvette motion, cuvette motion motor
connectors.
Cuvette motion home position is not
Alarm 031 Cuvette Motion Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13
Troubleshooting
6-5
Error messages
6-6
motor connectors.
reached with the acceptable motor
Alarm 032 Sample Vertical Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28
number of steps (error > 1/2 offset) during
the initialization.
Error messages
Troubleshooting

motor connectors.
Alarm 033 Sample Rotation Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30
the initialization.
motor connectors.
Alarm 034 Reagent Vertical Motor Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29
the initialization.
Reagent arm rotation home position is
motor connectors.
not reached with the acceptable motor
Alarm 035 Reagent Rotation Motor Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27
the initialization.
Sample tray home position is not reached optical encoder connectors.
Alarm 036 Sample Tray Position Error with the acceptable motor number of Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14
steps during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J21 Pin1-3 (home
Reagent tray home position is not home flag adjustment.
Alarm 037 Reagent Tray Position Error reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11
number of steps during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J14 Pin1-4 (home
Reaction tray home position is not home flag adjustment.
Alarm 038 Reaction Tray Position Error reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1
number of steps during the initialization. (2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J12 Pin1-3 (home

Mixer home position is not reached with home flag adjustment.
Alarm 039 Mixer Position Error the acceptable motor number of steps Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16
during the initialization. (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J33 Pin1-3 (home
Sample syringe home position is not
motion, motor connectors.
Alarm 040 Sample Syringe Position Error reached with the acceptable motor
number of steps during the initialization.
Reagent syringe home position is not
motion, motor connectors.
Alarm 041 Reagent Syringe Position Error reached with the acceptable motor
number of steps during the initialization.

Cuvette changer vertical home position is Check the voltages on the mother board: TP6

Alarm 042 Cuvette Vertical Motor Position Error not reached with the acceptable motor (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3
number of steps during the initialization. (home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector
(bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V,
other 0 V).
Cuvette changer horizontal home
horizontal motor connectors.
position is not reached with the
Alarm 043 Cuvette Horizontal Motor Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9
acceptable motor number of steps during
the initialization.
Cuvette motion home position is not connectors.
Alarm 044 Cuvette Changer Problem: Moving Forward reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13
number of steps during the initialization. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J37 Pin1-3 (home
Check the sample needle alignment, the sample
arm cover.
Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample
Alarm 045 Shock Detection Stop Check the voltage on the sample level detection
arm is ON during the initialization.
board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5
(ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).
Troubleshooting
6-7
Error messages
6-8
arm cover.
arm is ON during the initialization, and the
Alarm 046 Shock Detection Out of Service Check the voltage on the sample level detection
sample arm is at its vertical home
position.
(ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).
Error messages
Troubleshooting
Sample needle does not detect liquid,

with the capacitive level detection, during
Alarm 047 Sample Level Detection Error Check the level of the concerned reagent.
pipetting in reagent tray.
Triggered during the shutdown.
Reagent needle does not detect liquid,
with the capacitive level detection, during
Alarm 048 Reagent Level Detection Error Check the level of the concerned reagent.
pipetting in reagent tray.
Triggered during the shutdown.
Check the reaction tray fan is running (airflow from
Temperature of reaction tray, measured top to bottom), powered on 24 V on the mother
by the temperature sensor, is not in the board: J52, LED DS16.
acceptable range: Check the heater resistance, check the voltage on
Alarm 053 Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed
- after 15 min. during the initialization the heater: J2 Pin1-2 (24 V TTL).
(37°C ±0.25) Check the temperature sensor voltage on the
- after the initialization (37°C ±0.5). mother board: J46 (37°C 1.95 V, 30°C 2.3 V).
Check the cooling unit is running.
Check the reagent needle wires, check the
Temperature of reagent needle, connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level
measured by the temperature sensor, is detection board.
not in the acceptable range: Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or
Alarm 054 Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed
- after 10 min. during the initialization XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent
(37°C ±1.5). level detection board (J4) to the mother board
- after the initialization (37°C ±3). (J47).
Change the reagent needle.
Temperature of reagent tray, measured
Run an initialization and restart the cooling unit.
by the temperature sensor, is not in the
Check the glycol level and circulation.
Refrigerated Compartment Temperature acceptable range:
Alarm 055 Check the fans inside the reagent tray and the
regulation failed - after 4 hours during the initialization
cooling unit fan.
(6°C, 4-10°C).
Change the glycol.
- after the initialization (6°C, 2-12°C).

Mother board/acquisition board
Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition
Alarm 056 Measurement Module Out of Service board, and the bus.
Triggered during the spectrophotometer
Check the connector J1 on the mother board.
initialization.
Mother board/acquisition board
Alarm 057 Measurement Module Out of Service board, and the bus.
Triggered during absorbance
Check the connector J1 on the mother board.
measurements.
Reload the barcode reader configuration (shut
Incorrect communication frame with down and restart the instrument).
Alarm 058 Sample Tray Identification Failure
sample barcode reader. Change the barcode reader.
Change the mother board.
Reload the barcode reader configuration (shut
Incorrect communication frame with down and restart the instrument).
Alarm 059 Reagent Tray Identification Failure

reagent barcode reader. Change the barcode reader.
Change the mother board.

Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Warning 060 Non recoverable material error on the ISE module Triggered by the ISE mother board.
Change the ISE mother board.
The used ISE function cannot be
Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Warning 061 ISE command invalid performed.
Change the ISE mother board.
Triggered by the ISE mother board.
Close the main cover.
Check the main cover switch, connector J30 on
Detected by the main cover mechanical
Alarm 062 Main Cover Open the mother board.
switch during the initialization.
Connector J30 can be disconnected without
triggering any alarm on the instrument.
Close the reagent door.
Check the reagent door switch, connector J29
Pin1-2 on the mother board.
Detected by the reagent door magnetic
Alarm 063 Reagent Door Open To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when
switch.
disconnecting connector J29, make a short circuit
between the black and white wires on the
connector right below the reagent tray.
Troubleshooting
6-9
Error messages
6 - 10
Manually push the mixer down.
Check the "mixer present switch", connector J28
Alarm 065 Mixer not Positioned Detected by the "mixer present switch". on the mother board.
Error messages
Troubleshooting
Check the low pressure threshold = 300 in the

Pressure menu.
Check the water tank and hydraulic circuit (leaks,
unplug tubing, ...).
Detected by the sample or reagent
Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3
Alarm 066 pressure sensor (< 300 mbar) during the
hydraulic system (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with
initialization.
R16.
Change the sample or reagent pressure sensor.
See 2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent
alarms #066 or 114?, page 6-48.
Add new cuvette segments.
Detected by the cuvette segment sensor, Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment.
Alarm 067 No Clean Cuvettes Present located on the load rack, during the Check the voltages on the mother board: J38
initialization. Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment
5 V, with cuvette segment 0 V).
motor connectors.
Alarm 101 Sample Vertical Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28
reached on time during a run.
motor connectors.
Alarm 102 Sample Rotation Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30
motor connectors.
Alarm 103 Reagent Vertical Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29

motor connectors.
Reagent arm rotation home position is
Alarm 104 Reagent Rotation Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27
not reached on time during a run.
Sample tray home position is not reached optical encoder connectors.
Alarm 105 Sample Tray Position Error on time during a run or the optical Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14
encoder detects a wrong position. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J21 Pin1-3 (home
Reagent tray home position is not
Alarm 106 Reagent Tray Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11


Reaction tray home position is not
Alarm 107 Reaction Tray Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1
Mixer home position is not reached on
Alarm 108 Mixer Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16
time during a run.
Sample syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors.
Alarm 109 Sample Syringe Position Error
reached on time during a run. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP7
Reagent syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors.
Alarm 110 Reagent Syringe Position Error
reached on time during a run. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP2
Troubleshooting
6 - 11
Error messages
6 - 12
Cuvette changer vertical home position is
Alarm 111 Cuvette Vertical Motor Position Error (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3
not reached on time during a run.
(home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector
Error messages
Troubleshooting
(bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V,

other 0 V).
Cuvette changer horizontal home horizontal motor connectors.
Alarm 112 Cuvette Horizontal Motor Position Error position is not reached on time during a Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9
run. (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J20 Pin1-3 (home
connectors.
Cuvette motion home position is not
Alarm 113 Cuvette Changer Problem: Moving Forward Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13
Check the low pressure threshold = 300 in the
Pressure menu.
Check the water tank and hydraulic circuit (leaks,
unplug tubing, ...).
Detected by the sample or reagent
Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3
Alarm 114 pressure sensor (< 300 mbar) during a
hydraulic system (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with
run.
R16.
Change the sample or reagent pressure sensor.
See 2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent
alarms #066 or 114?, page 6-48.
Alarm 115 Main Cover Open the mother board.
switch during a run.
Reaction tray flap door open, detected by Close the reaction tray flap door.
Alarm 116 Manual Cuvette Loading Door Open the switch located on the reaction tray Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the
upper case during a run. mother board.
Unload rack is not detected by the Reinstall the unload rack.
Alarm 117 Used Cuvette Holder Missing mechanical switch during the Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor,
initialization or a run. connector J26 on the mother board.

Physically check the sample tubes and sample
Alarm 118 Sample Identification Failure Sample identification failed.
racks.
Alarm 119 Reagent Identification Failure Reagent identification failed. Physically check the cassettes and racks.
Mother board/acquisition board board, and the bus.
Alarm 122 Measurement Module Out of Service
communication failed. Check the connector J1 on the mother board.
Change the acquisition board.
Check the reaction tray fan is running (airflow from
top to bottom), powered on 24 V on the mother
Temperature of reaction tray, measured board: J52, LED DS16.
by the temperature sensor, is not in the Check the heater resistance, check the voltage on
Warning 123 Reaction tray temperature exceeds limits
acceptable range after the initialization: the heater: J2 Pin1-2 (24 V TTL).
- after 2 min. (37°C ±0.25). Check the temperature sensor voltage on the
mother board: J46 (37°C 1.95 V, 30°C 2.3 V).

Check the cooling unit is running.

connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level
Temperature of reagent needle,
detection board.
measured by the temperature sensor, is
Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or
Warning 124 Heating needle temperature exceeds limits not in the acceptable range after the
XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent
initialization:
level detection board (J4) to the mother board
- after 24 sec. (37°C ±1.5).
(J47).
arm cover.
Alarm 125 Shock Detection Out of Service Check the voltage on the sample level detection
arm is ON during a run.
(ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).
Check the level of the concerned sample or
reagent.
Check the sample arm wires, connections and
Sample needle does not detect liquid,
board.
with the capacitive level detection, 3
Alarm 126 Sample Level Detection Out of Service Check the frequency on the sample level detection
consecutive times during pipetting in
board: U2 Pin1-5 (on air 47 kHz, with J1
sample or reagent tray.
disconnected > 100 kHz).
Change the sample needle, sample level detection
board.
Troubleshooting
6 - 13
Error messages
6 - 14
Check the sample syringe has no bubble.
Check there is no leaks.
Air detection 2 consecutive times during Check the concerned sample or reagent (level,
sampling, the pressure measured by the foam, bubbles).
Alarm 127 Sample Level Detection Out of Service sample pressure sensor is lower than the Check the low pressure threshold = 300 and factor
Error messages
Troubleshooting
low limit of acceptable range KA = 0.050 in the Pressure menu.

(= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)). Calibrate the sample pressure sensor.
Change the sample needle, sample pressure
sensor, pressure board.
Check the level of the concerned reagent.
Check the reagent arm wires, connections and
board.
Check the voltage on the reagent level detection
Reagent needle does not detect liquid,
board at U2 output and U3 input: between TP1
with the capacitive level detection, 3
Alarm 128 Reagent Level Detection Out of Service and TP2 (J1 disconnected 2.8 V ±10%, J1
consecutive times during pipetting in
connected 0 V < 0.5 V, J5 disconnected on air
reagent tray.
1.9 V ±10%, J5 disconnected on water 1.7 V
±10%).
Change the reagent needle, reagent level
detection board.
Check the reagent syringe has no bubble.
Check there is no leaks.
Check the concerned reagent (level, foam,
bubbles).
Air detection 2 consecutive times during
Check the low pressure threshold = 300 and factor
sampling, the pressure measured by the
KA = 0.700 in the Pressure menu.
Alarm 129 Reagent Level Detection Out of Service reagent pressure sensor is lower than the
Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3
low limit of acceptable range
(3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with
(= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)).
R16.
Calibrate the reagent pressure sensor.
Change the reagent needle, reagent pressure
Check the high pressure threshold = 2500 in the
High pressure on the sample hydraulic Pressure menu.
Alarm 130 Over pressure on the sample hydraulic system circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the Check the sample needle is not clogged.
sample pressure sensor during a run. Change the sample needle, sample pressure
sensor, pressure board, water pump.

Pressure menu.
Check the reagent needle is not clogged.
High pressure on the reagent hydraulic
Alarm 131 Over pressure on the reagent hydraulic system circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the
reagent pressure sensor during a run.
R16.
Check the concerned sample or reagent.
Clog detection 2 consecutive times Check the sample needle is not clogged.
during sampling, the pressure measured Check the factor KB = 3.700 in the Pressure
Alarm 132 Sample Needle Clogged by the sample pressure sensor is higher menu.
than the high limit of acceptable range Calibrate the sample pressure sensor.
(= KB * (A * pipetted volume + B)). Change the sample needle, sample pressure

Check the concerned reagent.

Check the reagent needle is not clogged.
Check the factor KB = 1.800 in the Pressure
Clog detection 2 consecutive times
menu.
during sampling, the pressure measured
Alarm 133 Reagent Needle Clogged by the reagent pressure sensor is higher
than the high limit of acceptable range
R16.
(= KB * (A * pipetted volume + B)).
Calibrate the reagent pressure sensor.
Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample arm cover.
Alarm 134 Shock Detection Out of Service arm is ON during a run, and the sample Check the voltage on the sample level detection
arm is at its vertical home position. board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5
(ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).
Number of cycles incompatible with the mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Alarm 135 Maximum quantity of cycles exceeded
embedded software version. installation, page 1.
Troubleshooting
6 - 15
Error messages
6 - 16
See Alarm #136 "Peripheral busy", page 6-34 to
know which motor is concerned by the message.
Alarm 136 Peripheral busy [%s] Incompatible cycle, time out on a motor. Check the concerned motor.
Send to HORIBA Medical the files Asp400bd.mdb
and Error.log for analysis.
Error messages
Troubleshooting

mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Alarm 137 Unknown Cycle The requested cycle does not exist.
installation, page 1.
Reaction tray flap door open, detected by
Close the reaction tray flap door.
the switch located on the reaction tray
Alarm 138 Manual Cuvette Loading Cover Open Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the
upper case during a run and a reaction
mother board.
tray motion.
Alarm 139 Used Cuvette Holder Missing mechanical switch, located on the Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor,
cuvette changer. connector J26 on the mother board.
Remove used cuvette segments.
Check the "rack used segment full" sensor.
Check the voltage on the mother board: J19 Pin1-
Detected by the photoelectric beam
Alarm 140 Used Cuvette Holder Full 2 (with cuvette segment 5 V, without cuvette
sensor, located on the load rack.
segment 0 V).
Check there is no light interference above the
instrument.
The temperature sensor, located in the Check the temperature sensor and its wires,
Alarm 141 Reaction Tray Temperature Sensor Out of Order reaction tray, has no resistance (open connector J46 on the mother board.
circuit). Change the temperature sensor.
connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level
detection board.
The temperature sensor, located in the
Reagent Needle Temperature Sensor Out of Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or
Alarm 142 reagent needle, has no resistance (open
Order XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent
circuit).
level detection board (J4) to the mother board
(J47).
The temperature sensor, located in the Check the temperature sensor and its wires,
Alarm 145 Reagent Tray Temperature Sensor Out of Order reagent tray, has no resistance (open connector J43 on the mother board.
circuit). Change the temperature sensor.

arm cover.
Alarm 146 Shock Detection on dispensing Check the voltage on the sample level detection
arm is ON during dispensing.
(ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).
Instrument received 5 V = compressor Check the cooling unit is switched ON.
overload (instead of 0 V = compressor Check the cooling unit condenser (dirty), fan
Compressor overload: Refrigeration has been
Alarm 147 OK) through the cooling unit control cable (damaged), filter, control cable (disconnected).
stopped.
on instrument connector Pin6 or the Check the room temperature is not excessive.
cooling unit is switched OFF. See Compressor overload alarm, page 6-35.
Alarm 148 Reagent Door Open To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when
switch during pipetting.


High pressure on the sample hydraulic
Pressure menu.
circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the
Alarm 149 Over pressure on the sample hydraulic system Check the sample needle is not clogged.
sample pressure sensor during the
Change the sample needle, sample pressure
initialization.
Pressure menu.
High pressure on the reagent hydraulic Check the reagent needle is not clogged.
circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3
Alarm 150 Over pressure on the reagent hydraulic system
reagent pressure sensor during the (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with
initialization. R16.
Communication failed on PIC of pressure mother board. See RAS517: Software version
Alarm 151 Pressure controller initilization error
board. installation, page 1.
Troubleshooting
6 - 17
Error messages
6 - 18
Fill the water tank.
Check the voltage of the water tank empty sensor
on the mother board: J31 Pin3-4 (water 0 V, no
Detected by the level switch, located in water 5 V).
Alarm 152 Water Tank Low Level
the water tank. To avoid water level detection alarms when
Error messages
Troubleshooting

between Pin 3 and 4. WARNING: This will disabled
the waste tank level detection.
Check the sample pressure sensor, pressure
Alarm 153 Pressure controller of sample arm out of order sample pressure sensor is lower than the
board.
Check the reagent pressure sensor, pressure
Alarm 154 Pressure controller of reagent arm out of order reagent pressure sensor is lower than the
board.
Check the voltage of the "mixer present switch" on
Detected by the mechanical switch, the mother board: J28 Pin2-4 (mixer present 5 V,
Alarm 156 Mixer not Positioned
located under the mixer assembly. mixer not present 0 V).
Error on the reagent level detection
board. See Error on the reagent level detection board,
Alarm 157 Error card reagent detection [error %s1: %s2]
[%s1]: error code. page 6-37.
[%s2]: error message.
Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment.
Detected by the cuvette segment sensor, Check the voltages on the mother board: J38
Warning 301 Cuvette Holder Empty
located on the load rack, during a run. Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment
Check the cuvette motion, clean the load rack rail.

Remove used cuvette segments.
Check the "rack used segment full" sensor.
Detected by the photoelectric beam Check the voltage on the mother board: J19 Pin1-
Warning 302 Used Cuvette Holder Full sensor, located on the load rack, during a 2 (with cuvette segment 5 V, without cuvette
run. segment 0 V).
Check there is no light interference above the
instrument.
Detected by the level switch, located in
water 5 V).
Warning 303 Water Tank Low Level the water tank, during all phases except
To avoid water level detection alarms when
pipetting.

Empty the waste tank.

Warning 304 Waste Tank Full Check the voltage of the waste tank full sensor on
the waste tank.
the mother board: J31 Pin1-2 (empty 0 V, full 5 V).
Run an initialization and restart the cooling unit.
Temperature of reagent tray, measured
Check the glycol level and circulation.
by the temperature sensor, is not in the
Warning 305 Reagent tray temperature exceeds limits Check the fans inside the reagent tray and the
acceptable range after the initialization:
cooling unit fan.
- after 30 min. (6°C, 4-10°C).
Change the glycol.
Glycol level in the cooling unit
insufficient, detected by the mechanical
switch in the cooling unit.
Check the glycol level.
Warning 307 Water level of the cold group is insufficient Instrument received 5 V = low level
Check the cooling unit mechanical switch.
(instead of 0 V = OK) through the cooling
unit control cable on instrument
connector Pin4.
A default has been detected in the power
supply.
Warning 308 Power supply problem Change the power supply.
Information from the power supply
received on the mother board J54 Pin9.
Troubleshooting
6 - 19
Error messages
6 - 20
The sampling alarm SOLUTION_EMPTY/
Check the reagent and replace it if necessary.
SN has been triggered, by the sample
Activate the reagent in the Reagent
Warning 309 SOLUTION_EMPTY/SN on liquid [%s] needle, on the solution [%s] during the
Configuration menu.
shutdown.
Rerun the shutdown.
[%s] = solution short name.
Error messages
Troubleshooting
The sampling alarm SOLUTION_EMPTY/

RN has been triggered, by the reagent
Warning 310 SOLUTION_EMPTY/RN on liquid [%s] needle, on the solution [%s] during the
Configuration menu.
shutdown.
Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm SOLUTION_FOAM/
SN has been triggered, by the sample
Warning 311 SOLUTION_FOAM/SN on liquid [%s] pressure sensor, on the solution [%s]
Configuration menu.
during the shutdown.
Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm SOLUTION_FOAM/
RN has been triggered, by the reagent
Warning 312 SOLUTION_FOAM/RN on liquid [%s] pressure sensor, on the solution [%s]
Configuration menu.
during the shutdown.
Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm
Check the sample needle and tubing.
SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN has been
Run a sample pressure calibration.
triggered, by the sample pressure sensor,
Warning 313 SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN on liquid [%s] on the solution [%s] during the
shutdown.
Configuration menu.
The sample needle may be clogged.
Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm
Check the reagent needle and tubing.
SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN has been
Run a reagent pressure calibration.
triggered, by the reagent pressure sensor,
Warning 314 SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN on liquid [%s] on the solution [%s] during the
shutdown.
Configuration menu.
The reagent needle may be clogged.
Rerun the shutdown.

The sampling alarm SOLUTION_SHOCK
has been triggered, by the sample or Check the reagent, remove the caps. Activate the
Warning 315 SOLUTION_SHOCK on liquid [%s] reagent needle, on the solution [%s] reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.
during the shutdown. Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm
INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN has been Check the reagent and replace it if necessary.
triggered, by the sample pressure sensor, Activate the reagent in the Reagent
Warning 316 INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN on liquid [%s]
on the solution [%s] during the Configuration menu.
shutdown. Rerun the shutdown.
The sampling alarm
INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN has been Check the reagent and replace it if necessary.
triggered, by the reagent pressure sensor, Activate the reagent in the Reagent
Warning 317 INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN on liquid [%s]

on the solution [%s] during the Configuration menu.
shutdown. Rerun the shutdown.

ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion.
home position is not reached on time. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 318 Timeout error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 1)
ISE module status is 2 = module mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V,
configured. other 5 V).
ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion.
home position is not reached. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 319 Position error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 2)
ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion.
2) home position is not reached on time. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 320 Timeout error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 11)
ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion.
2) home position is not reached. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 321 Position error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 12)
Troubleshooting
6 - 21
Error messages
6 - 22
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB
sensor cannot detect Standard 1. The LB Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
Warning 322 Can’t detect ISE low solution (error code 21) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
ISE module status is 4 = module Run an ISE Global Initialization.
sleeping.
Error messages
Troubleshooting

sensor cannot detect the arriving of
Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
Standard 1. The LB sensor measurement
Warning 323 Can’t detect ISE low solution inlet (error code 22) Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
is > 4.5 V (air).
Run an ISE Global Initialization.
ISE module status is 4 = module
sleeping.
sensor detects Standard 1. The LB Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
Warning 324 Too much ISE low solution inlet (error code 23) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
ISE module status is 4 = module Run an ISE Global Initialization
sleeping.
sensor still detects Standard 1 flow after
ISE low solution inlet excess on timeout (error the aspiration specified time. The LB
Warning 325 Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
code 24) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid).
sleeping.
sensor detects Standard 1 at the
ISE low solution inlet excess on start of beginning of measurement. The LB
measuring (error code 25) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid).
sleeping.
sensor cannot detect Standard 2. The LB Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
Warning 327 Can’t detect ISE high solution (error code 31) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
sleeping.

Can’t detect ISE high solution inlet (error code Standard 2. The LB sensor measurement
32) is > 4.5 V (air).
sleeping.
sensor detects Standard 2. The LB Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
Warning 329 Too much ISE high solution inlet (error code 33) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
sleeping.
sensor still detects Standard 2 flow after
ISE high solution inlet excess on timeout (error the aspiration specified time. The LB

code 34) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid).

sleeping.
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB Check the sample for fibrin, clog.
Warning 331 Can’t detect ISE sample (error code 41) sensor cannot detect sample. The LB Check the sample needle and tubing.
sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Readjust the LB sensor.
Check the sample for fibrin, clog.
Warning 332 Can’t detect ISE sample inlet (error code 42) Check the sample needle and tubing.
sample. The LB sensor measurement is
Readjust the LB sensor.
> 4.5 V (air).
sensor detects sample. The LB sensor Check the hydraulic circuit.
Warning 333 Too much ISE sample inlet (error code 43) measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
sleeping.
sensor still detects sample flow after the
Check the hydraulic circuit.
ISE sample inlet excess on timeout (error code aspiration specified time. The LB sensor
44) measurement is < 1 V (liquid).
sleeping.
Troubleshooting
6 - 23
Error messages
6 - 24
The difference between the low and high
standard values is out of the sensitivity Run a 2-point calibration.
ISE electrode [%s1] sensibility error for [%s2] normal range for the electrode in Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
Warning 335
point (error code 50) brackets. cleaning).
[%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode.
Error messages
Troubleshooting
[%s2] = low/high point of the calibration.

The low or high standard value is out of
Run a 2-point calibration.
the acceptable range for the electrode in
ISE electrode [%s1] offset error for [%s2] point Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
Warning 336 brackets.
(error code 51) cleaning).
[%s1] = electrode name.
Change the corresponding electrode.
Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle has no bubble.
Change the ISE Standard 1 bottle.
Repeatability error on the low standard
Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
ISE electrode [%s1] repeatability error for [%s2] value for the electrode in brackets.
Warning 337 cleaning).
point (error code 52) [%s1] = electrode name.
Check the spring contact of the corresponding
electrode.
Check the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle has no
bubble.
The potential difference during the three
Change the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle.
last seconds of a measurement is
ISE electrode [%s1] response error for [%s2] Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
Warning 338 ≥ 0.40 mV for the electrode in brackets.
point (error code 55) cleaning).
electrode.
Warning 339 ISE LB check response error (error code 91) ISE module mechanical error. Change the ISE preampli board.
Check the cooling unit is switched ON.
The cooling unit is stopped for ten Check the cooling unit condenser (dirty), fan
Compressor overload: Refrigeration is stopped
Warning 340 minutes and automatically restarted after (damaged), filter, control cable (disconnected).
temporarily for 10 minutes.
ten minutes stopping. Check the room temperature is not excessive.
See Compressor overload alarm, page 6-35.
Bad database version.
Reload a compatible database version.
Database version [%s] Not OK, version required [%s] = database version number.
Alarm 501 Reinstall the software version. See RAS517:
[%s] The software detected an incompatible
Software version installation, page 1.
database version during the initialization.
Alarm 502 Compacting database Not OK Database compacting failed. Reload a previous database.

Bad embedded software version.
[%s] = embedded software version
Bad Embedded Software Version Required [%s], number. Reinstall the software version. See RAS517:
Alarm 503
Current [%s] The embedded software version on the Software version installation, page 1.
mother board is incompatible with the
current software version.
Reinstall the software version. See RAS517:
Bad CPLD version.
Alarm 504 Bad CPLD version Required [%s], Current [%s] Software version installation, page 1.
[%s] = CPLD version number.
Check the lamp and replace it if necessary.
The lamp stability is not reached after 10 Check the gain values.
min. during the initialization (the Clean the lamp side of the condensing lens. See
Alarm 505 Light stability Not OK
difference between 2 consecutive RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning, page 1.
absorbances is > 0.00022). Clean the mirror and all the lens of the optical

bench. See RAS383: Optical bench, page 1.
Bad embedded exchange table version.

[%s] = embedded exchange table
Bad Embedded exchange table: Version version number.
Alarm 506 Software version installation, page 1.
Required [%s], Current [%s] The software detected an incompatible
exchange table version on the mother
board during the initialization.
Bad computer exchange table version.
Bad PC exchange table: Version Required [%s], Reinstall the software version. See RAS517:
Alarm 507 [%s] = computer exchange table version
Current [%s] Software version installation, page 1.
number.
Bad Embedded exchange table size: Version Bad embedded exchange table size.
Alarm 508 -
Required [%s], Current [%s] [%s] = embedded exchange table size.
Bad PC exchange table size: Version Required Bad computer exchange table size.
Alarm 509 -
[%s], Current [%s] [%s] = computer exchange table size.
Run an initialization.
Module loading failed.
Perform a Checkdisk.
Alarm 510 Loading Module [%s]: Not OK [%s] = module name (COMPROCESS,
IHM).
Software version installation, page 1.
Alarm 511 Unable to found empty cuvette on a reaction tray No new cuvette on the reaction tray. Check the voltages on the mother board: J38
Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment
Troubleshooting
6 - 25
Error messages
6 - 26
Check the cable from the computer to the mother
Alarm 513 Communication Problem Internal communication failed. board.
Check the power supply on the mother board.
Check the barcode labels on cassettes and
Alarm 514 At least 2 identical Barcodes detected At least two identical reagent barcodes.
Error messages
reagent racks.
Troubleshooting
Problem when configuring the Sample Barcode Sample barcode reader configuration
Alarm 515 Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Reader failed.
Problem when configuring the Reagent Barcode Reagent barcode reader configuration
Alarm 516 Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Reader failed.
The light intensity on air, measured in the
position 1 of an empty sector of the
Check the optical bench, reaction tray adjustment
Alarm 517 Light intensity out of range reaction tray, is out of the acceptable
and clean the reaction tray.
range (between 57200 and 65535) during
the initialization.
Motor offset value out of range.
Motor [%s1], function position [%s2], value [%s1] = motor name.
Alarm 518 -
[%s3] has changed [%s2] = position name.
[%s3] = old value, new value.
Bad ISE module version. Software version installation, page 1.
Alarm 519 Bad ISE version Required [%s], Current [%s] [%s] = ISE version number. Reinstall the ISE version on the ISE module. See
Detected during the initialization. RAS540: ISE module software version installation,
page 1.
Spectrophotometer gain check failed.
[%s1] = wavelength.
The lamp has failed the gain check. [%s1 nm / [%s2] = gain.
Alarm 520 Replace the lamp.
%s2 Gain]. Please change the lamp. The gain is out of the acceptable range
(between 1 and 98%) during the
initialization.
Module loading failed.
Check the module connections.
Warning 600 Loading Module [%s]: Not OK [%s] = module name (PRINTER,
Run an initialization.
COMSIL).
Bad language database version.
Language database version [%s] Not OK, version
Warning 601 [%s] = language database version -
required [%s]
number.

Not Enough Clean Cuvettes on Reaction Tray to Less than four new cuvettes on the Check the voltages on the mother board: J38
Warning 602
Start Analysis reaction tray. Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment
Check the cleanness of the optical bench lenses.
No ordered sample tube on the sample
Warning 603 No Ordered Sample on Sample Tray Position sample tubes on the sample tray.
tray.
The sample ID in brackets, programmed
from the Host, contains the "AUTO_SID"
Warning 604 This Sample ID [%s] is a reserved code Modify the Sample ID from the Host.
prefix.
[%s] = Sample ID.
The patient ID in brackets, programmed
from the Host, contains the "AUTO_SID"
Warning 605 This Patient ID [%s] is a reserved code Modify the Patient ID from the Host.

prefix.
[%s] = Patient ID.

Warning 606 Main Cover Open the mother board.
switch.
Warning 607 Reagent Door Open To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when
switch.
Reaction tray flap door open, detected by Close the reaction tray flap door.
Warning 608 Manual Cuvette Loading Door Open the switch located on the reaction tray Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the
upper case. mother board.
Warning 609 Used Cuvette Holder Missing mechanical switch, located on the Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor,
cuvette changer. connector J26 on the mother board.
Troubleshooting
6 - 27
Error messages
6 - 28
Detected by the level switch, located in water 5 V).
Warning 610 Water Tank Empty
the water tank. To avoid water level detection alarms when
Error messages
Troubleshooting

Empty the waste tank.
Warning 611 Waste Tank Full Check the voltage of the waste tank full sensor on
the waste tank.
the mother board: J31 Pin1-2 (empty 0 V, full 5 V).
Check the "mixer present switch", connector J28
Warning 612 Mixer missing Detected by the "mixer present switch". on the mother board.
Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned
Warning 613 System cleaning failed Needles cleaning failed.
on the reagent tray.
Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned
Warning 614 ISE cleaning failed ISE module cleaning failed.
on the reagent tray.
Warning 616 ISE Module busy Stabilization or calibration in progress. -
At least two sample racks with the same
Warning 617 Sample Rack Duplicate Detected Check the ID of sample racks.
barcode.
Warning 618 Database save not OK Database save failed. -
At least two sample racks with the same
Warning 619 Sample Rack Duplicate Detected Check the ID of sample racks.
barcode.
A request, programmed from the Host,
L.I.S. order can't be performed for SID [sample does not comply with the ASTM format.
Warning 620 Check and modify the request from the Host.
ID]: incorrect value [value] in field [field] The fields sample ID, action code or
sample type contain an incorrect value.
Serial number recording on the electronic
Warning 621 Write error on the electronic key -
key has failed.
Serial number on the instrument is
Serial ## on the electronic key is incompatible Check the serial number entered in the System
Warning 622 different from serial number on the
with serial ## on memory Configuration menu.
electronic key.
Warning 623 Access to electronic key is impossible Instrument/key communication failed. -

One of the following sampling alarms is
triggered:
- MISMATCH
[%s1]: Sample [%s2] has been detected instead
Warning 624 - POS_CHANGE See 1.2. Sampling alarms, page 6-38.
of ordered sample [%s2]
- BARCODE_DUPLICATE.
[%s1] = sampling alarm.
[%s2] = rack position or Sample ID.
The sample tube has been moved (for a
Completed Sample [%s] is now detected on
Warning 625 sample that is for validation or validated). Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
Rack.Pos [%s]
[%s] = rack position or Sample ID.
Check the sample needle and clean it if necessary.
The calibration of the sample pressure
Warning 626 Pressure Sample calibration failed Check the sample syringe and hydraulic circuit.
sensor has failed.
Recalibrate the sample pressure sensor.
Check the reagent needle and clean it if necessary.
The calibration of the reagent pressure

Warning 627 Pressure Reagent calibration failed Check the reagent syringe and hydraulic circuit.
sensor has failed.
Recalibrate the reagent pressure sensor.

The database saved on [%s1] has been
restored by [%s2].
Warning 628 Restore database saved on [%s1] by [%s2] -
[%s1] = date and time.
[%s2] = user name.
Spectrophotometer gain reaches limit.
[%s1] = wavelength.
The lamp is dying, it is still operational but you
[%s2] = gain.
Warning 629 will need to change it soon. [%s1 nm / %s2 The lamp will need to be replaced soon.
The gain reaches the limit of the
Gain].
acceptable range (between 95 and 98%)
during the initialization.
The sample rack barcode is not read.
Warning 630 Rack label not read on sector [%s] [%s] = position number on the sample Check the barcode label on the sample rack.
tray.
The sample rack barcode is not read.
Rack label not read on sector [%s1] for SID: [%s1] = position number on the sample
Warning 631 Check the barcode label on the sample rack.
[%s2] tray.
[%s2] = Sample ID.
The sample tube has been removed
during the analysis.
Warning 632 SID [%s1] on position [%s2] no longer displayed Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
[%s1] = Sample ID.
[%s2] = rack position.
Troubleshooting
6 - 29
Error messages
6 - 30
The sample barcode is not read.
Warning 633 SID [%s1] on position [%s2] not read [%s1] = Sample ID. Check the sample barcode label.
[%s2] = rack position.
The system configuration has been
Error messages
restored the [%s1] by [%s2].

Troubleshooting
Warning 634 Restore system configuration the [%s1] by [%s2] -

[%s2] = user name.
The column configuration has been
restored the [%s1] by [%s2].
Warning 635 Restore column configuration the [%s1] by [%s2] -
[%s2] = user name.
The sample rack is not configured.
[%s1] = rack number. Configure the sample rack in the System
Warning 636 Rack [%s1] on sector [%s2] not configured
[%s2] = position number on the sample Configuration menu.
tray.
Not enough solution to perform a
cleaning required from the Customer
Warning 637 Not enough cleaner solution [%s] Configuration menu.
Services menu or during the shutdown.
Rerun the cleaning from the Customer Services
menu or rerun the shutdown.
Results save on the USB flash drive
Warning 638 Unable to save results onto USB stick Check the USB flash drive.
failed.
Warning 639 Saving archive database failed Archive database save failed. -
The sample rack has been moved during
Warning 640 Rack position modified [%s] the analysis. Replace the sample rack to its previous position.
[%s] = rack number.
The sample rack has been moved during
the analysis.
Warning 641 Rack position modified [%s1] for SID: [%s2] Replace the sample rack to its previous position.
[%s1] = rack number.
[%s2] = Sample ID.
The analyses have been performed
Worklist performed with reagent tray temperature though the temperature in the Rerun the analyses after performing the
Warning 642
[temperature] out of the range (acceptable range) refrigerated area of reagent tray was out appropriate controls.
of range.
LIS order cannot be performed. No order There is no O frame (Order) for the P Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 644
information available for PID [patient ID]. frame (Patient). configuration.

LIS order cannot be performed: communication/
There is no P frame (Patient) for the O Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 645 protocol error. Order information for SID [sample
frame (Order). configuration.
ID] could not be processed.
LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no O frame (Order) for the P
Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 646 protocol error. Patient information for PID [patient frame (Patient).
configuration.
ID] could not be processed. Interrupted communication.
LIS order cannot be performed: communication/
protocol error. Information for PID [patient ID] and There is no L frame (Terminator) before Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 647
related orders SID(s): [sample ID] could not be <EOT> (End of Transmission). configuration.
processed.
LIS communication/protocol error. Comment There is no P frame (Patient) or O frame Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 648
information could not be processed. (Order) for the C frame (Comment). configuration.
The Q frame (Query) comes with a P
frame (Patient) or a O frame (Order)

although only the H frame (Header) and
LIS communication/protocol error. Query Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
Warning 649 the L frame (Terminator) are authorized

information could not be processed. configuration.
with the Q frame. At least two Q frames
comes together although only one Q
frame is authorized.
A request, programmed from the Host,
has one or several rejected tests. Each
rejected test contains one of the
following errors.
- "Channel error": The test field does not
L.I.S. order with SID [sample ID] error. The contain a channel number.
Warning 650 following tests are rejected: [test no.1 (reason - "Disabled": The test is disabled on the Check and modify the request from the Host.
no.1), test no.2 (reason no.2), etc]. instrument.
- "Not configured": The test is not
configured on the instrument.
- "Sample type incompatible": The
sample type of the test does not match
the sample.
Position change: Sample [read barcode] was
detected in [rack position of the sample tube], The sample tube has been moved during
Warning 654 Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
but it is expected to be in [rack position of the the analysis.
sample tube]
Troubleshooting
6 - 31
Error messages
6 - 32
Mismatch: Sample [read barcode] was detected For a rack position, the sample ID in the Check the sample.
Warning 655 in [rack position of the sample tube] instead of worklist is different from the read Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the
expected sample [expected barcode] barcode. sample tube to its correct position.
Error messages
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Error messages
1.1.2. Additional information
Special message during the instrument initialization

■ Duringthe database check/compacting, the following message can be displayed:
"Unable to connect to database. Unable to compress or repair database. Do you really want to restore
the database?".
■ Press OK, then the following window is displayed:
This window lists the saved databases (the backup database name and date are displayed).
Each time a new worklist is created, the current database is saved on the instrument. Up to
eight databases are saved and numbered from the most recent to the oldest.
■ Choose a database by clicking the corresponding item.

■ Then, press OK.
■ Thedatabase is then restored and the following warning is triggered:
#628 "Restore database saved on [%s1] by [%s2]".
Modifications carried out after this database backup are lost (calibrations, controls, patient
results, reagent consumption, etc.)

Troubleshooting
Error messages
Alarm #136 "Peripheral busy"

With this alarm, you have a number corresponding to each peripheral.
Please refer to the following table to see which peripheral is in trouble.
# Peripheral
1 Sample arm rotation motion
2 Reagent arm rotation motion
3 Sample arm vertical motion
4 Reagent arm vertical motion
5 Sample syringe motion
6 Reagent syringe motion
7 Sample tray rotation
8 Reagent tray rotation
9 Reaction tray rotation
10 Mixer XY motion
11 Cuvette changer vertical motion
12 Cuvette changer horizontal motion
13 Cuvette motion
14 Temperature regulation
15 Spectrophotometer
16 Pressure sensors
17 ISE module
18 Sample barcode reader
19 Reagent barcode reader
20 Reaction tray temperature
21 Reagent tray temperature
22 Reagent needle temperature
Management of temperature warnings and alarms

This table will help you to understand how the temperature warnings and alarms are triggered.
Time of
Code Type Message Acceptable range
stabilization
The stability was not reached during the instrument initialization.
053 ALARM Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed 37°C (+/- 0.25°C) < 15 min.
054 ALARM Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed 37°C (+/- 1.5°C) < 10 min.***
Refrigerated Compartment Temperature
055 ALARM 4-10°C < 4 hours*
regulation failed
The stability was reached during the instrument initialization but the temperature is now out of range.
123 WARNING Reaction tray temperature exceeds limits 37°C (+/- 0.25°C) < 2 min.
053 ALARM Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed 37°C (+/- 0.5°C) None
124 WARNING Heating needle temperature exceeds limits 37°C (+/- 1.5°C) < 24 sec.
054 ALARM Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed 37°C (+/- 3°C) None
305 WARNING Reagent tray temperature exceeds limits** 4-10°C < 30 min.
Refrigerated Compartment Temperature
055 ALARM 2-12°C None
regulation failed

Troubleshooting
Error messages
* Every hour from the start of the cooling unit, the temperature in the refrigerated area of the
reagent tray (if it is still out of the acceptable range) is checked to ensure that it is decreasing
by at least two degrees per hour. If not, the alarm #055 "Refrigerated Compartment
Temperature regulation failed" is triggered.
** Before performing the analyses, the reagent tray temperature is checked and if it is out of
range, a dialog box is displayed: "The current reagent tray temperature [temperature] is out
of the range (acceptable range). The results can be affected by this malfunction. We
recommend you to perform controls. Do you still want to run analysis?".
*** On each start of the heating needle temperature regulation, a test period of 5 seconds is
performed. This test period consists in heating at its maximum power within 5 seconds, then
checking that the temperature has increased by at least 1.5°C.
If the temperature has increased of 1.5°C or more, then the heating needle temperature
regulation works properly. If not, the alarm #142 "Reagent Needle Temperature Sensor Out
of Order" is triggered and the heating needle temperature regulation is stopped.
Compressor overload alarm

If the "Compressor overload" alarm is triggered for the first time, the warning #340 "Compressor
overload: Refrigeration is stopped temporarily for 10 minutes" is triggered. This means that the cooling
unit has stopped for ten minutes and automatically restarted afterwards.
Once the cooling unit has automatically been restarted:

■ If a second "Compressor overload" alarm is triggered within five minutes, the alarm #147 "Compressor
overload: Refrigeration has been stopped" is triggered. This means that the cooling unit has stopped.

Troubleshooting
Error messages
■ After five minutes, the cooling unit operation is back to normal. If a new "Compressor overload" alarm
is triggered, it is considered as the first one.

Error on the reagent level detection board
This table lists the different errors that can appear on the reagent level detection board and trigger the system alarm #157 "Error card reagent detection
[error %s1: %s2]".
Code Message Error type Action

The reagent level detection Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board.
Defective card board is defective (detected Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic
001
(Autotest) during instrument principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20.
initialization). Replace the reagent level detection board.
Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic
The reagent level detection
Defective card principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20.
002 board or the embedded
(Category) Reinstall the software version.
software version is defective.
Replace the reagent level detection board.
Run a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer to
the instrument user manual).

Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board.
Calibration not No valid calibration of the
004 Disconnect and reconnect J2 connector on the reagent level detection board.

performed reagent level detection.
Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic
principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20.
Replace the reagent level detection board.
Rerun a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer
to the instrument user manual).
Reference measurement on air
005 Reference error Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic
out of range.
principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20.
Replace the reagent needle, the reagent level detection board.
Rerun a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer
007 Calibration failed The calibration has failed. to the instrument user manual).
Replace the reagent needle, the reagent level detection board.
The reagent level detection Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board.
008 Card busy
board is busy. Replace the reagent level detection board.
The reagent level detection
Absent or Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board.
009 board is absent or
incompatible card Replace the reagent level detection board.
incompatible.
Troubleshooting
6 - 37
Error messages
Troubleshooting
Error messages
1.2. Sampling alarms
Sampling alarms are displayed on the Sampling Exception tab of the Test Review menu.
If a sampling alarm is triggered, follow the instructions given in the following table.

Message Error type Action
Insufficient volume (detected by the sample needle).
SPLE_EMPTY Check the sample.
Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted.
Insufficient volume (detected by the sample needle).
Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate
SOLUTION_EMPTY/SN The reagent is then inactivated.
the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.
Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.
Insufficient volume (detected by the reagent needle).
SOLUTION_EMPTY/RN The reagent is then inactivated.
Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the sample pressure sensor).
SAMPLE_FOAM Check the sample.
SOLUTION_FOAM/SN The reagent is then inactivated.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the reagent pressure sensor).
SOLUTION_FOAM/RN The reagent is then inactivated.

Check the sample.
The sample needle may be clogged (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Make sure that the sample needle is not clogged and
SAMPLE_FIBRIN
Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted. clean it if necessary.
Check the sample needle and tubing.
The sample needle may be clogged (detected by the sample pressure sensor).
SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN The reagent is then inactivated.
The reagent needle may be clogged (detected by the reagent pressure Check the reagent needle and tubing.
sensor). Run a reagent pressure calibration.
SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN
The reagent is then inactivated. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate
Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.
The sample may be capped.
SAMPLE_SHOCK Check the sample.
The reagent may be capped.
Check the reagent. Activate the reagent in the
SOLUTION_SHOCK The reagent is then inactivated.
Reagent Configuration menu.
Troubleshooting
6 - 39
Error messages
6 - 40
Check the sample.
For a rack position, the sample ID in the worklist is different from the read
MISMATCH Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the
barcode (Sampling status).
sample tube to its correct position.
INC_SAMPLE_PIPET Check the sample.
Error messages

Troubleshooting

INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN The reagent is then inactivated.
Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the reagent pressure sensor).
INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN The reagent is then inactivated.
REAG_MISSING The reagent is missing. Place the reagent on reagent tray.
DIL_MISSING The diluent is missing. Place the diluent on reagent tray.
CLEANER_MISSING The cleaner is missing. Place the cleaner on reagent tray.
The reagent is inactivated. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration
REAG_LOCKED
It then cannot be used for the pending analyses. menu.
The diluent is inactivated. Activate the diluent in the Reagent Configuration
DIL_LOCKED
The cleaner is inactivated. Activate the cleaner in the Reagent Configuration
CLEANER_LOCKED
The reagent has expired.
REAG_EXPIRED Replace the reagent.
It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.
The diluent has expired.
DIL_EXPIRED Replace the diluent.
The cleaner has expired.
CLEANER_EXPIRED Replace the cleaner.
Calibrator Exp. The calibrator has expired. Replace the calibrator.
Configure the calibrator position in the Calibration/
Pos. not set The calibrator position is not configured.
Control menu.
NOT_ENOUGH_REAG Not enough reagent for the pending analyses. Replace the reagent.
NOT_ENOUGH_CUV Not enough cuvette segments in the load rack. Add new cuvette segments in the load rack.
No Cal. in Memory No current valid calibration for this test (Control). Run a calibration for this test.
Calibrator Miss The calibrator is missing. Place the calibrator.
CTRL_EXPIRED The control has expired. Replace the control.

Configure the control position in the Calibration/
Pos. not set The control position is not configured.
Control menu.
CTRL_MISSING The control is missing. Place the control.
No Cal. in Memory No current valid calibration for this test (Patient sample). Run a calibration for this test.
No Ctrl in Memory No current valid control for this test (Patient sample). Run a control for this test.
Check the sample.
barcode (All status, Position mode).
Check the sample.
barcode (All status, Identification mode).
POS_CHANGE The sample tube has been moved during the analysis. Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
The tests not completed will be performed at the next
INTERRUPT A sampling alarm has interrupted the tests in progress.

start.

Barcode Dup. Two sample tubes having the same barcode are placed on the sample tray. Check and remove one of them if necessary.
Insuf. Diluent Not enough diluent for the pending analyses. Replace the diluent.
Insuf. Cleaner Not enough cleaner for the pending analyses. Replace the cleaner.
ACTIVE_REAGENT_ Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration
No active cassette for this reagent.
ABX_CASSETTE_MISSING menu.
Activate the electrode in the Customer Services
Electrode disabled The electrode is inactivated.
menu.
ACTIVE_CLEANER_ Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration
No active cassette for this cleaner.
ACTIVE_DILUANT_ Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration
No active cassette for this diluent.
RACK_NOT_READ The barcode label of the sample rack is not read. Check the barcode label.
The sample tube has been removed whereas all the tests of the sample are
TUBE_NOT_PRESENT Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
not finished.
TUBE_LABEL_NOT_READ The barcode label of the sample tube is not read. Check the barcode label.
TUBE_DISAPPEAR The sample tube has been removed during the analysis. Replace the sample tube to its previous position.
POSCHANGE_RACK The sample rack has been moved during the analysis. Replace the sample rack to its previous position.
Troubleshooting
6 - 41
Error messages
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting
This guide is intended to provide help in solving problem situations that may appear when using the
instrument.
The actions described in this troubleshooting chapter must be undertaken if all the user troubleshooting
steps, described in your user manual (refer to the "Maintenance and Troubleshooting" chapter), have
been performed.
For any situations that cannot be resolved by using this guide, please contact the International Technical
Support department (ITS).
Services and repairs of the instrument should only be carried out by a fully trained technician.
2.1. Chemistry problem
In all cases, first perform the "Precision test" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention,
page 1.
2.1.1. Repeatability
1. Test T1 or P1 with CV > 1%
Cause Action
Worn syringe plunger tips. Change the syringe plunger tips.
Check the mixer paddle rotation, coupling, position.
Improper mixing.
Check the mixer XY motion.
Clean the hydraulic system with bleach solution.
Defective manifold, valves V1 or V2.
Change the manifold block.
Check the straw position into the water tank.
Bubbles in the pipetting system. Check the airtightness of the hydraulic system.
Change the manifold block, water pump.
Bubbles clung to the syringe plunger tips. Change the syringe plunger tips.
Prime the hydraulic system.
Clogged sample needle.
Change the sample needle.
Bubbles on the top of sample. Remove the bubbles.
Lamp instability. Change the lamp.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2. Test T1 or P1 with CV ≤ 1% but absorbance values out of the acceptable range
Cause Action
Use new ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution or ABX Pentra
Contaminated or expired solution.
Precitest Solution, use fresh distilled water on the rack.
Manually dilute the control solution and measure the
absorbance value in the Spectro menu.
- Test T1: 2.5 µL of ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution + 587.5 µL
of distilled water
Defect on the spectrophotometer or
- Test P1: 3 µL of ABX Pentra Precitest Solution + 292 µL of
pipetting.
distilled water
If the absorbance value x 1000 is in the acceptable range,
then there is a defect on the pipetting. Otherwise, check the
spectrophotometer.
2.1.2. Blank out of range
Cause Action
Check the distilled water integrity, resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm
Contaminated distilled water and tubing.
Perform the decontamination procedure.
Contaminated or expired reagent. Use fresh reagent.
Use of cuvette segments non-approved
Use HORIBA Medical approved cuvette segments.
by HORIBA Medical.
Re-used cuvette segments. Cuvette segments are designed for single use only.
2.1.3. Calibration factor out of range
Cause Action
Check the distilled water integrity, resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm
Contaminated distilled water and tubing.
Perform the decontamination procedure.
Contaminated or expired calibrator,
Use fresh calibrator, reagent.
reagent.
Bubbles/foam on the top of reagent (on
Remove the bubbles/foam.
cassette or reagent rack).
For kinetic tests, temperature regulation Check the reaction tray temperature regulation.
problem. Change the reaction tray temperature sensor.
For user channels, not suitable calibration
factor limits in the application Redefine the calibration factor limits.
configuration.
2.1.4. Control out of range
Cause Action
Error in the confidence range
Check the configured values with the corresponding annex.
configuration.
Recalibrate with fresh calibrator.
Expired calibration, reagent.
Replace the reagent and recalibrate.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2.2. Windows and computer error
Error Action
Shut down and restart the computer. Perform a Checkdisk.
Purge the Rs_Data and Bugs folders.
General exception
If the error continues to appear, reinstall the software
version.
Boot disk failure Reinstall the Windows master and the software version.
2.3. Cooling unit
2.3.1. Primary checking

■ The warning #340 is not necessarily a cooling unit defect. You should wait 10 minutes to let the
compressor cool down the temperature.
■ Check the compatibility of the voltage and frequency with the main power supply (see Section 8:
Exploded views, 24. Cooling unit, page 8-40).
■ Make sure that the laboratory temperature is between +15°C and +32°C.
■ Check the fuses (see Section 8: Exploded views, 24. Cooling unit, page 8-40).
■ Make sure that the temperature target is +6°C (Services > Diagnostics > Heating).
■ The minimum software version required for ABX Pentra 400 is 5.0.6.
No minimum software version required for Pentra C400.
■ The cooling unit maintenances have been performed:
RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 4. Cooling unit, page 3
RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2.3.2. Diagnostic sequence (warning #305, alarms #055 and #147)

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
CU401 fan is running?
■ Checkif there is air flow at the back of the

CU401. AIR FLOW
Regulation is functioning well?
"CLAC"
■ From the Heating menu (Services >
Diagnostics > Heating), press Start and
check by ear if the solenoid valve has
switched ("CLAC").
Cable defective?
■ Check the cable conductivity with an ohmmeter (see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 8.2.
DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE, page 4-37).
Control board defective?

■ Check the voltage on the control board (see Section 3: Technology, 3.2.3. Cooling unit electric
diagram, page 3-18).

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
5 V on PIN 3 of CU401 connector?
■ From the Heating menu (Services >

Diagnostics > Heating), press Stop and
then Start.
■ Check the voltage of the PIN 3 of the
CU401 connector (see Section 4: Electric
and electronic principles, 8.2. DAC034A
(1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE,
page 4-37).
Pump is running?
■ Checkif the pump is running: the liquid is

moving in the tank.
Liquid throughput OK?
■ Disconnect the IN tubing from the CU401

and put it above the tank in order to make
sure that the liquid throughput is correct.
Tubing pinched or clogged?

■ Check if the cooling liquid tubing is pinched or unclog the circuit (see Section 3: Technology, 2.3.
Cooling system diagram, page 3-11).

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Temperature sensor and fans?
■ Check if the reagent tray fans are working.

■ Check with an external temperature probe
if the temperature inside the reagent tray is
the same than the temperature displayed in
the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics
> Heating).
2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114?
This troubleshooting guide is intended to help you in solving problems of intermittent alarms #66 or
#114: "Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent hydraulic system". We recommend performing the
following steps in the indicated sequence:
■ 2.4.1. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration, page 6-48
■ 2.4.2. Improving the hydraulic system airtightness, page 6-50
■ 2.4.3. Checking the sample needle throughput, page 6-52
■ 2.4.4. Checking the water pump pressure, page 6-52
■ 2.4.5. Replacing the pressure sensors and the pressure board, page 6-52
2.4.1. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration
2.4.1.1. To activate the pressure sensors
1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser.

2. Make sure that the reagent and sample pressure sensors are activated.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Both pressure sensors must be activated. Otherwise, erroneous test results could occur.
2.4.1.2. To configure the pressure sensors
1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Pressure.

2. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the sample pressure sensor and
modify them if necessary.
3. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the reagent pressure sensor and

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2.4.1.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors
1. Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.

2. Press Reagent pressure calibration and wait until the calibration is finished.
3. Press Sample pressure calibration and wait until the calibration is finished.
2.4.2. Improving the hydraulic system airtightness
1. Remove the heat shrink tape (A).

Disconnect the tubing from the water
straw. Cut the tubing and reconnect it.
Instead of doing that, you can replace the
water straw assy ref. XBA568F
(1209114568).

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2. Check the inner water connection on the

water / waste connection assembly (B).
3. Disconnect the tubing from the water

pump inlet (C). Cut the tubing, add a tube
clamp ref. 3027030 (1223027030),
reconnect the tubing and tighten the tube
clamp.
4. Make sure that the tube clamp at the
water pump outlet (D) is well-tightened.
5. Remove the collar ref. EAJ003A

(1202261003) and disconnect the tubing
from the internal water tank inlet (E). Cut E
the tubing, add a tube clamp ref.
3027030 (1223027030), reconnect the
tubing and tighten the tube clamp.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
6- If necessary, replace the filter located on

the right-hand side, at the back of the
instrument. Observe the fitting direction
indicated by the arrow. Make sure that
both tube clamps are well-tightened.
7. Make sure that no air bubbles are visible in the syringes and check for leaks.
In case of problem, check the syringe plunger tips, the syringes and the manifold assembly (V1-V2).
If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.3. Checking the sample needle
throughput, page 6-52.
2.4.3. Checking the sample needle throughput

Refer to the "RAS378: 6 month maintenance" procedure to check the sample needle throughput.
In case of problem, check the sample needle (clogged, bent) and the manifold assembly (V1-V2).
If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.4. Checking the water pump pressure,
page 6-52.
2.4.4. Checking the water pump pressure

Refer to the "RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement" procedure to check the water pump
pressure (2.1 bars +/- 0.1).
In case of problem, check the filter and the water pump.
If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.5. Replacing the pressure sensors and
the pressure board, page 6-52.
2.4.5. Replacing the pressure sensors and the pressure board

Refer to the "RAS442: Pressure sensors" procedure to replace the pressure sensors and the pressure
board, adjust the pressure board voltage, and then, activate, configure and calibrate the pressure
sensors.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2.5. Other
2.5.1. Rejected cuvette segments
Cause Action
Use of cuvette segments non-approved
Use HORIBA Medical approved cuvette segments.
by HORIBA Medical.
Re-used cuvette segments. Cuvette segments are designed for single use only.
Check the lamp voltage (5.6 V).
Lamp instability.
Change the lamp.
Dirty optical bench lenses. Clean the optical bench lenses.
2.5.2. Not read or misread barcode
Cause Action
Bad adjustment of the barcode reader. Readjust the barcode reader.
Bad barcode label. Check the barcode label with the supplier.
2.5.3. No sound
Cause Action
Incompatible software version. Install the latest higher software version.
Incompatible hardware. Install the KIT, SOUND+USB UPDATE KIT P400.
Check the loudspeaker connectors.
Defective loudspeaker.
Change the loudspeaker.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Section 7: ISE module
1. ISE module description ................................................................................ 7 - 2

1.1. Measuring principle ...................................................................................................................7 - 2
1.2. Cycles description .....................................................................................................................7 - 6
1.3. ISE module status description .................................................................................................7 - 21
1.4. ISE module hydraulic diagram .................................................................................................7 - 22
1.5. Electric and electronic principles .............................................................................................7 - 24
1.6. ISE software description ..........................................................................................................7 - 28
1.7. Additional information ..............................................................................................................7 - 36
2. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7 - 38
3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 7 - 42
3.1. Maintenance by customers .....................................................................................................7 - 42
3.2. ISE 6 month maintenance ........................................................................................................7 - 42
3.3. ISE yearly maintenance ...........................................................................................................7 - 42
3.4. ISE procedure list ....................................................................................................................7 - 43
3.5. ISE maintenance check up summary ......................................................................................7 - 43
RAS441: ISE module installation
RAS388: ISE module maintenance
RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention
RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement
RAS539: Dummy PENTRA software use
RAS540: ISE module software version installation

ISE module
ISE module description
1. ISE module description
1.1. Measuring principle
1.1.1. Measurement description

The ISE module is designed to determine sodium, potassium and chloride concentrations in serum,
plasma or urine samples.
It uses three Ion Selective Electrodes (ISE) for the measurement of sodium, potassium and chloride
concentrations and one reference electrode.
The measurement principle is based on the interaction between moveable free ions in a sample solution
and an active sensing unit (ion selective sensing electrode).
An ion-selective membrane separates the sample solution, where the electrolyte concentration is
unknown, from the electrode electrolyte, where the concentration is known.
Potentiometry principle
Voltage measurement
Reference Selective electrode

Electrode (for the ion measured)
Electrolyte
(known concentration) Selective membrane
- -
+ + +
+ -
- - -
- + -
-
+ + + +
- + +
-
The membrane itself consists of a specific type of material which can react with one type of ions.
Each ion selective electrode is equipped with a different type of membrane:

■ Sodium electrode: a glass membrane selective to Na+ ions.
■ Potassium electrode: a PVC crown ether membrane which is selective to K+ ions.
■ Chloride electrode: a plastic membrane electrode selective to Cl- ions.
The four electrodes are compact and located in a Faraday cage to minimize the influence of electro-
magnetic fields.
This electrode layout allows a simultaneous measurement of the Na+, K+ and Cl- concentration.
The electrodes are supplied ready for use and no assembly is required.

ISE module
Reference electrode Sodium electrode
Sealing plug Sealing plug

O-ring O-ring
Electrode
Electrode
Electrolyte
Electrolyte
Electrode body
Electrode body
Reference tube
Waste tube Na tube with

O-ring glass membrane
Sealing-ring
Potassium electrode Chloride electrode
Sealing plug
Sealing plug
O-ring
O-ring
Electrode
Electrode
Electrolyte
Electrolyte
Electrode body
Electrode body
PVC crown
ether membrane
Plastic membrane
O-ring
O-ring
The electrode membrane can bind a selective type of ions whereby a potential change appears at the
membrane/sample boundary.
Membrane
Ion selective
membrane
+ + + + +
+
+ +
Δ mV + + +
+
+ + +
+ + Sample +

ISE module
In order to measure this potential change, a reference electrode with a fixed potential is immersed in the
same solution. The potential of the reference electrode is kept fixed and constant, by filling it with an
electrolyte that has a constant concentration.
Sodium, potassium and chloride are measured on:

■ undiluted
serum and plasma samples: 60 µL of sample is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL is
dispensed into the ISE module sample cup.
■ dilutedurine samples: 20 µL of sample is pipetted by the sample needle and 10 µL is dispensed and
diluted with 60 µL of low standard directly into the ISE module sample cup.
A syringe is used to transport the required solution through the electrodes.

The sample flows through the air sensor to reach the ISE block.
The air detection by air sensor indicates the end of sample transfer from the sample cup to the ISE block.
The reference solution flows through the reference electrode and merges with the sample downstream
of the ISE block.
The electrical potential is measured between each ion selective electrode and the reference electrode.
This measured potential is proportional to the ion concentration.
STD1
STD2
Low Waste Ref. High
Syringe 1 Syringe 2
VOLTMETER
Air sensor
Ref Na Cl K
REF
Cup
The potential values ascertained are amplified, digitized and finally sent via the RS232C serial interface
to the instrument.

ISE module
1.1.2. Calibration
The calculation of the ion concentration in a sample solution is derivated from a calibration curve.
When carrying out a calibration, the ion selective electrodes and the reference electrode are brought in
contact with a series of solutions (standards) with known concentration.
The voltages are recorded. The concentration of each standard is plotted against the measured voltage
(in millivolts) on semi-logarithmic paper. The straight line drawn through these points is called a
calibration curve.
mV K+ = 37 to 67 mv/dec
K+
Cl-
Na = 38 to 65 mv/dec
Na
Cl- = -53 to -28 mv/dec
CONCENTRATION
Std1 Std1 Std1 Std2 Std2 Std2
The electrical potential measured between these electrodes is proportional to the concentration of the
specific ion, and can be described by the Nernst equation:
E = E0 + S * log ai
where:
E: Measured potential between ion selective electrode and reference electrode
E0: Standard potential of electrode assembly
S: Electrode slope (Nernst factor)
ai: Activity of measured ion
The S slopes of the three electrodes are determined with two standard solutions of known
concentration.
The values are stored by the on board microprocessor system.

ISE module
1.2. Cycles description
This chapter describes the ISE module cycles:

■ Global initialization, page 7-7
■ Initialization of the flow system, page 7-7
■ Two point calibration, page 7-8
■ One point calibration, page 7-10
■ Serum measurement, page 7-11
■ Urine measurement, page 7-13
■ Priming of the flow system, page 7-14
■ Stabilization of flow system, page 7-15
■ Draining, page 7-16
■ Cleaning, page 7-16
■ Wake up, page 7-17
■ Keep ready, page 7-17
■ Ready, page 7-18
■ Activation, page 7-18
■ Shut down, page 7-19
■ Electrode replacement, page 7-19
■ Standard 1 reagent check, page 7-19
■ Standard 2 reagent check, page 7-20
■ Reference reagent check, page 7-20
■ LB sensor check, page 7-21
The cycles described on the following pages correspond to the ISE software version V1.53
for the ABX Pentra 400 or V2.00 for the Pentra C400.
Caption
Item Definition
Std1 ABX Pentra Standard 1, ref. A11A01717
Std2 ABX Pentra Standard 2, ref. A11A01718
R ABX Pentra Reference 280 mL, ref. A11A01901
S1Mx Measured potential of Standard 1
S2Mx Measured potential of Standard 2
RM Measured potential of Reference solution
CSx Known concentration of Standard
SM Measured concentration of sample (serum, plasma)
UM Measured concentration of diluted sample (urine + Standard 1)
S:x ISE module status at the beginning and at the end of the cycle
W:x Warning

ISE module
Global initialization
mV
Initialization of
Two point calibration
flow system
Std1/Std2/R Std1/Std2
1 2
t
S:0,1,2,3,4,5,6 S:6
1. The ISE module initializes the flow system (see Initialization of the flow system, page 7-7).
2. A two point calibration is run (see Two point calibration, page 7-8).
Initialization of the flow system
mV Reagent detection
Rinsing
(x4) Rinsing
Rinsing Std2 Std2

(x4)
R
Reagent detection
+ Keep condition in electrode
Rinsing
(x6) Rinsing Rinsing
Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3 4 5 6 t
S:3,4,5,6 S:5
1. Rinsing with Reference (4 times): Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then
goes to waste.
2. Rinsing with Standard 2 (4 times): Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through
the electrode then goes to waste.

ISE module
4. Rinsing with Standard 2: Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, detected by the LB sensor
then goes to waste.
During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 2 is too much or not enough, warning #327 or #330
is triggered. The cycle is stopped.
5. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the
electrode then goes to waste.
6. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the
electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.
Two point calibration

A two point calibration determines a slope and an offset from a high and low solution with known
concentrations. See Standards concentration, page 7-37.
The slope and the offset are used to determine the patient sample concentration.
Frequency: every 2 hours.
mV
W:338
S2M1
W:335
W:337 W:338 W:337

S1M2
S1M2 X6 max. S1M3 S1M3
S1M1 X6 max. Rinsing Rinsing X6 max.
Rinsing S1M3
Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t
S:4,5,6 3 sec. S:6 or 4 (if 4 at the beginning)
3 sec.
1. First measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1):

- Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the
aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.
- The potential of Standard 1 is measured.
If the potential of S1M1 is out of range (see Range of normal values (Standard 1) triggering warning
#336, page 7-37), warning #336 is triggered and the cycle is stopped.
- Standard 1 goes to waste.

ISE module
2. Second measurement of Standard 1 (S1M2):

- A second measurement of Standard 1 potential is run and compared with the first measurement
(S1M1).
If the difference in potential between S1M1 and S1M2 is out of range (see Repeatability normal range
(Standard 1) triggering warning #337, page 7-37), S1M2 is rerun and the updated S1M2 is compared
with S1M1 again. S1M2 is rerun maximum 6 times. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered
and the cycle is stopped.

is triggered.
The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Two point calibration rescue cycle, page 7-10).
If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338
("Calibration Error #1") is triggered.
4. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the sample cup, passes through the electrode
then goes to waste.
5. Third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3):

- A third measurement of Standard 1 potential is run and compared with the Standard 2
measurement (S2M1).
If the difference in potential between S2M1 and S1M3 is out of range (see Sensitivity normal range
(difference between Standard 1 and Standard 2) triggering warning #335, page 7-37), warning #335
is triggered and the rescue cycle is run (see Two point calibration rescue cycle, page 7-10). Then, the
cycle is stopped.
If the difference in potential between S1M2 and S1M3 is ≥ 0.40 mV, S1M3 is rerun and the updated
S1M3 is compared with S1M2 again. S1M3 is rerun maximum 6 times. If it is more than 6 times,
warning #337 is triggered.
The slope in sensitive electrode is calculated from the values of the Standard 2 measurement (S2M1)
and the third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3):
Slope = (S2M1-S1M3)/log ( CS2 )

CS1
Where:
- S2M1 is the measured potential of Standard 2
- S1M3 is the measured potential of Standard 1
- CS2 is the known concentration of Standard 2
6. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the sample cup, passes through the electrode
then goes to waste.

ISE module
electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).
8. Third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3): this measurement is rerun to check the correct functioning
of the valves. The S1M3 is rerun maximum 6 times.
Two point calibration rescue cycle
mV
Reagent detection Keep condition in electrode
Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing

Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3
t
electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste.
One point calibration

A one point calibration monitors the electrodes stability by passing Standard 1 through the electrode.
Frequency: every 15 minutes except when patient or control samples have to be run.
mV
W:338
Reagent
W:337
detection Keep condition in electrode
S1M2
S1M X6 max.
Rinsing S1M1 Rinsing
Std1 Std1
1 2 3
t
S:4,5,6 3 sec. S:identical to the initial status

ISE module

If the difference in potential between S1M1 and the previous S1M is out of range (see Repeatability
normal range (Standard 1) triggering warning #337, page 7-37), a second measurement of Standard
1 is run (S1M2) and the updated S1M2 is compared with S1M1. S1M2 is run maximum 6 times. If it
is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.
Serum measurement
mV
W:338
SM
Serum/Plasma
(50 µL)
Reagent detection
+ Keep condition
in electrode
W:338
Rinsing S1M1
Std1 Std1
1 2 3
t
S:6 3 sec. 3 sec.
S:6
1. Sample measurement:
- 60 µL of sample (serum, plasma) is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL is dispensed into the
ISE sample cup.
- The sample is aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.
During liquid check by the LB sensor, if sample is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is
triggered.
The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Serum measurement rescue cycle, page 7-12).
- The sample concentration is measured.
("ISE Error") is triggered.
- Sample goes to waste.

ISE module
3. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1):

The sample concentration is calculated from the values of the measured concentration of sample
(SM), the measured potential of Standard 1 (S1M) and the slope obtained in the two point calibration.
Dilution concentration = CS1 x 10^((SM-S1M)/Slope)
Where:
- SM is the measured concentration of sample
- S1M is the measured potential of Standard 1
- Slope comes from the two point calibration
- Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).
Serum measurement rescue cycle
mV
Reagent detection W:337

+ Keep condition
in electrode S1M2
S1M X6 max.
S1M
1
t
1. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M):
If the difference in potential between the current S1M and the previous S1M is ≥ 0.40 mV, the rescue
cycle is rerun (max. 6 times) after updating the previous S1M to the current S1M. If it is more than 6
times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.

ISE module
Urine measurement
mV
W:338
UM
Urine (10 µL)
+
Std1 (60 µL)
Reagent detection
W:338
Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing S1M1
Std1 Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3 4 5 6
t
S:6 3 sec. 3 sec.
S:6
2. Sample measurement:
- 60 µL of Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup. An air bubble is created (LV6
commutation and small aspiration by syringe 1). Then, LV6 commutes and Standard 1 is dispensed
(through the top connector) into the ISE sample cup. This cycle will avoid contamination between
Standard 1 and mixing solution.
- 20 µL of sample (urine) is pipetted by the sample needle. 10 µL is dispensed into the ISE sample
cup and diluted with Standard 1.
- The sample is aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.
triggered.
The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Urine measurement rescue cycle, page 7-14).
- The sample concentration is measured.
- Sample goes to waste.
3. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup (from the LV6- inlet 3 to
the middle inlet of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste.
the upper inlet at the back of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste.
the middle inlet of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

ISE module
6. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1):

The sample concentration is calculated from the values of the measured concentration of diluted
sample (UM), the measured potential of Standard 1 (S1M) and the slope obtained in the two point
calibration.
Dilution concentration = CS1 x 10^((UM-S1M)/Slope)
then,
Concentration = 7 x Dilution concentration - 6 x S1M
Where:
- UM is the measured concentration of the diluted sample
- S1M is the measured potential of Standard 1
- Slope obtained from the two point calibration
Urine measurement rescue cycle
mV
Reagent detection W:337

+ Keep condition
in electrode S1M2
S1M X6 max.
S1M
1
t
If the difference in potential between the current S1M and the previous S1M is ≥ 0.40 mV, the rescue
cycle is rerun (max. 6 times) after updating the previous S1M to the current S1M. If it is more than 6
times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.
Priming of the flow system

The priming of the flow system cycle is the same as the initialization of the flow system (see Initialization
of the flow system, page 7-7). The only difference is that the ISE module status is at the beginning 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 and at the end identical to the initial status.

ISE module
Stabilization of flow system
mV
Rinsing Rinsing
R Std2
Reagent detection
Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode
Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing

Std1 Std1 Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
t
S:4,5,6 S:5
1. Rinsing with Reference: Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then goes to
waste.
electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.

ISE module
Draining
mV
Rinsing
(x6)
Rinsing Std2
(x4)
R
Rinsing
(x6)
Std1
1 2 3
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3
1. Rinsing Reference (4 times): Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then goes to
waste.
3. Rinsing wih Standard 1 (6 times): Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through
Cleaning
mV
Reagent detection
Cleaning twice
+ Waste
Rinsing
Cleaning
solution Std2
(80 µL)
Reagent detection
+ Keep condition in electrode 4 times
Rinsing
Std1
1 2 3
t
S:4,5,6 S:identical to the initial status
1. Cleaning with cleaning solution: 80 µL of cleaning solution is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then
aspirated in the electrode for cleaning. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Then, it
goes to waste.
During liquid check by the LB sensor, if the cleaning solution is too much or not enough, warning
#331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to step 2.

ISE module
2. Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition).
The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Then, it goes to waste. (twice)
3. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition).
The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. (4 times)
Wake up
mV
Stabilization of
flow system Two point calibration
R/Std2/Std1 Std1/Std2
1 2
t
S:4,5,6 S:6
1. The ISE module stabilizes the flow system (see Stabilization of flow system, page 7-15).
2. A two point calibration is run (see Two point calibration, page 7-8).
Keep ready
When the instrument is shut down and to keep the electrodes stability, the ISE module runs the "Keep
ready" cycle to ensure reagent transfer at electrodes level.
Frequency: every 15 minutes (can be modified by the user, see ISE calibration setting, page 7-30).
mV
Rinsing Rinsing
Std1 Std1
1 2
t
S:4,5,6 S:4

ISE module
Ready
When the instrument is in operation and to keep the electrodes stability, the ISE module runs the
"Ready" cycle to ensure reagent transfer at electrodes level.
Frequency: every 5 minutes (can be modified by the user, see ISE calibration setting, page 7-30).
mV
Rinsing Rinsing
Std1 Std1
1 2
t
S:6 S:6
Activation
The activation cycle consists in running one serum or plasma sample to condition electrodes.
mV
Detection
+ Waste
Sample
(50 µL)
Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing

Std1 Std1 Std1
1 2 3 4
t
S:4,5,6 S:identical to initial status

ISE module
1. 60 µL of sample (serum, plasma) is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL of serum or plasma
sample is dispensed into the ISE sample cup. Sample is detected by the LB sensor, stays in the
electrode (keep condition) then goes to waste.
triggered. The cycle is skipped to step 2.
3. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the
aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste.
Shut down
mV Keep condition in electrode

Rinsing
R
Rinsing
Std1
1 2
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3
1. Rinsing with Reference: Reference solution passes through Reference electrode then goes to waste.
Electrode replacement
mV
Waste
Std1
1
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:Not applicable
1. Standard 1, present in electrode, goes to waste.
Standard 1 reagent check
mV
S1M
1
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4

ISE module

Standard 2 reagent check
mV
S2M
1
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4

Reference reagent check
mV
RM
1
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4
1. Measurement of Reference (RM):

- Reference solution is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated into the reference
electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor.
During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Reference is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334
- The potential of Reference solution is measured.

ISE module
LB sensor check
mV
LB sensor detection
Std1
1
t
S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4
1. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the
If the LB Sensor cannot detect "ON" or "OFF", warning #322 or #325 is triggered.
1.3. ISE module status description
The ISE module exists in seven different statuses. While the instrument is running, the status of the ISE
module is displayed in the ISE tab. Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE.
The status from 0 to 6 of the ISE module are described in the following table:
Code Description
0 Module not initialized
1 Module initialized
2 Module configured
3 Mechanical part initialized
4 Module sleeping
5 Fluidic part initialized
6 Module calibrated
In correct working order, the ISE module evolves sequentially from status 0 to 6, thus from the instrument
start up (Power ON) to the calibrated module achievement, ready for the analyses.

ISE module
1.4. ISE module hydraulic diagram
This diagram is available in the form of a sticker to be stuck on the inside of the ISE cover:
STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC HAX0271 (1207230271).
Mark on diagram P/n Designation Sales unit

1.5/2.5 EAB015A (1202211015) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 Pack of 5
ISOLATOR XCA167A (1209121167) CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) 1

ISE module

Air sensor GBM0746 (3014029452) FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE 1
Na+ A11A01738 ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E 1
Cl- A11A01739 ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E 1
K+ A11A01740 ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E 1
Ref A11A01741 ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E 1
XBA635AS (1209119635) VALVE, ISE VALVE
LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4 1
XBA544C (1209113544) VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY
EBA018A (1202351018) VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE
LV5, LV6 EBA017A (1202351017) VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE 1
XBA733AS (1209119733) VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY
E1 EAB013A (1202211013) FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR 1
GBM1266 (1203601266) FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML 1
GBM0751 (1203600751) FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW 1

- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

ISE module
1.5. Electric and electronic principles
1.5.1. ISE mother board XAA492CS (1209109492)
To ISE syringe motor 1/150 sensor

To ISE syringe motor 1/75 sensor
To ISE preampli board
To ISE syringe motor 1/150
To Valve block To ISE syringe motor 1/75
Fuse
To power supply
To the analyzer
To ISE software board
1.5.2. ISE preampli board XAA496C (3200092606)
To Reference electrode
TP3
To Reference electrode
To Na electrode To ISE mother board
To Cl electrode TP2
To K electrode

ISE module
1.5.3. ISE software board
ISE software board CPU-03N XAA497E (3200448459) for ABX Pentra 400 only
ISE software board CPU-07N XAA646A (3200375620) for Pentra C400 only

ISE module
1.5.4. Electric circuit configuration
ISE preampli board ISE mother board

ISE software board
LP-PRE-01 LP-CNT-03
CPU-03N (P400) /
CPU-07N (PC400)
Reference
Amplifier RS232
electrode Peripheral
control circuit
Na
Amplifier RS-232C-2
electrode
MPX Signal
AD converter isolator
Cl
electrode Amplifier
Liquid Valve Liquid Valve

bulb unit
drive circuit bulb unit
K
electrode Amplifier
Syringe-1
Syringe-1
drive circuit
LB
sensor Amplifier
Syringe-2
Syringe-2
drive circuit
(DC 5 V)
(DC 5 V) DC/DC
converter
Power supply
(DC24V)
DC/DC
converter

ISE mother board
ISE software board

ISE syringe motor 1/150
ISE syringe motor 1/150 sensor
ISE syringe motor 1/75

To the
analyzer

ISE syringe motor 1/75 sensor
1.5.5. ISE module wiring diagram
Valves
To power
supply
Valves
ISE preampli board

Electrodes
ISE module
7 - 27
ISE module
1.6. ISE software description
To minimize environmental interferences, the ISE module cover must always be closed during
ISE module operation.
1.6.1. ISE module status presentation

The ISE Module Status button, located on the main menu, allows the user to check the ISE module
status.
ABX Pentra 400
ISE Module
Status button
Pentra C400
ISE Module
Status button

ISE module
This button aspect changes according to the ISE module status:
ISE module is available and calibrations are finished.
ISE module is busy (calibration, cleaning, measurement, etc.).
Error on calibrations. A calibration needs to be ordered. See ISE calibration screens,

page 7-29.
Error on ISE module (mechanical, fluidic, etc.). A global initialization needs to be

ordered. See ISE customer services screen, page 7-30.
ISE module not initialized. ISE module needs to be activated. See ISE customer
services screen, page 7-30.
1.6.2. ISE customer screens
ISE calibration screens

■ ISE calibration
Press the ISE Module Status button to open the ISE module status screen.
The ISE module status screen displays the last results of chloride, potassium and sodium calibrations.
The Calibrate button allows the user to perform a 2-point calibration.
To know the expected values of the slope and the sensitivity for each electrode, refer to 1.7.2. NA, K, CL
normal range, page 7-37.

ISE module
■ ISE calibration setting

The ISE Calibration tab allows the user to configure the 2-point and 1-point calibrations frequency as
well as the Keep ready and Ready functions.
Go to Calibration > Control > ISE Calibration.
For more detailed information, refer to the "Calibration and Control Configuration" chapter of your user
manual.
ISE customer services screen

The ISE tab allows the user to activate electrodes, stop ISE cycle, change electrodes, run a fluidic
initialization, stabilize fluidic system, prime the flow system, drain the reagents, run a global initalization,
run a mechanical initialization, shut down the ISE module, run cleaning cycles (etching, cleaning) and
ISE module activation.
Moreover, the ISE tab allows the user to perform ISE automatic maintenance.
Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE.
A B
Fig.7-1: ISE tab

ISE module
■ Activated electrode (Fig.7-1-A):

Activates/inactivates the three electrodes: Chloride, Potassium, Sodium.
If the check box is selected, the electrode is activated.
An electrode cannot be inactivated if there are ISE tests for this electrode in the worklist or
for validation.
■ Stop ISE cycle:

Stops the ISE module immediately (without user confirmation).
Then, the user must initialize the ISE module by pressing the Global Initialization key.
The Stop ISE cycle key is enabled only if the ISE module is occupied.
■ Change electrode:
Helps the user to replace an electrode.
The ISE module drains the reagents from the electrodes to allow the user to replace the electrode.
The ISE module will be stabilized in status 4.
The Change electrode key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3.
■ Fluidic Initialization:
Primes the reagents into the fluidic system.
This function should be used after the ISE reagents replacement or an ISE shutdown (complete stop of
the ISE module) exceeding three days.
The Fluidic Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3.
■ Stabilization of Fluidic system:

Rinses the fluidic system out.
This function should be used to rinse the fluidic system out or eliminate air bubbles in the fluidic system.
The Stabilization of Fluidic system key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status
≥ 4.
■ Prime flow system:

Primes the reagents into the fluidic system.
This function should be used to prime the reagents into the fluidic system at the ISE module installation.
The Prime flow system key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 5.
■ Drain:
Drains the reagents from the fluidic system.
This function should be used for an ISE shutdown (complete stop of the ISE module) exceeding three
days or the system transportation.
The Drain key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3.
■ Global Initialization:
Initializes the ISE module.
The Global Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied.
■ Mechanical Initialization:
Checks the syringe movement and sets the syringes to their initial position.
The Mechanical Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 2.

ISE module
■ Shutdown:
ISE shutdown (complete stop of the ISE module) exceeding three days. See 1.6.3. ISE module
shutdown, page 7-32.
Fills the electrodes with low standard and air to prevent the contamination of the reference solution.
The Shutdown key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3.
■ ISE cleaning Solution (Fig.7-1-B):

Allows the user to perform etching and cleaning of the ISE module.
■ ISE activation (Fig.7-1-C):

Runs one serum or plasma sample to condition the electrodes. This function should be used after the
ISE module cleaning and/or etching.
This function is disabled if the ISE module is occupied.
■ ISE automatic maintenance (Fig.7-1-D):

Helps the user to perform the ISE module weekly maintenance (cleaning, etching, activation and 2-point
calibration).
For more detailed information, please refer to the instrument user manual.
■ ISE Status window (Fig.7-1-E):

Displays the ISE status. See 1.3. ISE module status description, page 7-21.
1.6.3. ISE module shutdown
Shutdown within 3 days
ISE reagents running dry can damage the electrodes.

Ensure that there is always enough ISE reagents to perform the ISE module calibrations.
■ Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE.
■ First,make sure that the ISE module status

is ≥ 3 (A).
If not, press Global Initialization (B).
■ Press Shutdown (C).
■ Switch the instrument off.
B
C A

ISE module
Shutdown over 3 days

■ First,make sure that the ISE module status

is ≥ 3 (A).
If not, press Global Initialization (B).
■ Remove the straws from the reagent bottles
and wrap them in absorbent paper.
■ Close the reagent bottles with caps.
B
After opening, ISE reagents are stable for one month if stored at 5-30°C and protected from
light.
■ Press Drain (C).

■ Plunge the straws into a distilled water
bottle and press Fluidic Initialization (D).
D
■ Remove the straws from the distilled water
bottle and wrap them in absorbent paper.
■ Press Drain (C). C

■ Remove the electrodes and the air sensor from the cage.
- For the sodium, chloride and potassium electrodes as well as for the air sensor, ensure there is no
liquid in the inner tube.
- For the reference electrode, connect a tubing filled with reference solution between the two
connectors and seal the inner tube with a cellophane tape.
Store the electrodes in a dry and clean area in their original packaging.

ISE module
Electrodes reinstallation after a shutdown over 3 days

■ Reinstall the electrodes and the air sensor into the cage.
- For the reference electrode, disconnect the tubing between the two connectors and remove the
cellophane tape from the inner tube.
- For all electrodes, make sure that the O-ring is well-positioned on one side of the electrode and make
sure that the electrode is clean.
- Install the electrodes.
■ Close the ISE door and tighten the screw.
■ Plunge the straws into the reagent bottles.
■ Switch the instrument on.
1.6.4. Diagnostics screen

The ISE diagnostics screen allows you to:
■ Run a global check, a global initialization, a data initialization, a mechanical initialization.
■ Calibrate electrodes low and high levels.
■ Check the sample detection, the syringes 1 and 2, the valves, the LB sensor.
■ Clean the ISE module.
■ Keep ready.
■ Prime the flow system.
■ Purge the ISE module.
Go to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.
To use those functions, select the corresponding option and press Check.
If the function is correct, the corresponding light becomes green.
■ Global Check:
Checks all the elements of the ISE module for example the mechanical movement of the syringes and
valves.
This command is a batch of "Standard 1", "Standard 2", "Sample Detection", "Needle 1 Liquid
Aspiration", "Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration", "Valve Check", "LB Sensor", "Cleaning", and "Keep ready"
functions.

ISE module
■ Standard 1 and Standard 2:

Performs a measurement of each electrode using the Standard 1 or the Standard 2 solution.
■ Sample Detection:
Checks the correct functioning of the sample detection.
■ Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration:

Checks the syringe 1 (Std 1 + Waste) complete movement.
■ Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration:

Checks the syringe 2 (Std 2 + Reference) complete movement.
■ ValveCheck:
Checks the liquid valves movement (open then close the four valves).
■ LB Sensor:
Checks the correct detection between air and liquid.
■ Cleaning:
Commands ISE module cleaning.
■ Keep ready:
Maintains liquid (Standard 1) in the fluidic system during the shutdown.
■ Global Initialization:
Initialization of the system, which is a batch of "Request status" (sets status, the instrument obtains the
current status), "Request Data" (sets data, the instrument obtains the current data), "Mechanical System
Initialization", "Prime flow system" (primes the reagent into the fluidic system; rinses the distilled/
deionized water into the fluidic system) and "Two point calibration" functions.
■ Data Initilization:
Initialization of the ISE module data.
■ Mechanical System Initialization:

Checks the syringe movements and sets the syringes to their initial position.
■ Prime flow system:

Primes the reagent into the fluidic system.
■ Purge ISE Module:

Purges the fluidic system. Prepares the ISE module for transportation.
If a function is used (except Cleaning cycle), you must run a Global Initialization before
leaving this menu.
■ Messages:
Displays the ISE error messages of previous tests (see 2. Error messages, page 7-38).

ISE module
1.7. Additional information
1.7.1. ISE module reagents consumption

The reagents consumption calculation is based on a basic ISE module working day (24 hours) which
includes:
- 1 ISE module wake up
- 90 measurements on serum
- 10 measurements on urine
- 12 x 2 point calibrations (every 2 hours)
- 16 x 1 point calibrations (every 15 minutes in 4 hours, instrument working)
- 32 x Ready cycles (every 5 minutes in 4 hours, instrument working)
- 80 x Keep ready cycles (every 15 minutes in 20 hours, instrument sleeping)
- 2 cleaning cycles (at the beginning and the end of the day)
- 0.1 x prime flow system cycle (reagents exchange)
Reagent consumption at each cycle (mL)
Cycle Standard 1 Standard 2 Reference

Wake up 1.12 0.48 0.75
Measure serum 0.14 0.00 0.08
Measure urine 0.32 0.00 0.10
Two point calibration 0.41 0.05 0.19
One point calibration 0.21 0.00 0.05
Keep ready 0.15 0.00 0.05
Ready 0.15 0.00 0.05
Cleaning 0.29 0.26 0.32
Prime flow system 2.79 2.23 1.92
Total consumption
Standard 1 Standard 2 Reference

Daily consumption (mL/day) 42.6 1.9 18.4
Weekly consumption (mL/week) 297.9 13.4 129.1
Bottle volume (mL) 280.0 100.0 100.0

ISE module
1.7.2. NA, K, CL normal range
Range of normal values (Standard 1) triggering warning #336
NA: -100 to 100 mv

K: -100 to 100 mv
CL: -50 to 150 mv
Sensitivity normal range (difference between Standard 1 and Standard 2) triggering

warning #335
NA: 8.5 to 14.4 mv

K: 9 to 16.3 mv
CL: 5 to 9.4 mv
Repeatability normal range (Standard 1) triggering warning #337
NA: 0.2 mv
K: 0.3 mv
CL: 0.2 mv
Slope normal range (for ISE V2)
NA: 38 to 65 mv
K: 37 to 67 mv
CL: -53 to -28 mv
Standards concentration
Standard 1 Standard 2
NA: 120 meq 200 meq
K: 4 meq 7 meq
CL: 100 meq 150 meq
1.7.3. Automatic cycle frequency
Cycle Condition
Two point calibration Executed every 2 hours (except when the instrument is shut down)
One point calibration Executed every 15 minutes (except when the instrument is shut down)
Ready Executed every 5 minutes (only when the instrument is running)
Keep ready Executed every 15 minutes (only when the instrument is shut down)

ISE module
Error messages
2. Error messages
System warnings and alarms are listed in the table on the following pages.
1. Warnings
Warnings are triggered to warn the user but are not blocking the instrument.
They are displayed on the Warning tab of the System Warnings menu.
When a warning is triggered, the instrument is not stopped but turns to "Ready" status.
If a warning appears, follow the instructions given in the table on the following pages.
2. Alarms
Alarms are blocking the instrument.
They are displayed on the Alarm tab of the System Warnings menu.
The Alarm tab is re-set at each start. To access the previous alarms, press CTRL + F8.
When an alarm is triggered, the instrument is stopped and turns to "Emergency Stop" status.
If an alarm appears, follow the instructions given in the table on the following pages.

Level Code Message Error type Action
Warning 001 ISE Module Initialization Problem Instrument/ISE module communication failed. Check the ISE module connections and fuse.
Non recoverable material error on the Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Warning 060 Triggered by the ISE mother board.
ISE module Change the ISE mother board.
The used ISE function cannot be performed. Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.
Warning 061 ISE command invalid
Triggered by the ISE mother board. Change the ISE mother board.
Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion.
ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home
Timeout error on ISE syringe 1 (error Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 318 position is not reached on time.
code 1) mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other
ISE module status is 2 = module configured.
5 V).
ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home
Position error on ISE syringe 1 (error Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 319 position is not reached.
5 V).

ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home
Timeout error on ISE syringe 2 (error Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 320 position is not reached on time.

5 V).
ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home
Position error on ISE syringe 2 (error Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE
Warning 321 position is not reached.
5 V).
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor
Can’t detect ISE low solution (error cannot detect Standard 1. The LB sensor
code 21) measurement is > 4.5 V (air).
ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.
Can’t detect ISE low solution inlet cannot detect the arriving of Standard 1. The LB
(error code 22) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air).
Too much ISE low solution inlet (error detects Standard 1. The LB sensor measurement
code 23) is < 1 V (liquid).
ISE module
7 - 39
Error messages
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still
7 - 40
detects Standard 1 flow after the aspiration Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
ISE low solution inlet excess on
Warning 325 specified time. The LB sensor measurement is Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
timeout (error code 24)
ISE module
< 1 V (liquid). Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Error messages

detects Standard 1 at the beginning of Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
ISE low solution inlet excess on start
Warning 326 measurement. The LB sensor measurement is Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
of measuring (error code 25)
Can’t detect ISE high solution (error cannot detect Standard 2. The LB sensor
code 31) measurement is > 4.5 V (air).
Can’t detect ISE high solution inlet cannot detect the arriving of Standard 2. The LB
(error code 32) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air).
Too much ISE high solution inlet detects Standard 2. The LB sensor measurement
(error code 33) is < 1 V (liquid).
detects Standard 2 flow after the aspiration Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit.
ISE high solution inlet excess on
Warning 330 specified time. The LB sensor measurement is Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor.
timeout (error code 34)
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Check the sample for fibrin, clog.
Can’t detect ISE sample (error code
Warning 331 cannot detect sample. The LB sensor Check the sample needle and tubing.
41)
measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Readjust the LB sensor.
ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Check the sample for fibrin, clog.
Can’t detect ISE sample inlet (error
Warning 332 cannot detect the arriving of sample. The LB Check the sample needle and tubing.
code 42)
sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Readjust the LB sensor.
Too much ISE sample inlet (error detects sample. The LB sensor measurement is
code 43) < 1 V (liquid).

ISE sample inlet excess on timeout detects sample flow after the aspiration specified
(error code 44) time. The LB sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid).
The difference between the low and high
Run a 2-point calibration.
standard values is out of the sensitivity normal
ISE electrode [%s1] sensibility error Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
Warning 335 range for the electrode in brackets.
for [%s2] point (error code 50) cleaning).
The low or high standard value is out of the Run a 2-point calibration.
ISE electrode [%s1] offset error for acceptable range for the electrode in brackets. Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
Warning 336
[%s2] point (error code 51) [%s1] = electrode name. cleaning).
[%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Change the corresponding electrode.
Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle has no bubble.
Change the ISE Standard 1 bottle.

Repeatability error on the low standard value for
Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
ISE electrode [%s1] repeatability the electrode in brackets.

Warning 337 cleaning).
error for [%s2] point (error code 52) [%s1] = electrode name.
electrode.
Check the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle has no bubble.
The potential difference during the three last Change the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle.
seconds of a measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV for the Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching,
ISE electrode [%s1] response error
Warning 338 electrode in brackets. cleaning).
for [%s2] point (error code 55)
[%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode.
[%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Check the spring contact of the corresponding
electrode.
ISE LB check response error (error
Warning 339 ISE module mechanical error. Change the ISE preampli board.
code 91)
Bad ISE module version. Software version installation, page 1.
Bad ISE version Required [%s],
Alarm 519 [%s] = ISE version number. Reinstall the ISE version on the ISE module. See
Current [%s]
Detected during the initialization. RAS540: ISE module software version installation,
page 1.
Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned on
Warning 614 ISE cleaning failed ISE module cleaning failed.
the reagent tray.
Warning 616 ISE Module busy Stabilization or calibration in progress. -
ISE module
7 - 41
Error messages
ISE module
Procedures
3. Procedures
Maintenance and adjustments required for the ISE module are divided into procedures
according to the concerned assemblies. This should make any update easier as all
interventions can be done with the corresponding procedure on its own.
1 - Procedures must be performed on a clean instrument. If the instrument is suspected not

to be perfectly clean, perform a cleaning procedure.
2 - Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator.
3 - When the Diagnostics menu is used, the security switches are disabled and it is therefore
recommended to be extremely cautious.
3.1. Maintenance by customers
The table below lists the ISE maintenance procedures and their frequencies.
For more detailed information, please refer to the instrument user manual.
Maintenance Frequency
ISE module etching Daily if more than 20 samples are run daily
ISE module cleaning Weekly
ISE reagents replacement As needed
Electrodes replacement As needed
3.2. ISE 6 month maintenance
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 1. 6 month maintenance, page 2.
3.3. ISE yearly maintenance
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 2. Yearly maintenance, page 3.

ISE module
Procedures
3.4. ISE procedure list
The procedures are sorted by theme.
Theme P/n and designation Concerns

Physical installation - Mechanical adjustments -
Installation RAS441: ISE module installation Electrode and reagent installation - Start and use
- Check up
RAS388: ISE module maintenance 6 month maintenance - Yearly maintenance
RAS537: ISE module check up after Check up of the ISE module on serum and urine
intervention mode
Dismantling - Boards, valves, syringes and motors
Maintenance
RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement replacement - Mechanical adjustments - LB
sensor adjustment
Connection - Command description - Software
use
RAS540: ISE module software version
Software ISE preparation - ISE version loading
installation
3.5. ISE maintenance check up summary
An ISE maintenance check up summary is provided in this manual (see on next page) to ensure the
maintenance follow-up. This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for
customer archives.

ISE module
Procedures

HORIBA ABX SAS
B.P. 7290
34184 Montpellier Cedex 4 - FRANCE
Phone: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16
Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17
ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 ISE module

Check-up maintenance
6 month Yearly
maintenance maintenance
Rinsing with distilled water and draining.
Rinsing and
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.1. Rinsing with X
draining
distilled water and draining, page 4.
Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing.

See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.2. Syringes O- X
rings replacement and greasing, page 5.
Syringes
Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.3. Syringes X
pistons and O-rings replacement, page 7.
Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning. See RAS388: ISE module

X X
maintenance, 3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9.
Valves Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4"

replacement. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance,
X X
3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4"
replacement, page 10.
ISE mix cup cleaning with bleach and rinsing with distilled
water. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.6. ISE X X
mix cup cleaning, page 10.
Mix cup
Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement.
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.7. Tubing "air X X
sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement, page 11.
All tubings and fittings replacement. See RAS388: ISE

module maintenance, 3.8. All tubings and fittings X
Tubings
Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement.
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.9. Isolator and X X
ISE waste tubing replacement, page 11.
ISE mix cup adjustment. See RAS388: ISE module
Adjustment X X
maintenance, 3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12.
Check up on serum mode. See RAS537: ISE module

check up after intervention, 1. Check up on serum mode,
page 2: X X
Calibration (x5): difference < 0.2 mV,
Check up after Control N, P (x10): CV < 1% Na, Cl and K.
intervention
Check up on urine mode. See RAS537: ISE module
check up after intervention, 2. Check up on urine mode,
X X
page 7:
Control Standard 2 (x10): CV < 2% Na, Cl and < 1.5% K.
This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer
archives.
RAS441E
ISE module installation

In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware
versions:
RAS441: ISE module installation
■For a full installation on an instrument without ISE

module, perform the procedure entirely.
■For an ISE module startup, perform only the ISE
module startup part.
Concerns
ISE module physical installation
ISE module startup
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Phillips screwdriver
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request
Specific kit or consumables

■ ISE module electrodes:
ABX Pentra Sodium-E A11A01738
ABX Pentra Chloride-E A11A01739
ABX Pentra Potassium-E A11A01740
ABX Pentra Reference-E A11A01741
■ ISE module reagents:
ABX Pentra Standard 1 A11A01717
ABX Pentra Reference 280 ML A11A01901
Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat

must be worn by the operator.
Local or national regulations must be applied in all the
operations.
ISE module installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. ISE module physical installation
1.1. Unpacking
Unpack the ISE module carefully and make sure that all the parts from the package list are present.
Package list
Part number Qty Designation

1 ISE module
1 ISE packaging
1 KIT, ISE INSTALLATION KIT P400
KIT, ISE INSTALLATION KIT P400

DAC028A (1201891028) 1 CABLE, PC/MAIN BOARD P80
EAE028AS (1202249028) 2 metres TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M
EAB013A (1202211013) 1 FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR
KAA013A (1207401013) 6 CHC SCREW M4X6
EAB015A (1202211015) 2 FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5
EAE003A* 0.5 metres TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030)
EAE007A* 0.5 metres TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060)
EAC015A (1202221015) 1 FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING
KAU007A (1207571007) 2 PLASTIC WASHER

- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)
RAS441E - 2 Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 ISE module installation
1.2. Instrument setting
■ Switch the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.
■ Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover.
■ Remove the ISE plate and the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.
■ Remove the rear plate (A), the luer

connector plate (B), the middle plate (C) and A C
the ISE rear plate (D) at the back of the
instrument. B
Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1

■ Remove the rear plate (A), the luer A C
connector plate (B) and the middle plate (C)
at the back of the instrument. B
Null modem cable connection:
J3
■ Connect the null modem cable (included in

the kit) in position J3 of the mother board.
■ Guide the cable down to the passage designed for the wires (follow the black "Barcode Reader" wire)
to achieve the correct position.
■ Put the mother board cover back in position.
Technical Manual RAS441E - 3

RAA023
■ Prepare the null modem cable linked to the

mother board (A), the crystal tubing linked
to the luer link plate (B) and the power
supply cable coming from the power supply
block (C).
1.3. ISE module positioning
Tygon tubing
■ Use the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 (included in Straight fitting

the kit) to connect the 1.52 mm Tygon
tubing to the crystal tubing 4x6 linked to the Crystal tubing
ISE waste assy.
Tygon tubing

■ Use the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 (included in
the kit) to connect the 1.52 mm Tygon tubing
to the crystal tubing 4x6 linked to the ISE
waste assy.
Straight fitting
Crystal tubing

RAA023
Null modem cable Power supply cable
■ Connect the power supply cable on the ISE

module mother board as well as the null
modem cable.
Make sure that the wires are not in a
stressed position.
A B
■ Slightly loosen the 2 CHC screws (A) to free

the left gusset plate.
■ Place the ISE module and tighten the 2
CHC screws (one with the braided ground
wire) on the left of the module (C), the 2 CHC
screws and plastic washers (provided in the
kit) on the right of the module (B) and the 2
CHC screws of the left gusset plate (A).

RAA023
■ Put the covers and plates back.
■ Connect the ISE waste tubing to the

external central luer connector plate.
ISE module waste
■ Guide with the shortest distance from the

instrument to the waste detection assy and
cut to the correct length.
■ Then, connect it to the small connector of
the waste detection assy.

RAA023
1.4. ISE module mechanical adjustments
■ Connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.
1.4.1. ISE mix cup adjustment

■ Remove the ISE cup cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6.
■ Make sure that the reagent arm is in its wash tower and the sample arm is at its vertical home position.

■ Selectthe sample arm Rotation radio
button (A), then press Motor Off (B).
■ Manually turn the sample arm over the ISE
mix cup. A
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws and washers.
■ Move the ISE mix cup to have the sample

needle centered (left/right).
■ Screw the ISE mix cup support.

RAA023
■ Check the position with the sample arm in

the ISE mix cup: A
- Select the sample arm Vertical radio
button (A), support the arm by hand, then
press Motor Off (B).
- Slowly move the arm down and check the
position.
■ Press Check Home (C) to move the arm up.
■ Put the ISE cup cover back. C B
1.4.2. Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment

Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup by following the sample arm adjustment procedure.
- ISE Sample (rotation) to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE
Position, page 42.
- Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical) to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup. See
RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.

RAA023
2. ISE module startup
2.1. Electrode and reagent installation
After opening, the electrodes are stable for:

- ABX Pentra Reference-E: 12 months
- ABX Pentra Sodium-E: 12 months
- ABX Pentra Chloride-E: 4 months
- ABX Pentra Potassium-E: 6 months
For the reference electrode, remove the protection from one side of the electrode and
disconnect the tubing between the two connectors.
For all electrodes, make sure that the O-ring is well-positioned on one side of the electrode
and make sure that the electrode is clean.
O-ring
■ Install the electrodes (after removing the foam supporting the air detector):
Chlore (Cl)
Reference
Sodium (Na) Potassium (K)

RAA023
■ Connect the tubing from LV3- inlet 1 to the upper inlet of the Reference electrode.
■ Connect the tubing from LV4- inlet 1 to the lower inlet of the Reference electrode.
■ Close and fasten the ISE door.
■ Install the Standard 1, the Standard 2 and the Reference solutions.
LV4 LV3
Standard 1
Standard 2
Reference

RAA023
ISE module hydraulic diagram


RAA023


- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)
2.2. Start and use of ISE option
■ Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser > ISE Module.
■ Activate the ISE module:

- Press Edit (A).
- Select the Activate ISE Module check B
box (B).
- Press OK (C).
A C

RAA023
■ Go to Services > Customer Services >

ISE.
■ Activate the electrodes: E
- Press Edit (D).
- In the Activated electrode area, select the
Chloride, Potassium and/or Sodium
check boxes (E).
- Press OK (F). D F
■ Go to Calibration/Control > ISE

Calibration.
■ Make sure that the Keep ready and Ready
functions are activated as well as the ISE
calibrations, if not:
H
■ Press Edit (G).
■ Select the 1 point Calibration Frequency,
2 point Calibration Frequency, Keep
ready and/or Ready check boxes (H) and
enter the frequency values. G I
■ Press OK (I).

ISE.
■ Run a Global Initialization.
2.3. ISE module check up
Follow the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS537: ISE module check up after
intervention, page 1.
To know the slope and offset range, see Section 7: ISE module, 1.7.2. NA, K, CL normal range,
page 7-37.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS388J
ISE module maintenance
RAS388: ISE module maintenance
Concerns
6 month maintenance
Yearly maintenance
Procedures
Rinsing with distilled water and draining
Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing
Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement
Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning
Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4"
replacement
ISE mix cup cleaning
Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement
All tubings and fittings replacement
Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement
ISE mix cup adjustment
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Required products
Distilled water
Bleach
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEC273AS (1209171273)
KIT, ISE 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE KIT XEA794ES (1209155794)

operations.
ISE module maintenance ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. 6 month maintenance
1.1. Maintenance kit
P/n Designation Qty

XEA019A (1209151019) TOOL, GREASE SILICON CONTAINER 1
FAA073A (1202401073) O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING 8
EAE028AS (1202249028) TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M 2 metres
EAE003AS (1202249003) TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) L=2M 2 metres
XCA167A (1209121167) CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) 1
1.2. What to do?
Here are listed and organized the tasks to be performed during the ISE 6 month maintenance. For each
task, the steps to follow are detailed in chapter 3.
No. Task Link

Syringes O-rings replacement and 3.2. Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing,
1
greasing page 5
2 Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning 3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9
Tubing "reference electrode to 3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no.
3
electrovalve no. 4" replacement 4" replacement, page 10
4 ISE mix cup cleaning 3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning, page 10
Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" 3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement,
5
replacement page 11
Isolator and ISE waste tubing 3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement,
6
replacement page 11
7 ISE mix cup adjustment 3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12
RAS388J - 2 Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 ISE module maintenance
2. Yearly maintenance
2.1. Maintenance kit
P/n Designation Qty

EAE007A* TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060) 3 metres
EAB015A (1202211015) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 11
GBM0891 (1203600891) SYRINGE, ISE SYR. PISTON 4
XEC273AS (1209171273) KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE
XEA019A (1209151019) TOOL, GREASE SILICON CONTAINER 1
FAA073A (1202401073) O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING 8
EAE028AS (1202249028) TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M 2 metres
EAE003AS (1202249003) TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) L=2M 2 metres
XCA167A (1209121167) CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) 1
* Possible to order under the following reference:

- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)
2.2. What to do?
Here are listed and organized the tasks to be performed during the ISE yearly maintenance. For each
task, the steps to follow are detailed in chapter 3.
No. Task Link

1 Rinsing with distilled water and draining 3.1. Rinsing with distilled water and draining, page 4
Syringes pistons and O-rings 3.3. Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement,
2
replacement page 7
3 Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning 3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9
Tubing "reference electrode to 3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no.
4
electrovalve no. 4" replacement 4" replacement, page 10
5 ISE mix cup cleaning 3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning, page 10
Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" 3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement,
6
replacement page 11
7 All tubings and fittings replacement 3.8. All tubings and fittings replacement, page 11
Isolator and ISE waste tubing 3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement,
8
replacement page 11
9 ISE mix cup adjustment 3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12
Technical Manual RAS388J - 3

RAA023
3. Procedures
3.1. Rinsing with distilled water and draining
In order not to damage the pistons, it is advisable to drain the syringes, then rinse them as
quickly as possible to avoid the crystallization of reagents.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

■ Remove the straws from the reagent bottles and wrap them in absorbent paper.
■ Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain

the circuit.
■ Dry the straws using absorbent paper.
■ Plunge the straws into a distilled water
bottle, then run a Prime flow system cycle
(B). B
■ Remove the straws from the distilled water A
■ Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain
the circuit.

RAA023
3.2. Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing
■ Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE and press Change electrode.
■ Disconnect the 2 tubings from the syringe

(A).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws (B) of the
syringe body, then remove it.
■ On a piece of absorbent paper, unscrew the

CHC screws and the Torx screws to open
the syringe body.
■ Remove the pistons and gently clean them
with distilled water.
■ Replace the 4 O-rings with new ones.
■ Take the first syringe block cover and put 2

O-rings in it. Do not grease these O-rings.
Install the first cover on the syringe body
(O-ring side facing up).
■ Grease 2 O-rings and put them in the O-rings without grease
second syringe block cover. Install the
second cover on the syringe body (O-ring
side facing up).
■ Screw both covers on the syringe body
without tightening the screws.
O-rings with grease

RAA023
Both covers must be well-aligned with the syringe body.
■ Put the pistons in the syringe body.

■ Maintain the covers and the syringe body
well-aligned and tighten the screws.
To avoid risk of instability or impossibility to calibrate, be very careful not to inverse the
pistons when reassembling the syringe.
■ Reinstall the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.
■ Perform the same operation with the second syringe.
■ Press Mechanical Initialization.

■ When the pistons are in the highest
position, press Stop ISE cycle.
■ Tighten the syringe body screws.

RAA023
3.3. Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement
■ Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE and press Change electrode.

(A).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws (B) of the
syringe body, then remove it.
■ On a piece of absorbent paper, unscrew the

CHC screws and the Torx screws to open
the syringe body.
■ Replace both pistons with new ones.
■ Replace the 4 O-rings with new ones.
■ Take the first syringe block cover and put 2

O-rings in it. Do not grease these O-rings.
Install the first cover on the syringe body
(O-ring side facing up).
■ Grease 2 O-rings and put them in the O-rings without grease
second syringe block cover. Install the
second cover on the syringe body (O-ring
side facing up).
■ Screw both covers on the syringe body
without tightening the screws.
O-rings with grease

RAA023
Both covers must be well-aligned with the syringe body.
■ Put the pistons in the syringe body.

■ Maintain the covers and the syringe body
well-aligned and tighten the screws.
To avoid risk of instability or impossibility to calibrate, be very careful not to inverse the
pistons when reassembling the syringe.
■ Reinstall the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.
■ Perform the same operation with the second syringe.


RAA023
3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the right

syringe body ("Syringe 1"), then remove it.
■ Disconnect the tubing from the lower inlet

of the reference electrode. See ISE module
hydraulic diagram, page 13. B
■ Plunge this tubing into bleach (diluted 1/10)
(A). A
■ Press on the electrovalve with a screwdriver
(B) and push the syringe piston (C) to make
the bleach pass through the electrovalve.
■ Leave the bleach to act for a few seconds.

■ Perform this operation 4 times.
■ Remove the tubing from the bleach.

■ Plunge it into distilled water and rinse the electrovalve in the same way as described above.

RAA023
■ Remove the dried up residue of the saline

solution.
■ Reinstallthe syringe body on the ISE

syringes assy without tightening the screws.
3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement
■ Replace the tubing from the lower inlet of the reference electrode to the electrovalve no. 4, inlet 1 (cut
0.170 m of the 0.76 mm Tygon tubing). See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13.
3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning
■ Remove the ISE cup cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6.
■ Disconnect the 4 tubings from the ISE mix cup.
■ Remove the ISE mix cup.
■ Clean it with bleach (diluted 1/10) and rinse it with distilled water.

RAA023
3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement
■ Replace the tubing from the air sensor inlet to the electrovalve no. 5 (cut 0.085 m of the 0.76 mm Tygon
tubing) and the tubing from the electrovalve no. 5 to the lower inlet of the ISE mix cup (cut 0.103 m of
the 0.76 mm Tygon tubing). See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13.
■ Reconnect the 3 other tubings on the ISE mix cup.
■ Put the ISE mix cup back.
■ Put the ISE cup cover back.
3.8. All tubings and fittings replacement
Replace all the ISE module tubings and fittings by following the hydraulic diagram. See ISE module
hydraulic diagram, page 13.
3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement
■ Replace the isolator with a new one.
Be very careful to respect the isolator orientation.
To LV4 valve
To waste

RAA023
■ Cut 750 mm of crystal tubing 4x6 and replace the ISE waste tubing located inside the instrument
between the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 of the ISE module (E1) and the internal central luer connector.
E1
luer connector
■ Use the remaining crystal tubing 4x6 to

replace the ISE waste tubing located
outside the instrument between the external
central luer connector and the waste tank.
luer connector
■ Guide with the shortest distance from the

instrument to the waste detection assy and
cut to the correct length.
■ Then,connect it to the small connector of
the waste detection assy.
3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment
Perform an ISE mix cup adjustment (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup
adjustment, page 7).

RAA023


RAA023


- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

RAA023
RAS537D
ISE module check up after intervention
RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention
Concerns
Check up on serum mode
Preliminary operations
Calibration
ISE activation
Control
Check results
Check up on urine mode
Results validation configuration
Procedure
Required tools
None
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
0 h 30
Frequency
On request

ABX Pentra N Control A11A01653
ABX Pentra P Control A11A01654

operations.
ISE module check up after intervention ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
The "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure should be performed after an
intervention to verify that the ISE module is functioning properly.
1. Check up on serum mode
1.1. Preliminary operations
1.1.1. Results validation configuration

■ Go to Services > System Configuration > Results validation.
■ Write down the customer configuration.
It is necessary to write down the customer configuration to reconfigure the control results
validation, with the customer configuration, at the end of the procedure.
■ Press Edit (A). B

■ Configure the control results validation (B).
■ Press OK to validate (C).
A C
RAS537D - 2 Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 ISE module check up after intervention
1.1.2. Application check

■ Go to Services > Application Configuration > Applications.
■ Select the application "K_S" in the Applications list and press Details.
■ In the Result area, the Decimal Position

field must be set at least to 1.
■ If
not, press Edit to modify the value, then
press OK.
1.1.3. Control configuration

■ Go to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure the N Control and the
P Control for the tests Cl, K and Na on serum.
■ Refer to the N Control and the P Control vials to specify the control characteristics. To use
the same configuration later, enter a longer expiration date.
■ Refer to the N Control and the P Control vials to specify the Target value, Min. value and
Max. value for the tests Cl, K and Na.
■ Fill one sample tube with 2 mL of N Control and another one with 2 mL of P Control.
■ Physically position the N Control and the P Control on the programmed rack positions.
■ Then, load the rack on the sample tray.
Technical Manual RAS537D - 3

RAA023
1.2. Calibration
This part of the procedure has to be done only after the first installation of the ISE module or
after the installation of new electrodes.
■ From the main menu, press the ISE Module Status button.
■ Press Calibrate to perform a 2-point

calibration.
■ Note the results (low and high values) of the
2-point calibration for each electrode.
■ Calculate the difference between the low and high values for each result.
Low value (mV) High value (mV) Difference

1 52.0 44.1 7.9
2 51.9 44.7 7.2
3 52.0 44.7 7.3
4 52.1 44.8 7.3
5 52.0 44.8 7.2
For the three last calibrations, the gap between the calculated differences must be 0.2 mV maximum.
For this example:
- 7.3
- 7.3
- 7.2
The gap is 0.1 mV.
It might be possible, during the first hour after the electrode installation, that the gap exceeds
0.2 mV.
It is due to the electrode stabilization.
In this case, wait for one hour before repeating this part of the procedure.

RAA023
1.3. ISE activation

■ Put a sample tube on a rack.
■ Selectthe rack position of the sample tube

used for the ISE activation by using the
corresponding scrolling lists.
■ Press ISE activation key and follow the
instructions given by the instrument.
■ Repeat this operation a second time.
■ From the main menu, press the ISE Module

Status button and then press Calibrate
button.
1.4. Control
Once the calibration is validated, perform the control as explained below.
■ Go to Worklist > Control and refer to your user manual to create the control request (10 replicates) for
the tests Cl, K and Na on serum.
■ Run the analyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar.
The 10 replicates for the tests Cl, K and Na on the N Control and the P Control will be performed.

RAA023
1.5. Check results
Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the tests Cl, K and Na.
■ Go to Quality Control > Control.
C
■ Select the N Control using the Control
scrolling list (A).
■ Inthe Session Mean area, drag the slider
(B) to display the CV (C).
B
■ Make sure that the CV are lower than those below:
Test CV Max.
CL_S 1.0
K_S 1.0
NA_S 1.0
■ Follow the same procedure for the P Control.
If you have to run the 10 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window
(use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 10 new replicates
are taken into account in the CV calculation.

RAA023
2. Check up on urine mode

First, perform check up on serum mode (See 1. Check up on serum mode, page 2).
2.1. Results validation configuration
See 1.1.1. Results validation configuration, page 2.
2.2. Procedure
Check the ISE results in urine mode as follows.
2.2.1. Application check

■ For the applications "K_U" and "NA_U",

make sure that the Decimal Position field is
set at least to 1.
2.2.2. Control configuration

■ Go to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure the Standard 2 as a
control for the tests Cl, K and Na on urine.
Please refer to the Standard 2 bottle to specify the control characteristics (name, lot,
expiration date) and to the following table to specify the Target value, Min. value and Max.
value for the tests "CL_U", "K_U" and "NA_U".
Target values
Test Target value Min. value Max. value
CL_U 150 143 157
K_U 7 6.7 7.3
NA_U 200 187.8 212.2
■ Fill one sample cup with 500 µL of Standard 2 and physically position this sample cup on the
programmed rack position.

RAA023
2.2.3. Control
the tests Cl, K and Na on urine.
■ Run the analyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar.
The 5 replicates for the tests Cl, K and Na on the Standard 2 will be performed.
■ Perform this operation twice.
2.2.4. Check results

Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the tests Cl, K and Na.

■ Select the Standard 2 control and make sure that:
- the results are included between the Min. and Max. values. See Target values, page 7.
- the CV are lower than those below:
Test CV Max.
CL_U 2.0
K_U 1.5
NA_U 2.0
If you have to run the 10 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window
(use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 10 new replicates
are taken into account in the CV calculation.

■ Press Edit.
■ Reconfigure the control results validation with the customer configuration previously written down.
■ Press OK to validate.

RAA023
RAS538F
ISE module spare part replacement

versions:
RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement
Concerns
ISE module dismantling
ISE module spare parts replacement
Boards replacement
ISE valves replacement
ISE syringes and motors replacement
ISE module mechanical adjustments
ISE mix cup adjustment
Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment
LB sensor adjustment
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Voltmeter
Syringe
KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
ISE module spare part replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. ISE module dismantling

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.
■ Rinse and purge the ISE module:

- Remove the straws from the reagent
bottles and wrap them in absorbent paper.
- Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain
the circuit.
- Dry the straws using absorbent paper.
- Plunge the straws into a distilled water
bottle, then run a Prime flow system cycle
(B). B
- Remove the straws from the distilled water A
- Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain
the circuit.
From the instrument rear:

Connections are accessible from the instrument front on ABX Pentra 400 V1. Move directly to the next
chapter.
■ Remove the ISE rear plate by unscrewing

the 12 CHC screws.
RAS538F - 2 Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 ISE module spare part replacement
■ Unplug the waste tubing (A).

■ Disconnect the power supply cable (B) and
the null modem cable (C).
B
C
From the instrument front:
A B
■ Slightly loosen the 2 CHC screws (A) to free

the left gusset plate.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and plastic
washers (B) on the right-hand side of the
module.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws (C) on the left-
hand side of the module.
Now, it is possible to move the ISE module, but if necessary, remove the power supply cover, the
external and internal sample covers. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.
Technical Manual RAS538F - 3

RAA023

■ Slowly pull the ISE module to access the connections.
■ Unplug the waste tubing (A).

■ Disconnect the power supply cable (B) and
the null modem cable (C).
B
C
■ Remove the ISE module.

■ Reassemble in reverse order.
2. ISE module spare parts replacement
At the end of each replacement, proceed to a mechanical adjustment (see 3. ISE module
mechanical adjustments, page 20), run a Global Initialization cycle in Services >
Diagnostics > ISE and follow the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure (see
RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, page 1).
■ Dismantle the ISE module until you have access to its connections (See 1. ISE module dismantling,
page 2).

RAA023
2.1. Boards replacement
As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an
antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.
2.1.1. ISE software board
CPU-03N
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers.

■ Slowly
pull the ISE software board to
remove it from the ISE mother board.
CPU-07N

RAA023
2.1.2. ISE mother board
■ Carefully disconnect:
- the "preampli to main board ISE" cable (A)
- the valves cable (B) A
- the 2 syringe home sensor cables: one of
them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (C) B
and the other one from the ISE syringe
motor 1/150 (D) C
- the 2 syringe motor cables: one of them E
D
from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (E) and the F
other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150
(F)
■ Remove the ISE software board. See 2.1.1. ISE software board, page 5.
■ Unscrew the 5 CHC screws and washers

(one with a ground wire) to remove the ISE
mother board from its plate.

RAA023
2.1.3. ISE preampli board assy

■ Open the ISE cage door and remove the electrodes.
■ Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy as

follows:
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers
maintaining the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.
- Disconnect all the tubings from the ISE V2

mix cup valve assy.
- Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 8 CHC screws (one with a

braided ground wire) supporting the ISE
preampli board assy to access the board.
■ Slowly pull the ISE preampli board assy.
B
■ Disconnect the "preampli to main board
ISE" cable (A) from the ISE preampli board.
■ Unscrew the screw supporting the ground
wire (B).
■ Remove the preampli board assy.
■ Reassemble in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic
diagram, page 18.

RAA023
2.2. ISE valves replacement
2.2.1. ISE valve (LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4)
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws supporting the

ISE valve assy and pull it toward the rear of
the ISE module.
■ Disconnect all the tubings from the valve to

be replaced.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws located under the
valve to be replaced.
■ Cutthe Ty-Raps™ maintaining the black

and red cables.
■ Disconnect the valve connector from the
connector located on the ISE mother board.

RAA023
■ Disconnect the black and red cables of the

concerned valve from the valve connector.
For this, push the cables using a thin
screwdriver.
■ Connect the new valve cables on the valve

connector.
Be careful of the polarity when connecting
cables. Place the black cable on position
"A" and the red cable on position "B". A B
diagram, page 18.
■ Run a Valve Check cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.
2.2.2. ISE valve assy (LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4)

ISE valve assy and pull it toward the rear of
the ISE module.
■ Disconnect all the tubings from the valves.

RAA023
■ Disconnect the valve connector from the

connector located on the ISE mother board.
diagram, page 18.
■ Run a Valve Check cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.
2.2.3. ISE LV5 valve
■ Disconnect the LV5 cable connector

located at the back of the ISE module
electrode holder.

LV5 valve.
■ Replace the valve.

RAA023
2.2.4. ISE LV6 valve
■ Disconnect the LV6 cable connector

located at the back of the ISE module
electrode holder.

supporting the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.
■ Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

LV6 valve.
■ Replace the valve.
diagram, page 18.

RAA023
2.2.5. ISE V2 mix cup valve assy
■ Disconnect the LV5 and LV6 cable

connectors located at the back of the ISE
module electrode holder.

supporting the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.
■ Disconnect all the tubings from the ISE V2

mix cup valve assy.
■ Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.
diagram, page 18.

RAA023
2.3. ISE syringes and motors replacement
2.3.1. ISE syringe + motor assy
■ Cut
the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the syringe
home sensor and syringe motor cables.
■ Disconnect from the ISE mother board:

- the 2 syringe home sensor cables: one of
them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (A)
and the other one from the ISE syringe
motor 1/150 (B)
- the 2 syringe motor cables: one of them A
from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (C) and the C
B
other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150 D
(D)
■ Disconnect the 4 tubings on the syringe

blocks.

RAA023
■ Remove the ISE reagent bottles from the

ISE bottle support.
■ Unscrew the 3 screws supporting the ISE
bottle support and remove it.

ISE syringe + motor assy.
diagram, page 18.
■ Runa Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration cycle and a Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration cycle in Services >
Diagnostics > ISE.

RAA023
2.3.2. ISE syringe block assy

block to be replaced.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the syringe
block to be replaced, then remove the
syringe body.
■ Reinstallthe syringe body on the ISE

syringes assy without tightening the screws.
ISE and press Mechanical Initialization.
■ To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.
Diagnostics > ISE.

RAA023
2.3.3. ISE syringe motor 1/150, 1/75
■ Cut
the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the syringe
home sensor and syringe motor cables.
■ Disconnect from the ISE mother board the

syringe motor cable of the motor to be
replaced:
- for ISE syringe motor 1/75 (A)
- for ISE syringe motor 1/150 (B) A

ISE syringe motor to be replaced and
remove the motor spring (if present).
spring spring
Diagnostics > ISE.

RAA023


RAA023


- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

RAA023
3. ISE module mechanical adjustments
3.1. ISE mix cup adjustment
Follow the ISE mix cup adjustment procedure (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup
3.2. Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment
Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup by following the sample arm adjustment procedure.
- ISE Sample (rotation) to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE
Position, page 42.
- Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical) to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup. See
RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.

RAA023
4. LB sensor adjustment
■ Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy (See 2.1.3. ISE preampli board assy, page 7).
■ Unscrew the 8 CHC screws (one with a

braided ground wire) supporting the ISE
preampli board assy to access the board.
■ Slowly pull the ISE preampli board assy. The connectors and tubings must stay connected.
■ Connect a voltmeter between TP2 and TP3. VR1 TP2
TP3
■ Remove the ISE cup cover (See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6).
■ Remove the ISE mix cup.
■ Disconnect the tubing from the ISE mix cup to the air sensor.

RAA023
■ Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP3.

The voltage must be > 4 V with air in the sensor.
If not, loosen the 4 CHC screws supporting the board, then move the board to adjust the voltage.
If the voltage is still < 4 V, adjust it with the trimmer VR1.
■ Fill a syringe with distilled water then connect it to the air sensor.
■ Use the syringe to push the liquid in the air sensor.
■ Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP3.
The voltage must be < 1 V with liquid in the sensor.
If not, loosen the 4 CHC screws supporting the board, then move the board to adjust the voltage.
If the voltage is still > 1 V, adjust it with the trimmer VR1.
■ Check if the adjustment with air in the sensor is still correct. If not readjust it.
■ Check and readjust until both adjustments are correct.
■ When the adjustment is correct, tighten the screws.

■ Perform an ISE mix cup adjustment (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup

RAA023
RAS539C
Dummy PENTRA software use

versions:
Concerns
Introduction
Connection of the ISE module with the laptop
Reminder on the different ISE module status
Communication between instrument and ISE module
Command access in the Dummy PENTRA software
Command validity according to the ISE module status
Dummy PENTRA software use
Command sequence to complete the diagnostic
Explanation of the main error messages
End of operation
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Dummy PENTRA software use ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Introduction
The Dummy PENTRA software makes the breakdown diagnostic relative to the ISE module easier.
According to the result of the performed tests, the failure can be attributed to the ISE module in itself or
to the instrument.
■ This software stems from the HORIBA Medical production.

■ Only certain software functions are available.
■ This software is designed for diagnostic help.
■ No upgrade/improvement of the software is expected at that time.
■ No specific aid concerning the use of this software will be provided.
■ The instrument can continue to run even if the ISE module is dismantled.
2. Connection of the ISE module with the laptop
Two solutions are possible to connect to the ISE module.
2.1. First case (easy one): use of a new connection cable
■ Obtain a null modem cable DB9F/DB9F, ref. DAC028A (1201891028).

■ Dismantle the ISE module until you have access to its connections (See RAS538: ISE module spare
part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).
■ Disconnect the null modem cable of the ISE module.
RAS539C - 2 Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Dummy PENTRA software use
ISE module
mother board
■ Connect the cable, ref. DAC028A
(1201891028), to the ISE module (in CN2
position) and to the laptop.
Connector
CN2 +
Null modem cable
2.2. Second case (if no cable at your disposal): use of the ISE/
instrument null modem cable
■ Dismantle the ISE module until you have access to its connections (see RAS538: ISE module spare
part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).
■ Remove the mixer cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 15. Mixer cover, page 9.
■ Remove the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 16. Mother board cover, page 10.
Null modem cable in J3 position
■ When the mother board is visible,

disconnect the null modem cable from J3
position. 2 cutting wheels
■ Slowly guide the null modem cable down to the passage designed for the wires (follow the black
"Barcode Reader" wire) to reach the ISE module back.
■ Connect the cable to the laptop.
Technical Manual RAS539C - 3

RAA023
3. Reminder on the different ISE module status
The ISE module exists in seven different statuses. While the instrument is running, the status of the ISE
module is displayed in the ISE tab. Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE.
The status from 0 to 6 of the ISE module are described in the following table:
Code Description
0 Module not initialized
1 Module initialized
2 Module configured
3 Mechanical part initialized
4 Module sleeping
5 Fluidic part initialized
6 Module calibrated
In correct working order, the ISE module evolves sequentially from status 0 to 6, thus from the instrument
start up (Power ON) to the calibrated module achievement, ready for the analyses.

RAA023
4. Communication between instrument and ISE

module
The change from status to status depends on the instrument which activates specific commands (see
Status transition diagram, page 5).
In addition to these commands which allow the ISE module to reach the status 6, the instrument can
communicate with the ISE through several other commands to provide the global functioning of the ISE
module. These commands can vary from a serum measurement to a cleaning command, and include an
activation command.
These commands are accessible from the Dummy PENTRA software.
They are defined by a number and the expected action heading.
Status transition diagram
Commands of the analyzer allowing Description of the status

the transition from status to status
Power ON
This status doesn’t require any
command from the analyzer
Status 0
"Request status", "Request data"

"Request system configuration"
Status 1 Ready to communicate with the analyzer
"Set system configuration"
Complete initialization (configuration checking,

Status 2 emptying of the RAM memory...)
"Initialization of mechanical system"
Status 3 Initialization of the mechanical system
"Initialization of flow system"

Status 4 Waking status
"Stabilization of flow system"
Status 5 Complete initialization of the fluidic system
"Two point calibration"
Status 6 Two point calibration ended

RAA023
5. Command access in the Dummy PENTRA

software
■ Open the Dummy PENTRA software by double-clicking.
If a USB/series adapter is used, configure under Windows the selected USB port in COM1.
The Dummy PENTRA screen opens.
B
A
The commands are located in the middle of the window (A).

They go sequentially from number 001 to 300.
The second part of the commands are accessible by using the scroll bar (B).
Some numbers are missing from the sequence. They correspond to commands carried out
by the instrument, but which have no sense to exist in this test software (example of unlisted
command: 100- "Emergency stop").

RAA023
6. Command validity according to the ISE

module status
The commands present in this software are either valid or not according to the ISE module status.
The table below is a summary of the accessible commands (number and designation) according to the
ISE module status:
Status of the ISE

Command
Command designation Status 0 Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Status 5 Status 6 module after the
number
command
001 Request status OK OK OK OK OK OK OK ID
002 Request data OK OK OK OK OK OK OK ID
003 Request system configuration OK OK OK OK OK OK OK ID
051 Global initialization OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 6
052 Set system configuration OK OK OK OK OK OK OK 2
053 Initialization of mechanical system - - OK OK OK OK OK 3
054 Initialization of flow system - - - OK OK OK OK 5
6
055 Two point calibration - - - - OK OK OK or 4 (if status 4 at the
beginning)
056 One point calibration - - - - OK OK OK ID
057 Measure serum - - - - - - OK 6
058 Measure urine - - - - - - OK 6
060 Keep ready - - - - OK OK OK 4
061 Shut down - - - OK OK OK OK 3
062 Cleaning - - - - OK OK OK ID
063 Prime flow system OK OK OK OK OK OK OK ID
064 Stabilization of flow system - - - - OK OK OK 5
065 Activation - - - - OK OK OK ID
066 Drain - - - OK OK OK OK 3
067 Wake up - - - - OK OK OK 6
068 Exchange electrode - - - OK OK OK OK NA
069 Ready - - - - - - OK 6
070 Measure urine (2) - - - - - - OK 6
101 Global check - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
103 Check L solution - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
104 Check H solution - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
105 Check sample - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
106 Check dispenser 1 - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
107 Check dispenser 2 - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
108 Check liquid valves - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
109 Check LB sensor - - - OK OK OK OK 3 or 4
110 Position for transport - - - OK OK OK OK NU
200 IPL mode OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NU
300 Wait NU
OK: Accessible command

-: Unaccessible command
ID: Status identical to the initial command status
NA: Not applicable
NU: Not used

RAA023
7. Dummy PENTRA software use
The Dummy PENTRA software put together all the actions in relation with the ISE module, accessible in
the Customer Services menu and in the Diagnostics menu.
The Dummy PENTRA software V1.32 is compatible with both ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra
C400.
7.1. Software description
The Dummy PENTRA screen contains four parts:
2 1
7.2. Part 1: Command access
In the case of a breakdown diagnostic, one or several commands can be selected successively.
■ Double-clickthe command to select it.
A message is displayed. It allows you:
■ To launch directly the command: click Run

(A).
■ To validate the command without launching
it: click OK (B).
This function is used to create a sequence A B C
of commands.
■ To cancel the command: click Cancel (C).

RAA023
7.3. Part 2: selected commands
■ If you click OK, the selected command is displayed in part 2 (A) of the window:
■ To cancel a pre-selected command, click the command in part 2 and cancel it (with delete keyboard
key).
7.4. Part 3: selected command(s) launching
■ Enter the number of times the command(s) will be launched in the Repeat times field (B).
By default, the command will be carried out only once.
■ To launch the command without a limit notion: select the Infinity times check box (C).
■ Click START (D) to launch the command.
■ Click STOP (E) to stop the command.
D
E
B
C

RAA023
7.5. Part 4: summary of information linked to the commands
■ When the command is launched, a message is displayed, informing that the selected command is
running.
The command can be stopped by clicking on the STOP button:
■ When the command is finished, some information is displayed in part 4.
The information present in each column is explained in the following table:

Designation of the column Corresponding information
"Command" Command number
"Date" Date and hour of the test
"Status" Status of the command (OK, ERR...)
"Initi.Lv" 0 to 6: Status of the ISE module after the command
"Na"
"K" Last values in memory*
"Cl"
"SEQ. Time" Cycle length (in seconds)
"ID#" Number of the selected command
"Config1" Value from 0 to 7 according to the selected electrode(s)**
"Config2" Not used
"Config3" Not used
"Config4" Not used
"Config5" Not used
"Config6" Not used
* Data can be displayed in these three columns while no analysis have been ordered.

RAA023
Example: without any value in memory, the following default values will be displayed:
NA K Cl
999.9 999.9 999.9
** The table below summarizes the relation between the indicated value and the selected electrode(s):
Electrode use setup
Na+ K+ Cl-
0 - - -
1 Yes - -
2 - Yes -
3 Yes Yes -
4 - - Yes
5 Yes - Yes
6 Yes Yes
7 Yes Yes Yes
The command 052 "Set system configuration" allows you to set the use of one, two or three
electrodes according to the binary weight (0=none and 7=all) assigned to the field "Config 1".
To check the change of configuration, launch the command 003.

RAA023
8. Command sequence to complete the

diagnostic
8.1. Communication test between the ISE module and the laptop
■ Command 002: "Request data"

If the status is "OK" (A), the communication between the ISE module and the laptop is established.
8.2. ISE module initialization to perform measurements
■ Command 052: "Set system configuration"

According to the electrode number present in the ISE module, mention the corresponding value in the
field 1 by referring to the information given in the table Electrode use setup, page 11.
The command 052 (B) allows:
- to initialize the ISE data table
- the transition from status 1 to status 2. The status 2 allows you to launch the mechanical initialization
of the module.
■ Command 053: "Initialization of mechanical system"

If the mechanical initialization is "OK" (C), the system is then in status 3.
■ Command 054: "Initialization of flow system"

If the flow system initialization is "OK" (D), the system evolves from status 3 to status 5. In status 5,
the flow system is initialized.
The status 4 is a "waking" status. See Status transition diagram, page 5.

The status 6 can be reached by using directly the command 067 "Waking up".

RAA023
■ Command 055: "Two point calibration"

This command makes the system available to perform measurements.
If the status is "OK" (E), the status 6 is reached.
■ If there is a problem during the calibration, an error 03 appears and the system stays in
status 5.
■ If there is no value in memory, the value 999.9 is displayed for each physically present
electrode.
■ All these sequences can be connected to reach directly the status 6 by using the command
051 "Global initialization".
D
E
8.3. Measurement sequences
To perform a measurement command, 50 µL of sample must be poured into the ISE mix cup right before
launching the command.
■ Command 057: "Measure serum"
The figure below is an example of repeatability performed with the Standard 1 which allows you to
compare directly the obtained values with the reference values on Cl, K and Na.

RAA023
9. Explanation of the main error messages
■ ERROR 02: communication problem between the ISE module and the instrument.
 Reset the Dummy PENTRA software and switch the ISE module off and on.
■ ERROR 03: this error message exists in different cases:
If the sample is missing or if it has been poured too late:

 Make sure that the sample is definitely present before lauching the command.
The system stays in status 6.
If the system is in "Keep ready":

 Wait for the end of the "Keep ready" cycle and launch again the command.
The system stays in status 6.
If there is a problem with the air sensor:

 Make sure that the air sensor is not obstructed.
 Readjust the air sensor sensitivity.
See RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 4. LB sensor adjustment, page 21
The sytem goes to status 4.
If there is a problem during the calibration:

 Order a new calibration.
The system goes to status 5.
■ ERROR 06: command not available in view of the ISE module status.

RAA023
10. End of operation
■ When the diagnostic is done, switch the Dummy PENTRA software off.
■ Disconnect your laptop from the ISE module.
■ Reconnect the null modem cable.
■ Reassemble the ISE module in reverse order.

■ Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE Position, page 42 and 6.4.5.
"Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.
■ Perform the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS537: ISE module check up
after intervention, page 1.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS540C
ISE module software version installation

versions:
RAS540: ISE module software version installation
Concerns
ISE module preparation
ISE software version loading
End of operation
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

Instrument software version
CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80 DAD124A (1201921124)

operations.
ISE module software version installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. ISE module preparation
■ Deselect the Activate ISE Module check

box in Services > System Configuration >
Analyser.
■ Install
the instrument software version corresponding to the ISE software version you need. See
RAS517: Software version installation, page 1.
■ For precautionary reasons, save the client

parameters (including database, system
configuration, parameters of the Customer
Services menu and column configuration)
by using the Save button in Services >
System Configuration > Local Settings.
■ Log in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password.

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer.
■ Press the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off.
■ Log in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.
■ From the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files and modify the name of the P400 Software folder
so that at the next instrument start, the instrument software is not launched and you are directly
logged in to Windows.

■ Dismantlethe ISE module until you reach the ISE software board (see RAS538: ISE module spare part
replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 ISE module software version installation
CPU-03N
(for ABX Pentra 400
only)
Rotary selector
■ If
your ISE module is equipped with the ISE
software board CPU-03N, use a flat
screwdriver to turn the rotary selector from
0 to F (located on the ISE software board).
Position F
Position 0
CPU-07N
(for Pentra C400 only)
SW1 switch
■ If
your ISE module is equipped with the ISE
software board CPU-07N, use a flat
screwdriver to change the SW1 switch
position from E to W (located on the ISE
mother board).
Position W
■ Disconnect the null modem cable from the ISE module.

RAA023
J5
■ On the instrument mother board, unplug the

RS232 cable from position J5.
■ Plug the RS232 cable into the ISE module.
If needed, use the CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80, ref. DAD124A (1201921124) to simplify
the connection between the RS232 cable and the ISE module.

RAA023
2. ISE software version loading
The following procedure is a generic procedure for the installation of ISE software versions.
The version numbers mentioned are shown as an example only.
The ISE software version installation procedure lightly differs depending on the ISE software
board you have on your ISE module: CPU-03N or CPU-07N.
Make sure to install the ISE software version compatible with your ISE software board.
2.1. ISE software board CPU-03N (for ABX Pentra 400 only)
■ From the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files\P400 Software\Exe\Tools\ISE\CPU03N and

launch the Ipl_load.exe file. The IPL Loader window is displayed.
■ Press Rom Info.
■ Inthe Information Address field, enter

"00010000" instead of "00000000".
■ Press
OK. Wait while the message "Just a
second..." is displayed.

RAA023
■ Make sure that the indicated ISE version

number corresponds to the latest software
version installed. For example 1.52.
■ Then, press OK.
■ Back to the IPL Loader window, press

Load.
■ Select the ISE software version to install.

For example 1.53.
■ Then, press Open.

RAA023
■ From
the IPL Loader window, press
RomWrite.
■ The following window is displayed.
■ Once the data transfer is finished, press

Rom Info and make sure that the indicated
ISE version number corresponds to the
version to install. For example 1.53.
■ Press
OK, then Cancel to close the IPL
Loader window.

RAA023
2.2. ISE software board CPU-07N (for Pentra C400 only)
■ From the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files\PC400 Software\Exe\Tools\ISE\CPU07N and

launch the IplActiveXClient.exe file. The IPL ActiveXClient window is displayed.
■ Select the ISE software version to be

installed, located in Tools\ISE\CPU07N (A).
For example: lp207iplv200.mot.
■ Press Initialize (B).
B A
■ Once the data transfer is finished, press Get

Info.

RAA023
Version currently installed Version to be installed
■ Inthe Status window, make sure that the

indicated ISE version number corresponds
to the version to install. For example 2.00.
■ Press OK to close the Status window.
■ Press Start.
■ When "Write completed" is displayed,

press OK to close IPL ActiveXClient
window.

RAA023
3. End of operation
■ From the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files and rename the P400 Software folder so that at
the next instrument start, the instrument software is launched.
■ Press the Windows Start button, press Shutdown and then Shutdown.
■ When getting the message "It is now safe to turn off your computer", switch the instrument off and
disconnect the power supply cable.
■ If your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-03N, use a flat screwdriver to turn
the rotary selector from F to 0 (located on the ISE software board).
Position F
Position 0
■ If your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-07N, use a flat screwdriver to change
the SW1 switch position from W to E (located on the ISE mother board).
Position E
■ Unplug the RS232 cable from the ISE module and plug it into the instrument mother board (J5). Then,
plug the null modem cable into the ISE module.
■ Reassemble the ISE module in reverse order.

■ Adjust
the sample arm in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower",
page 53.
■ Enable the ISE module by selecting the Activate ISE Module check box in Services > System
Configuration > Analyser.
■ Run a Global Initialization cycle in Services > Customer Services > ISE.

RAA023
Section 8: Exploded views
1. Reagent tray .................................................................................................. 8 - 3
2. Reagent tray closing assy ............................................................................ 8 - 6
3. Sample tray.................................................................................................... 8 - 7
4. Optical bench ................................................................................................ 8 - 8
5. Reaction tray ................................................................................................. 8 - 9
6. Cuvette changer.......................................................................................... 8 - 11
7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly ......................................................... 8 - 15
8. Cuvette changer load rack......................................................................... 8 - 16
9. Cuvette changer unload rack .................................................................... 8 - 17
10. Ventilation .................................................................................................. 8 - 18
11. Arms assembly.......................................................................................... 8 - 19
12. Sample arm................................................................................................ 8 - 23
13. Reagent arm .............................................................................................. 8 - 24
14. Arms assembly kits................................................................................... 8 - 25
15. Mixer assembly ......................................................................................... 8 - 26
16. Syringe assy .............................................................................................. 8 - 28
17. Wash cup assy .......................................................................................... 8 - 29
18. Fluid part .................................................................................................... 8 - 30
19. Covering..................................................................................................... 8 - 32
20. ISE module................................................................................................. 8 - 34
21. ISE module electrode holder ................................................................... 8 - 36

Exploded views
22. ISE module syringes ................................................................................. 8 - 37
23. Computer ................................................................................................... 8 - 38
24. Cooling unit ............................................................................................... 8 - 40

Exploded views
Reagent tray
1. Reagent tray
Reagent tray - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400
2
2
8
5
6 9
10
11
7
12
13
14
15
16
Mark P/n Designation Qty Sales unit Compatibility

1 GBM1354 (1203601354) COVER, REAG. INSULATED COVER 1 1 ALL
2 XBA587B (1209111587) FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400 9 1 ALL
3 CBC010A (1201681010) PCB, REAG. TRAY BARCODE READER 1 1 ALL
4 1300019579 ROLLER, REAGENT TRAY SUPPORT 3 1 ALL
5 XBA535BS (1209119535) SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. 1 1 ALL
6 XDA820D (1209134820) MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR 1 1 ALL
7 XEA809CS (1209159809) KIT, REAG TRAY TENSIONER ROLLER 1 1 ALL
8 GBM0940 (1203600940) HOLDER, REAG TRAY FAN HOLDER 8 1 ALL
9 XDA891AS (1209139891) HEATER, REAG. TRAY COOLING ASSY 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Reagent tray

10 GBM0945 (1203600945) PCB, ANTI-STATIC BRUSH 1 1 ALL
11 FAA071A (1202401071) O'RING, REAG.TRAY COOLING ASSY 4 Pack of 10 ALL
12 1300019590 ROLLER,REAG.TRAY MOTOR ROLLER 2 1 ALL
13 XEC186AS (1209179186) SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR 1 1 ALL
14 XBA573A (1209111573) SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR 1 1 ALL
15 XDA889AS (1209139889) ASSY, REAG.TRAY CLOSING ASSY 1 1 ALL
16 DAM010A (1201971010) PCB, REAG.TRAY CLOSING SOLENOID 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Reagent tray
Reagent tray - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1
2
8
3 9
10
4
11
5
12
13
14
15
6

1 CBC010A (1201681010) PCB, REAG. TRAY BARCODE READER 1 1 ALL
2 1300019590 ROLLER, REAG.TRAY MOTOR ROLLER 2 1 ALL
4 GBM0544 (1203600544) O'RING, PEELABLE SPACER R.TRAY 1 1 P400 V1
5 XDA820D (1209134820) MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR 1 1 ALL
6 XBA587B (1209111587) FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400 8 1 ALL
8 XEC186AS (1209179186) SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR 1 1 ALL
9 FAA071A (1202401071) O'RING, REAG.TRAY COOLING ASSY 4 Pack of 10 ALL
10 1300019579 ROLLER, REAGENT TRAY SUPPORT 3 1 ALL
11 XEA809CS (1209159809) KIT, REAG TRAY TENSIONER ROLLER 1 1 ALL
12 XBA573A (1209111573) SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR 1 1 ALL
13 EAA015A (1202201015) FITTING, ANGLE D=6 5 Pack of 5 ALL

Exploded views
Reagent tray closing assy
2. Reagent tray closing assy


Exploded views
Sample tray
3. Sample tray
3
9

1 XBA551A (1209111551) PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED 1 1 ALL
2 XDA888AS (1209139888) COVER, SAMPLE TRAY BLACK COVER 1 1 ALL
3 XEC019AS (1209179019) KIT, TUBE DETECTOR UPDATE KIT 1 1 ALL
4 CBC011A (1201681011) PCB, SAMP.TRAY BARCODE READER 1 1 ALL
6 XBA518A (1209111518) SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER 1 1 ALL
7 FBR023A (1202621023) BELT, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR BELT 1 1 ALL
8 XDA871B (1209132871) MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY 1 1 ALL
9 XBA531B (1209112531) PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Optical bench
4. Optical bench
1 6
7
3 8
4 9
10

1 XDA838B (1209132838) OPTICAL, OPT. BENCH LAMP LOCK 1 1 ALL
2 FCA026A (1202631026) OPTICAL, OPTIC BENCH MIRROR 1 1 ALL
1300028830 OPTICAL, LAMP P400 P400
3 1 1
GBM1326 (1203601326) OPTICAL, LAMP PC400 PC400
4 XDA858AS (1209139858) OPTICAL, CUV. EMISSION GUN+LENS 1 1 ALL
5 XDA857BS (1209139857) OPTICAL, LAMP EMISSION GUN+LENS 1 1 ALL
6 XEC106AS (1209179106) KIT, OPTICAL BENCH+COVERS 1 1 ALL
7 XDA854D (1209134854) OPTICAL, SPECTRO P400 >V5.06 1 1 ALL*
8 XAA483CS (1209109483) PCB, ACQU. BOARD P400 >V5.06 1 1 ALL*
9 XAA457BS (1209109457) PCB, PREAMPLIFIER BOARD P400 1 1 ALL
10 XDB114A (1209141114) OPTICAL, SPEC.EMISSION GUN+LENS 1 1 ALL
* For the ABX Pentra 400, the acquisition board ref. XAA483CS (1209109483) and the
spectrophotometer ref. XDA854D (1209134854) are compatible only if the instrument is
equipped with the software version V5.0.6 or higher.
The spectrophotometer ref. XDA854D (1209134854) is delivered with the acquisition board
cable ref. DAD134C (1201923134). This cable is not compatible with the ABX Pentra 400 V1,
the acquisition board cable ref. DAD134B (1201922134) must be used instead.

Exploded views
Reaction tray
5. Reaction tray
12
11
13
14
15
16
6
2
4 17
5 18
19
7 24
20
8 21
9
22
10 23

1 XDA855AS (1209139855) MOTOR, REACTION TRAY MOTOR 1 1 ALL
2 1300019574 ROLLER, REACT TRAY BRACKET ASSY 1 1 ALL
3 FAC027A (1202421027) ROLLER, TENSION. ROLLER SPRING 1 1 ALL
4 GBM1246 (1203601246) HOLDER, REAC.TRAY ADJUST PLATE 1 1 ALL
5 XDA856CS (1209139856) ROLLER, REAC.TRAY ADJUSTABLE 1 1 ALL
6 XEA833AS (1209159833) KIT, GROUND FITTING REAC. TRAY 1 1 ALL
7 1300019592 ROLLER, REACT.TRAY UPPER ROLLER 3 1 ALL
8 1300019591 ROLLER, REACTION TRAY LATERAL 2 1 ALL
9 1300019577 ROLLER, REACT.TRAY DOWN ROLLER 3 1 ALL

Exploded views
Reaction tray

KIT, REACTION TRAY ROLLERS KIT
Contains: 1 x XDA856CS (1209139856),
XEC080AS (1209179080) 1 1 ALL
3 x 1300019592, 3 x 1300019577,
2 x 1300019591
11 XDB038BS (1209149038) COVER, TOP COVER+HATCH NEW BO 1 1 ALL
12 XDA917AS (1209139917) ASSY, CUV. AUTO LOADING HATCH 1 1 ALL
13 GBM0975 (1203600975) SPRING, CUV. AUTO LOADING HATCH 1 1 ALL
15 XDB066A (1209141066) ASSY, CUVETTE HOLDER DISK 1 1 ALL
16 XDA853B (1209132853) ASSY, REACTION CROWN GEAR 1 1 ALL
17 XBA536A (1209111536) SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR 1 1 ALL
18 FAL009A (1202491009) SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL. 4 Pack of 12 ALL
19 XDB130B (1209142130) KIT, LOWCASE+FAN+HEAT 1 1 ALL
20 XBA533B (1209112533) FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN 1 1 ALL
21 XBA534C (1209113534) HEATER, REACTION TRAY 1 1 ALL
22 XEC028AS (1209179028) KIT, LOWER CASE ASSEMBLY 1 1 ALL
23 FAL005A (1202491005) SILENT BLOCK, FOR LOWER CASE 4 1 ALL
24 GBM1203 (1203601203) FILTER, LOWER CASE FOAM GRID 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Cuvette changer
6. Cuvette changer
Cuvette changer - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400
1
8
3 2
4 9
5
10
11

Exploded views
Cuvette changer

1 XBA554A (1209111554) MOTOR, TRANSLATOR MOTOR 1 1 ALL
2 CAE023A (1201531023) SWITCH, UNLOAD RACK SWITCH 2 1 ALL
3 FBR021A (1202621021) BELT, CUV.TRANSLATOR MOTOR BELT 1 1 ALL
4 XBA519A (1209111519) SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL. 1 1 ALL
5 KAP040A (1207551040) CLIP, CUVETTE GRABBER CLIP 1 Pack of 10 ALL
P400 V2, V3
6 XEC034AS (1209179034) MOTOR, UP/DOWN HANDLER MOTOR 1 1
PC400
P400 V2, V3
7 XDB111CS (1209149111) ASSY, CUV.CHANGER W/O FRAMES 1 1
PC400
P400 V2, V3
9 FBM008A (1202601008) CARRIAGE, CUV.HANDLER RAIL 1 1
PC400
10 FAC031A (1202421031) SPRING, HANDLER FINGER SPRING 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Cuvette changer
Cuvette changer - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1
2
9
3
4
5
6 1
7
10

1 CAE023A (1201531023) SWITCH, UNLOAD RACK SWITCH 2 1 ALL
5 XDA887AS (1209139887) ASSY, CUVETTE HANDLER FINGER V1 1 1 P400 V1
10 XBA555A (1209111555) MOTOR, UP/DOWN HANDLER MOTOR V1 1 1 V1
If the cuvette changer ABX Pentra 400 V1 needs to be replaced, order the cuvette changer
update kit ref. XEC033AS (1209179033). See Cuvette changer update kit, page 8-14.

Exploded views
Cuvette changer
Cuvette changer update kit

1

1 XEC033AS (1209179033) KIT, CUV. CHANGER V1->V2 UPDATE 1 1 V1

Exploded views
Cuvette changer carriage assembly
7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly
1 5
2 6

P400 V2, V3
1 XEC205AS (1209179205) KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY 1 1
PC400
P400 V2, V3
4 FBM008A (1202601008) CARRIAGE, CUV.HANDLER RAIL 1 1
PC400

Exploded views
Cuvette changer load rack
8. Cuvette changer load rack
1
2 9
4
6

1 XDA863DS (1209139863) ASSY, LOAD RACK ASSY 1 1 ALL
2 HAX0112 (1207230112) STICKER, RACK SENSOR WIRE COVER 1 Pack of 10 ALL
3 HAX0040 (1207230040) STICKER, LOAD RACK STICKER 4 Pack of 10 ALL
P400 V2, V3
4 XBA560BS (1209119560) ASSY, CUV. MOTION MOTOR 1 1
PC400
P400 V2, V3
5 DAL021A (1201961021) MOTOR, LOAD RACK MOTOR 1 1
PC400
7 XEA997AS (1209159997) KIT, LOAD RACK SUPPORT 1 1 ALL
8 XBA532DS (1209119532) SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD 1 1 ALL
9 GBM0669 (1203600669) STICKER, NON SKID FOR CUV. RACK 2 1 ALL

Exploded views
Cuvette changer unload rack
9. Cuvette changer unload rack

1 XDA864BS (1209139864) ASSY, UNLOAD RACK ASSY 1 1 ALL
2 GBM0905 (1203600905) ASSY, UNLOADING RACK RAILS 2 1 ALL

Exploded views
Ventilation
10. Ventilation

1 XBA393A (1209111393) FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80 1 1 ALL
2 XBA634A (1209111634) FAN, PC/LAMP 24 V FAN 1 1 ALL
The FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80 ref. XBA393A (1209111393) is located at the rear of the
instrument, right below the mother board.

Exploded views
Arms assembly
11. Arms assembly
Arms assembly - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400
2
3
4
7

Exploded views
Arms assembly

P400 V2, V3
1 GBM1113 (1203601113) COVER, LEFT ARM COVER 1 1
PC400
P400 V2, V3
2 GBM1112 (1203601112) COVER, RIGHT ARM COVER 1 1
PC400
3 FBR022A (1202621022) BELT, ARM ROTATION MOVEMENT 2 1 ALL
4 XBA541A (1209111541) MOTOR, UP/DOWN SAMPLE ARM MOTOR 1 1 ALL
6 XBA542B (1209112542) MOTOR, ROTATION ARM MOTOR 2 1 ALL

Exploded views
Arms assembly
Arms assembly - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1
4 6

Exploded views
Arms assembly

1 GBM0924 COVER, LEFT ARM COVER P400 V1 1 1 P400 V1
2 GBM0654 COVER, RIGHT ARM COVER P400 V1 1 1 P400 V1
3 FBR022A (1202621022) BELT, ARM ROTATION MOVEMENT 2 1 ALL
4 XBA541A (1209111541) MOTOR, UP/DOWN SAMPLE ARM MOTOR 1 1 ALL
6 XBA542B (1209112542) MOTOR, ROTATION ARM MOTOR 2 1 ALL
7 XBA540C* (1209113540) MOTOR, UP/DOWN REAG.ARM MOTOR 1 1 P400 V1
* The part number XBA540C (1209113540) is obsolete and replaced by the kit ASSY,
REAGENT ARM ASSY W/O JIB ref. XDA861CS (1209139861).

Exploded views
Sample arm
12. Sample arm
1
4
7
3

1 DBJ025A (1202131025) CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM 2 Pack of 2 ALL
2 GBM0675 (1203600675) TUBING, SAMPLE PIPE GUIDING 1 1 ALL
3 GBM1204 (1203601204) TUBING, ARM PIPE HOLDER 1 1 ALL
4 XEA827AS (1209159827) COVER, SAMPLE ARM JIB COVER 1 1 ALL
XBA563ET (1209119563) NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE P400
5 1 1
XBA847AT (1209119847) NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400 PC400
6 GBM0612 (1203600612) NEEDLE, SHOCK DETECTION SPRING 1 1 ALL
7 XAA486AS (1209108486) PCB, SAMPLE ARM DETECTION BOARD 1 1 ALL
To position the teflon tubing of the sample needle in the correct way on the mother board
cover, use the CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM ref. DBJ025A (1202131025).

Exploded views
Reagent arm
13. Reagent arm
5
2
3 6

1 DBJ025A (1202131025) CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM 2 Pack of 2 ALL
2 GBM0621 (1203600621) TUBING, REAGENT PIPE GUIDING 1 1 ALL
3 GBM1204 (1203601204) TUBING, ARM PIPE HOLDER 1 1 ALL
4 XEA826AS (1209159826) KIT, KIT REAG. ARM COVER 1 1 ALL
5 XBA564DT (1209119564) NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE 1 1 ALL
6 XAA500FS (1209109500) PCB, REAG.LEVEL DETECTION BOARD 1 1 ALL
To position the teflon tubing of the reagent needle in the correct way on the mother board
cover, use the CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM ref. DBJ025A (1202131025).

Exploded views
Arms assembly kits
14. Arms assembly kits
2 1 3

ASSY, SAMPLE AND REAGENT ARMS
Includes: 1 x XBA520A (1209111520), P400 V2, V3
1 XDA823E (1209135823) 1 1
1 x XBA815A (1209111815), 1 x XBA814A PC400
(1209111814)
2 XDA862CS (1209139862) ASSY, SAMPLE ARM ASSY W/O JIB 1 1 ALL
3 XDA861CS (1209139861) ASSY, REAGENT ARM ASSY W/O JIB 1 1 ALL
For the ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2: because the up/down reagent arm motor rotation way is
inverted, it is mandatory to replace the reagent arm vertical motor cable by the new one
(provided in the kit XDA861CS (1209139861)).

Exploded views
Mixer assembly
15. Mixer assembly
1 9
2 10
11
3 12
4 13
5
14
6 15
16
7
8

Exploded views
Mixer assembly

1 JAJ007AS (1207309007) ADHESIVE, TAPE FOR RACK L=1M 1 1 ALL
2 XDA837C (1209133837) ASSY, COMPLETE MIXER 1 1 ALL
3 XDB299AS (1209149299) KIT, MIXER ARM ASSY 1 1 ALL
5 XBA561D (1209114561) MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY 1 1 ALL
6 FAC030A (1202421030) SPRING, MIXER SHAFT SPRING 2 1 ALL
7 EBD007A (1202381007) AIR CYLINDER, MIXER 1 1 ALL
8 GBM0134 (1203600134) NEEDLE, MIXING PADDLE 1 1 ALL
9 GBM0633 (1203600633) COVER, MIXER ASSY COVER 1 1 ALL
10 FZZ009A (1202651009) CLIP, SMALL RUBBER BUMPER 5 Pack of 10 ALL
11 FAC023A (1202421023) SPRING, MIXER ARM SPRING 1 1 ALL
12 DBD007A (1202091007) O'RING, MIX PADDLE MOTOR CABLE 1 Pack of 10 ALL
13 DAL029A (1201961029) MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR 1 1 ALL
14 XDA835B (1209132835) CUP, MIXER WASH CUP 1 1 ALL
15 CAE006A (1201531006) SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-82 1 Pack of 5 ALL
16 XDA886AS (1209139886) CUP, MIXER WASH CUP SUPPORT 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Syringe assy
16. Syringe assy
6 7

1 XDA822C (1209133822) SYRINGE, SYR. BLOCK ASSY 1 1 ALL
2 XBA546A (1209111546) MOTOR, SYRINGE MOTOR 2 1 ALL
3 GBM1211 (1203601211) SPRING, SYRINGE BLOCK GND 1 1 ALL
4 CAE010A (1201531010) SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81 2 Pack of 5 ALL
6 B8078955 (1228078955) REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) 1 1 ALL
7 B8076812 (1228076812) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL) 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
Wash cup assy
17. Wash cup assy

1 GBM0773 (1203600773) CUP, WASH CUP OVERFLOW 1 1 ALL
2 XDA836A (1209131836) CUP, NEEDLE WASH CUP 2 1 ALL
3 GBM1198 (1203601198) CLIP, FOR REAGENT WASH CUP 1 1 ALL
5 XDA879AS (1209139879) CUP, NEEDLE WASH CUP SUPPORT 2 1 ALL

Exploded views
Fluid part
18. Fluid part
1 13 14
2
12 16
3
4
17
2
3 14
5
6 9
7 18
4 13
2 13 15
19
8
20
10 21
11
24
23
22
+ EAC015A (x1)
+ EAC015A (x3)

Exploded views
Fluid part

1 XCA197A (1209121197) FLUID, CONDENSATION MANIFOLD V1 1 1 P400 V1
2 EAA015A (1202201015) FITTING, ANGLE D=6 5 Pack of 5 ALL
3 EAA017A (1202201017) FITTING, STRAIGHT D=6 3 Pack of 5 ALL
4 EAC012A (1202221012) FITTING, STOPPER D=6 2 Pack of 5 ALL
5 XCA198B (1209122198) FLUID, OVERFLOW MANIFOLD 1 1 ALL
6 EAA022A (1202201022) FITTING, ANGLE 1/4" 1/8-27 2 Pack of 5 ALL
7 EAA023A (1202201023) FITTING, STRAIGHT 1/4"1/8-27 2 Pack of 5 ALL
8 1300015267 MANIFOLD, WITH VALVES V1 AND V2 1 1 ALL
9 EBA010A (1202351010) VALVE, 2 WAYS ELECTROVALVE 3 1 ALL
10 EAA006A (1202201006) FITTING, STRAIGHT I=3X19.5 1 Pack of 5 ALL
KIT, WIRED PRESSURE SENSORS WITH
11 1300015280 1 1 ALL
PCB
12 XCA193A (1209121193) FLUID, INTERNAL WATER TANK 1 1 ALL
13 EAC026A (1202221026) FITTING, FITTING S=20 7 Pack of 5 ALL
14 EAC025A (1202221025) FITTING, FITTING S=30 2 Pack of 5 ALL
15 FAA072A (1202401072) O'RING, INTERN.WATER TANK 1 1 ALL
16 XCA194B (1209122194) VALVE, 3 VALVES ASSY 1 1 ALL
17 EBA011A (1202351011) VALVE, 3 WAYS ELECTROVALVE 2 1 ALL
18 EZZ001A (1202391001) FITTING, STOPPER D=4 1 Pack of 5 ALL
19 XEC202AS (1209179202) PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET 1 1 ALL
20 XCA216BS (1209129216) PUMP, WASTE ASSY + METAL SHEET 1 1 ALL
21 FAL008B (1202492008) SILENT BLOCK, COMPR. ALL P120 4 Pack of 4 ALL
FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY
22 XBA574C (1209113574) 1 1 ALL
Includes: 3 x EAC015A (1202221015)
23 LBH004A (1207791004) FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER 1 1 ALL
FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY
24 XBA568F (1209114568) 1 1 ALL
Includes: 1 x EAC015A (1202221015)
EAC015A (1202221015) FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING 4 Pack of 5 ALL

Exploded views
Covering
19. Covering
13
1 14
15
3
4 16
17
5
18
6
19
7
8 20
9
21
22
10
23
11
12
26 25 24
27

Exploded views
Covering

1 XDA872CS (1209139872) COVER, TOP ISE COVER 1 1 ALL
HAX0301 (1207230301) STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL P400 P400
2 1 1
HAX0327 (1207230327) STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL PC400 PC400
3 GBM0793 (1203600793) COVER, BOTTOM ISE COVER 1 1 ALL
4 GBM0418 (1203600418) COVER, SAMPLE TRAY LEFT SIDE 1 1 ALL
5 XEC099AS (1209179099) COVER, SAMPLE TRAY RIGHT SIDE 1 1 ALL
6 GBM0883 (1203600883) COVER, POWER SUPPLY COVER 1 1 ALL
7 XDA932E (1209135932) COVER, REAGENT TRAY FRONT COVER 1 1 ALL
8 FAX009AS (1202529009) COVER, REAG. COVER FOAM EP=6 1 1 ALL
9 FAX012AS COVER, REAG. COVER FOAM EP=9 1 1 ALL
HAX0300 (1207230300) STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR P400 P400
10 1 1
HAX0343 (1207230343) STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR PC400 PC400
11 JAJ015AS (1207309015) COVER, REAG. COVER MAGNET. TAPE 1 1 ALL
12 GBM0901 (1203600901) COVER, P400 ADJUSTABLE FOOT 4 1 ALL
13 GBM0881 (1203600881) COVER, ARMS MAIN COVER ASSY 1 1 ALL
14 EBD006A (1202381006) AIR CYLINDER, COVER 3 1 ALL
15 GBM0886 (1203600886) COVER, SEGMENT HANDLER COVER 1 1 ALL
16 GBM0789 (1203600789) COVER, BACK REAGENT TRAY COVER 1 1 ALL
17 GBM0791 (1203600791) COVER, MIXER COVER BACK SIDE 1 1 ALL
18 XDA874CS (1209137874) COVER, LAMP HATCH 1 1 ALL
19 GBM0790 (1203600790) COVER, REACTION TRAY LEFT SIDE 1 1 ALL
20 XDA877BS (1209139877) COVER, MANUAL CUVETTE LOADING 1 1 ALL
21 CZZ030B (1201862030) PCB, SPEAKER 1 1 ALL
XBA682CS (1209119682) PCB, SPEAKER + HATCH USB
22 XBA735AS (1209119735) PCB, CONNECTION HATCH+USB 1 1 ALL
XDB112AS (1209149112) COVER, PC CONNECTION HATCH
23 XAA578A (1209101578) PCB, USB EXTENSION BOARD 1 1 ALL
24 XDA875BS (1209139875) COVER, REACTION TRAY RIGHT SIDE 1 1 ALL
25 FZZ048A (1202651048) COVER, WASH CUP HATCH PUSH-PUSH 1 1 ALL
26 GBM0882 (1203600882) COVER, PC COVER 1 1 ALL
P400 V2, V3
27 1300023001 COVER, REAG. DOOR REPAIR HINGES 1 1
PC400

Exploded views
ISE module
20. ISE module
1 2
3
3
5
4
6
7
8
10
20
11
19
12
18
13
21
17
14
15 16

Exploded views
ISE module

XDA843ES (1209139843) ISE, MODULE ASSY V1.53 P400 P400
1 1 1
XDB263AS (1209149263) ISE, MODULE ASSY V2.00 PC400 PC400
2 HAX0271 (1207230271) STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC 1 1 ALL
3 GBM0753 (1203600753) FLUID, ISE 280 ML BOTTLE CAP 1 1 ALL
4 GBM0751 (1203600751) FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW 1 1 ALL
5 GBM1266 (1203601266) FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML 1 1 ALL
6 GBM0752 (1203600752) FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE CAP 2 1 ALL
7 GBM0750 (1203600750) FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW 2 1 ALL
8 GBM1267 (1203601267) CUP, ISE BOTTLE SUPPORT 1 1 ALL
9 XBA635AS (1209119635) VALVE, ISE VALVE 1 1 ALL
10 XBA544C (1209113544) VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY 1 1 ALL
11 XDA921DS (1209136921) ASSY, ISE SYRINGES + MOTORS 1 1 ALL
XAA497E (3200448459) PCB, ISE SOFTWARE V1.53 P400 P400
12 1 1
XAA646A (3200375620) PCB, ISE SOFTWARE V2.00 PC400 PC400
13 XAA492CS (1209109492) PCB, ISE MAIN BOARD 1 1 ALL
14 EBA017A (1202351017) VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE 1 1 ALL
15 EBA018A (1202351018) VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE 1 1 ALL
16 XBA733AS (1209119733) VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY 1 1 ALL
17 HAX0141 (1207230141) STICKER, ISE ELECTRODE POSITION 1 1 ALL
18 XCA167A (1209121167) CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) 1 1 ALL
19 XDA892B (1209132892) CUP, ISE MIX CUP 1 1 ALL
20 GBM0870 (1203600870) COVER, ISE CUP COVER 1 1 ALL
21 XBA543A (3012277056) CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
ISE module electrode holder
21. ISE module electrode holder
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10

1 GBM0500 (1203600500) PCB, ISE ELECTR. SPRING CONTACT 6 1 ALL
2 GBM0607 (1203600607) DOOR, ISE ELECTRODE SUPPORT 1 1 ALL
3 A11A01738 ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E 1 1 ALL
4 A11A01739 ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E 1 1 ALL
5 A11A01740 ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E 1 1 ALL
6 GBM0746 (3014029452) FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE 1 1 ALL
7 XEA795AS (1209159795) DOOR, ISE CAGE DOOR 1 1 ALL
8 A11A01741 ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E 1 1 ALL
9 XDA923AS (1209139923) PCB, ISE PREAMPL. BOARD ASSY 1 1 ALL
10 XBA603A (1209111603) CABLE, ISE BOARDS GND WIRE 1 1 ALL

Exploded views
ISE module syringes
22. ISE module syringes
1 2 3 4 5
9
6

1 XDA921DS (1209136921) ASSY, ISE SYRINGES + MOTORS 1 1 ALL
2 XBA591A (1209111591) MOTOR, ISE SYR.MOTOR 1/150 1 1 ALL
3 XBA592A (1209111592) MOTOR, ISE SYR.MOTOR 1/75 1 1 ALL
4 XBA545B (1209112545) CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE 2 1 ALL
5 3200261156 SENSOR, OPTICAL CELL 2 1 ALL
6 XDA922BS (1209138922) SYRINGE, ISE SYR. BLOCK ASSY 1 1 ALL
7 FAA073A (1202401073) O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING 8 1 ALL
8 GBM0891 (1203600891) SYRINGE, ISE SYR. PISTON 4 1 ALL
9 GBM1372 (1203601372) SPRING, FOR ISE MOTOR SHAFT 2 1 ALL

Exploded views
Computer
23. Computer
Computer models from 1300013734
5
3 6
8
4

1 1300013893 PCB, PC ASSY FOR W7 TYPE 1300013734 1 1 ALL
3 XDB355A (1209141355) PCB, SCREEN COMPL. ASSY 1 1 ALL
PCB, HDD SATA 250 GO (for computer
4 1201772017 1 1 ALL
models from "CCC014J")
5 XBA507AS (1209119507) FAN, FOR COMPUTER P80 1 1 ALL
6 1300018920 CABLE, WITH SOUND AMPLIFICATION PCB 1 1 ALL
7 1300014030 PCB, RAM 4GB DDR3 1 1 ALL
PCB, MOTHER BOARD CONFIGURED FOR
8 1300023975 1 1 ALL
PC

Exploded views
Computer
Computer models < 1300013734
3
4

2 XAA511BS (1209109511) PCB, TOUCH PANEL FUTJI P80 1 1 ALL
CBT018A PCB, CD-ROM READER P80/P400 (for
computer models < "CCC014L")
3 1 1 ALL
CBT021A (1201771021) PCB, DVDRW PC CCC005L/CCC014L (for
computer models from "CCC014L")
XEC074AS (1209179074) PCB, HDD FOR PC<J + MASTER
4 1201772017 PCB, HDD SATA 250 GO (for computer 1 1 ALL
models from "CCC014J")
5 XBA507AS (1209119507) FAN, FOR COMPUTER P80 1 1 ALL
To check the spare parts compatibility with the different computer models in the field, please
refer to RAS392: Internal computer: 3. Computer parts replacement, page 8.

Exploded views
Cooling unit
24. Cooling unit
Cooling unit CU401
3 3*
1 4
5
11
6
2
12
10
13

Exploded views
Cooling unit

DZZ045F (1202196045) CHILLER, CU401 100 V 50-60 HZ
DZZ046F (1202196046) CHILLER, CU401 115 V 60 HZ (Not delivered
anymore)
1 1 1 CU401
1300012509 CHILLER, CU401 115 V 60 HZ
DZZ047F (1202196047) CHILLER, CU401 230 V 50 HZ
2 FAA102AS (1202409102) O RING, CU401 FOR PURGE TAP 1 1 CU401
CHILLER, FUSE HOLDER W/O FUSES (for
3 1300016611 1 1 CU401
DZZ045/046/047/048)
CHILLER, CIRCUIT BREAKER P/RST (for CU401
3* 1300013129 2 1
1300012509) 1300012509
DAR048A (1202001048) FUSE, FUSE 5X20 10 A T 250 V (for DZZ045/
047/048)
4 2 Pack of 10 CU401
DAR049A (1202001049) FUSE, 5X20 10 A TT 115 V CU401 (for
DZZ046)
CU400/
5 DAC034A (1201891034) CABLE, CHILLER CABLE 1 1
CU401
CU400/
6 XDB254AS (1209149254) CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR 1 1
CU401
7 XCA246BS (1209129246) TUBING, FOR COOLING UNIT 3.4 M 2 1 CU401
8 EAF022A (1202251022) FITTING, BARBED FOR CU401(X2) 2 2 CU401
CU400/
9 CBR030AS (1201761030) CHILLER, CTRL BOARD CU400-401 1 1
CU401
DAK038AS (1201952038) CHILLER, AIR FAN 115 V FOR CU401 (for
DZZ045/046 and 1300012509)
10 1 1 CU401
DZZ047/048)
EBC018AS (1202379018) CHILLER, CU401 PUMP 100 V 50-60 HZ
EBC017AS (1202379017) CHILLER, CU401 PUMP 115 V 60 HZ
11 1 1 CU401
12 CAE032AS (1201531031) CHILLER, FLOAT SWITCH FOR CU401 1 1 CU401
KIT, INTEGRATED CABLE CU401 115V 60HZ CU401
13 1300022713 1 1
(for 1300012509) 1300012509
The main fuses, ref. DAR048A (1202001048) or DAR049A (1202001049), are located in the
power plug.
■ Before opening the fuse holder, disconnect the cooling unit power plug!
■ Only use fine fuses with a nominal value as specified and with UL approbation!

Exploded views
Cooling unit
Cooling unit CU400
5
1
4
8
6

1 DZZ055A (1202191055) FILTER, COOLING UNIT FILTER 1 1 CU400
CU400/
2 DAC034A (1201891034) CABLE, CHILLER CABLE 1 1
CU401
DAR047A (1202001047) FUSE, FUSE 5X20 10 A TT 115 V (for
DZZ045/046)
3 2 Pack of 10 CU400
DAR033A (1202001033) FUSE, FUSE 5X20 8 A T 250 V (for DZZ047/
048)
4 DZZ056A (1202191056) VALVE, COOLING UNIT TAP P400 (+ tubing) 1 1 CU400
CU400/
5 XDB254AS (1209149254) CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR 1 1
CU401
6 CAE030AS (1201531030) CHILLER, FLOAT SWITCH FOR CU400 1 1 CU400
DZZ045/046)
7 1 1 CU400
DZZ047/048)
CU400/
8 CBR030AS (1201761030) CHILLER, CTRL BOARD CU400-401 1 1
CU401

Exploded views
Cooling unit
The main fuses, ref. DAR047A (1202001047) or DAR033A (1202001033), are located in the
power plug.
■ Before opening the fuse holder, disconnect the cooling unit power plug!
■ Only use fine fuses with a nominal value as specified and with UL approbation!

Exploded views
Cooling unit

Section 9: Additional spare parts
1. Tools............................................................................................................... 9 - 2
2. Kits ................................................................................................................. 9 - 3
3. Fuses .............................................................................................................. 9 - 3
4. Stickers .......................................................................................................... 9 - 4
5. Other consumables....................................................................................... 9 - 5

Additional spare parts
Tools
Please note that the complete list of spare parts and consumables is available in the TOOL,
CDROM SPARE PARTS CATALOG ref. RAX021 (1208417021).
1. Tools
P/n Designation Sales unit Compatibility

9200787 (1229200787) OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 1 ALL
1300017438 ABX PENTRA PRECITEST SOLUTION 1 ALL
A11A01758 ABX PENTRA QUALITEST SOLUTION 1 ALL
GBM1124 (1203601124) TOOL, DUMMY REAGENT NEEDLE 1 ALL
GBM1125 (1203601125) TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE 1 ALL
LAM009A (1207681009) TOOL, WSA ORAPI GREASE 200 ML 1 ALL
LAM014A (1207681014) TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 100 G 1 P400 V1
P400 V2, V3
LAM017A (1207681017) TOOL, CUV.CHANGER AXIS GREASE 1
PC400
LBC001A (1207761001) TOOL, PRECISION WIPES 1 ALL
MAA031A (1207811031) TOOL, PAIR OF PLIERS "DELRIN" 1 ALL
MAB097A (1207821097) TOOL, LENS DISMANTLING KEY 1 ALL
MAJ008A (1207881008) TOOL, RULER 30 CM 1 ALL
MZZ013A (1207921013) TOOL, PEN WITH SUCTION CUP 1 ALL
MZZ015A (1207921015) KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT 1 ALL
XDA893A (1209131893) TOOL, TEST SEGMENT 1 ALL
XDB097AS (1209149097) TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL 1 ALL
XEA381A (1209151381) TOOL, GREASE AIR+LIQ.SYR.MICROS 1 ALL
XEA768A (1209151768) TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 3.5 ML 1 ALL
XEA945BS (1209159945) TOOL, OPT. BENCH CLEANING KIT 1 ALL
XEA957AS (1209159957) TOOL, OPTICAL CLEAN WIPES (X10) 1 ALL
XEC003AS (1209178003) TOOL, ARMS ADJUSTING TOOLS KIT 1 ALL
XEC011AS (1209179011) TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT 1 ALL

Kits
2. Kits

XBA453D (1209114453) KIT, INST. BARCODE PS2 TOUCH 65 1 ALL
XEA766BS (1209159766) KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE 1 ALL
XEA792GS (1209159792) KIT, 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE 1 ALL
XEA794ES (1209155794) KIT, ISE 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE KIT 1 ALL
1300023765 KIT, WINDOWS MASTERS P400/C400 1 ALL
XEA873AS (1209159873) SPRING, P400 RACK SPRINGS KIT 1 ALL
XEA955DS (1209159955) KIT, SOUND+USB UPDATE KIT P400 1 P400
XEA975AS (1209159975) KIT, CHILLER/LOWER BOX FOAM KIT 1 ALL
XEC005AS (1209179005) KIT, SAMP TRAY SCREWS KIT P400 1 P400
XEC014AS (1209179014) KIT, TUBE CLIPS KIT P400 1 P400
XEC032AS (1209179032) KIT, SPRINGS SYRINGE P400 1 P400
XEC076AS (1209179076) CABLE, MIX PADDLE MOTOR P400 1 P400
XEC080AS (1209179080) KIT, REACTION TRAY ROLLERS KIT 1 ALL
XEC206AS (1209179206) KIT, BIOCHEMISTRY SCREWS 1 ALL
XEC273AS (1209171273) KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE 1 ALL
3. Fuses
P/n Designation Location Sales unit Compatibility

DAR014A (1202001014) FUSE, 3.15 A (5X20) ISE module Pack of 10 ALL
DAR055A (1202001055) FUSE, 5X20 T 6.3 A H Power supply Pack of 10 ALL
FUSE, FUSE 5X20 8 A T 250 V (for DZZ047/
DAR033A (1202001033) Cooling unit Pack of 10 CU400
048)
FUSE, FUSE 5X20 10 A TT 115 V (for
DZZ045/046)
FUSE, FUSE 5X20 10 A T 250 V (for DZZ045/
047/048)
FUSE, 5X20 10 A TT 115 V CU401 (for
DZZ046)

Stickers
4. Stickers

GBM0669 (1203600669) STICKER, NON SKID FOR CUV. RACK 1 ALL
HAX0040 (1207230040) STICKER, LOAD RACK STICKER Pack of 10 ALL
HAX0112 (1207230112) STICKER, RACK SENSOR WIRE COVER Pack of 10 ALL
HAX0141 (1207230141) STICKER, ISE ELECTRODE POSITION 1 ALL
HAX0152 (1207230152) STICKER, WATER FILTER 1 ALL
HAX0166 (1207230166) SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10 1 ALL
HAX0170 (1207230170) SAMPLE CUP RACK STICKERS 41-50 1 ALL
HAX0173 (1207230173) CAL SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 71-84 1 ALL
HAX0174 (1207230174) CTRL SAMP. RACK STICKERS 85-99 1 ALL
HAX0175 (1207230175) REAGENT RACK STICKERS 60-69 1 ALL
HAX0176 (1207230176) REAGENT RACK STICKERS 70-79 1 ALL
HAX0188 (1207230188) CAL REAG. RACK STICKERS 01-15 1 ALL
HAX0190 (1207230190) CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 30-44 1 ALL
HAX0191 (1207230191) CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 45-59 1 ALL
HAX0220 (1207230220) STICKER, ISE VALVE STICKER 1 ALL
HAX0230 (1207230230) STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400 1 ALL
HAX0256 (1207230256) STICKER, HOLDER DISK STICKERS 1 ALL
HAX0271 (1207230271) STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC 1 ALL
HAX0273 (1207230273) NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10 1 ALL
HAX0274 (1207230274) NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 11-20 1 ALL
HAX0277 (1207230277) NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50 1 ALL
HAX0280 (1207230280) NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84 1 ALL
HAX0281 (1207230281) NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99 1 ALL
HAX0288 (1207230288) STICKER, ISE SOLUTION POSITION 1 ALL
HAX0300 (1207230300) STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR P400 1 P400
HAX0301 (1207230301) STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL P400 1 P400
HAX0327 (1207230327) STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL PC400 1 PC400
HAX0334 (1207230334) PC400/P400 OPEN CAS. STICKER SHEET1 1 ALL
HAX0335 (1207230335) PC400/P400 OPEN CAS. STICKER SHEET2 1 ALL
HAX0343 (1207230343) STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR PC400 1 PC400

Other consumables
5. Other consumables

A11A01851 ISE, DUMMY ELECTRODE 1 ALL
1300024610 CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L 1 ALL
XEA828AS (1209159828) KIT, 4 HANDLES KIT 1 ALL
XEA935AS (1209159935) KIT, CL ELECTRODE CLEANING KIT 1 ALL

Other consumables

Section 10: Host connection
1. Physical connection.................................................................................... 10 - 2
2. Connection configuration on the instrument ........................................... 10 - 3

2.1. RS232 Configuration ............................................................................................................... 10 - 4
2.2. Query Mode ............................................................................................................................. 10 - 4
2.3. Handling spaces ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
2.4. Automatic Transmission to Host ............................................................................................. 10 - 4
2.5. Analyser Id ............................................................................................................................... 10 - 5
2.6. Host Tools................................................................................................................................ 10 - 5
3. Connection protocol ................................................................................... 10 - 5

3.1. Format type.............................................................................................................................. 10 - 5
3.2. Connection type ...................................................................................................................... 10 - 5
4. ASTM format ............................................................................................... 10 - 6

4.1. Exchange structure.................................................................................................................. 10 - 6
4.2. The different ASTM frames ...................................................................................................... 10 - 6
4.3. The different record structures ................................................................................................ 10 - 7
5. Bidirectional connection ............................................................................ 10 - 9

5.1. The instrument only sends data to the Host............................................................................ 10 - 9
5.2. The Host downloads data onto the instrument ....................................................................... 10 - 9
5.3. The instrument asks the Host for data (Query mode)............................................................ 10 - 10
6. Data exchange examples ......................................................................... 10 - 11

6.1. Example of Host query for one tube...................................................................................... 10 - 11
6.2. Example of response for one tube......................................................................................... 10 - 12
6.3. Example of result transmission.............................................................................................. 10 - 13
6.4. Example of bad data receipt.................................................................................................. 10 - 15
7. Connection test......................................................................................... 10 - 16
7.1. Physical test........................................................................................................................... 10 - 16
7.2. Software test.......................................................................................................................... 10 - 17
8. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 10 - 27
8.1. List of warnings about the connection .................................................................................. 10 - 27
8.2. Troubleshooting help ............................................................................................................. 10 - 28

Host connection
Physical connection
1. Physical connection
The instrument and the Host are connected by a RS232 serial connection, using a RS DB9 cable.
The RS serial port of the instrument, located at the rear of the instrument, is a DB9 male connector.
GND
5 5
9 9 A
4 4 n
H 8 8 a
o TXD TXD l
3 3
s y
t 7 7 s
RXD RXD
2 2 e
6 6 r
1 1
Abbreviation Full name Function

TD Transmit Data Serial data output (TXD)
RD Receive Data Serial data input (RXD)
GND Ground Ground

Host connection
Connection configuration on the instrument
2. Connection configuration on the instrument
First, it is important to define the laboratory working method i.e. to configure the loading mode in
Services > System Configuration > Analyser.
■ Identification mode: select this mode if all sample tubes are identified with barcode labels.
■ Position mode: select this mode if sample tubes with and without barcode labels are used on the
instrument.
IMPORTANT! To use the instrument in connected mode, it is mandatory to select the

Identification mode.
Then, the connection is configured on the instrument in Services > System Configuration > Host
connection.

Host connection
Connection configuration on the instrument
2.1. RS232 Configuration
Heading Description Format Default value

Speed selection: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
Bauds Radio button 9600
19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Parity Parity selection: None, Odd, Even Radio button None
Stop bit Stop bit selection: 1 Stop, 2 Stop Radio button 1 Stop
Profile Protocol selection: Xon/Xoff, None Radio button Xon/Xoff
2.2. Query Mode
This part is used to enable/disable the Query mode.

The Query mode allows the instrument to ask the Host if there is a programmed request corresponding
to the SID (Sample IDentification) read on the sample tray.
The Query mode is automatically disabled when the instrument operates in Position mode.
The Sending validated samples option is used to manually ask the Host for supplementary tests on
validated patient samples by using the corresponding function in the Work Balance menu or the Patient
Result list.
2.3. Handling spaces
This part is used to authorize the character "Space" on the left side of the Sample ID field.
■ If the check box is selected, then the character "Space" is allowed on the left side of the Sample ID
field when manually captured from the instrument as when loaded from the Host. On prints, the
character "Space" is indicated by a rectangle.
■ If the check box is deselected, then the character "Space" is not authorized on the left side of the
Sample ID field and is systematically deleted.
2.4. Automatic Transmission to Host
This part is used to enable/disable the automatic transmission of patient and/or control results to the
Host.

Host connection
Connection protocol
Three options of transmission are available:

■ Nothing: no transmission.
■ Order: transmission request by request after manual or automatic validation of the results (only for
patient results). The results of all the tests of a request must be validated in order to be transmitted.
■ Test: transmission test by test after manual or automatic validation of the results. The results of each
test are transmitted as soon as they are validated.
2.5. Analyser Id
This field is used to enter the identification number of the instrument by the Host.
2.6. Host Tools
This part is used to perform some operations regarding the Host connection.
See Host Tools, page 10-17.
3. Connection protocol
The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 connection protocol is both the language used for the transmission
of data between the instrument and the LIS (Laboratory Information System) and the way the data is
exchanged. For simplification, we will call protocol the way the data is exchanged and format the
language used.
3.1. Format type
The ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) format is the language used for the transmission
of data on the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400.
3.2. Connection type
There are two analyzer operating modes: monodirectional (i.e. unidirectional) and bidirectional. This is
inherent to the protocol.
On the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the bidirectional connection is used.

Host connection
ASTM format
4. ASTM format
The ASTM format was developed several years ago to standardize the connection between analysis
instruments and LIS. In fact, there were as many connection formats as companies providing
instruments. Each company may use a different protocol for each instrument.
The ASTM proposed one standard for the low level exchange protocol (E-1381) and another for the
format used for the transmission of clinical data (E-1394).
For more information, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra
C400" ref. RAA025, intended for IT Services Companies.
4.1. Exchange structure
At the protocol level, the data exchange is based on the following model:
- <ENQ> (ENQuiry) --> line pick-up request.

- <ACK> (ACKnowledge) --> correct acknowledgement, positive response to the line pick-up request.
- <STX> ..data.. <ETX> (Start of Text ..data.. End of Text) --> data transmission.
- <ACK> (ACKnowledge) --> acceptance of data receipt.
- <EOT> (End Of Transmission) --> end of message.
The characters <CR> (Carriage Return) and <LF> (Line Feed) are usually placed at the end
of frame for a better organization and reading.
4.2. The different ASTM frames
These different frames have an identifier that indicates the nature of transmitted data between <STX>
and <ETX>.
From Host To Host

H (full or shortened)
H
Header (grab) separator + sender ID + date and
separator
time
P P
Patient (patient data)
patient demography patient demography
Order (test request) O O
Result (results) R
Q Q
Query (Host interrogation)
if no request entered simple or multiple

Host connection
ASTM format
From Host To Host

C C
Comment (comments,
comments linked to comments linked to
optional)
patient / order patient / order / result
Terminator (give back, end of
L L
communication)
Three types of separators are used in these frames:

- | separates the fields
- ^ separates the parts of a field
- \ separates the repetitive fields.
4.3. The different record structures
4.3.1. Structure of Order transmission

- H (Header)
- ...P (Patient)
- ...C (Patient Comments) optional
- ......O (Order)
- ......C (Order Comments) optional
- L (Terminator)
The comment frames are optional.
Example
<-- <ENQ>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>1H|HEADER<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>2P|PATIENT DEMOGRAPHY<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>3O|ORDER<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>4L|TERMINATOR<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <EOT>
CKSM (Checksum): numerical value, calculated according to the transmitted characters, that ensures
the frame integrity.

Host connection
ASTM format
4.3.2. Structure of Result transmission

- H (Header)
- ...P (Patient)
- ...C (Patient Comments) optional
- ......O (Order)
- ......C (Order Comments) optional
- ......C (Run Alarms) optional
- .........R (Result)
- .........C (Flag Comments) optional
- .........R (Result)
- ...............................................
- ...............................................
- .........R (Result)
- L (Terminator)
The comment frames are optional.
Example
<-- <ENQ>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>1H|HEADER<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>2P|PATIENT DEMOGRAPHY<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>3O|ORDER<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>4R|RESULT<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>5L|TERMINATOR<CR><ETX>CKSM<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <EOT>
CKSM (Checksum): numerical value, calculated according to the transmitted characters, that ensures
the frame integrity.

Host connection
Bidirectional connection
5. Bidirectional connection
A bidirectional communication goes into both directions. This definition does not give any information
about the nature of transmitted data. We only know that the instrument and the LIS can exchange data
between themselves.
Using this connection type, the instrument can receive orders from the Host and then send results to the
Host.
Several operating modes are distinguished:

■ 5.1. The instrument only sends data to the Host, page 10-9
■ 5.2. The Host downloads data onto the instrument, page 10-9
■ 5.3. The instrument asks the Host for data (Query mode), page 10-10.
5.1. The instrument only sends data to the Host
In this case, the sample tubes are programmed on the instrument. The results are then sent to the Host,
and the Host confirms the data receipt (<ACK>, ACKnowledge).
ACK
5.2. The Host downloads data onto the instrument
ACK
ACK

Host connection
Bidirectional connection
Two management types are possible:

■ Barcode management
The sample tubes are labeled with barcodes and can be arranged randomly on the instrument. The
instrument reads these barcodes and searches for the associated requests in its own database
(Identification mode). Once the analyses have been performed, the instrument sends the results to the
Host.
This management type ensures a high secure data exchange.
■ Positionmanagement
The sample tubes are not labeled with barcodes and the worklist can be sent directly from the Host to
the instrument. Then, the worklist has to be managed on the instrument to affect a position to the
sample tubes loaded on the sample tray.
5.3. The instrument asks the Host for data (Query mode)
In this case, the laboratory must use barcodes. Starting the analyses, the instrument reads the barcode
labels of sample tubes (Identification mode) and asks the Host for the associated requests (Query
mode). The Host sends the corresponding requests to the instrument and once the analyses have been
performed, the instrument sends the results to the Host.
This operating mode is best used when several identical instruments are connected to the
LIS, resulting in one worklist per analyzer.

Host connection
Data exchange examples
6. Data exchange examples
6.1. Example of Host query for one tube
ENQ
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
EOT
Example of Host query for the SID (Sample IDentification) 2312019

--> from instrument to Host
<-- from Host to instrument
--> <ENQ>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>1H|\^&||||||||||P|E1394-97|20050111111131<CR><ETX>6A<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>2Q|1|^2312019||ALL||||||||0<CR><ETX>7C<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF
<-- <ACK>
--> <EOT>

Host connection
6.2. Example of response for one tube
ENQ
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
EOT
Example of response with a request previously entered from the Host for the SID 2312019
The Host sends the requests corresponding to the SID 2312019, read on the instrument.
<-- <ENQ>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>1H|\^&|||ABX|||||||P|E1394-97|20050111111502<CR><ETX>47<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<--
<STX>2P|1||PID001||NAME^FIRSTNAME||19641223|M|||||PRESCRIPTOR||||||||||||LOCATION<CR><ETX>
14<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>3C|1|I|PATIENT COMMENT|<CR><ETX>38<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>4O|1|2312019||^^^13\^^^12\^^^14\^^^32\^^^34\^^^37\^^^39|||19900522105500||||A||||1
<CR><ETX>4F<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>5C|1|I|ORDER COMMENT<CR><ETX>A1<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>6L|1|N<CR><ETX>09<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <EOT>

Host connection
Example of response without request previously entered from the Host for the SID 2312019
<-- <ENQ>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>1H|\^&|||ABX|||||||P|E1394-97|20050111111502<CR><ETX>47<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>2Q|1|^2312019||||||||||X<CR><ETX>AC<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <STX>3L|1|N<CR><ETX>06<CR><LF>
--> <ACK>
<-- <EOT>
The reason why information systems have problems accepting the protocol, regardless of the
protocol type used, often lies with the LIS connection driver development. This connection
level requires great attention. As all the fields (identifiers) are not mandatory, the Host first
needs to be asked to give as little information as possible and then to add information by
studying several possible cases depending on the tubes.
For more information, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra
C400" ref. RAA025, intended for IT Services Companies.
6.3. Example of result transmission
ENQ
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
EOT

Host connection
Example of result transmission for the SID 2312015

--> <ENQ>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>1H|\^&|||01|||||||P|E1394-97|20031118162410<CR><ETX>D7<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>2P|1||PID12345||LASTNAME^FIRSTNAME||19641223|M<CR><ETX>C4<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>3C|1|I|Patient Comment|G<CR><ETX>FF<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>4O|1|2312015||||20031118154703|20031117000000||||||||1|Prescriptor|||||||||F||||Location<CR>
<ETX>EE<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>5C|1|I|Order Comment|G<CR><ETX>28<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>6R|1|^^^1002^RATIO|5.54|2||A||F|||18991230000000<CR><ETX>1D<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>7C|1|I|Flag^NORM_RANGEL|I<CR><ETX>69<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>0R|2|^^^13^ALB|5.5494|6||H||F|||20031118162203<CR><ETX>7E<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>1C|1|I|Flag^NORM_RANGEH|I<CR><ETX>5F<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>2R|3|^^^29^IRON1|-0.01262|6||L||F|||20031118162215<CR><ETX>76<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>3C|1|I|Flag^NORM_RANGEL|I<CR><ETX>65<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <STX>4L|1|N<CR><ETX>07<CR><LF>
<-- <ACK>
--> <EOT>

Host connection
6.4. Example of bad data receipt
ENQ
ACK
NACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
EOT
When a data is received incorrectly, the <NACK> (Not ACKnowledge) response asks the same data to
be transmitted again.

Host connection
Connection test
7. Connection test
This document can be used to make sure that the connection on the instrument is well-configured, and
that the instrument receives orders and sends results correctly.
The physical connection (cable) and the LIS configuration are managed by the IT Services
Company.
Required tools
- RS DB9 cable ref. DAC028A (1201891028)
- Laptop with a free COM serial port or a serial/USB adaptor
- WinASTM software
7.1. Physical test
Use your RS DB9 cable and your simulator to test the physical connection (cable).
If the connection works properly with your RS DB9 cable and your simulator (see 7.2.2. Using the
WinASTM software, page 10-20), connect the instrument and your simulator with the customer cable
and test the communication again.
If the communication does not work, ask the IT Services Company to check and replace the customer
cable.
If the communication works, ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Host connection
Connection test
7.2. Software test
7.2.1. Using the instrument software
Host Tools
Go to Services > System Configuration > Host connection.
■ Reset connection
Press the Reset connection button to reinitialize the connection process (COMSIL).
If the connection process does not work, it is reinitialized after user confirmation.
If the connection process works properly, a message informs the user and the connection
process is not reinitialized.
■ PurgeHost orders
Press the Purge Host orders button to suppress the pending data receipts.
The pending data receipts are suppressed after user confirmation.

Host connection
Connection test
■ Test
communication
Press the Test communication button to test the communication with the Host.
Once the test is done, a message is displayed in the Received character field.
Message Description
ACK (ACKnowledge) Correct acknowledgement, positive response to the test.
XXX Incorrect acknowledgement, negative response to the test.
Time Out Response to the test not received on time.
Process NOK The connection process (COMSIL) does not work.
The Test communication button is accessible only if no data receipt/transmission is in

progress.
■ Connection Spy
Press the Connection Spy button to visualize the frames of the communication with the Host, and
search for a character string in these frames.
The following screen is then displayed:
This screen opens in Display mode. In this mode, you can only visualize the frames of the
communication with the Host. The screen is refreshed at each new frame, the last frame is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
Press the Search button to turn to Search mode.
In Search mode, the screen is not refreshed anymore. You can search for a character string in the
displayed frames as follows:
- Type the character string in the Text to Find field (30 characters max.).
- If necessary, select the Case Sensitive and/or Whole Words check boxes.
If the Case Sensitive check box is selected, the search takes into account the use of
uppercase or lowercase.
If the Whole Words check box is selected, the search is done on the complete character
string.

Host connection
Connection test
- Choose the search direction (Forward, Backward) by selecting the corresponding radio button.
- Then, launch the search by pressing the Next button.
Press Cancel to turn to Display mode.
Check of instrument data receipt
The purpose of this procedure is to make sure that a pending data receipt, created in the
Rs_Data folder, is integrated correctly by the instrument software, and so that the connection
on the instrument is well-configured.
■ Create the following file with a text editor:

H|\^&|||HOST LAB
P|1||115189||MR^STI||20031124|M|||||-||||||||||||
O|1|2402313||^^^39|R||20040224115200||||N||||1
L|1
Press Alt Gr + 6 to enter the character "|".
■ Save
this file as follows:
Astm161007104845813.rcv
■ Put this file in the Rs_Data folder.
If the connection is well-configured, the order should be integrated correctly by the instrument software
and created in Worklist > Patient.
If not, check the connection configuration on the instrument and make sure that the test corresponding
to the channel #39 (used above) is enabled.
Check of instrument data transmission
The purpose of this procedure is to make sure that a pending data transmission, created in
the Rs_Data folder, is sent correctly by the instrument software, and so that the connection
on the instrument is well-configured and the communication with the Host works properly.
■ Create the following file with a text editor:

H|\^&||||||||||P|E1394-97|20040226162323
P|1|||||||U
O|1|20040216004||||20040216141034|20040216000000||||||||1||||||||||F
R|1|^^^18^C_Chol|2.27|12||H||F|||20040216141911
L|1|N
■ Save
this file as follows:
Astm260204162323245.trx
■ Put this file in the Rs_Data folder.
If the connection is well-configured, the result should be sent correctly by the instrument software (the
file disappears from the Rs_Data folder) and should be received by the Host.
If not, test the physical connection (cable) and ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS
configuration and that the test corresponding to the channel #18 (used above) is enabled.

Host connection
Connection test
■ TheRs_Data folder contains temporary files, created during the communication with the Host.
These temporary files are named as follows: AstmddMMyyhhmmsszzz (date, time, three-digit number)
and the following file extensions are possible.
File extension Description

.r* Data receipt from Host to instrument.
.rcv Pending data receipt.
.rrr Data receipt with incorrect ASTM format.
.rer Data receipt with an error (see warning #620).
.t* Data transmission from instrument to Host.
.trx Pending data transmission.
.ter An error appears during the communication with the Host.
Successful data transmission. Note: These files are quickly
.tok
suppressed.
■A file SEND_TO_SIL can appear in the Rs_Data folder, this file lists the status of data
transmissions from instrument to Host in case of "GeneralException" error (for example).
■ During the instrument initialization, the following message can be displayed:
"Transmission not successful, do you want to continue to process queued messages?".
This message means that data transmissions are pending in the Rs_Data folder.
Press Yes to send the pending data transmissions as soon as the communication with the
Host is running.
Press No to suppress the pending data transmissions.
7.2.2. Using the WinASTM software
The WinASTM software should be used only for connection tests on HORIBA Medical
instruments.
■ The purpose of this procedure is to simulate the Host, using the WinASTM software on a
laptop, to send an order to the instrument and to receive a result from the instrument.
■ This procedure consists in simulating the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument
and checking the result receipt once the analysis has been performed.
Installation of the WinASTM software

■ Download the WinASTM_x.x.x(x.x.x.x).exe file on a laptop (example: WinASTM_1.0.0(1.0.0.2).exe).
■ Double-click the .exe file and follow the instructions displayed to install the WinASTM software.

Host connection
Connection test
Connection configuration on the WinASTM software

The connection on the WinASTM software must be configured according to the connection parameters
configured on the instrument in Services > System Configuration > Host connection.
■ Note down the connection parameters configured on the instrument in Services > System
Configuration > Host connection.
■ Enter these connection parameters on the WinASTM software in Configuration > RS and Sockets
Settings.
■ Click Save and quit to save the connection configuration.

Host connection
Connection test
Configuration of test T1 on the WinASTM software

To simulate the transmission of a test T1 order, the test T1 must be previously configured on the
WinASTM software.
■ Go to Configuration > Other Settings.

■ Click Add One Row.
■ Enter the channel #600 corresponding to the test T1 in the available field.
■ Click Save and quit to save the test T1 configuration.

Host connection
Connection test
Creation of a test T1 order on the WinASTM software

■ Click the Database Records tab.
■ Create a test T1 order by filling the Patient and Order fields as follows:
2
2
5 5
1. Select the Modify check box to access modification function.

2. Use the Patient Index # displayed in the left window to fill the Patient Index field in the right window.
3. Use the current date to fill the Collection Date field with the following format: yyyyddMM.

Host connection
Connection test
4. Select the channel #600 corresponding to the test T1 in the Test scrolling list. Note: If the channel
#600 does not appear in the scrolling list, close and reopen the WinASTM software.
5. Do not forget to click Modify Current Patient/Modify Current Order to save the Patient/Order
fields.
For more information about the different fields, please refer to the document "Output formats
ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025, intended for IT Services Companies.
Test of communication between the instrument and the WinASTM software

■ Go to Services > System Configuration > Host connection.
■ Press the Test communication button to test the communication with the WinASTM software.
■ Once the test is done, make sure that the message displayed in the Received character field is ACK
(ACKnowledge).
Simulate the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument

■ Before simulating the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument, check the status of the
instrument. It must be Ready.
The control solution for the test T1 must be configured and physically positioned on the sample tray
(you can use distilled water in place of the control solution).
Two vials of distilled water (15 mL and 10 mL) must be configured as a reagent for the test T1 and
physically positioned on the reagent tray.
The calibration for the test T1 must be performed.
■ Then, check the status of the WinASTM software.

The WinASTM software must be connected to the instrument i.e. the status buttons must be as
follows:
If not and the status buttons are as follows:
1 2
Press (1), then (2) to connect the WinASTM software.

If it does not work, check the connection configuration, test the physical connection (cable) and test
the communication using the Host Tools in Services > System Configuration > Host connection.
■ Choose the protocol:

On the WinASTM software, there are two protocols "ASTM" and "LIS1/2A".
The "LIS1/2A" protocol corresponds to the ASTM protocol with an extended transmission capacity
(64 octets -> around 65000 octets).
To switch between "ASTM" and "LIS1/2A" protocols, use the button below:
When "ASTM" is displayed, "LIS1/2A" protocol is selected.

When "LIS1/2A" is displayed, "ASTM" protocol is selected.

Host connection
Connection test
■ Once the test T1 order is created from the Database Records tab, click Send Current Patient With
His Orders to send the test T1 order to the instrument.
■ Click the Console tab to visualize the sent frame.

Host connection
Connection test
■ The order should be correctly integrated by the instrument software and created in Worklist > Patient.
If not, check on the instrument: the instrument status, the loading mode configuration and the
connection configuration. Check on the WinASTM software: the status buttons, the connection
configuration and make sure that the test T1 order is correctly created.
■ In Worklist > Patient, open the order and select the rack position of the control solution physically
positioned on the sample tray. Press OK to validate.
Then, press Start to run the analysis.
■ Once the analysis has been performed, check the result receipt on the WinASTM software.

Host connection
Troubleshooting
8. Troubleshooting
8.1. List of warnings about the connection

The sample ID in brackets,
programmed from the Host,
This Sample ID [%s] is a
Warning 604 contains the "AUTO_SID" Modify the Sample ID from the Host.
reserved code
prefix.
[%s] = Sample ID.
The patient ID in brackets,
programmed from the Host,
This Patient ID [%s] is a
Warning 605 contains the "AUTO_SID" Modify the Patient ID from the Host.
reserved code
prefix.
[%s] = Patient ID.
A request, programmed from
L.I.S. order can't be the Host, does not comply
performed for SID [sample with the ASTM format. The Check and modify the request from
Warning 620
ID]: incorrect value [value] in fields sample ID, action code the Host.
field [field] or sample type contain an
incorrect value.
LIS order cannot be
performed. No order There is no O frame (Order) Ask the IT Services Company to
Warning 644
information available for PID for the P frame (Patient). check the LIS configuration.
[patient ID].
LIS order cannot be
performed: communication/
There is no P frame (Patient) Ask the IT Services Company to
Warning 645 protocol error. Order
for the O frame (Order). check the LIS configuration.
information for SID [sample
LIS order cannot be
performed: communication/ There is no O frame (Order)
Ask the IT Services Company to
Warning 646 protocol error. Patient for the P frame (Patient).
check the LIS configuration.
information for PID [patient Interrupted communication.
LIS order cannot be
performed: communication/
There is no L frame
protocol error. Information for Ask the IT Services Company to
Warning 647 (Terminator) before <EOT>
PID [patient ID] and related check the LIS configuration.
(End of Transmission).
orders SID(s): [sample ID]
could not be processed.
LIS communication/protocol There is no P frame (Patient)
Warning 648 error. Comment information or O frame (Order) for the C
could not be processed. frame (Comment).

Host connection
Troubleshooting

The Q frame (Query) comes
with a P frame (Patient) or a O
frame (Order) although only
LIS communication/protocol the H frame (Header) and the
Warning 649 error. Query information L frame (Terminator) are
could not be processed. authorized with the Q frame.
At least two Q frames comes
together although only one Q
frame is authorized.
A request, programmed from
the Host, has one or several
rejected tests. Each rejected
test contains one of the
following errors.
- "Channel error": The test
L.I.S. order with SID [sample field does not contain a
ID] error. The following tests channel number.
Check and modify the request from
Warning 650 are rejected: [test no.1 - "Disabled": The test is
the Host.
(reason no.1), test no.2 disabled on the instrument.
(reason no.2), etc]. - "Not configured": The test
is not configured on the
instrument.
- "Sample type
incompatible": The sample
type of the test does not
match the sample.
8.2. Troubleshooting help
No order is integrated by the instrument software and created in Worklist > Patient.
When the instrument is used in connected mode, it is mandatory to select the Identification mode even
if the laboratory does not use barcodes.
When the Position mode is selected, no order is integrated by the instrument software and created in
Worklist > Patient whereas the connection on the instrument is well-configured. In this mode, the
instrument can only send results to the Host.
It is impossible to add, from the Host, a supplementary test for a SID

Check, from the Host, the value in the Action Code field (field 9.4.12, please refer to the document
"Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025).
For the first request, the Action Code field must be "N" (New request) and when a supplementary test
is added from the Host, the Action Code field must be "A" (Add request).
This setting must also be respected when using the WinASTM software.
Incorrect sample type

An order is not integrated by the instrument software if the sample type specified in the order does not
correspond to the requested test.
It is mandatory to specify correctly the sample type in the Specimen Descriptor field (field 9.4.16,
please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025).

Host connection
Troubleshooting
Please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025
for more information about the ASTM fields.

Host connection
Troubleshooting

Section 11: Maintenance
1. Preventive maintenance ............................................................................. 11 - 2

1.1. Maintenance by customers .....................................................................................................11 - 2
1.2. 6 month maintenance ..............................................................................................................11 - 3
1.3. Yearly maintenance .................................................................................................................11 - 3
2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ..................................... 11 - 4
3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 11 - 7
3.1. Procedure list ...........................................................................................................................11 - 7
3.2. Maintenance check up summary .............................................................................................11 - 8
RAS378: 6 month maintenance
RAS379: Yearly maintenance
RAS393: Check up after intervention
RAS377: Covers dismantling
RAS380: Reagent tray
RAS381: Sample tray
RAS382: Reaction tray
RAS548: Fan and heater replacement
RAS383: Optical bench
RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning
RAS386: Mixer
RAS385: Arms
RAS384: Cuvette changer
RAS392: Internal computer
RAS390: Power supply replacement
RAS391: Mother board replacement
RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment
RAS387: Syringe block assembly replacement
RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement
RAS533: Windows master installation
RAS517: Software version installation
RAS518: Reagent applications installation
RAS542: Printer installation
RAS814: External barcode reader
RAS624: Cooling unit

Maintenance
Preventive maintenance
1. Preventive maintenance
1.1. Maintenance by customers
Maintenance procedures have to be carried out according to the recommended frequency

table and after having attended a HORIBA Medical approved customer training course.
The system warranty may be affected if damage appears after a non trained technician
intervenes or if replaced spare parts and consumables do not come from HORIBA Medical
approved origin.
1. Daily maintenance procedures

No special maintenance or adjustment has to be done on your instrument if the recommended start up
and shutdown procedures are explicitly respected.
Please refer to your user manual and daily guide.
2. Weekly maintenance procedures

An overall check for cleanness of the instrument is recommended every week.
Please refer to the instrument cleaning and decontamination procedure in your user manual.
If the instrument is switched off for one week at least:

■ remove the reagents from the tray, close them and place them in a refrigerated area,
■ then, switch the cooling unit off.
If the instrument is equipped with ISE module, you have to shut down the ISE module first.
See Section 7: ISE module, 1.6.3. ISE module shutdown, page 7-32.
The table below lists the maintenance procedures and their frequencies.
For more detailed information, please refer to your user manual and daily guide.
Maintenance Frequency
Without mixer: Daily
Needles cleaning with Deproteinizer
With mixer: Weekly
Reagent needle cleaning (external part) Monthly
Wash towers cleaning Monthly
Syringe plunger tips replacement Monthly
Precision test Monthly
Cooling unit (CU400) filter cleaning Monthly
Cooling unit (CU401) condenser cleaning Monthly
Glycol level checking Bimonthly
Filter replacement Bimonthly
Syringes replacement As needed
Needles replacement As needed
Mixer paddle replacement As needed
Lamp replacement As needed
Instrument cleaning and decontamination As needed
Applications update As needed
Software update As needed

Maintenance
Preventive maintenance
1.2. 6 month maintenance
See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, page 1.
KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEA766BS (1209159766)
P/n Designation Qty

9001072 (1229001072) FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE 1
B8078955 (1228078955) REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) 1
B8076812 (1228076812) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL) 1
3027030 (1223027030) CLAMP, TUBE D7 2
1.3. Yearly maintenance
See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, page 1.
KIT, 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE XEA792GS (1209159792)
P/n Designation Qty

XEA768A (1209151768) TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 3.5 ML 1
1300024610 CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L 2
DZZ055A (1202191055) FILTER, COOLING UNIT FILTER 1
LBH003A (1207791003) REAGENT, 5 L KEG FOR RINSE SPS 1
HAX0239 (1207230239) GLYCOL STICKER 1
JAB010A (1207251010) CASE USDD40 500x400x250 1
DBJ025A (1202131025) CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM 4
XEA766BS (1209159766) KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE 1

Maintenance
Prevention against the electrostatic discharges
2. Prevention against the electrostatic

discharges
■ The electronic boards are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD).

■ The damages are not always immediately visible, but can be detected over the course of time.
In order to prevent those risks, the use of an antistatic kit is MANDATORY.
2.1. The antistatic kit ref. MZZ015A (1207921015)
■ An antistatic ground mat is one of a number of antistatic devices designed to help eliminate static
electricity. This mat has a conductive material embedded within, which collects the static. The mat
would need to be grounded (earthed). This is usually accomplished by plugging it into the grounded
line in an electrical outlet. It is important to discharge at a slow rate, therefore a resistor should be
used in earthing the mat. This ground mat allows you to connect an antistatic wrist strap.
■ The antistatic kit is composed of:
- An antistatic mat with 2 female snaps:

Maintenance
- A wrist strap:
- A ground cord (for the wrist strap):
- A crocodile clip:
- A second ground cord (for the crocodile

clip):

Maintenance
2.2. How to use the antistatic kit
■ Connect the second ground cord to a snap

of the antistatic mat and install the crocodile
clip on its other end.
■ Connect the crocodile clip to the earth

outlet.
■ Install
the wrist strap on the first ground
cord and connect the first ground cord to
the second snap of the antistatic mat.
■ Put the bracelet around your wrist.
■ The antistatic kit is ready for use:
To ensure a good contact, ensure that the wrist strap is correctly tightened around your wrist.

Maintenance
Procedures
3. Procedures
■ Maintenance and adjustments required for the instrument are divided into procedures
according to the concerned assemblies. This should make any update easier as all
interventions can be done with the corresponding procedure on its own.
■ For ISE module procedures, please refer to the ISE module specific section (see Section 7:
ISE module, 3. Procedures, page 7-42).
1 - Procedures must be performed on a clean instrument. If the instrument is suspected not

to be perfectly clean, perform a cleaning procedure.
2 - Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator.
3 - When the Diagnostics menu is used, the security switches are disabled and it is therefore
recommended to be extremely cautious.
3.1. Procedure list
The procedures are sorted by theme and instrument sub-assembly.
Category P/n and designation Concerns

Instrument and cooling unit installation - First start of the
Installation RAS376: Installation instrument - Mechanical check - Reagent application
installation - Check up
Decontamination - Filter and Syringes replacement -
Cooling unit maintenance - Mechanical adjustments -
Photometer, temperature and pumps check up -
Pressure sensors calibration
Maintenance
Greasing and cleaning - Cooling unit maintenance -
6 month maintenance
Check up of the instrument pipetting accuracy and
precision
Covers RAS377: Covers dismantling Dismantling of all the instrument covers
Dismantling, parts replacement and adjustment of the
Reagent tray RAS380: Reagent tray
reagent tray
Sample tray RAS381: Sample tray
sample tray
reaction tray
Reaction tray
Reaction tray lower box dismantling - Fan and Heater
replacement - Temperature and Glycol circuit check
Dismantling of the optical bench - Mirror and lenses
cleaning and replacement - Check up
Optical bench
RAS656: Partial condensing lens
Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side)
cleaning
Mixer paddle replacement - Dismantling and
Mixer RAS386: Mixer replacement of the mixer assembly - Parts replacement
- Adjustment

Maintenance
Procedures
Category P/n and designation Concerns

Needles replacement - Dismantling and parts
Arms RAS385: Arms replacement of the arms assembly - Adjustment of the
arms - Level and shock detection check
Cuvette changer rack dismantling - Parts replacement -
Cuvette changer RAS384: Cuvette changer
Adjustment
Computer RAS392: Internal computer Computer dismantling and parts replacement
RAS390: Power supply replacement Dismantling and replacement of the power supply
RAS391: Mother board replacement Dismantling and replacement of the mother board
Electricity
RAS394: Sensors check and
Check and adjustment of all the instrument sensors
adjustment
RAS387: Syringe block assembly
Dismantling and mounting of the syringe block assembly
replacement
RAS389: Waste and water pumps
Dismantling and replacement of the pumps
Hydraulics replacement
Pressure sensors and pressure board replacement -
RAS442: Pressure sensors Pressure board voltage adjustment - Pressure sensors
activation, configuration and calibration
RAS533: Windows master installation Windows master installation
Software version downloading - Software version
installation
Software RAS518: Reagent applications Reagent applications downloading - Reagent
installation applications installation
RAS542: Printer installation Driver installation - Printer selection
RAS814: External barcode reader Installation - Configuration - Barcode reading test
Dismantling - Air fan, float switch, control board,
Cooling unit RAS624: Cooling unit
pressure sensor, pump replacement
3.2. Maintenance check up summary
A maintenance check up summary is provided in this manual (see on next page) to ensure the
maintenance follow-up. This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for
customer archives.

HORIBA ABX SAS
BP 7290
34184 Montpellier Cedex 4 - FRANCE
Phone: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16
Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17
ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400

Check-up maintenance
6 month Yearly
- CU401: Condenser cleaning
- CU400: Filter cleaning
X
See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 4. Cooling unit,
page 3.
- Cooling unit draining

Cooling unit - Overflow jar cleaning
- Filling with glycol and distilled water
- Cooling unit grid cleaning X
- CU400: Filter replacement
See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit,
page 7.
- Reagent tray cleaning

- Reagent barcode reader cleaning
X
See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.1. Reagent tray
cleaning, page 2.
Reagent barcode reader position

Reagent tray
See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.4. Reagent barcode reader X X
position, page 24.
Sample barcode reader position

See RAS381: Sample tray, 4.3. Sample barcode reader X X
position, page 17.
Sample arm all positions mechanical check

X X
See RAS385: Arms, 6. Sample arm adjustment, page 36
Reagent arm all positions mechanical check

X X
Arms See RAS385: Arms, 5. Reagent arm adjustment, page 23
2 arms greasing (Molykote grease)
See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.2. Arms assembly X
greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only), page 3
All positions mechanical check
Mixer X X
See RAS386: Mixer, 5. Adjustments, page 17.
Reaction tray cleaning

Reaction tray See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.3. Reaction tray X
cleaning, page 5.
Photometer check up. See RAS383: Optical bench, 4.

Optical bench check, page 31:
- Black measurement: between 1400 and 2000
- Gain measurement: between 3 and 242
- Dynamic Optical Reading: reference on Air ≅ 0 X X
Optic - Dynamic Optical Reading: Reference on Air with
cuvette:
WL =340 nm: between 0.06 and 0.12
WL=700 nm: between 0.05 and 0.09
Lamp replacement. Refer to the instrument user manual. X X

6 month Yearly
Dynamic cuvette changer functioning check
X X
See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4. Adjustments, page 31.
Cuvette changer Endless screw greasing
See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.4. Cuvette changer X
endless screw greasing, page 6.
Filter replacement. Refer to the instrument user manual. X X
Syringes replacement 100 µL and 1000 µL.

X X
Refer to the instrument user manual.
Pressure sensor calibration. See RAS442: Pressure

X X
sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.
Water pump flow check

See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the X X
sample needle throughput, page 8.
Hydraulic Fluidic system decontamination
See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1. To decontaminate X X
the hydraulic system, page 2.
- Water tank decontamination

- Waste tank decontamination
X X
See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1.2. To
decontaminate the tanks, page 2.
Wash tower decontamination

See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1.3. To X X
decontaminate the wash towers, page 2.
Temperature check. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance,

9. To check the temperature, page 7:
Temperature - Reaction heating: 37°C (± 0.25°C) X X
- Needle heating: 37°C (± 1.5°C)
- Refrigerated area: 4-10°C
Check up after Run a test T1 or P1 (Precision test) x15, CV < 1%. See
X X
intervention RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.
= Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1
This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer
archives.
Specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions:
RAS376H
Installation
Concerns
Instrument installation
Cooling unit installation
ISE module preparation
First start of the instrument
ISE
Mechanical alignments check
Priming
Pressure sensors calibration
Reagent applications installation
Racks
Check up
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Graduated ruler
Required products
Distilled water

KIT, INSTALLATION P400 XEA759G (1209156759)
KIT, INSTALLATION PC400 XEC139B (1209172139)
If the instrument is equipped with ISE module option:
■ ISE module electrodes:
ABX Pentra Sodium-E A11A01738
ABX Pentra Chloride-E A11A01739
ABX Pentra Potassium-E A11A01740
ABX Pentra Reference-E A11A01741
■ ISE module reagents:
ABX Pentra Reference 280 ML A11A01901
operations.
Installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Instrument installation
Before unpacking, control the proper handling of the instrument package during
transportation with the help of the shock indicator "Shockwatch" and the tipping indicator
"Tiltwatch".
Please refer to the Service Information Letter RAN357A to know the procedure to follow for
instrument package reception.
1.1. Unpacking
Unpack the instrument carefully, then make sure that all of the parts from the package list are present.
You can print these following tables and tick off the corresponding check box when the part is present.
Package list

1 Instrument with or without ISE module
XEA759G (1209156759) KIT, INSTALLATION P400 or
XEC139B (1209172139) KIT, INSTALLATION PC400
XEA815E (1209155815) KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX P400 V4 or
1
XEC114C (1209173114) KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX PC400
DZZ045F (1202196045) CHILLER, CU401 100 V 50-60 HZ or
1300012509 CHILLER, CU401 115 V 60 HZ or
1
DZZ047F (1202196047) CHILLER, CU401 230 V 50 HZ or
1300024610 2 CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L
LBH004A (1207791004) 2 FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER
1300017778 PCB, QWERTY KEYBOARD USB or
1
CBK055A (1201721055) PCB, USB AZERTY KEYBOARD
1 PRINTER (OPTIONAL)
DAC051A (1201891051) 1 CABLE, USB PC-FRONT USB L=1M
GBM0418 (1203600418) 1 COVER, SAMPLE TRAY LEFT SIDE
RAL199B (1300025224) SAFETY INFORMATION P400 or
RAL156D (1300025223) SAFETY INFORMATION PC400
DAC011A (1201891011) 2 CABLE, POWER EUROPE (+ 1 cable if printer) or
DAC012A (1201891012) 1 CABLE, POWER USA (+ 1 cable if printer)
1 KIT, SOFTWARE VERSION P400 / PC400
JAM005A (1207321005) 1 5 OUTLET EXTENSION CORD
1 KIT, REAGENT APPLICATION P400 / PC400
1300030012 P400 DOCUMENTATION USB FLASH DRIVE
1
1300029998 PC400 DOCUMENTATION USB FLASH DRIVE
GBD072A (1202901072) 4 COVER, HANDLER FOR P120 & P400
CUVETTE SEGMENTS (3x15)
RAS376H - 2 INSTALLATION Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Installation
KIT, INSTALLATION P400 XEA759G (1209156759)

XDA806B (1209132806) 6 SAMPLE RACK
XDA968A (1209131968) 6 TUBE ADAPTORS (x5)
XDA805B (1209132805) 6 SAMPLE CUP RACK
8700205 (1228700205) 1 SAMPLE CUP BLUE (x100)
XDA849A (1209131849) 6 REAGENT RACK + ADAPTORS
8700596 (1228700596) 1 4 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)
8700713 (1228700713) 1 10 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)
B1037307 (1221037307) 0.10 15 ML REAGENT CUP (100/bag)
CAL/CTRL REAG. RACK GBM0749 (1203600749) +
XDA850A (1209131850) 4
ADAPTORS GBM0794 (1203600794)
HAX0230 (1207230230) 1 STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400
XBA574C (1209113574) 1 FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY
XBA568F (1209114568) 1 FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY
CBK048A (1201721048) 1 PCB, OPT. MOUSE 3 BUT. & WHEEL
GBM0843 (1203600843) 1 CHILLER, CHILLER TUBING SUPPORT
CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR (cooling unit
XDB254AS (1209149254) 1
overflow jar + magnetic ribbon)
EAE003A* 1 metre TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030)
3027030 (1223027030) 2 CLAMP, TUBE D7
FAX016AL0060
2 FLUID, CHILLER CASING L=60CM
(1202522016)
DBJ016A (1202131016) 2 COLLAR, COBRA METAL COLLAR D=12
FBA002A (1202551002) 2 ADHESIVE AUTO-GRIP STRIP (0.160)
DZZ039A (1202191039) 3 CABLE, FERRITE D=10 MM
A11A01922 3 KIT, CASSETTE 30/10+CAPS (x6)

- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)
KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX P400 V4 XEA815E (1209155815)

1 Accessory case ABX Pentra 400
HAX0166 (1207230166) 1 SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10
HAX0170 (1207230170) 1 SAMPLE CUP RACK STICKERS 41-50
HAX0173 (1207230173) 1 CAL SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 71-84
HAX0174 (1207230174) 1 CTRL SAMP. RACK STICKERS 85-99
XBA563ET (1209119563) 1 NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE
HAX0175 (1207230175) 1 REAGENT RACK STICKERS 60-69
HAX0188 (1207230188) 1 CAL REAG. RACK STICKERS 01-15
Technical Manual INSTALLATION RAS376H - 3

RAA023

HAX0190 (1207230190) 1 CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 30-44
1300028830 1 OPTICAL, LAMP P400
MAB086A (1207821086) 1 TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM
B8076812 (1228076812) 1 SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL)
B8086648 (1228086648) 1 100 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)
B8088454 (1228088454) 1 SEAL REPLACEMENT TOOL
B8078955 (1228078955) 1 REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL)
B8086605 (1228086605) 1 1000 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)
B8086583 (1228086583) 1 1000 µL + 500 µL O'RINGS (x10)
9001072 (1229001072) 1 FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE
1 Clips, Ø 12 mm
1 ISO sticker
1 Key screwdriver
1 Mouse pad
2 Touchscreen stylus
EAA021A (1202201021) 1 Straight link DI=4.25
EAB031A (1202211031) 1 Straight link DI=5 Polyprop.
DAR055A (1202001055) 2 FUSE, 5X20 T 6.3 A H
HAX0273 (1207230273) 1 NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10
HAX0277 (1207230277) 1 NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50
HAX0280 (1207230280) 1 NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84
HAX0281 (1207230281) 1 NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99
1 Flat screwdriver 3.5x100
DBK009A (1202141009) 6 ADHESIVE, HOLDER TYRAP D=9 MM
MAB002A (1207821002) 1 TOOL, ALEN SCREWDRIVER 2.5 MM
HAX0334 (1207230334) 1 PC400/P400 OPEN CAS.STICKER SHEET1
KIT, INSTALLATION PC400 XEC139B (1209172139)

XDA806B (1209132806) 6 SAMPLE RACK
XDA968A (1209131968) 6 TUBE ADAPTORS (x5)
XDA805B (1209132805) 6 SAMPLE CUP RACK
8700205 (1228700205) 1 SAMPLE CUP BLUE (x100)
XDA849A (1209131849) 6 REAGENT RACK + ADAPTORS
8700596 (1228700596) 1 4 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)
8700713 (1228700713) 1 10 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)
B1037307 (1221037307) 0.10 15 ML REAGENT CUP (100/bag)

RAA023

CAL/CTRL REAG. RACK GBM0749 (1203600749) +
XDA850A (1209131850) 4
ADAPTORS GBM0794 (1203600794)
HAX0230 (1207230230) 1 STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400
XBA574C (1209113574) 1 FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY
XBA568F (1209114568) 1 FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY
CBK048A (1201721048) 1 PCB, OPT. MOUSE 3 BUT. & WHEEL
GBM0843 (1203600843) 1 CHILLER, CHILLER TUBING SUPPORT
CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR (cooling unit
XDB254AS (1209149254) 1
overflow jar + magnetic ribbon)
3027030 (1223027030) 2 CLAMP, TUBE D7
FAX016AL0060
2 FLUID, CHILLER CASING L=60CM
(1202522016)
DBJ016A (1202131016) 2 COLLAR, COBRA METAL COLLAR D=12
FBA002A (1202551002) 2 ADHESIVE AUTO-GRIP STRIP (0.160)
DZZ039A (1202191039) 3 CABLE, FERRITE D=10 MM
A11A01922 3 KIT, CASSETTE 30/10+CAPS (x6)

- EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres)
- EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)
KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX PC400 XEC114C (1209173114)

1 Accessory case Pentra C400
HAX0166 (1207230166) 1 SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10
HAX0170 (1207230170) 1 SAMPLE CUP RACK STICKERS 41-50
HAX0173 (1207230173) 1 CAL SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 71-84
HAX0174 (1207230174) 1 CTRL SAMP. RACK STICKERS 85-99
XBA847AT (1209119847) 1 NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400
HAX0175 (1207230175) 1 REAGENT RACK STICKERS 60-69
HAX0188 (1207230188) 1 CAL REAG. RACK STICKERS 01-15
HAX0190 (1207230190) 1 CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 30-44
GBM1326 (1203601326) 1 OPTICAL, LAMP PC400
MAB086A (1207821086) 1 TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM
B8076812 (1228076812) 1 SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL)
B8086648 (1228086648) 1 100 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)
B8088454 (1228088454) 1 SEAL REPLACEMENT TOOL
B8078955 (1228078955) 1 REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL)
B8086605 (1228086605) 1 1000 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)
B8086583 (1228086583) 1 1000 µL + 500 µL O'RINGS (x10)
9001072 (1229001072) 1 FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE

RAA023

1 Clips, Ø 12 mm
1 ISO sticker
1 Key screwdriver
1 Mouse pad
2 Touchscreen stylus
EAA021A (1202201021) 1 Straight link DI=4.25
EAB031A (1202211031) 1 Straight link DI=5 Polyprop.
DAR055A (1202001055) 2 FUSE, 5X20 T 6.3 A H
HAX0273 (1207230273) 1 NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10
HAX0277 (1207230277) 1 NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50
HAX0280 (1207230280) 1 NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84
HAX0281 (1207230281) 1 NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99
1 Flat screwdriver 3.5x100
DBK009A (1202141009) 6 ADHESIVE, HOLDER TYRAP D=9 MM
MAB002A (1207821002) 1 TOOL, ALEN SCREWDRIVER 2.5 MM
1.2. Location
■ Place your instrument on a clean and leveled table or workbench.

■ Avoid exposure to sunlight.
■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.
■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to dust.
■ Avoid direct exposure to air conditioner.
■ Place your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.
■ Place your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.
■ Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise such as a
centrifuge, etc.
■ Provide a space of at least 20 cm (7.9 in) at the back of the instrument for a proper ventilation.
■ Make sure to provide enough space to open the main cover easily. The instrument height is
approximately 63 cm (24.8 in) closed cover and 105 cm (41.3 in) open cover.
■ Make sure to provide enough space on both sides of the instrument to access the computer
connections and power supply connection.

RAA023
The Power switch and Power supply connection should always be accessible. When
positioning the system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy
access to these items.
1.3. Installation
Install the instrument lifting handles in their location, make sure that they are correctly
secured, lift the instrument onto the workbench using the four handles.

RAA023
■ Open the arms main cover and remove its

protective foam.
■ Remove the protective foams retaining the

arms.
■ Open the reagent door and remove the

foam.
In order not to damage needles during installation, disable the arms (vertical and rotation
movements), and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the
following picture.

RAA023
■ Open the optic hatch (A).

■ Make sure that the tubings on the reagent B
syringe and on the sample syringe are
correctly fastened (B).
■ Remove the mixer cover (C). See RAS377:
Covers dismantling, page 1.
■ Unscrew the CHC screw supporting the

mixer in low position and remove it.
■ Lift
the mixer assembly up, then down by
pressing the red button.
■ Put the mixer cover back.
1.4. Syringes
Required products:
- Reagent syringe 1000 µL (provided in the accessories box)
- Sample syringe 100 µL (provided in the accessories box)
■ Manually fill and empty several times the syringes using a container of distilled water to ensure that
the barrel is filled with water and no air bubbles are visible in the syringes.

RAA023
■ Push the syringes support halfway down

(A).
■ Install the syringes: carefully fasten the
glass barrel (B), then the knurl (C).
A
1.5. Electrical and computer connections
■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the cooling unit tubing.

■ Make sure that the power supply module voltage of the instrument (indicated at the instrument back)
corresponds to the nominal supply voltage of the laboratory and the country.
■ Connect the power supply cable.
■ Open the connection hatch (right-hand side

of the instrument).
■ Route the cables under the frame of the
instrument.

RAA023
■ Place a ferrite core on the keyboard cable

as follows:
- Open the plastic case of the ferrite core.
- Place the keyboard cable into the case (at
approx. 10 cm of the USB connection).
- Make a loop with the keyboard cable, then
close the case.
■ Connect the keyboard to the computer.
■ Place a ferrite core on the mouse cable as
follows:
- Place the mouse cable into the case (at
approx. 10 cm of the USB connection).
- Make a loop with the mouse cable, then
close the case.
■ Connect the mouse to the computer.
■ Connect the printer into a free USB port.

■ Close the connection hatch cautiously.
Make sure to inform the customer that:

■ the instrument is equipped with a ferrite core on the keyboard cable as well as on the mouse
cable,
■ if he has to replace the keyboard or the mouse, he must keep the ferrite core and reinstall
it on the new peripheral device.
1.6. Distilled water and waste installation
Use the "Luer" connectors, straws and tubings provided in the installation kit and in the accessories box
to connect distilled water and waste.
A - Evacuation of condensation water

B - H2O
C - ISE module waste
D - Intrument waste
B C D
A
■ Connect the instrument distilled water (B) and waste (D) tubings.

RAA023
■ Place a ferrite core on both level detection

E F
cables (distilled water and waste) as
follows:
- Mark the distilled water level detection
cable and the waste level detection cable.
- Place both level detection cables into the
case.
- Make a loop with each cable, then close
the case.
■ Connect the distilled water level detection
cable (E) and the waste level detection cable
(F) to the instrument.
■ Connect the 6x9 mm PVC tube to the twisted priming tube (evacuation of condensation water (A)).
Guide with the shortest distance from the side of the instrument to the waste detection assy and cut
to the correct length. Connect it to the big connector of the waste detection assy.
■ If the instrument is equipped with the ISE module option, follow the same procedure for the ISE waste
tubing (C), then connect it to the small connector of the waste detection assy.
The evacuation of condensation water is done by gravity, it is very important to make sure
that tubes do not bend or do not go up. Idem for ISE waste tubing.
This tube must be guided between the cooling unit tubings by the "Chiller tubing support".
See 2. Cooling unit installation, page 13.
Place the ISO sticker (provided in the accessories box) on the waste container.

RAA023
2. Cooling unit installation
■ Before plugging the cooling unit tubings, install the connectors (provided with the cooling unit) as
follows:
screw nuts with caps
- Unscrew the screw nuts and caps from the

cooling unit.
- Remove the caps from the screw nuts.
- Keep the caps for a possible
transportation of the cooling unit.
- Put the connectors in the screw nuts and
screw them on the cooling unit.
- Tighten the connectors with a pair of
pliers. screw nut with connector
casings
- Put the casings (provided in the installation

kit) on the connectors.

RAA023
■ Plug the cooling unit tubings as follows:
■ The input tubing of the instrument into the output connector of the cooling unit.
■ The output tubing of the instrument into the input connector of the cooling unit.
See picture below:
output tubing input tubing

of instrument of instrument
output tubing input tubing

of cooling unit of cooling unit
- Compress the tubing cover to access the

tubing and cut 10-15 cm of the tubing.
- Put the Cobra metal collar (provided in the

installation kit) on the tubing and plug the
tubing into the connector.

RAA023
- Then, with a pair of pliers, tighten the collar

to its maximum.
- Put the tubing cover in contact with the

casing. Support the casing and the tubing
cover with one auto-grip strip (provided in
the installation kit). The rough and grip side
of the auto-grip strip must be placed on the
casing and the tubing cover.
- Put the slipcover on the tubing cover +

casing + auto-grip strip.
To instrument
■ Install the chiller tubing support (included in

the installation kit) to support those tubings.
To cooling unit

RAA023
■ Plug the cooling unit cable into the

instrument connector and the cooling unit
connector.
■ Install the cooling unit drainage tubing (10-15 cm of the tubing previously cut) as follows:
- Pull the ventilation grid in the front of the

cooling unit and remove it.
- Plug the drainage tubing into the

connector next to the bleed screw.

RAA023
- Put the ventilation grid back.
When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown on
the figure below.
■ Install the cooling unit overflow jar (included

in the installation kit) at the rear of the
cooling unit.
■ Fill the cooling unit with ethylene glycol and distilled water as follows:
- Slightly push to unlock and to open the lid

of the filling opening.

RAA023
- Fill the cooling unit with two liters of ethylene glycol and complete with distilled water up to the high
mark.
Take care that no liquid enters the cooling unit.
- Close the lid.
Install the cooling unit under the instrument or at the same level but never on a higher
position.
Proper ventilation requires at least 10 cm (4 inches) space in the front and at the rear.
■ Connect the cooling unit.

■ Switch the cooling unit on.
3. ISE module preparation
■ If the instrument is not equipped with the ISE module option and you have to install the ISE
module, refer to RAS441: ISE module installation, page 1.
■ If the instrument is already equipped with the ISE module, refer directly to the ISE module
startup procedure. See RAS441: ISE module installation, 2.1. Electrode and reagent

RAA023
4. First start of the instrument
■ Make sure that the arms main cover is open.

■ Put some cuvette segments in the cuvette segment loader.
■ Start the instrument (ON/OFF switch is on the left-hand side of the instrument).
The initialization will be "NOT OK" because of the open arms main cover.
■ When initialization is ended, enter the name

(tech) and the password (qbxtech for Azerty
keyboard or abxtech for Qwerty keyboard),
then press OK to access the main menu.
4.1. Check online help language
■ Press Help and verify that the online help is

installed on the instrument in the software
language.
■ If
not, use the Documentation media
supplied within the instrument to install it.
4.2. Check keyboard setup
■ Go to Services > System Configuration > Local Settings.

■ Press Change Configuration, select the country in the Default input language list, press Apply, then
OK.

RAA023
4.3. Check date and time
■ In the Local Settings tab, press Edit (A) to

access the System Date and Time
scrolling lists (B).
■ Make the modifications, then press OK (C)
to confirm.
A C
If the date format or the time format is changed, the instrument will reboot automatically after
confirmation.
4.4. Check printer configuration
■ Go to Services > System Configuration >

Printer.
■ Press Edit (D) to access the different
scrolling lists.
■ Make the modifications, then press OK (E)
to confirm. D E
5. ISE
See RAS441: ISE module installation, 2.2. Start and use of ISE option, page 12 in
Section 7: ISE module.

RAA023
6. Mechanical alignments check
It is advisable to check the sample needle alignment in order not to damage it.
Always move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home) before moving the reagent
arm.
Always move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions before moving a tray.
Always move the reagent arm into its wash tower before moving the sample arm.
■ Check the adjustment of the reagent arm positions in the wash tower by following the reagent arm
adjustment procedure:
- Wash Tower Position (rotation): see RAS385: Arms, 5.3.2. Wash Tower Position, page 29
- Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical): see RAS385: Arms, 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower",
page 32
■ Check the adjustment of the sample arm positions in the wash tower by following the sample arm
adjustment procedure:
- Wash Tower Position (rotation): see RAS385: Arms, 5.3.2. Wash Tower Position, page 29
- Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical): see RAS385: Arms, 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower",
page 32
7. Priming
■ Push the waste straw into the waste container.
■ Manually fill the two wash towers with distilled water to avoid splashes, then put the optic hatch back.
■ Close the arms main cover, then leave the Diagnostics menu (press Back) and press Startup.
The instrument initializes its mechanical components, wait until the end of the initialization.
■ Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles\Priming.

■ Connect the distilled water tubing to the distilled water container, then perform two Filling up cycles.
■ Perform a Priming Cycle.
■ Make sure that no air bubbles are visible in the syringes.
8. Pressure sensors calibration
Perform the pressure sensors calibration by following the pressure sensors procedure.
See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

RAA023
9. Reagent applications installation
Perform a full installation of the reagent applications (included in the reagent application kit).
See RAS518: Reagent applications installation, page 1.
Before installation, ensure that the reagent application version is compatible with the
software version installed on the instrument. Refer to the compatibility table in the technical
note included in the reagent application kit.
To optimize the "software" support of your customers, this Reagent Application media must
be kept close to the instrument.
10. Racks
The instrument racks are identified by means of barcode and numbered labels.
Place these labels on racks as shown on the stickers plate:
■ HAX0166 (1207230166) for sample rack 1-10
■ HAX0170 (1207230170) for sample cup rack 41-50
■ HAX0173 (1207230173) for calibrator sample rack 71-84
■ HAX0174 (1207230174) for control sample rack 85-99
■ HAX0175 (1207230175) for reagent rack 60-69
■ HAX0188 (1207230188) for calibrator reagent rack 01-15
■ HAX0190 (1207230190) for control reagent rack 30-44
To read barcode format "Interleaved 2 of 5 WITHOUT Check Digit", use the following
stickers:
- HAX0273 (1207230273): NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10 (included in the accessories
box)
- HAX0274 (1207230274): NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 11-20
- HAX0277 (1207230277): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50 (included in the accessories
box)
- HAX0278 (1207230278): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 51-60
- HAX0279 (1207230279): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 61-70
- HAX0280 (1207230280): NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84 (included in the accessories
box)
- HAX0281 (1207230281): NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99 (included in the accessories
box)
Go to Services > System Configuration > Local Settings.
Press Edit and deselect the Check Digit option, then press OK.

RAA023
Reagent and calibrator/control stickers (STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400 HAX0230 (1207230230)) are
also available to identify solutions, calibrators and controls on the reagent racks, calibrator/control
reagent racks and calibrator/control sample racks.
Place these stickers as shown on the examples below:
11. Check up
Follow the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS378J
6 month maintenance
Concerns
To decontaminate the hydraulic system
To replace the filter
To replace the syringes
Cooling unit
ISE module
To check the mechanical adjustments
To check the barcode readers
To check the spectrophotometer
To check the temperature
To check the sample needle throughput
To calibrate the pressure sensors
To clean and defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives
Check up after intervention
Required tools
Flat screwdriver
Hexagonal keys
Required products
Bleach
Intervention time
2 h 00
Frequency
Every 6 months


operations.
6 month maintenance ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
P/n Designation Qty

3027030 (1223027030) CLAMP, TUBE D7 2
1. To decontaminate the hydraulic system
1.1. To decontaminate the hydraulic circuit
1. Prepair a bottle containing half a liter of bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water
(1/10).
2. Prepair a bottle containing half a liter of distilled water.
3. Replace the water tank with the diluted bleach bottle then run several Filling up cycles.
4. Remove the straw from the diluted bleach bottle and wrap it in absorbent paper.
5. Run several Priming Cycle to drain the circuit.
6. Dry the straw with absorbent paper.
7. Plunge the straw into the distilled water bottle then run several Priming Cycle.
8. Remove the straw from the distilled water bottle and wrap it in absorbent paper.
9. Run several Priming Cycle to drain the circuit.
10. Dry the straw well.
11. Decontaminate the water tank (see 1.2. To decontaminate the tanks, page 2).
12. Plunge the straw into the water tank filled with distilled water.
1.2. To decontaminate the tanks
1. Prepair 2 liters of bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water (1/10).
2. Pour this dilution into the water tank then shake it several times.
3. Throw the dilution out in a waste container then rinse thoroughly with distilled water.
4. Follow the same procedure to decontaminate the waste tank.
1.3. To decontaminate the wash towers
1. Prepair bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water (1/10).
2. Fill the wash towers with this dilution then wait a few minutes.
3. Run a Draining cycle to drain the wash towers.
RAS378J - 2 MAINTENANCE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 6 month maintenance
4. Fill and drain the wash towers several times with distilled water.
5. Manually clean the wash towers with absorbent paper.
2. To replace the filter
The filter is located on the right-hand side, at the back of the instrument.
Refer to your user manual to replace the filter.
3. To replace the syringes
Refer to your user manual to replace the syringes.
4. Cooling unit
4.1. To clean the cooling unit condenser (for cooling unit CU401)
1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser and deselect the Activate Cold Area option.
2. Switch the cooling unit off and disconnect the power supply cable.
3. Pull the ventilation grid and remove it.
Technical Manual MAINTENANCE RAS378J - 3

RAA023
4. Remove dust from the condenser with a

vacuum cleaner.
5. Put the ventilation grid back.
When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown
below.
6. Connect the power supply cable and switch the cooling unit on.
Wait ten minutes minimum, between switching off and switching on the cooling unit.
7. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser and select the Activate Cold Area option.

RAA023
4.2. To clean the cooling unit filter (for cooling unit CU400)
If you have just replaced the filter, it is not necessary to clean it now.
1. Remove the filter with its metallic support from the cooling unit grid.
2. Remove the filter from its metallic support.
3. Clean the filter with water and let it dry.
4. Once dry, put the filter back in its metallic support.
5. Put the filter with its metallic support back on the cooling unit grid by fitting the two metallic pieces
in the grid holes.
5. ISE module
Refer to the procedure RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 1. 6 month maintenance, page 2 in the
section 7: ISE module.
6. To check the mechanical adjustments
Always move the reagent arm into its wash tower before moving the sample arm.
Always move the sample arm to its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.

RAA023
6.1. To check the sample arm positions
1. Check the adjustment of all the sample arm positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS385:
Arms, 6. Sample arm adjustment, page 36.
- Cuvette: Cuvette Position (rotation) and Low Position in Cuvette (vertical)
- Wash tower: Wash Tower Position (rotation) and Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical)
- Reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack
- Calibrator/control reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack, R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack, R3
Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack
- Cassette (rotation): R1 on Cassette and R2 on Cassette
- Reagent rack, calibrator/control reagent rack and cassette (vertical): Low Position in Reagent
rack, Low Position CalCs on reagent tray, Low Position in Cassette
- Sample (rotation): External Sample and Internal Sample
- Sample (vertical): Low Position in Sample Cup and Low Position in Sample Tube
- ISE tower: ISE Sample (rotation) and Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical)
2. If necessary, readjust the positions.
6.2. To check the reagent arm positions
1. Check the adjustment of all the reagent arm positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS385:
Arms, 5. Reagent arm adjustment, page 23.
- Cuvette: Cuvette Position (rotation) and Low Position in Reaction Tray (vertical)
- Wash tower: Wash Tower Position (rotation) and Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical)
- Reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack
- Cassette (rotation): R1 on Cassette and R2 on Cassette
- Reagent rack and cassette (vertical): Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack and Low Position
in Cassette
6.3. To check the mixer positions
1. Check the adjustment of all the mixer positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS386: Mixer,
5. Adjustments, page 17.
- Home position
- Above Reaction Tray position and Cuvette position
6.4. To check the cuvette changer
1. Refer to the procedure RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.9. Adjustment check, page 47 to check the
adjustment of the cuvette changer.
2. If necessary, readjust the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4. Adjustments, page 31.

RAA023
7. To check the barcode readers
1. Check the adjustment of the reagent barcode reader position. Refer to the procedure RAS380:
Reagent tray, 4.4. Reagent barcode reader position, page 24.
2. If necessary, readjust the position.
3. Check the adjustment of the sample barcode reader position. Refer to the procedure RAS381:
Sample tray, 4.3. Sample barcode reader position, page 17.
4. If necessary, readjust the position.
8. To check the spectrophotometer
Refer to the procedure RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check, page 31.
9. To check the temperature
1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

2. Make sure that the assigned values for the following are correct.
- Needle Heating: 37°C
- Reaction Heating: 37°C
- Refrigerated Area: 6°C
3. If necessary, change the assigned values

as follows.
- Select the Needle Heating, Reaction A
Heating or Refrigerated Area option (A).
- Press Stop (B).
- Change the assigned value.
- Press Start (C) to save the modifications C B
on the mother board.
4. Make sure that the current temperatures for the following are correct.
- Needle Heating: 37°C +/- 1.5°C
- Reaction Heating: 37°C +/- 0.25°C
- Refrigerated Area: between 4 and 10°C
The lights should be green.

RAA023
10. To check the sample needle throughput
This procedure allows you to check the sample needle and the water pump flow.
1. Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.

2. Run a Priming Cycle.
3. Make sure that the suction and the flow of the reagent and sample needles are correct.
A
4. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.
5. Select the Reagent option (A) then press
Motor Off (B).
6. Place an empty 15 mL vial on the position "A1" of a reagent rack.

7. Manually load this rack on the reagent tray, in position "1".
8. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe.

9. In the Pump area, select the Water Pump C
option (C) then press Water pump flow E
D
measurement (D).
The cycle starts then the water volume
that has flowed is displayed in the
Measured volume field (E).
The water volume is displayed in red if it is
out of range or if an error appears during
the cycle.
11. To calibrate the pressure sensors
Refer to the procedure RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

RAA023
12. To clean and defragment the C:\ and D:\

drives
12.1. To log in to Windows
1. Log in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password.

2. Go to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer.
3. Press the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off.
4. Log in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.
12.2. To clean the C:\ and D:\ drives
1. Press the Windows Start button and go to Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk
Cleanup.
2. Select the C:\ drive and press OK.

3. Add the Compress old files option and press OK.
4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 for the D:\ drive.

RAA023
12.3. To defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives
1. Press the Windows Start button and go to Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk
Defragmenter.
2. Select the C:\ drive and press Defragment.

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for the D:\ drive.
12.4. To clear the print spooler
1. Open the Windows Explorer and go to C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\PRINTERS.
2. Delete all the files.

RAA023
12.5. To purge the Host orders
1. Go to C:\Program Files\P400 Software\Exe\Rs_Data.

2. Delete all the files.
12.6. To empty the recycle bin
Right-click the Recycle Bin and then click Empty Recycle Bin.
13. Check up after intervention
Refer to the procedure RAS393: Check up after intervention.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS379J
Yearly maintenance
versions:
Concerns
Instrument
Reagent tray cleaning
Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only)
Reaction tray cleaning
Cuvette changer endless screw greasing
Cooling unit
Cooling unit CU401
Cooling unit CU400
ISE module
6 month maintenance procedure
Required tools
Flat screwdriver
Hexagonal keys
Torx key
Required products
Distilled water
Bleach
Intervention time
3 h 30
Frequency
Yearly


operations.
Yearly maintenance ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
P/n Designation Qty

XEA768A (1209151768) TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 3.5 ML 1
1300024610 CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L 2
DZZ055A (1202191055) FILTER, COOLING UNIT FILTER 1
LBH003A (1207791003) REAGENT, 5 L KEG FOR RINSE SPS 1
HAX0239 (1207230239) GLYCOL STICKER 1
JAB010A (1207251010) CASE USDD40 500x400x250 1
DBJ025A (1202131025) CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM 4
XEA766BS (1209159766) KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE
3027030 (1223027030) CLAMP, TUBE D7 2
1. Instrument
1.1. Reagent tray cleaning
■ Remove the sample tray, the insulating cover and the reagent tray (see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1)
to access the reagent tray fans.
■ Make sure that the reagent tray fans are working properly.
■ Use a brush to remove dust from the reagent tray.
■ Use absorbent paper to clean the reagent tray and the barcode reader window.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Yearly maintenance

Follow the arms assembly greasing procedure before reassembling. See 1.2. Arms assembly greasing
(for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only), page 3.
1.2. Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only)
It is advisable to remove the needles before dismantling the arms assembly (in order not to damage
them).
■ Fill a syringe with MOLYKOTE grease.

■ Remove the covers. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.
Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover.
Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch, the arms
covers, the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover, the reagent plate, the loader cover, the mother board
cover and the mixer plate.
■ Disconnect the two connectors from the reagent arm board and the connector from the sample arm
board.
■ Disconnect the reagent arm motor connector (J58) from the mother board.
■ Disconnect the sample arm motor connector (J59) from the mother board.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™, then unplug the B

connectors of the two rotation motors (A)
and the connectors of the two home
sensors (B).

RAA023
■ Remove the arms assembly by unscrewing

the four CHC screws.
Take care of the needles.
■ Turn the arms to access the greasing holes.
■ Use the syringe to grease the arms through the two holes on each arm body.
After the arms assembly greasing procedure, it is advisable to check the mechanical adjustments of
the sample and reagent arms. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 6. To check the mechanical
adjustments, page 5.

RAA023
1.3. Reaction tray cleaning
■ Follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, page 1.
A
■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the
flap door (A) switch and unscrew the NTC to
remove the upper case.
■ Unscrew the 6 CHC screws to remove the

holder disk.
■ Remove dust from the reaction tray using a brush and a vacuum cleaner.
■ Clean the crown wheel using a brush and a vacuum cleaner.
■ Clean the roller groove using absorbent paper.
■ Blow dust off the spectrophometer lenses, using an aerosol duster.

RAA023
1.4. Cuvette changer endless screw greasing
This procedure does not apply to the ABX Pentra 400 V1.
■ Open the arms main cover.

■ Remove the loader cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 11. Loader cover, page 7.
■ Use the syringe of "TOOL, CUV.CHANGER AXIS GREASE" (provided in the kit) to grease the endless
screw:
- Put a drop of grease on the endless screw.

- Manually move up and down the endless
screw by turning it.
■ Put the loader cover back.

RAA023
2. Cooling unit
Follow the procedure corresponding to the cooling unit model you have:
- 2.1. Cooling unit CU401, page 7
- 2.2. Cooling unit CU400, page 9
2.1. Cooling unit CU401
■ Drain the cooling unit as follows:
- Pull the ventilation grid and remove it.
- Put the glycol sticker on the tank (both provided in the kit).
- Put the drainage tubing in the tank to

collect the used glycol and unscrew the
bleed screw.
- Slightly tilt the cooling unit forwards to drain completely the cooling unit.
- Then, screw the bleed screw and remove the drainage tubing from the tank.

RAA023
- Put the ventilation grid back.
When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown on
the figure below.
■ Clean the overflow jar at the rear of the

cooling unit.
■ Fill the cooling unit with ethylene glycol and distilled water as follows:
- Slightly push to unlock and to open the lid

of filling opening.

RAA023
- Fill the cooling unit with 2 liters of ethylene glycol and complete with distilled water up to the high
mark.
Take care that no liquid enters the cooling unit.
- Close the lid.

■ Remove dust from the cooling unit grid (at the rear of the cooling unit).
2.2. Cooling unit CU400
■ Raise the cooling unit by approximately 40 cm.

■ Drain the cooling unit as follows:
- Put the glycol sticker on the tank (both provided in the kit).
- Place the tank under the cooling unit and

put the tubing into the tank to collect the
used glycol.
- Turn the tap on.
- Slightly tilt the cooling unit backwards to
drain completely the cooling unit.
- Then, turn the tap off and remove the
tubing from the tank.

RAA023
■ Clean the overflow jar.

■ Fill the cooling unit with 2 liters of ethylene glycol, then add one liter of distilled water.
The liquid level (glycol + distilled water) exceeds lightly the middle mark of the window.
■ Remove dust from the cooling unit grid.

■ Replace the filter (included in the kit).
3. ISE module
See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 2. Yearly maintenance, page 3 in Section 7: ISE module.
4. 6 month maintenance procedure
See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, page 1.
It is not necessary to perform the cooling unit filter cleaning (for cooling unit CU400 only)
because it has been replaced.

RAA023
RAS393E
Concerns
Calibration
Control
Check results
Required tools
None
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
1 h 30
Frequency
On request

ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution A11A01758 or
ABX Pentra Precitest Solution 1300017438

operations.
Check up after intervention ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
The "Check up after intervention" procedure, also called "Precision test" procedure, should
be performed after an intervention to verify that the instrument is functioning properly. This
procedure consists in checking the pipetting precision with the ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution
or the ABX Pentra Precitest Solution.
1. Preliminary operations
1.1. Control configuration
■ Go to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure either the ABX Pentra
Qualitest Solution as a control for the test T1 or the ABX Pentra Precitest Solution as a control for the
test P1.
■ For the test T1, refer to the control solution vial to specify the control characteristics as the
Target Value, Min. Value and Max. Value.
■ For the test P1, specify the control characteristics as follows:
- Target Value: 600 ΔA,
- Min. Value: 500 ΔA,
- Max. Value: 700 ΔA
■ Transfer the control solution in a sample cup (200 µL minimum).

■ Physically position the sample cup on the programmed rack position.
1.2. Reagent configuration
■ Go to Reagent Configuration > Configuration and refer to your user manual to configure distilled
water as a reagent for the test T1 or P1.
■ Physically position either two vials of distilled water (15 mL and 10 mL) for the test T1 or a 15 mL vial
of distilled water for the test P1 on the programmed rack position.
■ Then, load the rack on the reagent tray.
1.3. Results validation configuration

■ Write the customer configuration down.
RAS393E - 2 MAINTENANCE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Check up after intervention
It is necessary to write down the customer configuration to reconfigure the results validation
of calibrations and controls, with the customer configuration, at the end of procedure.
■ Press Edit (A).

B
■ Configure the results validation of
calibrations and controls (B).
A C
2. Calibration
■ Go to Worklist > Calibration and refer to your user manual to create the calibration request for the
test T1 or P1.
■ Runanalyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar.
The calibration for the test T1 or P1 will be performed.
3. Control
Once the calibration is validated, perform the control as explained below.

the test T1 or P1.
■ Runanalyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar.
The 15 replicates for the test T1 or P1 will be performed.
Technical Manual MAINTENANCE RAS393E - 3

RAA023
Check up after intervention ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
4. Check results
Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the test T1 or P1.
First, make sure that all the results (15 replicates) were validated automatically.
A
C
■ Selectthe control solution using the

Control scrolling list (A).
■ In the Session Mean part, drag the slider
(B) to display the CV (C). B
The expected coefficient of variation (CV)
for the 15 replicates must be ≤ 1.0%.
■ If the test results are bad, see Section 6: Troubleshooting, 2.1.1. Repeatability, page 6-42.
■ If you have to run the 15 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window
(use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 15 new
replicates are taken into account in the CV calculation. Use new control solution, use fresh
distilled water on the rack.
■ Go to Services > System Configuration >

Results validation.
■ Press Edit (A). B
■ Reconfigure the results validation of
calibrations and controls with the customer
configuration previously written down (B).
A C
RAS393E - 4 MAINTENANCE Technical Manual

RAA023
RAS377E
Covers dismantling
versions:
RAS377: Covers dismantling
Concerns
Arms main cover and ISE cover
Sample covers
Power supply cover
ISE plate
Optic hatch
Arms covers
Cuvettes tray plate
Reagent cover
Reagent plate
Recuperation jar
Loader cover
Cuvettes hatch
Connection hatch
Cuvettes cover
Mixer cover
Mother board cover
Arm bracket covers
Mixer plate
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver
Required products
None

None

operations.
Covers dismantling ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Arms main cover and ISE cover
A
B
■ Lift the arms main cover up (A).

■ Lift the ISE cover up (B).
2. Sample covers
■ Remove the external sample cover.
■ Unscrewthe 3 cruciform screws and the

FHC screw to remove the internal sample
cover.
RAS377E - 2 COVERS Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Covers dismantling
3. Power supply cover
■ Unscrew the 7 cruciform screws to remove

the power supply cover.
4. ISE plate
■ Ifthe instrument is not equipped with ISE module, follow the procedure below.
■ If the instrument is equipped with ISE module, see RAS538: ISE module spare part
replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2.

the ISE plate.
Technical Manual COVERS RAS377E - 3

RAA023
5. Optic hatch
■ Press the front of the optic hatch to open it.
Press
6. Arms covers
■ Unscrew the 4 BHC screws to remove the

left arm cover.
■ Unscrew the 2 FHC screws to remove the

right arm cover.

RAA023
7. Cuvettes tray plate

the cuvettes tray plate.
8. Reagent cover

the reagent cover with the reagent hatch.

RAA023
9. Reagent plate
■ First,
remove the ISE cup cover by
unscrewing the BHC screw.
■ Then,
unscrew the 5 cruciform screws to
remove the reagent plate.
If the instrument is not equipped with ISE module, you have to remove the ISE plate instead
of the ISE cup cover. See 4. ISE plate, page 3.

RAA023
10. Recuperation jar
■ Disconnect the tubings from the wash

towers.
■ Pullthe wash towers and disconnect the
overflow tubings.
and disconnect the tubing under the
recuperation jar to remove the recuperation
jar.
11. Loader cover
■ Remove the loader cover by unscrewing the

2 cruciform screws on the side and
loosening the 3 CHC screws at the rear.

RAA023
12. Cuvettes hatch
■ Pull the cuvettes hatch to remove it.
Pull
13. Connection hatch
■ Usea flat screwdriver to turn the captive

screw anti-clockwise.
■ Disconnect the loudspeaker and the USB
cables from the computer, then remove the
connection hatch.

RAA023
14. Cuvettes cover

the cuvettes cover.
15. Mixer cover
■ Unscrew the 3 BHC screws to remove the

mixer cover.

RAA023
16. Mother board cover
■ Remove the needle tubings from the plastic

collars located on the mother board cover
and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove
the mother board cover.
Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2

■ First,
remove the wire guide by unscrewing
the CHC screw.
■ Then, remove the needle tubings from the

plastic collars located on the mother board
cover and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to
remove the mother board cover.

RAA023
17. Arm bracket covers
Hold the arms in position when unscrewing in order not to damage the needles.
The arm boards are sensible to electrostatic discharge. In order not to damage those boards,
do not touch them.
■ Unscrew the 2 BHC screws on the sample

arm bracket and the 2 BHC screws on the
reagent arm bracket to remove the plastic
covers.
18. Mixer plate

the mixer plate.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS380E
Reagent tray
versions:
RAS380: Reagent tray
Concerns
Reagent tray dismantling
Reagent tray parts replacement
Impacted adjustments
Adjustments
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Torx key
Open-end wrench
TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS
(1209149097)
TOOL, DUMMY REAGENT NEEDLE GBM1124 (1203601124)
TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE GBM1125 (1203601125)
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Reagent tray ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Reagent tray dismantling
The reagent tray dismantling allows you to access the reagent tray parts that can be replaced:
- barcode reader
- rollers
- home sensor
- motor
- fans
- NTC
- reagent tray closing assy
- reagent tray door sensor.
See 2. Reagent tray parts replacement, page 6
■ Remove the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1):
Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch, the left arm
cover, the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover and the reagent plate.
■ Remove the left gusset plate by unscrewing

the 3 CHC screws on the side and loosening
the 4 CHC screws at the rear of the
instrument.
RAS380E - 2 REAGENT TRAY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Reagent tray
■ If
the instrument is equipped with ISE module, you have to remove the ISE module. See RAS538: ISE
module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2.
■ Remove the ISE angle support plate by

unscrewing the 2 CHC screws at the rear of
the instrument.

For ABX Pentra 400 V1 only, you have to remove the sample tray as follows:
■ Remove the barcode reader cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws and disconnecting the LED
connector from the sample relay board (J2).
■ Loosen the screw to turn the antistatic

brush.
Technical Manual REAGENT TRAY RAS380E - 3

RAA023
■ Remove the sample tray by unscrewing the

5 low head CHC screws.
■ Disconnect the fan from the right side of the tray, then remove the insulating cover by unscrewing the
13 Torx screws and the 2 Torx F screws.

For ABX Pentra 400 V1, disconnect the fan from the right side of the tray, then remove the insulating
cover by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws and the 2 FHC screws.

RAA023
■ Remove the reagent tray.
■ Reassemble in reverse order except covers.
When reassembling the reagent tray, put the reagent tray into gear on the tensioner roller first.
Then, pull on the reagent tray to put it into gear on the 2 centering rollers. Never dismantle
the motor or the tensioner roller to put the reagent tray back in place.

RAA023
2. Reagent tray parts replacement
2.1. Barcode reader replacement
To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement:

See 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.
■ Followthe reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the
barcode reader.
■ Remove the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.
■ Markthe position of the barcode reader

support (to align it when reassembling), then
unscrew the 4 Torx screws.
Marks
It is important to mark the position of the barcode reader support to keep the mechanical
adjustment done in factory.
The position of the barcode reader support is adjusted so that the barcode reader beam
passes crosswise through a sector of the reagent tray. The angle formed from one reagent
tray sector extremity to the other is 12°.
12°
■ Unplug the barcode reader connector from the mother board (J4), then remove the barcode reader.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws under the

barcode reader support to release the
barcode reader from its support.
■ Replace the barcode reader and reassemble in reverse order.
2.2. Rollers replacement

see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.
■ Follow the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the
rollers.
■ Remove the 2 deflectors by unscrewing the

10 cruciform screws.

RAA023
This procedure describes how to replace

the 2 centering rollers (A), the 3 supporting
rollers (B) and the tensioner roller (C):
- 2.2.1. Centering roller, page 8
- 2.2.2. Supporting roller, page 8 A
- 2.2.3. Tensioner roller, page 9. C
2.2.1. Centering roller
■ Loosen the hexagonal screw to release the

roller.
■ Replacethe roller and tighten the
hexagonal screw.
2.2.2. Supporting roller
■ Unscrew the 2 Torx screws to remove the

roller with its support.
■ Replacethe roller with its support and
reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
2.2.3. Tensioner roller
■ Unscrew the CHC screw and washer to CHC screw

remove the roller adjusting plate. Then,
remove the spring and the roller assembly.
roller adjusting plate
CHC screws

roller adjusting support with the roller
spacer plate.
roller spacer plate

roller adjusting support
■ Replace and reassemble the roller as follows:
roller adjusting plate

roller adjusting support
CHC screws M4x8

CHC screw M3x5
with washer
1 2 3 tappings
roller spacer plate
CHC screws M3x6

spring roller assembly
- Assemble the roller spacer plate on the roller adjusting support by screwing the 2 CHC screws M3x6
in the tappings # 2 and 3.
- Screw the roller adjusting support on the reagent tray by using the 2 CHC screws M4x8.

RAA023
- Install the roller assembly and the spring

on the roller adjusting support.
- Screw the roller adjusting plate on the

roller assembly by using the CHC screw
M3x5 with washer.
■ Putthe reagent tray back and remove the

temperate area of the reagent tray by
unscrewing the 3 CHC screws to adjust the
tensioner roller.
■ Make sure that there is 2.5 mm between the 2.5 mm

roller support and the L plate.
If necessary, adjust the tensioner roller by CHC screw
unscrewing the CHC screw.
L plate Roller support

RAA023
If you cannot adjust the tensioner roller to have 2.5 mm between the roller support and the L
plate, then reassemble the roller spacer plate on the roller adjusting support by screwing the
2 CHC screws M3x6 in the tappings # 1 and 2.
2.3. Home sensor replacement

■ Follow
the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the
home sensor.
■ Remove the front deflector by unscrewing

the 6 cruciform screws.
■ Remove the thermal insulation (A).

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and cut the
Ty-Raps™ to release the home sensor and
its wires.
A

RAA023
■ Disconnect the home sensor connector.

■ Replace the home sensor, reconnect the home sensor connector, fasten the 2 CHC screws and put
new Ty-Raps™ back.
■ Put the thermal insulation back.
■ Putthe reagent tray back and remove the

temperate area of the reagent tray by
unscrewing the 3 CHC screws to adjust the
home sensor.
■ Make sure that the home flag (fixed under

the reagent tray) passes in the middle of the
home sensor and does not touch the home
sensor.
If necessary, adjust the home flag by
unscrewing the CHC screw on the reagent
tray. CHC screw
■ Remove the reagent tray to put the front deflector back and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
2.4. Motor replacement

2.4.1. General procedure

motor.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers,

disconnect the motor connector and
remove the motor.
■ Replace the motor, fasten the 3 CHC screws and washers and reconnect the motor connector.
■ Put the reagent tray back to adjust the motor position.
■ Make sure that there is no play between the reagent tray and the motor pinion but do not over-tighten
the motor.
If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.

RAA023
2.4.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1

motor.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers.
Peelable spacer
■ Disconnectthe motor connector and
remove the motor with its peelable spacer.
■ Replace the motor with the old peelable spacer, fasten the 3 CHC screws and washers and reconnect
the motor connector.
The peelable spacer is used to adjust the motor height positioning. This adjustment is done
by the factory. You have to replace the motor with the old peelable spacer to keep the
adjustment done by the factory.
■ Put the reagent tray back to adjust the motor position.
■ Make sure that there is no play between the reagent tray and the motor pinion but do not over-tighten
the motor.
If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.

RAA023
2.5. Fans replacement

fans.
■ Remove the 2 deflectors by unscrewing the

10 cruciform screws.

■ Unscrew the 2 screws maintaining the fan
support on the tray.
■ Pull the fan up to remove it from the tray and cut the Ty-Raps™ to release the fan and its wires.
■ Disconnect the fan connector.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws to release the fan from its support.
■ Replace the fan and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
■ Caution! Put the fan back on the tray by pressing carefully on the two sides of the fan in
order not to break the fan.
■ Ensure that the fan is positioned in the correct direction: the letterings must be placed
towards the tray center.
Press both sides
Letterings
2.6. NTC replacement

NTC.
■ Remove the front deflector by unscrewing

the 6 cruciform screws.

RAA023
■ Unscrewthe Torx screw and cut the

Ty-Raps™ to release the NTC and its wires.
■ Disconnect the NTC connector.

■ Replace the NTC and reassemble in reverse order.
2.7. Reagent tray closing assy replacement

reagent tray closing assy.
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors SW1 (no

polarity), unscrew the 2 Torx screws and
Torx screws
remove the reagent tray closing assy.
Connectors SW1
■ Replace the reagent tray closing assy and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
2.8. Reagent tray door sensor replacement

reagent tray door sensor.
■ Disconnect the sensor connector.
■ Unscrew the black nut to release the sensor.
■ Replace the sensor as well as its washer and nut and reassemble in reverse order.
Make sure that there is a space of 1 to 3 mm between the sensor and the upper side of the
tray.
1-3 mm
Black nut

RAA023
3. Impacted adjustments
Replaced spare parts

Impacted adjustments Barcode Home Door
Rollers Motor Fans NTC Dismantling
reader sensor sensor
Reagent Tray
Reagent Bar Code Reader Position X X X
Central Loading Reagent Position X X
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm X X
R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm X X
R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm X X
R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm X X
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm X X
R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm X X
R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm X X
Sample arm rotation
ISE Sample (if present) X X X X X X X

RAA023
4. Adjustments

When you adjust a position of the reagent tray by changing the number of steps for this
position, please note that a change of 29 steps is approximately equal to a move of
1 mm linear.
Please also note that this value is a mean value taking no account of the different
reagent tray positions.
If the cassette, reagent rack or calibrator/control reagent rack position adjustments are
modified, then the corresponding reagent arm and sample arm position adjustments will
have to be checked and readjusted if necessary. See RAS385: Arms, page 1.
4.1. Functional positions to adjust
The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by three different
types of adjustment:
- the combination of two movements to obtain a centering or
- performing an automatic "AUTO" adjustment or
- performing a manual "MAN" adjustment
The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments.
Modules
Reagent Tray
Sector Position Target Type Tool
Sample arm rotation
Sector 1 Cassette
R1 on cassette 1 R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm
R2 on cassette 2 R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm
Sector 2 Reagent rack
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack 1-A R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm
Sector 3 Cal/Ctrl rack
R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack 1 R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm

RAA023
Modules
Reagent Tray
Reagent arm rotation
Sector 1 Cassette
R1 on cassette 1 R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm
R2 on cassette 2 R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm
Sector 2 Reagent rack
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack 1-A R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm
Sector 3 Cal/Ctrl rack
R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack* 1 R1 Pos. Cal/Ctrl Rack for Reagent Arm*
Reagent Barcode
Reader
Sector 1 Cassette 1 Reagent Bar Code Reader Position AUTO
Sector 36 Cassette
1 Central Loading Reagent Position MAN
* At the moment, these functional positions are not used on HORIBA Medical range.

RAA023
4.2. "Reag tray adjusting tool" description
The "Reag tray adjusting tool" represents the functional positions to adjust as follows:
- C1 and C2: functional positions of a cassette.
- R1, R2 and R3: functional positions of a reagent rack, positions A1, A2 and A3.
- CS1, CS2 and CS3: functional positions of a Cal/Ctrl rack.
CS1, CS2, CS3:

C1, C2:
Functional positions
Functional positions
of a Cal/Ctrl rack
of a cassette
Height adjustment R1, R2, R3:

Functional positions of a reagent rack
A1, A2, A3
It is also used for barcode reader adjustments.

RAA023
4.3. Preliminary procedure
Ensure that the reagent and sample arms are in their respective wash towers.

■ Before starting the position adjustments, load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent tray:
- Select the Reagent radio button (A).

- Press Motor Off (B).
- Turn manually the reagent tray and load

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent
tray.
- Press Check Home (C) to move the

reagent tray to its home position.

RAA023
4.4. Reagent barcode reader position
Warning! Class 2 laser barcode reader

Do not stare directly into beam or with optical instrument, as it may cause permanent eye
damage.
4.4.1. Automatic adjustment

The reagent barcode reader position can be adjusted automatically by using the CAB auto reader
adjustment function (D). To use this function correctly, the "Reag tray adjusting tool" loaded in the
reagent tray (see 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23) must be equipped with a barcode label in good
condition and perfectly centered on the "Reag tray adjusting tool".
■ Press Search (D1).
The reagent tray moves to its home position.
Then, the "Reag tray adjusting tool" moves
to the Reagent Bar Code Reader Position
position.
The adjustment value for the Reagent Bar
Code Reader Position position is
calculated and then displayed in the E
corresponding field (D2).
- The value is displayed in black if it is within
range.
D
- The value is displayed in red if it is out of
2
range. 1 3 4
■ If the adjustment value is correct, press C

Validate (D3).
The value is then transferred in the Target
field for the Reagent Bar Code Reader
Position position (E).
If not, press Cancel (D4) and try again.
■ Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent
tray to its home position.
4.4.2. Adjustment check

Once the reagent barcode reader position is adjusted, check the reagent barcode reading as follows:
A
■ Put different cassettes and racks on the
reagent tray.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Barcode
Test.
■ Select the Reagent radio button (A).
■ Then, press Check Tray (B).
At the end of the cycle, make sure that the
position of cassettes and racks on the B
screen corresponds to the position on the
reagent tray.

RAA023
4.5. "Central Loading Reagent Position"
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Central
Loading Reagent Position (F). G
■ In the Sector scrolling list, select any sector
("7" for this example) (G). F
■ Press Check Home (C).

■ Press Check Position to move the selected
sector to the Central Loading Reagent C H
Position position (H).
■ Check the position of the selected sector in

front of the yellow arrow.
■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Target field for the Central
Loading Reagent Position position (E).
- Increase the number of steps to move the
tray anticlockwise. E
- Decrease the number of steps to move the
tray clockwise.
■ Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent
C H
tray to its home position, then check the
position again (press Check Position (H)).
■ Put the covers back.

RAA023
4.6. Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack)
■ Load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent tray. See 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23.
■ Replacethe reagent and sample needles respectively by the "Dummy reagent needle" (see RAS385:
Arms, 5.2. "Dummy reagent needle" installation, page 25) and the "Dummy sample needle" (see
RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation, page 38).
Adjustment example
Adjustment of a sampling with the reagent needle in a cassette in position "C1".
Aim of this procedure: center the reagent needle in the R1 on Cassette position. This
adjustment is performed with the "Reag tray adjusting tool" and the "Dummy reagent
needle".
R1 on Cassette
R2 on Cassette

RAA023
a- Reagent tray tab

■ In
the Target scrolling list, select R1 Pos.-
Cassette for Reagent Arm (F).
■ Press Check Home (C). F
■ Press Check Position to move the cassette
to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm
position (H), then check the "Reag tray E
adjusting tool" position: C H
The "C1" hole of the "Reag tray adjusting

tool" must be centered in the rear slot of the
insulating cover.
■ Adjust the position by changing the number of steps in the Target field for the R1 Pos.- Cassette for
Reagent Arm position (E).
- Y1 - Increase the number of steps to move the tray anticlockwise.
- Y2 - Decrease the number of steps to move the tray clockwise.
Y1 Y2
OK
■ Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent tray to its home position, then check the position again
(press Check Position (H)).

RAA023
b- Reagent arm rotation tab

■ Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical home position.

■ Ensure that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.
■ Selectthe reagent arm Rotation radio

1
button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select R1 on 2
Cassette (2).
■ Press Check Position (3).
3
■ Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent

needle" in the "Reag tray adjusting tool" as
follows:
- Select the reagent arm Vertical radio
button (4).
- Press Motor Off (5).
5
Reagent arm rotation / R1 on Cassette (b)

+
-
+
- Slowly push the arm down, then check the

position of the "Dummy reagent needle" in
the "Reag tray adjusting tool".
Reagent tray / R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm (a)

RAA023
■ Press Check Home (6).

of steps in the Position field for the R1 on
Cassette position (7).
- Increase the number of steps to turn the
reagent arm clockwise.
- Decrease the number of steps to turn the 6
7
reagent arm anticlockwise.
The principle of the adjustment consists in a combination of two movements: the reagent tray
rotation (a) and the reagent arm rotation (b).
If necessary, repeat the "a" and "b" adjustments by changing each adjustment with the + and
- buttons.
■ Move the reagent arm to its rotation home position as follows:

Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).
■ Check the position again as follows:
Press Check Position (3) and check the centering of the needle again (see above).
■ Move the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows:
Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (6).
Check the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).
Follow the same adjustment principle for all the functional positions listed in the functional positions
table. See 4.1. Functional positions to adjust, page 20.
Pay attention to select the correct module concerned and to correctly set the sectors, the
positions and the targets.
■ Remove the "Dummy sample needle" and the "Dummy reagent needle" and put the sample and
reagent needles back.
■ Remove the "Reag tray adjusting tool" from the reagent tray.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS381D
Sample tray
versions:
RAS381: Sample tray
Concerns
Sample tray dismantling
Sample tray parts replacement
Adjustments
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Torx key
Open-end wrench
Flat screwdriver
TOOL, DYNAMO. SCREWDRIVER A302 MAG019A
(1207851019)
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Sample tray ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Sample tray dismantling
Remove the external and internal sample covers.
This cover dismantling is enough to be able to adjust the sample tray. See 4. Adjustments,
page 16. But, if necessary, the sample tray can be removed as follows.
■ Loosen the screw to turn the antistatic

brush.
RAS381D - 2 SAMPLE TRAY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Sample tray
■ Remove the sample tray by unscrewing the

5 low head CHC screws.
■ Reassemble in reverse order except covers.
Technical Manual SAMPLE TRAY RAS381D - 3

RAA023
2. Sample tray parts replacement
2.1. Barcode reader replacement
■ The barcode reader frequency (550 Hz) allows the reading of high resolution barcodes
(higher than or equal to 0.16 mm). However, this frequency does not allow the reading of
higher resolution barcodes (lower than 0.16 mm).
■ To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement:
■ Unplugthe barcode reader connector from

the sample relay board (J5).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws on the barcode
reader support to release the barcode
reader from its support.

RAA023
■ Remove the barcode reader.
■ Replace the barcode reader and reassemble in reverse order.
To position correctly the barcode reader, screw the 2 CHC screws on the barcode reader
support pushing the barcode reader as indicated on the following picture.

RAA023
2.2. Sample tube detector replacement

■ Disconnect the sample tube detector

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws on the sample

tube detector to release it from its support.
■ Replace the sample tube detector and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023


■ Follow the sample tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2.
■ Remove the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers
dismantling, page 1.
■ Open the computer fan box as follows: slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.
■ Remove the blue tube from the computer

fan box.
■ Disconnect the sample tray home sensor

connector (C21) under the reagent tray.

RAA023
■ Giveplay to the sample tray motor by

unscrewing the right CHC screw and
washer and loosening the left CHC screw.
■ Remove the belt from the motor pinion to pass the sample tray home sensor connector through the
opening under the reagent tray.
■ Mark the position of the sample tray home

sensor support before unscrewing the 4
Torx screws of the support.
■ Unscrew the CHC screw to release the sample tray home sensor and its wires.
■ Replace the sample tray home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.
Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/
disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the
computer model).

RAA023


fan box.
■ Disconnect the sample tray home sensor

connector (C21) under the reagent tray.
■ Move the sample tray motor support by

unscrewing the right CHC screw and C
washer (A) and loosening the left CHC
screw (B) to pass the sample tray home
sensor connector through the opening
under the reagent tray.
■ Markthe position of the sample tray home
sensor support before loosening the 4 CHC
screws of the support (C).
A
B

RAA023
■ Unscrew the CHC screw to release the sample tray home sensor and its wires.
■ Replace the sample tray home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.
computer model).



fan box.

RAA023
■ Disconnect the motor connector (M25) (A)

and the optical encoder connector (E27) (B)
under the reagent tray. A
■ Remove the motor without modifying the

adjustment of the belt tensioner screw as
follows:
- Unscrew the right CHC screw and washer
and loosen the left CHC screw to give play
to the motor.
- Unscrew the left CHC screw and washer to
release the motor.
The belt tensioner screw is adjusted at 90 mNm with a dynamometric screwdriver.

RAA023
■ To remove the motor from the instrument, it is necessary to slightly lift the reagent tray up as follows:
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws and washers of

the left reagent tray foot.
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws, one with

washer and one with a ground wire of the
right reagent tray foot.
- Carefully lift the reagent tray up.
■ Replace the motor, put the belt back on the motor pinion and fasten the left CHC screw and washer.
■ Put the belt back on the sample tray wheel and fasten the right CHC screw and washer.
■ Tighten the left and right CHC screws.
computer model).
Because the reagent tray has been lifted up, check all the centering positions of the reagent
and sample arms using the "Reag tray adjusting tool", the "Dummy reagent needle" and the
"Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, page 1.

RAA023


fan box.
■ Disconnect the motor connector (M25) (A)

and the optical encoder connector (E27) (B)
B
■ Remove the motor without modifying the

adjustment of the belt tensioner screw as
follows:
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers
to give play to the motor.

RAA023
- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws under the

reagent tray to release the motor from its
support.
The belt tensioner screw is adjusted at 90 mNm with a dynamometric screwdriver.
■ Replace the motor and reassemble in reverse order.

computer model).

RAA023

Barcode reader Sample tube detector Home sensor Motor Dismantling
Sample Tray
Sample Bar code reader Position X X
Sample Tube Detector Position X X
External sampling Pos. X
Internal sampling Pos. X

RAA023
4. Adjustments

When you adjust a position of the sample tray by changing the number of steps for this
1 mm linear.
Please also note that this value is a mean value taking no account of the different
sample tray positions.
When you adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position, press Check
Home, then check the position again (press Check Position) to validate and save the new
adjustment.
The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by the
combination of two movements to obtain a centering .
Modules
Sample Tray
Sample arm rotation
External Sample 1 2 External Sampling Pos.
Internal Sample 1 1 Internal Sampling Pos.
Sample Barcode Reader

Default value 332 N/A Sample Bar code reader Position (332)
Sample tube detector
1 1 Sample Tube Detector Position

RAA023
■ Before starting the position adjustments, load a sample cup rack on the sample tray in position "1".
B
■ Select the Sample radio button (A).
■ Inthe Sector and Position scrolling lists,
select "1" and "1" (B).
■ Press Check Home (C).
C
4.3. Sample barcode reader position
Warning! Class 2 laser barcode reader

Do not stare directly into beam or with optical instrument, as it may cause permanent eye
damage.
■ To adjust this position, remove the barcode reader cover (see 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2) to
access the sample relay board.
■ Perform the Preliminary procedure, page 17 but load a sample rack instead of a sample cup rack.
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Sample
Bar code reader Position (D).
■ Enter
"332" in the Target field for the
Sample Bar code reader Position position D
(F).
■ PressCheck Home (C), then press Check F
Position (E). C E
■ Close the Diagnostics menu and answer OK at the question: "Do you want to save parameters?".

RAA023
■ Goto Services > Customer Services >

Barcode. 2 3
■ Place a 5 mL adaptor on the rack position
"2".
select "1" and "2" (1).
1
■ Press Polling to allow continuous reading
of the selected position (2).
■ Slightly
loosen the 2 CHC screws on the
barcode reader support.
■ Adjust the barcode reader position to 5 mL adaptor notch

center the beam on the 5 mL adaptor notch.
■ Tighten the 2 CHC screws.
■ Press Stop (3).
■ Make sure that the beam is centered on the

rack position 1 as follows:
- In the Sector and Position scrolling lists,
select "1" and "1".
- Press Polling and make sure that the
beam is centered on the sample rack
window. sample rack
window

RAA023
4.4. Sample tube detector position
The vertical centering of the beam is no more required (lightly positioned under the window)
because the tube detector position is fixed from now.
■ Perform the Preliminary procedure, page 17 but load a sample rack instead of a sample cup rack.
■ In
Tube Detector Position (A).
■ Enter
"3860" in the Target field for the
Sample Tube Detector Position position A
(B).
■ PressCheck Home (C), then press Check B
Position (D). C D
■ The middle window of the sample tray (A)

must be approximately centered on the
reflector. B
The LED of the sample tube detector is lit (red light (B)) when the reflector is detected and
unlit when the reflector is not detected.
■ Place a 5 mL adaptor on the rack position "2".

RAA023

select "1" and "2" (E).
■ Press Check Position (D).
■ Turnthe potentiometer anticlockwise until

the LED is unlit.
■ Then, turn the potentiometer clockwise
until the LED is lit.
■ Move the sample tray clockwise by using

the - button (E) until the LED is unlit and note
the number of steps (a) displayed in the
Target field for the Sample Tube Detector
Position position (B).
■ Move the sample tray anticlockwise by
using the + button (F) until the LED is lit.
■ Move the sample tray anticlockwise by
using the + button (F) until the LED is unlit
again and note the number of steps (b)
displayed in the Target field for the Sample B
Tube Detector Position position (B).
■ Enterthe mean value of number of steps C E D F
(a+b)/2 in the Target field for the Sample
Tube Detector Position position (B) and
press Check Position (D).
■ Press Check Home (C) to move the sample
position again (press Check Position (D)).

RAA023
■ Make sure that all types of sample tubes and cups are correctly detected as follows:
- Load 6 sample racks/sample cup racks with several sample tubes and cups on the sample tray.
- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Barcode Test.
- Select the Sample Tray radio button (A)

and press Check Tray (B).
- At the end of the cycle, make sure that the
position of sample tubes and cups on the
screen corresponds to their position on the
sample tray. Click in the Sector fields (C) to
display the different racks.
C
■ If some sample tubes and cups are detected on physically empty positions, lightly turn the
potentiometer clockwise and check the detection again (see above).
■ If some sample tubes and cups are not detected, slightly turn the potentiometer anticlockwise and
check the detection again (see above).
The most sensitive positions are the rack positions "1" and "10" for each rack.
Check the detection with and without sample tubes and cups on these positions.
■ Put the barcode reader cover back.

RAA023
4.5. Sampling in sample tray adjustment
■ Replace the sample needle by the "Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample
needle" installation, page 38.
Adjustment example
Adjustment of a sampling with the sample needle in a sample cup (or tube) in internal position.
a- Sample tray tab

■ Load a sample cup rack on the sample tray

A
in sector "1", position "1" as follows:
- Select the Sample radio button (A).
- In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, B
select "1" and "1" (B).
- Press Check Home (C).
D
■ Move the sample cup rack to the Internal F

Sampling Pos. position as follows:
C E
- In the Target scrolling list, select Internal
Sampling Pos. (D).
- Press Check Position (E).
■ To adjust the sample tray position (see Sample position, gray arrows) change the number of steps in
the Target field for the Internal Sampling Pos. position (F).
- Increase the number of steps to move the tray anticlockwise.
- Decrease the number of steps to move the tray clockwise.
Sample position
Sample arm adjustment (b)

+ "Internal Sample"
"External Sample"
Sample tray adjustment (a)
"Internal Sampling Pos." -
"External Sampling Pos."
+

RAA023
b- Sample arm tab

■ Place the reagent arm in its wash tower as

follows:
button (1) and press Check Home (2). A 1
button (A) and press Check Home (2).
- Select the reagent arm Rotation radio B
button (B) and press Check Home (2). D
- In the Position scrolling list, select Wash
Tower Position (C) and press Check C
Position (3).
- Select the reagent arm Vertical radio 2 3
button (A).
- In the Position scrolling list, select Low
Position in Wash Tower (D) and press
Check Position (3).
■ Move the sample arm to the Internal

Sample position as follows:
- Select the sample arm Rotation radio 4
button (4) and press Check Home (2).
- In the Position scrolling list, select
Internal Sample (5). 5
- Press Check Position (3) to move the
sample arm over the sample cup rack
6
position "2".
7
■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

needle" in the hole "1" of the sample cup
rack as follows:
button (1).
- Maintain the arm with one hand, then
press Motor Off (6).
position of the "Dummy sample needle" in
the sample cup rack position "1".
■ Press Check Home (2) to move the sample arm to its vertical home position.
■ To adjust the sample arm position (see Sample position, blue arrows) change the number of steps in
the Position field for the Internal Sample position (7).
- Increase the number of steps to turn the sample arm clockwise.
- Decrease the number of steps to turn the sample arm anticlockwise.

RAA023
■ Move the sample arm to its rotation home

position as follows:
- Select the sample arm Rotation radio
button (8).
- Press Check Home (9).
■ Check the position again as follows: 8
- Press Check Position (10).
- Check the centering of the "Dummy
9 10
sample needle" again (see above).
The principle of the adjustment consists in a combination of two movements: the sample tray
rotation (a) and the sample arm rotation (b).
If necessary, repeat the "a" and "b" adjustments by changing each adjustment with the + and
- buttons.
11
■ Move the sample arm to its vertical and

rotation home position as follows:
9
■ Press Check Home (A) to move the sample

position again (press Check Position (B)).
A B
Follow the same adjustment principle for the external position described in the functional positions
table. See 4.1. Functional positions to adjust, page 16.
Pay attention to select the correct module concerned and to correctly set the sectors, the
positions and the targets.
■ Remove the "Dummy sample needle " and put the sample needle back.

RAA023
RAS382F
Reaction tray
Concerns
Reaction tray dismantling
Reaction tray parts replacement
Adjustments
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Hexagonal screwdriver
Flat screwdriver
OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787)
TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893)
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

Cuvette segments

operations.
Reaction tray ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Reaction tray dismantling
In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation
movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the
following picture.
- Open the arms main cover.
- Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.
- Lift the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.
- Remove the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate.
■ Remove the unload rack.
■ Remove the load rack as follows:
- Open the 2 adhesive collars and release the wires of the "rack used segment full" sensor.
- Disconnect the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and unscrew the 6 CHC screws.
"rack used segment full"

sensor
RAS382F - 2 REACTION TRAY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Reaction tray
- Disconnect the ground wire.

- Open the adhesive collar and release the
wires of the "new segment available"
sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect this
connector because the wires are long
enough to put the load rack close to the
instrument.
"new segment available" sensor
- Lightly lift the load rack up to disconnect

the cuvette motion motor (M32) and the
cuvette motion home sensor (C37), located
under the load rack.
- Remove the load rack.
■ Remove the reaction tray cover by

unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.
Technical Manual REACTION TRAY RAS382F - 3

RAA023
2. Reaction tray parts replacement
2.1. Flap door switch replacement

■ First, follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws then remove

the flap door switch cover.
■ Disconnect the 2 flap door switch cables

(A).
■ Hold the plate on which the screws are
tightened (located in the reaction tray inside)
and unscrew the 2 CHC screws (B), then
remove the flap door switch.
A
■ Install the new flap door switch then fasten the 2 CHC screws.
■ Make sure that the flap door switch works properly by hearing a characteristic "click". If not, adjust it
by unscrewing/screwing the 2 CHC screws.
■ Connect the 2 flap door switch cables.
■ Reinstall the flap door switch cover.
■ Adjust the flap door switch cover with the 2 CHC screws so that the hatch closes properly by
magnetization.

RAA023
2.2. NTC replacement

■ Disconnect the flap door switch (A).

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws then remove A
the upper case.
Make sure that the holder disk is correctly positioned to remove the upper case without
damaging the NTC.
NTC
Holder disk

RAA023
■ Unscrewthe CHC screw then remove the

NTC from the upper case notch.
■ Remove the NTC black support.
■ Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the 8

CHC screws.
■ Disconnect the NTC connector.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Heating >

Reaction Heating.
■ Inthe NTC Impedance field, enter the
values written on the new NTC cable sticker.

RAA023
When reinstalling the NTC on the upper case, ensure that only the blue part of the cable is in
the upper case notch.
NTC cable
Upper case notch

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the
upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.
■ Unscrew the ground wire and disconnect

the motor connector.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws, then remove

the motor.
■ Replace the motor, fasten the 2 CHC screws and reconnect the motor connector.
■ Make sure that there is no play between the reaction tray crown wheel and the motor pinion but do not
over-tighten the motor. If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws.
2.4. Rollers replacement

2.4.1. Roller adjusting assy replacement

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the roller

adjusting assy and remove it.

RAA023
■ Installthe new roller adjusting assy. The

roller must touch the crown wheel.
■ Ensure that the crown wheel turns correctly.
Adjust the pressure using the adjusting
screw.
2.4.2. Lateral rollers replacement

■ On the lateral roller to be replaced, unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the lateral roller
support and remove it.
■ Install the new lateral roller. The screws must be placed alongside the crown wheel.

RAA023
2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement

2.4.3.1. General procedure
If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please
refer to the specific procedure: 2.4.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model
of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 12.
■ Follow the optical bench dismantling procedure until you removed the optical bench. See RAS383:
Optical bench, 1. Optical bench dismantling, page 2.

holder disk.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the upper

roller support and remove it.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the CHC screw of the upper roller

support then remove the roller from the
support.
■ Install the new roller on the upper roller support.

■ Install the upper roller support on the crown wheel. Ensure that there is a space of 0.2 mm between
the roller and the crown wheel as follows:
Stick a piece of adhesive tape on the crown wheel. Adjust the space between the roller and the crown
wheel using the roller axis. The roller must turn when it is on the adhesive tape and must be fixed when
it is on the crown wheel.
Roller axis
0.2 mm
Adhesive tape
■ Leave the adhesive tape on the crown wheel and check the position of the 2 other upper rollers.
■ Remove the adhesive tape.

RAA023
2.4.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C")
This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench
(before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

holder disk.

roller support and remove it.
■ Unscrew the CHC screw of the upper roller

support then remove the roller from the
support.

RAA023
■ Install the new roller on the upper roller support.

■ Installthe upper roller support on the crown wheel. Ensure that there is a space of 0.2 mm between
the roller and the crown wheel as follows:
Stick a piece of adhesive tape on the crown wheel. Adjust the space between the roller and the crown
wheel using the roller axis. The roller must turn when it is on the adhesive holder and must be fixed
when it is on the crown wheel.
Roller axis
0.2 mm
Adhesive tape
■ Leave the adhesive tape on the crown wheel and check the position of the 2 other upper rollers.
■ Remove the adhesive tape.
2.4.4. Down rollers replacement

■ Follow the 2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement, page 10 procedure until you removed the holder disk.

RAA023
■ Remove the crown wheel as follows:

- Unscrew the 2 external CHC screws of
each upper roller, mark them in order not to
invert them when reassembling and remove
them.
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral 2

roller support "1" and remove it.
- Unscrew one of the 2 CHC screws of the
roller adjusting assy "2" and loosen the
second CHC screw to turn the support.
- Now, remove the crown wheel. 1
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the down

roller to be replaced and remove it.

RAA023

them.
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral

2
- Now, remove the crown wheel. 1

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the down

roller to be replaced and remove it.

■ Follow the 2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement, page 10 procedure until you removed the holder disk.
■ Follow the 2.4.4. Down rollers replacement, page 13 procedure to remove the crown wheel.

CHC screws.

RAA023
■ Disconnect the home sensor connector.
■ Loosen the 3 CHC screws supporting the

lower box.
■ Unscrewthe CHC screw and remove the

home sensor.
■ Cut one ear of the new home sensor and twist the cables.
■ Install the new home sensor and center it in the notch.
When reinstalling the crown wheel, ensure that the home sensor does not touch the crown
wheel flag.
■ Check all the reaction tray position adjustments. See 4. Adjustments, page 19.

RAA023

Flap door switch NTC Home sensor Motor Rollers Dismantling
Reaction Tray
Offset X X
Mixing Position X X
Reagent Arm Position X X
Sample Arm Position X X
Automatic Loading X X
Handling Position X X
Reaction Tray cover (for needles) X X X X X X
Sample arm rotation
Cuvette Position X X
Mixer
Cuvette changer
Load in Reaction Tray Position X X
Heating menu
Reaction Heating: NTC Impedance X

RAA023
4. Adjustments

When you adjust a position of the reaction tray by changing the number of steps for this
1 mm linear.
The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by three different
types of adjustment:
Modules
Reaction Tray
Optical Bench Light Beam
1 Offset AUTO
Mixer
Cuvette Position 1 2 Mixing Position
Cuvette Position 1 1 Reagent Arm Position
Sample arm rotation
+
Cuvette Position 1 2 Sample Arm Position
Cuvette changer
Vertical: Motor Off;
Horizontal: Load in Reaction 1 1 Automatic Loading
Tray Position
Reaction tray
1 1 Handling Position MAN

RAA023
Make sure that all the assemblies are at their home position before starting an adjustment.
Make sure that the arms are in the upper position before moving a tray.
■ Beforestarting the position adjustments, select the position of the adjustment tool or cuvette segment
on the reaction tray:
- Select the Reaction radio button (A).

- Press Check Home (B).
- In the Sector scrolling list, select "1" (C).

RAA023
4.3. Home position
This position adjustment is performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST
9200787 (1229200787).
4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation

■ First, follow the Preliminary procedure, page 20.
■ Manually load the adjustment tool in the reaction tray in position "1" as follows:
- In the Target scrolling list, select Handling

Position (D).
- Press Check Position (E). The position "1"
D
of the reaction tray moves to the Handling
Position position.
- Manually load the tool in the reaction tray.
E
Make sure that the tool is loaded properly into the reaction tray. It is necessary to press the
tool completely down into the reaction tray.
4.3.2. Home position adjustment

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro.
A
B
■ Clickthe Spectro Measure Adjustment

tab (A).
The number of steps of the reaction tray
home offset is indicated in the Current
offset field (B). C
■ Press Measure (C).
The instrument evaluates the quality of the current ajdustment. If the current adjustment is not
satisfactory, a new offset is determined and the instrument carries out a second measure with this
new offset. If this new offset is not satisfactory, a new offset is again determined and the instrument
carries out a third measure.

RAA023
D G
The calculated offset value is displayed in
the Calculated offset field (D):
- The value is displayed in green if it is within
range (optical density curve in green (G)).
range (optical density curve in red (G)).
■ If
the adjustment is not correct, press E F
Cancel (F). The optical density curve and
the calculated offset are erased. Run
measure cycles until the adjustment is
correct.
■ If the adjustment is correct, press OK (E).
The offset value is transferred in the Offset

field for the reaction tray home position (F).
■ Leave the adjustment tool in the reaction tray to adjust the other positions.
■ If the home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.

RAA023
4.4. Mixing Position
This position adjustment is performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST
9200787 (1229200787).
The position "2" of the adjustment tool will be used.
1 2
Make sure that the mixer assembly is in the upper position.
■ If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in
position "1". If not, manually load it. See 4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation, page 21.
■ In the Position scrolling list, select "2" (A). A

■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Mixing
Position (B).
B
■ Press Check Position (C).
The position "1" of the reaction tray moves
to the Mixing Position position. C

RAA023
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. 1

■ Select the Mixer radio button (1).
■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette 2
Position (2).
■ PressCheck Position (3).
The mixer moves over the reaction tray and
the mixing paddle turns.
3
■ Waitfor the mixing paddle to stop turning,
then manually pull the mixer down.
■ Check the centering of the paddle on the

mobile part of the tool position "2".
■ Manually pull the mixer up.
reaction tray adjustment

of steps in the Target field for the Mixing
Position position (D).
- Increase the number of steps to turn the D
reaction tray clockwise.
reaction tray anticlockwise.

RAA023
■ Adjust the mixer positioning center as

follows:
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the mixer
positioning center.
- Move the mixer positioning center until the
mixer paddle is centered on the mobile part
of the tool position "2".
- Fasten the 2 CHC screws of the mixer
positioning center.
■ Move the reaction tray to its home position

(press Check Home (E)) then check the
position again (press Check Position then
manually pull the mixer down).
■ Move the mixer to its home position:

- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.
- Select the Mixer radio button (1).
4
Leave the adjustment tool in the reaction tray to adjust the other positions.

RAA023
4.5. Arms position
■ Replacethe reagent and sample needles respectively by the "Dummy reagent needle" (see RAS385:
Arms, 5.2. "Dummy reagent needle" installation, page 25) and the "Dummy sample needle" (see
RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation, page 38).
4.5.1. Reagent Arm Position

Make sure that the sample arm is in its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.
If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in
1 2

■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Reagent
Arm Position (B).
B
to the Reagent Arm Position position. C

RAA023
■ Move the sample arm to its vertical home

- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. 3 1
4
7
■ Move the reagent arm to its vertical and
5
- Select the reagent arm Rotation radio 2 6
button (4).
Cuvette Position (5).
The value of the rotation home offset (7) must not be modified.
Adjust the rotation home position with the reagent arm mechanical adjustment described
below.

needle" into the hole of the tool position "1"
as follows:
button (3).
8

position of the "Dummy reagent needle"
into the hole of the tool position "1".
arm adjustment (RAS385)
reaction tray adjustment (RAS382)

RAA023
■ Loosen the CHC screw on the reagent arm,

then turn the reagent arm to center the
"Dummy reagent needle" into the hole of the
tool position "1".
■ Tighten the screw.

4
- Select the reagent arm Rotation radio
reagent needle" again (see above).
2

of steps in the Target field for the Reagent
Arm Position position (D).
reaction tray anticlockwise. D
■ Move the reaction tray to its home position E

(press Check Home (E)) then check the
position again with the reagent needle (see
above).
■ Move the reagent arm to its home position

(vertical then rotation): 4
2

RAA023
4.5.2. Sample Arm Position

This position corresponds to the home position. Therefore, the number of steps in the Target
scrolling list must be "0". This is fixed and must not be changed.
Follow this procedure to check the position only.
Make sure that the reagent arm is in its wash position (rotation and vertical) before moving
the sample arm.
If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in
1 2

■ In
Arm Position (B).
B
to the Sample Arm Position position. C

RAA023
■ Move the sample arm over the reaction tray 1

as follows:
button (3). 3
Cuvette Position (4). 2 5 4
6
Adjust the rotation home position with the sample arm mechanical adjustment described
below.

needle" on the mobile part of the tool
position "2" as follows:
button (1).
7

position of the "Dummy sample needle" on
the mobile part of the tool position "2".

RAA023
■ Loosen the CHC screw on the sample arm,

then turn the sample arm to center the
"Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part

■ Move the sample arm to its home position 3

(vertical then rotation) as follows:
- Select the sample arm Vertical radio 2
■ Remove the tool from the reaction tray as

follows: A
- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.
- In the Sector scrolling list and in the
Position scrolling list, select "1" and "1" (A). B
Position (B).
- Press Check Position (C). C
- Remove the tool from the reaction tray.
4.6. Cuvette changer
■ First,
install the "Test segment Pentra 400". See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.2. "Test segment Pentra
400" installation, page 32.
■ Perform
the reaction tray adjustment. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.4. Adjustment of reaction tray
"Automatic Loading" position, page 34.

RAA023
4.7. Handling Position
■ First, follow the 4.2. Preliminary procedure, page 20.
■ Manually load a cuvette segment in the

reaction tray in position "1" as follows:
Position (A).
- Press Check Position (B). A
to the Handling Position position.
- Manually load the cuvette segment in the B
reaction tray.
■ Check the centering of the cuvette segment

in front of the upper case opening.

of steps in the Target field for the Handling
Position position (C).
reaction clockwise.
E
(press Check Home (D)) then check the
position again (press Check Position). A
■ Remove the cuvette segment from the

reaction tray as follows: D B
C
- In the Sector scrolling list and in the
Position scrolling list, select "1" and "1" (E).
Position (A).
- Press Check Position (B).
- Remove the cuvette segment from the
reaction tray.

RAA023
4.8. Hole position check
■ Reinstall the reaction tray cover by slightly turning the 3 CHC screws and washers.
■ Reconnect the flap door switch.
4.8.1. Mixer hole position check

■ Lift the mixer up.

■ Select the Mixer radio button (1).
■ Press Check Home (2) 3
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select Above
Reaction Tray (3).
■ PressCheck Position (4):
The mixer moves over the reaction tray and
the mixing paddle turns. Wait for the mixing 2 4
paddle to stop turning, then manually pull
the mixer down.
■ Check the mixer hole position in order to

center it according to the mixer paddle. If
not, adjust the position by unscrewing/
screwing the CHC screw.
■ Manually pull the mixer up.
■ Move the mixer to its home position:

- Select the Mixer radio button (1).

RAA023
4.8.2. Reagent hole position check
Make sure that the sample arm is in its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.
■ Move the reagent arm over the reaction tray

1
as follows:
3
This position corresponds to the Cuvette
Position position.
- Select the reagent arm Vertical radio 2 4
button (1).
■ Slowly pull the reagent arm down.

■ Check the reagent hole position in order to
center it according to the "Dummy reagent
needle". If not adjust the position by
unscrewing/screwing the CHC screw.
■ Move the reagent arm to its home position

3
2 4

RAA023
4.8.3. Sample hole position check
Make sure that the reagent arm is in its wash position (rotation and vertical) before moving
the sample arm.
■ Move the sample arm over the reaction tray

as follows: 1
This position corresponds to the Cuvette 3
Position position.
- Select the sample arm Vertical radio 2 4
button (1).
■ Slowly pull the sample arm down.

■ Check the sample hole position in order to
center it according to the "Dummy sample
needle". If not adjust the position by
unscrewing/screwing the CHC screw.
■ Move the sample arm to its home position

2
■ Remove the "Dummy reagent needle" and the "Dummy sample needle" and put the reagent and
sample needles back.

RAA023
4.9. Automatic loading position
This adjustment is described during the cuvette changer adjustment. See RAS384: Cuvette changer,
4.4. Adjustment of reaction tray "Automatic Loading" position, page 34.

RAA023
RAS548B
Fan and heater replacement
Concerns
Reaction tray lower box dismantling
Fan replacement
Heater replacement
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver
Pliers
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Fan and heater replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling
following picture.
■ Lift up the arms main cover and the mixer.
■ Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch, the cuvettes cover, the optic
hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate. See RAS377: Covers

CHC screws.
Heater connector Fan connector

■ From the instrument rear, disconnect the
heater connector and the fan connector.
RAS548B - 2 REACTION TRAY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Fan and heater replacement
On the lower box input (left side):
■ Remove the 2 auto-grip strips maintaining

the tubing cover and the casing.
■ Slide the casing to reach the tubing.
Collar
■ Clamp the tubing, then remove the collar

using a flat screwdriver.
■ Disconnect the input tubing from the lower
box.
On the lower box output (right side):
■ Unscrew the CHC screw maintaining the

braided ground wire.
■ Remove the auto-grip strip maintaining the

tubing cover.
■ Slide the tubing cover to reach the tubing.
Technical Manual REACTION TRAY RAS548B - 3

RAA023
Collar
■ Clamp the tubing, then remove the collar

using a flat screwdriver.
■ Disconnect the tubing from the lower box.
■ Remove the left condensate tubing from the

adhesive holder, then disconnect it from the
"T" fitting.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws maintaining the

lower box.
■ Remove delicately the lower box.

■ Disconnect the condensate tubing from the lower box angle fitting.

RAA023
2. Fan replacement
■ First, perform the lower box dismantling. See 1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling, page 2.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the fan cable

and the heater cable.

the thermic bulkhead and the fan.

RAA023
Be very careful when positioning the fan:

■ 2 arrows, located on the fan side, indicate the fan rotation direction and the air direction
(A). The fan must breathe toward the heater (B).
■ Pay attention to place the fan cable in front of the cable notch (C).
Fan rotation
Air direction
(toward the heater) direction
Air direction
(toward the heater)
C Lower box notch Fan cable Cable notch

RAA023
■ The thermic bulkhead notch must be placed in front of the spectrophotometer flat cable
notch (A).
■ When connecting the cooling unit tubings on the lower box, pay attention to connect the
Input and Output correctly (B).
Notch
Input Output
Before fastening the 4 CHC screws maintaining the lower box, ensure that the reaction tray
home sensor cable, the spectrophotometer flat cable, the fan cable and the heater cable are
well positioned in their respective notches.
Spectrophotometer
flat cable notch
Fan and heater notch
Reaction tray home

sensor cable notch

RAA023
3. Heater replacement
■ First, perform the lower box dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling,
page 2.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the fan cable

and the heater cable.

the thermic bulkhead and the fan.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 4 crosspieces then remove the

heater.
Be careful when positioning the heater. The heater metallic flaps must be on top.
Be very careful when positioning the fan:

■ 2 arrows, located on the fan side, indicate the fan rotation direction and the air direction
(A). The fan must breathe toward the heater (B).
■ Pay attention to place the fan cable in front of the cable notch (C).
Fan rotation
Air direction
(toward the heater) direction

RAA023
Air direction
(toward the heater)
C Lower box notch Fan cable Cable notch
■ The thermic bulkhead notch must be placed in front of the spectrophotometer flat cable
notch (A).
■ When connecting the cooling unit tubings on the lower box, pay attention to connect the
Input and Output correctly (B).
Notch

RAA023
Input Output
Before fastening the 4 CHC screws maintaining the lower box, ensure that the reaction tray
home sensor cable, the spectrophotometer flat cable, the fan cable and the heater cable are
well positioned in their respective notches.
Spectrophotometer
flat cable notch
Fan and heater notch
Reaction tray home

sensor cable notch

RAA023
None.
5. Check up after intervention
5.1. Temperature check

Analyser.
■ Inthe Temperatures area, check the
reaction tray temperature and the reagent
tray temperature.
- Reaction tray: 37°C (± 0.25°C)
- Reagent tray: 4-10°C
5.2. Glycol circuit check
■ On the lower box, make sure that there is no leak at the level of Input and Output fittings.

RAA023
RAS383F
Optical bench
Concerns
Optical bench dismantling
Optical bench mirror and lenses cleaning and replacement
Optical bench check
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Open-end wrench
Flat screwdriver
TOOL, OPT. BENCH CLEANING KIT XEA945BS (1209159945)
Required products
Dusting spray
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

Cuvette segments

operations.
Optical bench ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Optical bench dismantling
1.1. Dismantling
following picture.
- Remove the recuperation jar.
■ Follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1. Reaction tray
refer to the specific procedure: 1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model
RAS383F - 2 OPTICAL BENCH Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Optical bench

flap door switch (A) and unscrew the NTC to A
■ Remove the spectrophotometer cover as

follows:
- Remove the antistatic bruch by
unscrewing the CHC screw and washer (A),
then unscrew the crosspiece (use an open-
end wrench). A
- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the
spectrophotometer cover.
■ Release the spectrophotometer from the

optical bench as follows:
- Unscrew the flange (A) of the optical
bench.
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers A
(B) of the spectrophotometer.
Technical Manual OPTICAL BENCH RAS383F - 3

RAA023
- Release the spectrophotometer gun from

the optical bench.
1
At this stage of the procedure, you can dismantle the spectrophotometer as well as the
acquisition board although this is not necessary to finish the optical bench dismantling.
■ Dismantle the spectrophotometer as

follows: A
- Remove the ground wires from the
acquisition board by unscrewing the CHC
screw (A).
Take care not to lose the ground wires.
D
- Unplug the flat cable (B).
■ Remove the acquisition board from the C
spectrophotometer as follows:
- Unscrew the two CHC screws of the
acquisition board (C).
- Slowly disconnect the acquisition board
(D) to remove it.
B
- Remove the aluminium insulating plate.

RAA023
■ Make a mark on the sample wash tower

support (to align the sample wash tower
when reassembling), then unscrew the 2
CHC screws to remove the sample wash
tower.
■ Disconnect the lamp supply cable and

loosen the 2 CHC screws. Turn the light lock
and remove the lamp.
Warning! Hot surface

Risk of personal injury due to hot surfaces within the instrument. Wait for the lamp to cool
down before proceeding.
■ Unscrewthe 2 CHC screws to remove the

lamp supply cable support.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 2 upper CHC screws and

loosen the 2 bottom CHC screws to remove
the fan plate.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws of the optical

bench: 2 CHC M4x45 screws on the lamp
side and 2 CHC M4x25 screws on the
spectrophotometer side.
■ Remove the optical bench.
1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical
bench (before "XDA829C")


RAA023

holder disk.

them.
- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral

2
- Now, remove the crown wheel.
1

RAA023
■ Remove the spectrophotometer cover as

follows:
- Remove the antistatic brush by
unscrewing the CHC screw and washer (A),
then unscrew the crosspiece (use an open-
end wrench). A
- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the
spectrophotometer cover.
■ Remove the ground wires by unscrewing

the CHC screw from the acquisition board
as well as the CHC screw and washer from
the spectrophotometer.

RAA023
The acquisition board dismantling procedure is described below but is not necessary to
dismantle the optical bench.
■ Remove the acquisition board as follows:

- Unplug the flat cable and unscrew the 2
CHC screws.
- Slowly disconnect the acquisition board to

remove it.
- Remove the aluminium insulating plate.

RAA023
■ Make a mark on the sample wash tower

support (to align the sample wash tower
when reassembling), then unscrew the 2
CHC screws to remove the sample wash
tower.




the fan plate.

RAA023

optical bench.
■ Slightly loosen the little screw.
■ Then, separate the spectrophotometer from

the optical bench.

RAA023
1.2. Reassembly
refer to the specific procedure: 1.2.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model
■ Put the optical bench in place. Two dog points located under the optical bench ensure that you put it
in the correct position.
■ Reassemble the spectrophotometer as well as the acquisition board in reverse order. Do not forget to
put the ground wires back.
■ Put the spectrophotometer in place. The spectrophotometer gun must reach the end stop.
■ Tighten the 2 CHC screws and washers (A)

of the spectrophotometer to hold it in place.
■ Tightenthe 4 CHC screws of the optical

bench to hold it in place: 2 CHC M4x45
screws on the lamp side and 2 CHC M4x25
screws on the spectrophotometer side.

RAA023
■ Put the flange of the optical bench back and

tighten it (B) to hold the spectrophotometer
gun in place. B
■ Reassemble the fan plate and the lamp supply cable support in reverse order.
■ Reassemble the lamp in reverse order.
Do not touch the glass part of the lamp with your fingers!
Make sure that the lamp is correctly positioned.
■ Put the sample wash tower back.

■ Reassemble the spectrophotometer cover in reverse order (do not forget the antistatic brush).
■ Reassemble the upper case in reverse order.
■ Now, connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.
■ Put the reaction tray cover back and check the holes position.
■ Reassemble and readjust if necessary the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, page 1.
■ Follow the optical bench check procedure. See 4. Optical bench check, page 31.
■ Follow the check up after intervention procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

RAA023
1.2.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical
bench (before "XDA829C")
■ Reassemble the spectrophotometer and

the optical bench without tightening the
little screw.
■ Put the assembly back on the reaction tray.

■ Tightenthe 4 CHC screws of the optical
bench, indicated in blue on the following
figure.
■ Make sure that the spectrophotometer is correctly engaged in the optical bench.
Spectrophotometer NOT OK
Spectrophotometer OK
■ Now, tighten the little screw.

■ Tighten the last CHC screw of the optical bench, indicated in red.

RAA023
■ Reassemble the fan plate and the lamp supply cable support in reverse order.
■ Reassemble the lamp in reverse order.
Make sure that the lamp is correctly positioned.
■ Put the sample wash tower back.

■ Reassemble the acquisition board in reverse order and put its ground wires back.
■ Reassemble the spectrophotometer cover in reverse order (do not forget the antistatic brush).
■ Put the crown wheel and the rollers back.
■ Reassemble the holder disk as follows:

- Put the holder disk back without
tightening the 6 CHC screws.
- Position 3 cuvette segments into the
reaction tray as shown on the following
figure, to adjust the holder disk.
- Now, tighten the 6 CHC screws.
■ Reassemble the upper case back.

■ Now, connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.
■ Check all the reaction tray position adjustments. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 2. Reaction tray parts
■ Put the reaction tray cover back.
■ Reassemble and readjust if necessary the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, page 1.
■ Follow the optical bench check procedure. See 4. Optical bench check, page 31.
■ Follow the check up after intervention procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

RAA023
2. Optical bench mirror and lenses cleaning and

replacement
Take care not to touch the mirror or the lenses with your fingers. Wear gloves to handle the
mirror and the lenses.
2.1. Condensing lens cleaning and replacement
2.1.1. Dismantling



RAA023


the fan plate.
■ Unscrew the lamp socket screws (A) to A

remove it.
■ Unscrew the condensing lens holder (B) to

remove it.

RAA023
■ Slightly loosen the little screw to free the

lens.
■ Follow the optical bench dismantling procedure. See 1.1. Dismantling, page 2.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and remove the

mirror clip.
■ Remove the mirror cautiously and place it
on paper.
■ To access the condensing lens:

- Slightly loosen the little screw and remove
the cap.

RAA023
- Turn the optical bench over, unscrew the 4

CHC screws and remove the heat sink
cover.
■ Dismantle the condensing lens as follows:

- Slightly loosen the little screw to free the
lens.
- Turn the optical bench over, use paper to

protect the lens exit and push cautiously the
lens with a plastic tool passing through the
mirror hole.
Pushing the lens, take care not to touch the lens but the metallic part.

RAA023
2.1.2. Cleaning and replacement
A B
■ Remove the condensing lens from its

metallic support as follows:
- Adjust the lens dismantling key (provided
in the optical bench cleaning kit (A)) in the
nut notches (B) and unscrew the nut.
- Remove the lens from its metallic support

using the pen with suction cup (provided in
the optical bench cleaning kit) and place it
on paper.
Make sure that the pen with suction cup is clean before use.
If necessary, clean it with a cleaning towelette (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit).
■ Clean each side of the condensing lens with

a cleaning towelette. Wipe the condensing
lens with paper.
■ Put the condensing lens back in its metallic support using the pen with suction cup and fasten the nut.
Take care that the convex side of the lens is upwards.
■ Remove any dust from the condensing lens using a dusting spray.
Make sure that there are no marks on the condensing lens.

RAA023
2.1.3. Reassembly
■ Put the condensing lens back in its holder.
■ Put the lens holder back in its original position. Make sure that the convex side of the lens is facing
the right direction (opposite to the lamp side).
Make sure that the lens holder reaches the end stop so that it is properly placed.
CONDENSING LENS
focal length = 20 mm
■ Make sure that the lens is well-positioned and fully inserted.

■ Screw the condensing lens holder.
■ Tighten the little screw on top to block the lens.
■ Screw the lamp socket.
■ Reassemble the rest of the instrument in reverse order.

RAA023
■ Reassemble the condensing lens as

follows:
- Put the lens back in the optical bench
ensuring that it is installed in the correct
way.
- Make sure that the lens is well-positioned
and fully inserted.
- Tighten the little screw to block the lens.
■ Reassemble in reverse order the heat sink cover and the cap.
■ Clean the mirror with a cleaning towelette. Wipe the mirror with paper.
■ Remove any dust from the mirror using a dusting spray.
Make sure that there are no marks on the mirror.
■ Reassemble in reverse order the mirror.
■ Follow the optical bench reassembly procedure. See 1.2. Reassembly, page 12.

RAA023
2.2. Shaping lens cleaning and replacement
2.2.1. Dismantling

■ Unscrew the flange to have access to the

shaping lens holder.
■ Remove the shaping lens holder.

RAA023
■ Follow the optical bench dismantling procedure. See 1.1. Dismantling, page 2.
■ Dismantle the shaping lens as follows:

- Slightly loosen the little screw to free the
lens.
- Remove the lens and place it on paper.
2.2.2. Cleaning and replacement
■ Remove the shaping lens from its metallic

support as follows:
- Slightly loosen the screw and lift up the
metallic support.
- Take the lens using the pen with suction

cup (provided in the optical bench cleaning
kit) and place it on paper.

RAA023
■ Clean each side of the shaping lens with a

cleaning towelette (provided in the optical
bench cleaning kit). Wipe the shaping lens
with paper.
■ Remove any dust from the shaping lens using a dusting spray and make sure that there are no marks
on the shaping lens.
■ Put the shaping lens back in its metallic support using the pen with suction cup and tighten the screw.
Take care that the convex side of the lens is downwards.
SHAPING LENS

RAA023
2.2.3. Reassembly
■ Put the lens holder back in its original position.
Make sure that the lens holder reaches the end stop so that it is properly placed.
■ Put the flange back and tighten the flange screws.

■ Reassemble the rest of the instrument in reverse order.
■ Reassemble the shaping lens as follows:

- Put the lens back in the optical bench
ensuring that it is installed in the correct
way.
- Make sure that the lens is well-positioned

and aligned with the optical bench as
shown on the following picture.

RAA023
- Tighten the little screw to block the lens.

RAA023
2.3. Coupling lens cleaning and replacement
■ Follow
the optical bench dismantling procedure until you dismantled the spectrophotometer. See 1.1.
Dismantling, page 2.
The coupling lens is located inside the reception barrel of the spectrophotometer.
To replace the coupling lens, you have to replace the reception barrel.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws on the

spectrophotometer to remove the reception
barrel.
■ Remove the coupling lens from the

reception barrel as follows:
- Adjust the lens dismantling key (provided
in the optical bench cleaning kit) in the nut
notches or use a ruler and unscrew the nut.
- Gently turn the barrel over onto an optical

paper on the workbench.

RAA023
- Remove the lens from the reception barrel

using the pen with suction cup (provided in
the optical bench cleaning kit) and place it
on paper.
■ Clean each side of the coupling lens with a

cleaning towelette (provided in the optical
bench cleaning kit). Wipe the coupling lens
with paper.
■ Put the coupling lens back in the reception barrel using the pen with suction cup and fasten the nut.
Take care that the convex side of the lens is upwards.
COUPLING LENS
■ Remove any dust from the coupling lens using a dusting spray and make sure that there are no marks
on the coupling lens.

RAA023
These adjustments are necessary only if your instrument is equipped with an old model of
optical bench (before "XDA829C").
Impacted adjustments Mirror and lenses replacement

Reaction Tray
Offset X
Mixing Position X
Reagent Arm Position X
Sample Arm Position X
Automatic Loading X
Handling Position X
Reaction Tray cover (for needles) X
Sample arm rotation
Cuvette Position X
Cuvette Position X
Mixer
Cuvette Position X
Cuvette changer
Load in Reaction Tray Position X
See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4. Adjustments, page 19.

RAA023
4. Optical bench check
■ Run an initialization and once the instrument is Ready, go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.
■ Select the Reaction radio button and press Motor Off.
■ Manually remove all the cuvette segments from the reaction tray.
■ Then, press Check Home.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro > Spectro Settings.

This tab displays the list of spectrophotometer initialization steps (A) and five subtabs to perform each
initialization step (B). Once a step is performed, it is marked "Done" in the list.
1. Measure Gain
■ Click the Measure Gain tab (B).

■ Press Start (C).
■ When the message "After the gain D E
measurement, the spectrophotometer is
initialized." is displayed, press OK.
Then, the following message is displayed:
"Verify absence of segment in sector 1."
■ Make sure that there is no cuvette segment
in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press
OK.
Once the step is performed, the gain and
the light intensity measured on air (without
cuvette) are displayed for each wavelength.
■ Makesure that the gains (D) are included C
between 1 and 95%. A
B
■ Make sure that the light intensities (E) are
included between 57200 and 65535
(~ 61000).

RAA023
2. I Black
■ Click the I Black tab (A).

■ Press Start (B).
Once the step is performed, the black
intensity measured in the black (with the
inter-sector located between the sectors 1
and 6 of the reaction tray) is displayed for
each wavelength.
■ Make sure that the black intensities (C) are A
included between 1400 and 2000.
B
3. Lamp Stabilization
■ Click the Lamp Stabilization tab (A).

Then, the following message is displayed: "Verify absence of segment in sector 1."
■ Make sure that there is no cuvette segment in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press OK.
During the lamp stabilization, the light intensity measured on air (without cuvette) and the deviation are
displayed for each wavelength every 12 s during 600 s maximum.
The light intensities (LI) are checked to ensure that they are included between 57200 and 65535.
The deviations (Dev) are checked to ensure that the difference between 2 consecutive absorbances
< 0.00022.
Once the step is performed, the following message is displayed: "Stability of lamp done."
4. I0 Air
■ Click the I0 Air tab (A). C

"Verify absence of segment in sector 1."
in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press
OK.
Once the step is performed, the light
intensity measured on air (without cuvette)
A
is displayed for each wavelength.
■ Make sure that the light intensities (C) are B
included between 57200 and 65535.

RAA023
5. I0 Water
■ Click the I0 Water tab (A).
C
"Put a new segment in sector 1 and
manually fill the first cuvette with 200 µL of
H2O in the handling position."
■ Manually load a cuvette segment into the
sector 1 of the reaction tray, manually fill the
first cuvette with 200 µL of H2O and press
OK. A
Once the step is performed, the light
intensity measured through a water-filled B
cuvette is displayed for each wavelength
(C).
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro > B

Spectro Measurement. A
■ Select the Reference on Air radio button C
(A).
■ In the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "340".
■ Press Read (C).
■ Make sure that the values displayed in the D
Dynamic Optical Reading table (D) are
close to 0.

■ Select the Reaction radio button and press Motor Off.
■ Manually position 6 new cuvette segments into the reaction tray.
■ Then, press Check Home.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro >

Spectro Measurement.
■ Select the Reference on Air radio button
B
(A).
■ In the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "340". A
C
■ Press Read (C).
■ Make sure that the values displayed in the
included between 0.060 and 0.120.
D
■ In the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "700".
■ Press Read (C).
■ Make sure that the values displayed in the
included between 0.050 and 0.090.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS656B
Partial condensing lens cleaning
RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning
Concerns
Optical bench lamp dismantling
Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side)
Checks after intervention
Required tools
Pair of scissors
TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM MAB086A (1207821086)
Required products
Alcohol
Intervention time
0 h 15
Frequency
On request

Cuvette segments
TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT XEC011AS (1209179011)

operations.
Partial condensing lens cleaning ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
Follow this procedure to clean the lamp side of the condensing lens with the help of the
TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT XEC011AS (1209179011) and without dismantling the
optical bench.
1. Preliminary operations
1.1. TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT
crystal tube
optic wipes
crystal tube tool
1.2. Tool preparation
■ Take the tool.

■ Cut 2 strips of about 25 x 200 mm from an
"optic wipes" sheet.
■ Twiddle the first strip on itself and insert it in 23 mm
the crystal tube "3/5" present at the
extremity of the tool.
■ Cut the strip at about 23 mm of the tool axe,
as illustrated on the following picture:
For a better handling of the tool, you can also put a crystal tube lenght at the other extremity
of the tool.
This crystal tube lenght is in the little bag, ref. EAE011A (1202241011), which contains about
10 cm of crystal tube.
RAS656B - 2 OPTICAL BENCH Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Partial condensing lens cleaning
2. Optical bench lamp dismantling
■ Refer to your user manual to dismantle the lamp to access the condensing lens (lamp side).

spectrophotometer
access to condensing lens
reagent tray cover
Technical Manual OPTICAL BENCH RAS656B - 3

RAA023
Partial condensing lens cleaning ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
3. Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side)
■ Saturate the tool strip with alcohol.

■ Insert the tool at 45° in the opening designed for the lamp (A), then bring it to the vertical to lead up
the strip in touch with the lens (B).
A B
■ Once the tool is correctly inserted, get in touch with the lens and clean it by making small rotational
movements and keeping the tool as vertical as possible.
As the lens surface is positioned further than the emission chamber walls, the lens contact is
perceptible.
■ Remove the tool.

■ Replace the alcohol strip with a second non-alcohol strip to make the lens dry.
■ If needed, clean the lamp with an "optic wipes" sheet.
■ Please refer to your user manual to reassemble the lamp.
4. Checks after intervention
■ Follow the optical bench check procedure (see RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check,
page 31) to control the cleaning efficiency.
RAS656B - 4 OPTICAL BENCH Technical Manual

RAA023
RAS386G
Mixer
versions:
RAS386: Mixer
Concerns
Mixer paddle replacement
Mixer assembly dismantling
Mixer assembly parts replacement
Adjustments
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

Cuvette segments

operations.
Mixer ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Mixer paddle replacement

Cycles.
■ Press Replace Mixer Paddle.
The following message appears: "Replace
the mixer paddle and click OK when done."

■ Remove the mixer cover by unscrewing the
3 BHC screws. See RAS377: Covers
■ Lift
the mixer assembly up by pressing the
red button.
■ Loosen the CHC screw and remove the
mixer paddle by pulling it down.
■ Replace the mixer paddle and reassemble
in reverse order.
When reassembling, make sure that the mixer paddle is pushed up to the maximum in its
support.
■ Press OK when finished.
RAS386G - 2 MIXER Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Mixer
2. Mixer assembly dismantling
following picture.
- Remove the mixer cover.
■ Lift the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the home

sensor wires, then disconnect the home
sensor connector, the motor and the mixer
paddle motor.
Technical Manual MIXER RAS386G - 3

RAA023
■ Manually push down the cylinder to move the XY carriage up (A), then forward (B).
■ Disconnectthe wash tower tubings, then

remove the wash tower.

CHC screws to access the mixer assembly
foot.

RAA023
■ Then,unscrew the 6 CHC screws of the

mixer assembly foot.
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors of the "mixer

present switch".
■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the reagent arm vertical motor cable and gently remove the mixer
assembly.
■ When reassembling, turn the 6 CHC screws of the mixer assembly foot without tightening
them. Push the mixer assembly down and check if it is correctly engaged. Then, tighten the
6 CHC screws of the mixer assembly foot.
■ Be careful not to clamp the tubings and wires when you push the mixer assembly down.
■ After the mixer assembly replacement, it is necessary to readjust all the mixer positions.
See 5. Adjustments, page 17.
In case of mixer assembly replacement, dismantle the mixer paddle from the old mixer
assembly and reassemble it on the new mixer assembly. See 1. Mixer paddle replacement,
page 2.

RAA023
3. Mixer assembly parts replacement

■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the home

sensor wires, then disconnect the home
sensor connector, the motor and the mixer
paddle motor.

home sensor.
■ Replace the home sensor and reassemble
in reverse order.

RAA023

■ Disconnect the motor.
■ Manuallypush down the cylinder to move

the XY carriage up.

RAA023
■ Loosen the motor axis screw.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ and unscrew the 2 CHC

screws to remove the motor.
■ Replace the motor and reassemble in
reverse order.
When reassembling, make sure that you tighten the motor axis screw on the plane of the
motor axis.

RAA023
3.3. Mixer paddle motor

■ Disconnect the mixer paddle motor.
■ Atthe back of the mixer, cut the 2

Ty-Raps™ maintaining the mixer paddle
motor wires.
■ Remove the mixer paddle motor wires from

the wire guide and the adhesive holder.

RAA023

■ Cut the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the wires.
B
■ Loosen the CHC screw (A) and remove the
mixer paddle by pulling it down.
mixer paddle motor (B).
■ Replacethe mixer paddle motor and A
When reassembling, to avoid risk of wire breaking, ensure that:

■ the O-ring maintaining the mixer paddle motor wires is well positioned at the bottom of the
mixer paddle motor (A);
■ the mixer paddle motor wires are well flattened on the mixer paddle motor (B);
■ the ring marker is positioned at the top of the mixer paddle motor close to the welding (C);
■ the mixer paddle motor wires are placed in the correct way:
- the wire length between the O-ring bottom and the XY carriage wire guide is
105 mm +/- 3 (D),
- the wire length between the XY carriage wire guide and the upper wire guide is
70 mm +/- 3 (E).

RAA023
70 mm +/- 3
105 mm +/- 3
When reassembling, make sure that the mixer paddle is pushed up to the maximum in its
support.

RAA023
3.4. Cylinder replacement

■ Unscrew the CHC screw "A".

■ Unscrew the CHC screw "B" and plastic
washer.
■ Releasethe mixer paddle motor cable and
remove the plate.
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the motor.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the CHC screw and nut of the

cylinder.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers of

the X axis.
■ Pull the X axis forward.
■ Remove the cylinder and replace it.
■ When reassembling, make sure that you

tighten the cylinder screw on the flat spot of
the motor axis.

RAA023
3.5. Cylinder spring replacement

■ Unscrew the CHC screw inside the cylinder

to remove the cylinder spring.
■ Replace the cylinder spring and reassemble
in reverse order.
■ When reassembling, make sure that the CHC screw is right above the cylinder.
■ After
the cylinder spring replacement, make sure that the XY carriage moves down without
moving backward.

RAA023
3.6. "Mixer present switch" replacement

Open the arms main cover.

CHC screws to access the "mixer present
switch".
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors and unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the "mixer
present switch".
■ Replacethe "mixer present switch" and
After the "mixer present switch" replacement, it is necessary to make sure that it works
correctly. See RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment, 6. "Mixer present switch", page 7.

RAA023
Cylinder or Mixer assy dismantling

Paddle Home sensor Paddle motor Mixer motor Switch
cylinder spring or replacement
Mixer
Home position X X
Above Reaction Tray X X X
Cuvette Position X X X
Reaction tray
Mixing Position X

RAA023
5. Adjustments
Disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over
the reagent tray as shown on the following figure.
■ Remove the mixer cover, the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch, the cuvettes
cover, the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate. See RAS377:
Covers dismantling, page 1.
■ Remove the unload rack, the load rack and the reaction tray cover. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1.
Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.
Before starting position adjustments, make sure that the CHC screw is right above the
cylinder.

RAA023
5.1. Home position

■ Move the mixer to its home position as
follows:
- Select the Mixer radio button (A) and
press Check Home (B).
B
■ Position the mixing paddle motor assy in its

upper position as follows:
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the mixing
paddle motor assy.
- Place the mixing paddle motor assy in its
upper position.
- Screw the 2 CHC screws.
■ Make sure that the mixer paddle is pushed
up to the maximum in its support.
A
■ Check the distance between the XY
carriage and the low carriage.
■ Adjustthis position to have 7 mm +/- 0.5
between the XY carriage and the low
carriage by moving the home flag (A).
- Move the home flag down to move the XY
carriage up. 7 mm +/- 0.5
- Move the home flag up to move the XY
carriage down.
■ Press Check Home (B), then check the
position again.

RAA023
■ Manuallymake sure that there is a gap of

about 2 mm between the end of the mixer
paddle and the wash tower bottom by
moving the wash tower up and down.
≈2 mm
5.2. Reaction tray "Mixing Position"
■ Adjust the reaction tray Mixing Position position. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4.4. Mixing Position,
page 23.

follows: 1
select "1" and "1" (1). 2
Position (2).
- Press Check Position (3). 3

RAA023
5.3. "Cuvette" position
The mixer assembly should be in up position.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. A
■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette

(A).
■ Press Check Position (B).
B
■ Check the distance between the XY

carriage and the low carriage. This distance 7 mm +/- 1
must be 7 mm +/- 1.

of steps for the Cuvette position (C).
- Increase the number of steps to move the C
XY carriage down.
XY carriage up.
■ Press Check Home (D) and check the
D
position again.
■ Manually pull the mixer assembly up.

RAA023
5.4. Mixer paddle height
Follow this procedure to adjust the mixer paddle height in the cuvette.
The distance between the end of the mixer paddle and the bottom of the cuvette must be
3 mm.
3 mm
■ Manually load a cuvette segment in the

reaction tray as follows:
- Select the Reaction radio button (1) and 1
press Check Home (2).
- In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, 3
select "1" and "1" (3).
Position (4). 4
- Manually load a cuvette segment in the
reaction tray. 2 5
- In the Target scrolling list, select Mixing
Position (4).
- Press Check Position (5) to move the
cuvette segment to the Mixing Position
position.

RAA023

C
■ Select the
Mixer radio button (A) and press
Check Home (B).
■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette
(C).
■ Press Check Position (D). B D
■ Whenthe mixing paddle stops turning,

manually push the mixer assembly down to
engage it.
mixer paddle motor then move down the
paddle until the end of the paddle touches
the bottom of the cuvette.
■ Measure the distance D between the

bottom of the mixing paddle motor assy and
the top of the reaction tray cover (if the
reaction tray cover is removed, make the
measurement at the top of the cuvette).
■ Lift the mixer paddle up by 3 mm and screw
the 2 CHC screws maintaining the mixer
paddle motor.
(Adjustment value = measured distance D -
3 mm) D
■ Press Check Home (B) and check the
position again.

RAA023
■ Remove the cuvette segment from the

- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. 3
select "1" and "1" (3). 4
Position (4).
- Press Check Position (5). 5
- Remove the cuvette segment from the
reaction tray.
5.5. "Above Reaction Tray" position
Follow this procedure to adjust the mixer paddle height above the reaction tray.
■ Reinstall the reaction tray cover.
A
■ Select the
Mixer radio button (A) and press
Check Home (B). C
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select Above
Reaction Tray (C).
■ Press Check Position (D).
■ When the mixing paddle stops turning, B D E
press Motor Off (E).

RAA023
■ Manually push the mixer assembly down to

engage it.
■ Check the distance between the end of the
mixer paddle and the top of the reaction tray 1-2 mm
cover (not above the mixer hole). This
distance must be 1-2 mm.
Mixer hole
■ Adjust the mixer paddle height by changing

the number of steps for the Above
Reaction Tray position (F).
- Increase the number of steps to move the F
XY carriage down.
XY carriage up.
■ Press Check Home (B) and check the B
position again.


■ When reassembling, check the cuvette changer adjustments. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.
Adjustments, page 31.

RAA023
RAS385G
Arms
versions:
RAS385: Arms
Concerns
Needles replacement
Arms assembly dismantling
Arms assembly parts replacement
Reagent arm adjustment
Sample arm adjustment
Level detection check
Shock detection check
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Torx key
Flat screwdriver
(1207851019)
TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS
(1209149097)
Required products
Distilled water
TOOL, THREADLOCKING LAX003A (1207721003)
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Arms ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Needles replacement
■ Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.
1.1. Reagent needle replacement
■ Press Replace Reagent needle.

the needle and click OK when done."

■ Remove the reagent arm bracket cover by
unscrewing the 2 BHC screws. See
RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.
■ Make sure that the reagent needle is above
its wash tower and disconnect the teflon
tubing of the reagent needle from the
syringe block support.
■ Remove the teflon tubing of the reagent

needle from the 2 plastic collars.
RAS385G - 2 ARMS Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Arms
■ Disconnect the level detection cable (A) and

loosen the 2 CHC screws (B) to free the
needle.
■ Disconnectthe reagent needle connector

and remove the needle.
■ Replace the needle and reassemble in
reverse order.

When reassembling, take care that the plastic collars are positioned in the correct way and the teflon
tubing is passing in front of the electrical wire.
Be careful not to clamp the tubing and wires of the reagent arm when you fasten the reagent
arm bracket cover.
Technical Manual ARMS RAS385G - 3

RAA023

The following message appears: "Click OK
to continue."
A
■ Press OK again.
■ Ifthe level detection of the reagent needle
is enabled, a message informs the user that
the calibration of the reagent level detection
will be automatically performed.
B
■ Press Priming Cycle (A).
■ Press Reagent pressure calibration (B).
1.2. Sample needle replacement
■ Press Replace Sample needle.

the needle and click OK when done."
■ Remove the sample arm bracket cover by

unscrewing the 2 BHC screws. See
■ Make sure that the sample needle is above
its wash tower and disconnect the teflon
tubing of the sample needle from the
syringe block support.

RAA023
■ Remove the teflon tubing of the sample

needle from the 2 plastic collars.
When reassembling, take care that the plastic collars are positioned in the correct way. See
the picture above.
■ Disconnect the level detection cable (A) and

loosen the sample needle locking screw (B)
to release the needle.
■ Remove the needle.
■ Replace the needle and reassemble in
reverse order.
A
■ Before the sample arm bracket cover reassembly: position, as much as possible, the
sample needle locking screw towards the sample arm inside.
■ Take care that the tubing is correctly positioned in the sample arm bracket cover and be
careful not to clamp the tubing nor the wires of the sample arm when you fasten the sample
arm bracket cover.
■ When the sample arm bracket cover is fastened, make sure that the shock detection runs
smoothly. See 8. Shock detection check, page 59.

RAA023

A
The following message appears: "Click OK
to continue."
■ Press OK again.
■ Press Priming Cycle (A). B
■ Press Sample pressure calibration (B).

RAA023
2. Arms assembly dismantling
It is advisable to remove the needles before dismantling the arms assembly (in order not to
damage them).

- Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover.
- Remove the external and internal sample covers, the optic hatch, the arms covers, the cuvettes tray
plate, the reagent plate, the loader cover, the mother board cover and the mixer plate.
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors from the reagent level detection board (J2 and J4) and the connector
from the sample level detection board (J2).
■ Disconnect the reagent arm vertical motor from the mother board (J58).
■ Disconnect the sample arm vertical motor from the mother board (J59).

arms assembly.
■ Slightly lift the arms assembly up, then cut the Ty-Rap™ and disconnect the 2 home sensor
connectors (A) and the 2 rotation motors (B).
■ Remove the arms assembly.

RAA023
A
■ First,cut the Ty-Rap™ and disconnect the 2
home sensor connectors (A) and the 2
rotation motors (B).
■ Then, unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the arms assembly.
Make sure that all the wiring is in the correct position before putting a new Ty-Rap™ and
make sure that the wires are not in the way of the home sensors.

RAA023
3. Arms assembly parts replacement
3.1. Home sensors replacement
This procedure describes how to replace the 2 vertical home sensors and the 2 rotation home
sensors:
- 3.1.1. Vertical home sensor, page 9
- 3.1.2. Rotation home sensor, page 11.

3.1.1. Vertical home sensor

■ Follow the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.
C
■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ (A) and disconnect the 2
vertical motor connectors (B).
■ Unscrew the CHC screw (C) to release the
vertical home sensor and its wires.
B
A

■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ (A) and disconnect the 2
vertical motor connectors (B).
■ Unscrew the CHC screw (C) to release the
B
vertical home sensor and its wires.
A

RAA023
■ Cutone side of the new vertical home

sensor as indicated on the picture.

■ Reposition the cable and gather it with a Ty-Rap™ as shown on the following pictures:
1 2 3
■ To ensure that the cable is correctly positioned, check the cable bend (refer to the following picture)
when the rack rail assembly is in low position.
Reagent arm Sample arm
■ Make sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home
sensor. If necessary, manually adjust the home flag position.

RAA023
3.1.2. Rotation home sensor

■ Unscrew the CHC screw to release the

rotation home sensor and its wires.
■ Cutone side of the new rotation home

sensor as indicated on the picture.
■ Make sure that the home flag passes in the

middle of the home sensor and does not
touch the home sensor.
If necessary, adjust the home flag position
by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws and/or
manually adjust the home flag position.

■ Make sure that the home flag passes in the
middle of the home sensor and does not
touch the home sensor.
If necessary, adjust the home flag position by
unscrewing the 2 CHC screws and/or
manually adjust the home flag position.

RAA023
3.2. Motors replacement
This procedure describes how to replace the reagent and sample vertical motors and the
reagent and sample rotation motors:
- 3.2.1. Vertical motor, page 12
- 3.2.2. Rotation motor, page 14.

3.2.1. Vertical motor

A
■ Remove the vertical home flag by
unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A). B
A
■ Remove the end stop by unscrewing the 2
CHC screws (B).
■ Remove the wire guide support by B
unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (C).
C

CHC screws.
On the reagent arm, before removing end stop screws, note the position of the screws on the
end stop to reassemble it in the same way.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws to release the

support of the vertical motor and home
sensor.
■ Remove the vertical motor as follows: B A

- Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers (A).
- Then, unscrew the last CHC screw taking
care not to lose the spring (B).
- Disconnect the motor connector and
remove the motor.

sensor.
■ Remove the vertical motor as follows: A B

- Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers (A).
- Then, unscrew the last CHC screw taking
care not to lose the spring (B).
- Disconnect the motor connector and
remove the motor.

■ There is no spring on the last CHC screw for ABX Pentra 400 V1.
■ Replace the vertical motor and reassemble in reverse order.
When reassembling, put threadlocking LOCTITE 222 on the end of the 4 CHC screws. First
turn the 3 CHC screws and washers without tightening them. Then, turn the last CHC screw
with the spring and tighten the 4 CHC screws.

RAA023
3.2.2. Rotation motor

■ Remove the rotation motor as follows:

- Unscrew the belt tensioner screw (A).
- Then, unscrew the 4 CHC screws and
washers and remove the motor. A
■ Replace the rotation motor and reassemble
in reverse order.
When reassembling, first turn the 4 CHC screws and washers without tightening them. Then,
fasten the belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the
4 CHC screws.
3.3. Reagent or sample rack rail assembly replacement


■ Remove the arm cable. See 3.4. Arm cables replacement, page 19.
■ Unscrew the CHC screw on the arm to

remove the arm.

RAA023
A
unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A). B
A
CHC screws (B).
■ Remove the wire guide support by B
unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (C).
C

sensor.

rack rail assembly ring.
belt
■ Loosen the belt tensioner screw (A) as well

as the 4 CHC screws and washers (B), then
C
remove the belt. B
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws (C) to remove
the pulley. A
pulley

RAA023
■ Removethe rack rail assembly by pulling it

downwards.
As the rack rail assembly is solidly built, you might have to pull it hard.
■ Replace the rack rail assembly and reassemble in reverse order.
When reassembling the pulley, first fasten the pulley and put the belt back. Then, fasten the
belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the 4 CHC
screws and washers.
3.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2

■ Unscrew the CHC screw on the arm to

remove the arm.

RAA023

unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A).
A
B
CHC screws (B).
On the reagent arm, before removing the end stop screws, note the position of the screws on
the end stop to reassemble it in the same way.

sensor.

rack rail assembly ring.

To remove the rack rail assembly ring, unscrew
the CHC screw and crosspiece as well as the
4 CHC screws.
Keep the ring to replace it on the new rack rail
assembly.

RAA023
belt
■ Loosen the belt tensioner screw (A) as well

as the 4 CHC screws and washers (B), then
C
remove the belt. B
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws (C) to remove
the pulley. A
pulley
■ Removethe rack rail assembly by pulling it

downwards.
As the rack rail assembly is solidly built, you might have to pull it hard.
■ Replace the rack rail assembly and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Because the up/down reagent arm motor rotation way is inverted, it is mandatory to replace the
reagent arm vertical motor cable with the new one (provided in the reagent rack rail assembly
replacement kit).
Dismantle the ring from the new rack rail assembly and replace it with the ABX Pentra 400 V1
ring.
Reassemble in reverse order with the new pulley and the new vertical motor and home sensor
assembly (both provided in the rack rail assembly replacement kit).

RAA023
When reassembling the pulley, first fasten the pulley and put the belt back. Then, fasten the
belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the 4 CHC
screws and washers.
When reassembling the reagent arm, be careful to well position the CHC screws on the end
stop. Some end stops have 2 holes and others have 4 holes. Refer to the following picture to
know the correct positioning of the end stop screws.
End stop with 2 holes End stop with 4 holes
3.4. Arm cables replacement
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors from the reagent level detection board (J2 and J4) or the connector from
the sample level detection board (J2).
■ Remove the reagent or sample rack rail assembly carefully in order not to clamp and not to damage
the cables. See 3.3. Reagent or sample rack rail assembly replacement, page 14.

arm axis frame.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lower

arm axis frame.

RAA023
■ Remove the cable from the wire guides.

■ To reinstall the cable on the rack rail

assembly, proceed as follows:
- Place the cable into the groove of the
hubcap.
- Slowly slide the arm axis frame over the

cable. Be careful not to clamp the cable.
■ Be careful not to clamp the cable in the arm notch.

■ The Ty-Rap™ must be positioned close to the arm.
Arm notch
Ty-Rap™

RAA023
The indications in the following table have to be taken into account only if a preliminary
adjustment with the TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS (1209149097) has
been performed by the factory or during a previous intervention.
If it is not the case, it is imperative to perform all the adjustments of the functional positions
mentioned.
Sample arm
Vertical Horizontal Whole

Vertical Horizontal
Needles Home Home Rails module
motor motor
sensor sensor dismantling
Sample arm rotation
Cuvette Position (O) X V1 only X V1 only
Wash Tower Position V1 only
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack V1 only
R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack V1 only
R1 on Cassette V1 only
R2 on Cassette V1 only
External sample V1 only
Internal sample V1 only
ISE sample V1 only
Sample arm vertical
Low Position in Cuvette X X X
Low Position in Wash Tower X X X
Low Position in Sample Cup X X X
Low Position in Sample tube X X X
Low Position in Reagent rack X X X
Low Position in Cassette X X X
Low Position CalCs on reagent tray X X X
Low Position in ISE Tower X X X

RAA023
Reagent arm
Vertical Horizontal Whole

Vertical Horizontal
Needles Home Home Rails module
motor motor
sensor sensor dismantling
Cuvette Position (O) X V1 only X V1 only
Wash Tower Position
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack
R1 on Cassette
R2 on Cassette
Reagent arm vertical
Low Position in Reaction Tray X X X
Low Position in Wash Tower X X X
Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack X X X
Low Position in Cassette X X X

RAA023
5. Reagent arm adjustment

When you adjust a position of the reagent arm by changing the number of steps for this
position, please note that:
- for the rotation movement, a change of 12 steps is approximately equal to a move of
1 mm linear.
- for the vertical movement, a change of 128 steps is approximately equal to a move of
1 mm.
The following table lists the functional positions to be adjusted. Those positions are reached by three
different types of adjustments:
Modules
Reagent Arm Rotation
Sector Position Position Type Tool
Reaction tray
Reagent Arm Position 1 1 Cuvette Position
Wash tower Wash Tower Position
Reagent tray
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent arm 1-A R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack
2
Reagent Rack
R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent arm 1 1 R1 on Cassette
R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent arm Cassette 2 R2 on Cassette

RAA023
Modules
Reagent Arm Vertical
Reaction tray
Low position in Reaction

Reagent Arm Position 1 10 AUTO
Tray
Low Position in Wash

Wash tower MAN
Tower
Reagent tray
Low Position in Reagent/

(Motor Off) Cal/Ctrl Rack AUTO
Low position in Cassette
■ Before starting the position adjustments, remove the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling,
page 1):
- Remove the external and internal sample covers, then remove the optic hatch.
- Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the left arm cover.
- Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the cuvettes hatch and the arm bracket covers.
■ Press Stop to stop the initialization.
Always move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home position) before moving the
reagent arm.
Always move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home position)
before moving any tray.

RAA023
5.2. "Dummy reagent needle" installation
■ Perform the reagent needle dismantling. See 1.1. Reagent needle replacement, page 2.
■ Install
the "Dummy reagent needle" on the
reagent arm.
5.3. Reagent arm rotation adjustment
5.3.1. Cuvette positions

The cuvette position adjustments are performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX
TEST 9200787 (1229200787).
The following positions of the adjustment tool will be used: "1", "2" and "10".
2 10
1

RAA023
Adjustment tool installation
A
■ Select the Reaction radio button (A).
C
■ Press Check Home (B).
select "1" and "1" (C). D
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Handling
Position (D).
B E
■ Press Check Position (E).
■ Load the tool into the reaction tray.
Make sure that the tool is loaded properly in the reaction tray. It is necessary to press the tool
completely down in the reaction tray.
"Cuvette Position"
■ The rotation adjustment value for the Cuvette Position position is factory adjusted on the
rotation home position, therefore, the number of steps for the Cuvette Position position is
0. This is fixed and must not be changed.
■ If the rotation home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.
Follow this procedure to have the reagent needle centered in the cuvette.

A
select "1" and "1" (A).
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Reagent B
Arm Position (B).
■ PressCheck Position to move the tool to
C
the Reagent Arm Position position (C).

RAA023

3
■ Move the sample arm to its vertical home
rotation home position as follows: 5
button (3) and press Check Home (2). 2
Adjust the rotation home position with the mechanical adjustment described below.

needle" in the hole of the tool position "1" as
follows:
button (3).
6

the hole of the tool position "1"
reaction tray adjustment (RAS382)

RAA023
■ Loosen the CHC screw on the reagent arm,

then turn the reagent arm to center the
"Dummy reagent needle" in the hole of the
tool position "1".

3
- Check the centering of the "Dummy 4
reagent needle" again (see above).
2

RAA023
5.3.2. Wash Tower Position
Follow this procedure to have the reagent needle centered in its wash tower.


button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select Wash
Tower Position (2).
needle" in the wash tower as follows:
button (4).
the wash tower. 4
of steps in the Position field for the Wash 1
Tower Position position (7).
- Increase the number of steps in order to 2
turn the reagent arm clockwise. 7
- Decrease the number of steps in order to
turn the reagent arm anticlockwise. 6 3 5
■ Move the reagent arm to its rotation home
- Press Check Position (3) and check the
centering of the "Dummy reagent needle"
again (see above).
5.3.3. Reagent Tray Position

See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.6. Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack),
page 26.

RAA023
5.4. Reagent arm vertical adjustment
5.4.1. "Low Position in Reaction Tray"
Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in the cuvette.
The point of the needle must be 2 mm above the bottom of the cuvette.
2 mm
This adjustment is made automatically using the adjustment tool.


A
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Reagent B
Arm Position (B).
C
the Reagent Arm Position position (C).

RAA023

■ Selectthe reagent arm Vertical radio 2
button (1).
■ Select the Automatic adjustment check
box (2).
It opens the automatic adjustment function.
■ Inthe Reference point scrolling list, select

Fixed test segment in reaction tray (3).
■ Press Motor Off (4) and slowly push the
arm down.
The "Dummy reagent needle" is manually
moved down into the hole of the tool
position "10", this position is used as
vertical reference position.
■ Press Measure height (5).
The "Dummy reagent needle" moves to its
3
vertical home position measuring the
number of steps between the 2 positions.
8
This measured number of steps is added to
an offset to calculate the value for the Low
Position in Reaction Tray position. 6
This calculated value is displayed in the
table (6).
- The value is displayed in black if it is within 4 5 7 9
range.
range.
■ Ifthe adjustment value is correct, press
Validate AA (7).
The value is then transferred in the Position
field for the Low Position in Reaction Tray
position (8).
If not, press Cancel AA (9).
■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check
box.

follows: A
select "1" and "1" (A). B
Position (B).

RAA023
5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower"
Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in its wash tower.
The distance between the underside of the reagent arm and the top of the wash tower must
be 91 mm +/- 0.5.
91 mm +/- 0.5


button (1).
■ In
Tower Position (2) and press Check
Position (3).
■ Selectthe reagent arm Vertical radio
button (4).
■ Check the position as follows:
- In the Position scrolling list, select Low 4
Position in Wash Tower (5) and press 5
Check Position (3).
- Check the "Dummy reagent needle" height 6
1
in the wash tower.
■ Adjust the reagent needle height by 2
changing the number of steps for the Low
Position in Wash Tower position (6) using
the + and/or - buttons. 7 3
- + = Increase the number of steps to move
the reagent arm down.
- - = Decrease the number of steps to move
the reagent arm up.

RAA023
5.4.3. Reagent tray position
Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in the vial ("Low Position in
Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack") and in the cassette ("Low Position in Cassette").
The point of the needle must be 1 mm above the bottom of the vial and 1 mm above the
bottom of the cassette.
Vial Cassette
1 mm 1 mm
These two adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "ABX Cassette" (without level
detection), page 33.

"ABX Cassette" (without level detection)
The vertical position adjustment in a cassette is the same for both R1 and R2.
We will do the position adjustment for R1.
■ Move the "Reag tray adjusting tool" to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm position.
To load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" on the reagent tray and to move it to the R1 Pos.-
Cassette for Reagent Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.3. Preliminary procedure,
page 23.

RAA023

■ Press Motor Off (B).
B
"Reag tray adjusting tool" notch
■ Manually move the reagent tray to position

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" so as to make
the adjustment easier.

4
button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select R1 on
Cassette (2). 5
1
■ Selectthe reagent arm Vertical radio 2
button (4).
box (5). 3
■ In
the Reference point scrolling list, select 6
ABX Cassette (6).
■ Then, use the + and/or - buttons to adjust
the position of the "Dummy reagent
needle".
the reagent arm down. 3
the reagent arm up.

RAA023
The point of the "Dummy reagent needle"

must be positioned right above the notch of
the "Reag tray adjusting tool" (as shown on
the following figure), this position is used as

The "Dummy reagent needle" moves to its
2 different offsets to calculate the value for
the Low Position in Cassette position and
the value for the Low Position in Reagent/
Cal/Ctrl Rack position.
These calculated values are displayed in the
3
table (8).
- The values are displayed in black if they
10
are within range.
5
- The values are displayed in red if they are
out of range. 8
■ Ifthe adjustment values are correct, press 1

Validate AA (9). 12 4 7 9 11
The values are then transferred in the
Position field for the Low Position in
Cassette position and for the Low Position
in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack position (10).
box (5).
■ Move the reagent arm to its rotation home

RAA023
6. Sample arm adjustment

When you adjust a position of the sample arm by changing the number of steps for this
position, please note that:
- for the rotation movement, a change of 8 steps is approximately equal to a move of
1 mm linear.
- for the vertical movement, a change of 128 steps is approximately equal to a move of
1 mm.
Place the reagent arm in low position in the wash tower before moving the sample arm.
See 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower", page 32.
The following table lists the functional positions to be adjusted. Those positions are reached by three
different types of adjustments:

RAA023
Modules
Sample Arm Rotation
Reaction tray
Sample Arm Position 1 2 Cuvette Position
Wash tower Wash Tower Position
Reagent tray
R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample arm 1-A R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack
2
Reagent Rack
R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample arm 1 R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack
3
Cal/Ctrl Rack
R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample arm 1 1 R1 on Cassette
R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample arm Cassette 2 R2 on Cassette
Sample tray
External Sampling Pos. 1 2 External Sample
Internal Sampling Pos. 1 1 Internal Sample
ISE Tower ISE Sample
Modules
Sample Arm Vertical
Reaction tray
Sample Arm Position 1 10 Low Position in Cuvette AUTO
Wash tower Low Position in Wash tower MAN
Reagent tray
Low Position in Reagent rack

Low Position in Cassette
(Motor Off)
Low Position CalCs on
reagent tray
AUTO
Sample tray
Low Position in Sample Cup
(Motor Off) 1
Low Position in Sample Tube
ISE Tower Low Position in ISE Tower

RAA023
6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation
■ Perform the sample needle dismantling procedure. See 1.2. Sample needle replacement, page 4.
■ Install
the "Dummy sample needle" on the
sample arm.
6.3. Sample arm rotation adjustment
6.3.1. Cuvette positions
Adjustment tool installation

The cuvette position adjustments are performed with the adjustment tool already used for the reagent
arm.
2 10
1
It is necessary to load this adjustment tool in the reaction tray. Follow the procedure described in
Adjustment tool installation, page 26.

RAA023
"Cuvette Position"
■ The rotation adjustment value for the Cuvette Position position is factory adjusted on the
rotation home position, therefore, the number of steps for the Cuvette Position position is
0. This is fixed and must not be changed.
■ If the rotation home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.
Follow this procedure to have the sample needle centered in the cuvette.
A
■ Select the Reaction radio button (A).
C
■ Press Check Home (B).
select "1" and "2" (C). D
■ In
Arm Position (D). E
B
the Sample Arm Position position (E).

rotation home position as follows: 4
Adjust the rotation home position with the mechanical adjustment described below.

RAA023

needle" on the mobile part of the tool
position "2" as follows:
button (1).
- Press Motor Off (5). 5

position of the "Dummy sample needle" on
the mobile part of the tool position "2".
arm adjustment
■ Loosen the CHC screw on the sample arm,

then turn the sample arm to center the
"Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part

■ Move the sample arm to its vertical and 3

RAA023
6.3.2. Wash Tower Position
Follow this procedure to have the sample needle centered in its wash tower.
Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

button (1).
■ In
Tower Position (2).
needle" in the wash tower as follows:
button (4).
the wash tower.
4
of steps in the Position field for the Wash
Tower Position position (7). 1
- Increase the number of steps in order to
turn the sample arm clockwise. 2
- Decrease the number of steps in order to
6 3 5
turn the sample arm anticlockwise.
position as follows: 7
Press Check Position (3) and check the
centering of the "Dummy sample needle"
again (see above).

See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.6. Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack),
page 26.

RAA023
6.3.4. Sample Tray Position

See RAS381: Sample tray, 4.5. Sampling in sample tray adjustment, page 22.
6.3.5. ISE Position
Follow this procedure to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup.
■ Selectthe sample arm Rotation radio 4

button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select ISE
Sample (2).
■ Press Check Position (3). 1
■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample 2
needle" in the ISE mix cup as follows:
- Select the sample arm Vertical radio 3 5
button (4).
- Slowly push the arm down, then check the +

the ISE mix cup. -

RAA023

of steps in the Position field for the ISE
Sample position (7).
- Increase the number of steps in order to
turn the sample arm clockwise.
- Decrease the number of steps in order to 4
turn the sample arm anticlockwise.
- Press Check Position (3) and check the 6 3
centering of the "Dummy sample needle"
again (see above). 7
6.4. Sample arm vertical adjustment
6.4.1. "Low Position in Cuvette"
Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle in the cuvette.

The point of the needle must be 2 mm above the bottom of the cuvette.
2 mm
This adjustment is made automatically using the adjustment tool.

RAA023

A
■ In
the Target scrolling list, select Sample B
Arm Position (B).
C
the Sample Arm Position position (C).

2
■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button
(1).
box (2).
■ Inthe Reference point scrolling list, select

Fixed test segment in reaction tray (3).
■ Press Motor Off (4) and slowly push the 3
arm down.
The "Dummy sample needle" is manually
moved down into the hole of the tool
position "10", this position is used as 4
Take care of the shock detection. It should not be activated otherwise the adjustment won’t
be correct.

RAA023

The "Dummy sample needle" moves to its
Position in Cuvette position.
table (6). 2
range. 6
- The value is displayed in red if it is out of 8
range.
■ Ifthe adjustment value is correct, press 5 7 9
Validate AA (7).
field for the Low Position in Cuvette
position (8).
box (2).

follows: A
select "1" and "1" (A). B
Position (B).

RAA023
6.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower"
Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in its wash tower.
The distance between the underside of the sample arm and the top of the wash tower must
be 111 mm +/- 0.5.
111 mm +/- 0.5

button (1).
■ In
Tower Position (2) and press Check
Position (3).
(4).
4
- In the Position scrolling list, select Low
Position in Wash Tower (5).
- Press Check Position (3) and check the 5
"Dummy sample needle" height in the wash
tower.
■ Adjust the reagent needle height by 1 6
changing the number of steps for the Low
Position in Wash Tower position (6) using 7 3 2
the + and/or - buttons.
the reagent arm down.
the reagent arm up.

RAA023
Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the vial ("Low Position in Reagent
rack"), in the sample cup ("Low position CalCs on reagent tray") and in the cassette ("Low
Position in Cassette").
The point of the needle must 1 mm above the bottom of the vial, 1 mm above the bottom of
the sample cup and 1 mm above the bottom of the cassette.
Vial Sample cup Cassette
1 mm 1 mm 1 mm
These three adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "ABX Cassette" (without level
"ABX Cassette" (without level detection)
The vertical position adjustment in a cassette is the same for both R1 and R2.
We will do the position adjustment for R1.
■ Move the "Reag tray adjusting tool" to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm position.
To load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" on the reagent tray and to move it to the R1 Pos.-
Cassette for Sample Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.3. Preliminary procedure,
page 23.

RAA023

■ Manually move the reagent tray to position

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" so as to make
the adjustment easier.
"Reag tray adjusting tool" notch

button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select R1 on 5
Cassette (2).
■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button 1
(4).
3
■ Select the Automatic adjustment check 2
box (5).
■ In
the Reference point scrolling list, select
ABX Cassette (6).
6
the position of the "Dummy sample needle".
the sample arm down.
3
the sample arm up.

RAA023
The point of the "Dummy sample needle"

must be positioned right above the notch of
the "Reag tray adjusting tool" (as shown on
the following figure), this position is used as
be correct.

the Low Position in Cassette position, the
value for the Low position CalCs on
reagent tray position and the value for the
Low Position in Reagent rack position.
table (8).
- The values are displayed in black if they are 5
within range.
- The values are displayed in red if they are 8
out of range. 10
■ Ifthe adjustment values are correct, press
Validate AA (9). 1
Position field for the Low Position in 12 7 9 11
Cassette position, for the Low position
CalCs on reagent tray position and for the
Low Position in Reagent rack position (10).
box (5).
■ Remove the "Reag tray adjusting tool" from
the reagent tray.

RAA023
6.4.4. Sample Tray Position
Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the sample cup ("Low Position in
Sample Cup") and in the sample tube ("Low Position in Sample Tube").
The point of the needle must be 1 mm above the bottom of the sample cup and 1 mm above
the bottom of the sample tube.
Sample cup Sample tube
1 mm 1 mm
These two adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "Sample tube rack" (without level
"Sample tube rack" (without level detection)
The vertical position adjustment in a sample tube is valid and is the same for both the
External Sample and Internal Sample positions.
We will do the position adjustment for the Internal Sample position.
■ Load a sample rack on the sample tray in position "1".

■ Move the position "1" of this sample rack to the Internal Sampling Pos. position.
To load a sample rack on the sample tray in position "1" and to move the position "1" of this
sample rack to the Internal Sampling Pos. position, see RAS381: Sample tray, 4.2.
Preliminary procedure, page 17.

RAA023

■ Select the Sample radio button (A).

button (1).
■ In the Position scrolling list, select Internal 5
Sample (2).
■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button 1
(4).
3
■ Select the Automatic adjustment check 2
box (5).
■ In
Sample tube rack (6).
6
the position of the "Dummy sample needle".
3
the sample arm up.
The point of the "Dummy sample needle"

must be positioned right above the upper
part of the sample rack (as shown on the
following picture), this position is used as
Manually move the sample tray to position
the sample rack so as to make the
adjustment easier.

RAA023
be correct.

the Low Position in Sample Tube position
and the value for the Low Position in
Sample Cup position.
table (8). 5
- The values are displayed in black if they
are within range. 8
- The values are displayed in red if they are 10
out of range.
■ Ifthe adjustment values are correct, press 1
Validate AA (9).
12 7 9 11
Position field for the Low Position in
Sample Tube position and for the Low
Position in Sample Cup position (10).
box (5).

RAA023
6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower"
Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup.
The distance between the underside of the sample arm and the top of the ISE mix cup must
be 121 mm +/- 0.5.
121 mm +/- 0.5
This adjustment is made automatically proceeding as follows.

button (1).
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select ISE
6
Sample (2).
■ Press Motor Off (4).
1
(5). 3 4
2
box (6).
■ In
ISE (7).
the position of the "Dummy sample needle". 7
The end of the "Dummy sample needle"
must be positioned right above the upper
part of the ISE mix cup, this position is used
as vertical reference position.
3
the sample arm up.

RAA023
be correct.

Position in ISE Tower position.
6
table (9).
9
11
range.
range.
■ Ifthe adjustment value is correct, press 8 10 12
Validate AA (10).
field for the Low Position in ISE Tower
position (11).
box (6).

- In the Position scrolling list, select Low 5
Position in ISE Tower (13).
- Press Check Position (3) and check the
13
"Dummy sample needle" height in the ISE
mix cup.
1
■ Remove the "Dummy sample needle" and the "Dummy reagent needle" and put the sample and
reagent needles back.

RAA023
7. Level detection check
7.1. Reagent arm
The principle of this procedure is to move the reagent arm down until it detects the liquid in
the vial.
■ Half-fill a "15 mL vial" with distilled water.

■ Place this vial on R1 / A on a reagent rack.
■ Move the position R1 / A of this reagent
rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for
Reagent Arm position.
R1
To load a reagent rack on the reagent tray and to move the position R1 / A of this reagent rack
to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray,
page 1.
■ Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

RAA023

button (A).
■ Inthe Position scrolling list, select R1 Pos.
- Reagent Rack (B).
■ Press Check Position to move the reagent
arm right above the filled vial on the reagent
tray (C).
■ Selectthe reagent arm Vertical radio
button (D).
■ Inthe Position scrolling list, select Low
Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack (E),
then note the number of steps D
E
corresponding to this position (F).
■ Select the Reagent Detection radio button
(G). F
■ Let the Sensibility field at its default value A
(= 0). This field is used to set the sensitivity B
level used during the reagent level G
detection. See Section 3: Technology, 4.1.
Reagent level detection, page 3-22.
■ Inthe Max Step field, type the number of I J H
steps previously noted (H). K C
■ PressLevel detection (I).
The reagent arm moves down until the
reagent needle touches the water.
■ Make sure that the Level detection light
turns green (J).
button (D) and press Check Home (K).
button (A) and press Check Home (K).
In case of a problem, see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level
detection board, page 4-20 to check the reagent level detection board (LEDs state).

RAA023
7.2. Sample arm
The principle of this procedure is to move the sample arm down until it detects the liquid in
the vial.
■ Half-fill a "15 mL vial" with distilled water.

■ Place this vial on R1 / A on a reagent rack.
■ Move the position R1 / A of this reagent
rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for
Sample Arm position.
R1
To load a reagent rack on the reagent tray and to move the position R1 / A of this reagent rack
to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1.
■ Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.
■ Ensurethat the reagent arm is in its wash tower. See 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower",
page 32.

RAA023

button (1).
■ Inthe Position scrolling list, select R1 Pos.
- Reagent Rack (2).
■ Press Check Position to move the sample
arm right above the filled vial on the reagent
tray (3).
(4).
4
■ In
the Position scrolling list, select Low
Position in Reagent rack (5), then note the
number of steps corresponding to this 5
position (6). 6
■ Select the Sample Detection radio button
(7). 1
■ Inthe Max Step field, type the number of 2
steps previously noted (8).
■ PressLevel detection (9). 7
11 8 9 10
The sample arm moves down until the
3
sample needle touches the water.
■ Make sure that the Level detection light
turns green (10).
In case of a problem, see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level
detection board XAA486AS (1209108486), page 4-18 to check the sample level detection
board.

RAA023
8. Shock detection check
The shock detection is available for the sample arm only.
The principle of this procedure is to move the sample arm down until it detects the bottom of
the vial.
■ Replace the hall-filled vial on the reagent rack with an empty one.

■ Follow the same procedure as that for the
sample arm level detection but, in the Max
Step field, add some steps (100 steps by
100 steps) to the number of steps
previously noted (1).
■ Press Level detection (2).
The sample arm moves this number of
steps down.
- If the needle touches the bottom of the vial
before running this number of steps, it will
stop and the Shock Detection light turns
green (3).
- If the needle doesn’t touch the bottom of 3
the vial, the Shock Detection light stays red 1 2
(3).
In this case, it is necessary to add some
steps in the Max Step field (1) again and
press Level detection (2) again.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS384F
Cuvette changer
versions:
RAS384: Cuvette changer
Concerns
Cuvette changer racks dismantling
Cuvette changer parts replacement
Adjustments
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Torx key
(1207851019)
TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893)
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

Cuvette segments

operations.
Cuvette changer ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling
following picture.
■ Remove the load rack as follows:
- Open the 2 adhesive collars and release the wires of the "rack used segment full" sensor.
- Disconnect the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and unscrew the 6 CHC screws.
"rack used segment full"

sensor
RAS384F - 2 CUVETTE CHANGER Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Cuvette changer

- Open the adhesive collar and release the
wires of the "new segment available"
sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect this
connector because the wires are long
enough to put the load rack close to the
instrument.
"new segment available" sensor
- Lightly lift the load rack up to disconnect

the cuvette motion motor (M32) and the
cuvette motion home sensor (C37), located
under the load rack.
- Remove the load rack.
On the instruments equipped with centering pins on the load rack support, the readjusting is
not mandatory. For the other instruments: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.
■ Remove the reaction tray cover by

unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.
Technical Manual CUVETTE CHANGER RAS384F - 3

RAA023
2. Cuvette changer parts replacement
2.1. Cuvette changer
2.1.1. Home sensors replacement
Horizontal home sensor


CHC screws to access the cuvette changer
horizontal home sensor.
■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor C

wires and the home sensor wires.
A
■ Disconnect the motor connector (A) and the
motor/home sensor connector (B).
home sensor and its wires (C).
B
■ Replace the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Make sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home
sensor.

RAA023
Vertical sensors

■ Replace the cuvette changer vertical sensor (home and/or low position) by following the corresponding
procedure.
1. Vertical home sensor
■ Cut the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the wires of

the "new segment available" sensor.
A
■ Disconnect the home sensor connector
(C17).
home sensor and its wires (A).
in reverse order.
C17
2. Vertical low position sensor

the vertical low position sensor.
■ Disconnect the low position sensor
connector (C61).
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws to remove the C61
low position sensor and its wires (A).
in reverse order.
■ Replacethe low position sensor and
When reassembling, fasten the low position sensor in its lowest position.

RAA023
2.1.2. Horizontal motor replacement


horizontal motor.
motor connector
■ Disconnect the motor connector.
motor.
■ Replace the motor and reassemble in
reverse order.
motor screws
When reassembling, take care that the motor connector is correctly positioned.

RAA023
■ Adjust the belt tensioner screw as follows:

- Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the belt
support. belt support screws
- Loosen the belt tensioner screw, then turn
it at 90 mN.m (not for ABX Pentra 400 V1)
with a dynamometric screwdriver.
- Tighten the 2 CHC screws of the belt
support.
belt tensioner screw
2.1.3. Vertical motor replacement

General procedure
Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.
■ Remove the rear plates by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer vertical
motor.

RAA023
V5
V4
■ Dismantle the manifold as follows:

- Disconnect the valves 3, 4 and 5 of the
manifold, at the rear of the instrument.
V3
- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove

the manifold.
■ Disconnect the motor connector (M15).

motor.

RAA023
■ Release the motor and the endless screw

as follows:
- Block the grabber carriage up with one
hand.
- With the other hand, release the endless
screw from the cuvette changer assembly
by turning the endless screw clockwise.
2
- Remove the motor and the endless screw.
motor connector position
■ Replace the motor and the endless screw and reassemble in reverse order.
■ Take care that the motor connector is correctly positioned.

■ Take care not to clamp the tubings when reassembling the manifold.

RAA023
Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1

■ Remove the rear plates by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer vertical
motor.
V5
V4
■ Dismantle the manifold as follows:

- Disconnect the valves 3, 4 and 5 of the
manifold, at the rear of the instrument.
V3
- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove

the manifold.

RAA023
■ Loosen the upper screw of the motor/

endless screw coupling.
■ Disconnectthe motor connector (M15) and

unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the
motor.
■ Remove the motor assembly taking care not to drop the endless screw down.
■ Replace the motor assembly and reassemble in reverse order.
■ Ensure that you tighten the upper screw of the motor/endless screw coupling in the endless
screw notch.
■ Take care that the motor connector is correctly positioned.
■ Take care not to clamp the tubings when reassembling the manifold.

RAA023
2.1.4. Silent blocks replacement

- Remove the loader cover.
■ Check if the cuvette changer carriage assembly has two or four silent blocks.
4 silent blocks 2 silent blocks
■ If the cuvette changer carriage assembly already has four silent blocks, replace them by
referring to the General procedure: four silent blocks, page 12.
■ If the cuvette changer carriage assembly has only two silent blocks, you must install the
whole KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY XEC205AS (1209179205) by referring to the
Specific procedure: two silent blocks, page 13.
General procedure: four silent blocks
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws M3x6 of the nut

support.

RAA023
■ Lift up the nut support.

■ Unscrew the 4 silent blocks to replace
them.
Specific procedure: two silent blocks

■ Unscrew the left screw of the main cover

switch support and loosen the right screw.
■ Turnthe main cover switch support (A) to
access the 2 screws of the cuvette changer
upper plate.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws of the cuvette A
changer upper plate (B).
J20
■ Disconnect the cuvette changer horizontal

motor from the mother board (J20).
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor
wires and release the wires.

RAA023
■ Open the adhesive collar (A).

■ Disconnect the connector of the "new B
C
segment available" sensor (B).
■ Disconnectthe 2 connectors of the "rack
used segment in position" sensor (C).
free connector
A
When reassembling, take care to the position of the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment
in position" sensor.

both vertical sensors (A).
■ Disconnect the 2 vertical sensors (B).
■ Cut the 3 Ty-Raps™ maintaining the
cuvette changer strand.
■ Open the adhesive collar (C) and release the B
strand from the cuvette changer course.
A
■ Unscrew the 5 screws of the cuvette

changer upper plate.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 3 screws of the cuvette

changer upper plate and remove the plate.
■ Remove the cuvette changer carriage
assembly.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws M4x6 of the

carriage assembly plate.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws M3x6 of the

grabber rail.
■ Separate the carriage assembly plate from
the carriage assembly block.

RAA023
■ Remove the two angle brackets from the

carriage assembly block.
A B
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws of the nut (A)

and remove it from its support.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the anti-twist
bearing (B) and remove it from the carriage
assembly block.
■ Take the new carriage assembly block (provided in the KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY
XEC205AS (1209179205)).
- Fasten the 4 new silent blocks.
- Take the new nut support and install the nut in its support.
- Reassemble the nut and its support without tightening the support on the new carriage assembly
block.
- Reassemble the anti-twist bearing without tightening it.
- Reassemble in reverse order the two angle brackets and the carriage assembly plate.
■ Reassemble in reverse order the cuvette changer carriage assembly.
■ Manually move the cuvette changer carriage assembly in low position.

■ Now, tighten the 4 CHC screws M3x6 of the nut support and the anti-twist bearing.

RAA023
2.1.5. Grabber rail + carriage replacement


To replace the grabber rail + carriage on the ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete
grabber assembly by following the procedure Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1, page 19.
General procedure
■ Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling,
page 2.
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

grabber on the belt.
grabber on its rail.
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws of the grabber

rail and remove the rail with its carriage.
In order not to lose the balls, never remove the carriage from the rail.

RAA023
■ Replace and reassemble in reverse order end stop

the grabber rail as follows:
- Take care to the position of the rail: the end
of the rail must be at the level of the end
stop.
- Push on the middle of the rail (as indicated
by the arrow on the picture) when tightening
the 3 CHC screws to respect the balance.

RAA023

page 2.
Torx screw of grabber rail

horizontal home flag on the grabber.
Torx screw of grabber rail
■ Unscrew the 2 Torx screws of the grabber

rail and remove the grabber assembly
(grabber + rail + carriage).
■ Dismantle the horizontal home flag from the new grabber assembly.
■ Replace the grabber assembly and reassemble in reverse order.
When reassembling, take care to the position of the rail: the end of the rail must be at the level
of the plate.

RAA023
2.1.6. Grabber spring replacement

- Remove the loader cover.
■ Remove the circlip by pushing up the finger

and using a flat screwdriver.
■ Release the finger from the grabber and circlip
replace the spring. finger
2.1.7. Cuvette changer replacement


To replace the cuvette changer on the ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete cuvette
changer assembly by using the cuvette changer update kit.
page 2.
■ Remove the mother board cover (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1) to access the "main cover
closed" sensor.
■ Remove the "main cover closed" sensor

with its support by unscrewing the 2 CHC
screws of its support.

RAA023

horizontal motor.
■ Cutthe Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor

wires and the home sensor wires. A
■ Disconnect the motor connector (A) and the
motor/home sensor connector (B).
■ Disconnectthe cuvette changer vertical

motor connector (M15).
■ Disconnect the 2 connectors of the "rack

used segment in position" sensor. Then,
unscrew the left CHC screw and loosen the
right one to release the "rack used segment
free connector

RAA023
When reassembling, take care to the position of the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment
A A A
■ Disconnect the 2 vertical sensors (C17 and

C61). C17
■ Cut the 4 Ty-Raps™ maintaining the

cuvette changer strand. C61
■ Release the strand from the cuvette

changer course (B).
A A
cuvette changer on the right plate (A).
Take care to the 2 ground wire supports.

RAA023
■ Unscrew the 2 top CHC screws (A) and the

2 bottom CHC screws (B) maintaining the
cuvette changer on the left plate. B
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws at the rear of

the instrument to give play to the cuvette
changer and gently lift up the cuvette
changer to remove it.
■ Replace the cuvette changer and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Readjust the switch position of the "rack used segment in position" sensor.

RAA023
2.2. Cuvette changer racks
2.2.1. Cuvette motion home sensor replacement

page 2.
■ Turn the load rack over to access the cuvette motion home sensor.

home sensor and its wires.
in reverse order.
2.2.2. Cuvette motion motor replacement

■To replace the cuvette motion motor on ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete load
rack assembly by following the procedure Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1, page 25.
■To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement:
General procedure
page 2.
■ Turn the load rack over to access the cuvette motion motor.
■ Disconnect the ground wire and unscrew

the 4 CHC screws.

RAA023
■ Turnthe load rack over and unscrew the 4

Torx screws to release the cuvette motion
motor assembly.
■ Replace the cuvette motion motor assembly and reassemble in reverse order.
When reassembling, first turn the 8 screws without tightening them. Then, tighten the 8
screws.

page 2.
■ Dismantle the two iron corners maintaining

the load rack assembly on the cuvette
changer by unscrewing the 4 CHC screws.
■ Assemble the two new iron corners. Do not tighten the screws.
■ Putthe new load rack assembly in place using the centering pins and reconnect the connectors in
reverse order.
■ Screw the load rack assembly on the computer. Do not tighten the screws.
■ Then, screw the load rack assembly on the iron corners. Do not tighten the screws.
■ Now, tighten the 4 CHC screws maintaining

the iron corners.

RAA023
■ Then, tighten the 6 CHC screws maintaining

the load rack assembly on the computer
and the iron corners.

After the load rack assembly replacement, it is necessary to readjust the cuvette changer by
following the procedures 4.7. Adjustment of new cuvette segment loading (load rack),
page 39 and 4.8. Adjustment of used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack), page 43.
Then, check the adjustment by following the procedure 4.9. Adjustment check, page 47.

RAA023
2.2.3. "Rack used segment full" sensor replacement

page 2.
To avoid risk of damage on the sensor connector, disconnect it as follows:

■ Press the clip to move it up (A).
■ Disconnect the male and female part of the connector (B).
B
B
■ Remove the 2 black adhesive tapes on the

left side of the load rack.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and the 5 Torx

screws to release the left side of the load
rack.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and remove the

black adhesive tape to remove the sensor
and its wires.
■ Replace the sensor and reassemble in
reverse order.

RAA023
2.2.4. "New segment available" sensor replacement

■ Remove covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1):
■ Open the adhesive collar and release the

wires of the "new segment available" sensor
(A).
■ Disconnect the "new segment available"
sensor (C38).
B
sensor and its wires (B).
C38 A
To avoid risk of damage on the sensor connector, disconnect it as follows:

■ Press the clip to move it up (A).
■ Disconnect the male and female part of the connector (B).
B
B
■ Replace the sensor and reassemble in reverse order.
The connectors of the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and the "new segment
available" sensor (C38) have been modified.
■ In ABX Pentra 400 V1: it is necessary to use the "Cable, adaptor sensor rack" (provided in
the sensor kit) to connect the sensor to the right cable (linked to the mother board).
■ Ifthe instrument has a serial number anterior to #133: before installing the adaptor, it is
mandatory to replace the 4 points connectors C19 (for the unload rack) and C38 (for the
load rack) by new ones with 3 points. Proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the male and female parts of the connector.
- Replace the 4 points female connector by the new 3 points connector (provided in the
sensor kit):
Connect the first pin (which was in position 1 on the 4 points connector) in position 1 on the
new connector. Connect the second pin in position 2. Do not disconnect the third pin.
Connect the fourth pin in position 3. Cut the third wire end: cut the 4 points female
connector.
See picture on next page.
- Reconnect the male and female parts of the connector.

RAA023
3 points connector
pos.3
pos.2
pos.1
3rd pin
pos.4
pos.3
pos.2
pos.1
4 points connector

RAA023

Impacted Horizontal Vertical Vertical low Grabber Cuvette Rack new
adjustments Horizontal Vertical Silent Grabber
Home Home position rail + changer segment
motor motor blocks spring
sensor sensor sensor Carriage complete dismantling
Reaction tray
Automatic
X X
Loading
Reaction tray
X X X X X
cover (for needles)
Cuvette changer
horizontal
Backward
Position in X X X X
Reaction Tray
Load in Reaction
X X X X
Tray Position
Taking New
X X X X V1 only
Segment Pos
Load Used
X X X X V1 only
Segment Position
Cuvette changer
vertical
Used Cuvette
X X X X V1 only
Holder Position
New Cuvette
X X X X V1 only
Holder Position
Pause Position
Above Reaction X X X X
Tray
Low Position on
X X X X
Reaction Tray
Grabber
X X X
adjustment

RAA023
4. Adjustments

When you adjust a position of the cuvette changer by changing the number of steps for
this position, please note that:
- for the horizontal motion, a change of 130 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm.
- for the vertical motion, a change of 530 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm.
Follow the procedures 4.2. "Test segment Pentra 400" installation, page 32 and 4.3. Grabber
mechanical adjustment, page 33 before proceeding to the adjustments.
When you adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position, press Check
Home, then check the position again (press Check Position) to validate and save the new
adjustment.
4.1. Introduction
The following procedure is used to adjust the cuvette segment loading/unloading mechanism and the
different grabber positions:
- Reaction tray adjustment

■ Automatic Loading position: Reaction tray cuvette segment loading/unloading position.
- Grabber horizontal positions adjustment ("Horizontal Motions")

■ Load in Reaction Tray Position position: Cuvette segment loading in the reaction tray.
■ Backward Position in Reaction Tray position: Grabber back position to release a cuvette segment
in the reaction tray.
■ Taking New Segment Pos position: New cuvette segment loading (load rack).
■ Load Used Segment Position position: Used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack).
- Grabber vertical positions adjustment ("Vertical Motions")

■ Low Position on Reaction Tray position: Cuvette segment loading in the reaction tray.
■ Pause Position Above Reaction Tray position: Intermediate grabber position above the reaction tray.
■ New Cuvette Holder Position position: New cuvette segment loading (load rack).
■ Used Cuvette Holder Position position: Used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack).
- Rack rails positions adjustment

■ Load rack rail position adjustment.
■ Unload rack rail position adjustment.

RAA023
4.2. "Test segment Pentra 400" installation
The adjustments of the reaction tray, the grabber horizontal and vertical positions, and the rack rails
positions are performed with an adjustment tool: TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893).

■ Disable the reaction tray as follows:
Select the Reaction radio button (A) and
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette

Changer. A C
■ Disable the cuvette changer vertical and
horizontal motors as follows:
- Select the Vertical Motions radio button
(A) and press Motor Off (B).
- Select the Horizontal Motions radio
button (C) and press Motor Off (B). B
■ Install the "Test segment Pentra 400" on the

grabber using a CHC screw (M3x10).

RAA023
4.3. Grabber mechanical adjustment
The purpose of this mechanical adjustment is to adjust the grabber orientation in the reaction
tray.
Each time you have to manually move the grabber, you must use the endless screw (vertical
movement) and the grabber gear wheel (horizontal movement).
■ Loosen the 6 CHC screws of the grabber to

move it freely and adjust it.

The grabber is maintained by 4 CHC screws
for ABX Pentra 400 V1.
■ Manually move the grabber to insert the

"Test segment Pentra 400" into the reaction
tray, the tool must be fully inserted but must
not be constrained (you can feel a
resistance on the endless screw when the
tool is constrained).
■ Center the "Test segment Pentra 400" in the
reaction tray and tighten the grabber
screws.

RAA023
4.4. Adjustment of reaction tray "Automatic Loading" position
The purpose of this adjustment is to obtain a correct cuvette segment loading in the reaction
tray. The adjustment is done by changing the number of steps for the reaction tray Automatic
Loading position.
■ Manually move the grabber to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray.

■ Select the Reaction radio button (A) and
press Check Home (B).
■ Select the Automatic Loading position (C) C
and press Check Position (D).
B D
■ Manually move the grabber to insert the

"Test segment Pentra 400" in the reaction
tray.
■ Adjust the reaction tray position to have the
"Test segment Pentra 400" centered in the
tray, by changing the number of steps for
the reaction tray Automatic Loading
position.
- Decrease the number of steps to turn the
Before changing the number of steps for the reaction tray Automatic Loading position,
manually move the grabber to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray.

(press Check Home (B)) then check the
position again (press Check Position (D)).
■ Manually move the grabber to remove the
"Test segment Pentra 400" from the
reaction tray.
B D

RAA023
4.5. Adjustment of cuvette segment loading into the reaction tray
"Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position" position
■ Goto Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette

Changer.
■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A)
and press Check Home (B).
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions radio button A C
(C) and press Check Home (B).
■ Selectthe Vertical Motions > Pause
Position Above Reaction Tray position (D) D F
and press Check Position (E).
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions > Load in
Reaction Tray Position position (F) and
B E G
press Check Position (E).
■ Disable the cuvette changer vertical motor
as follows:
Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A)
and press Motor Off (G).
■ Manually move the grabber downward to

insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" in the
reaction tray. The "Test segment Pentra
400" must not touch the reaction tray.
■ Adjust this position to have the "Test
segment Pentra 400" centered into the
reaction tray, by changing the number of
steps for the Horizontal Motions > Load in
Reaction Tray Position position.
grabber forward.
grabber backwards.
■ Manually move the grabber upwards to
remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from
the reaction tray.
■ Check this position for each sector of the

- Select a sector of the reaction tray (A) and A
press Check Position (B) to move this
sector to the Automatic Loading position.
- Manually move the grabber downward to
insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" into
the reaction tray.
- Manually move the grabber upwards to B
remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from
the reaction tray.

RAA023
"Vertical Motions > Low Position on Reaction Tray" position

■ Remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the grabber.
■ Install a cuvette segment on the grabber.

Changer.
■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A)
A C
■ Select the Horizontal Motions radio button
(C) and press Check Home (B). D F
■ Select the Horizontal Motions > Load in
Reaction Tray Position position (F) and
B E G
■ Select the Vertical Motions > Low
Position on Reaction Tray position (D) and
■ The cuvette segment must be fully inserted

but must not be forced by the grabber. The
circlip must slightly be raised up (< 1 mm) circlip
and the finger must not touch at the top.
■ Adjust this position by changing the
number of steps for the Vertical Motions > < 1 mm
Low Position on Reaction Tray position.
grabber downward.
grabber upwards. finger

RAA023
"Horizontal Motions > Backward Position in Reaction Tray" position
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions >

A
Backward Position in Reaction Tray
position (A) and press Check Position (B).
■ Thegrabber must release the cuvette

segment without touching the reaction tray
upper case.
■ Adjust this position by changing the
number of steps for the Horizontal Motions
> Backward Position in Reaction Tray
position.
grabber forward.
grabber backwards.
C
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions > Load in
Reaction Tray Position position (A) and
press Check Position (B). A
■ Selectthe Vertical Motions radio button
(C) and press Check Home (D).
■ Put the reaction tray cover back.
D B
Make sure that the reagent and sample needles as well as the mixer paddle do not touch the
reaction tray cover.

RAA023
4.6. Adjustment of "Vertical Motions > Pause Position Above

Reaction Tray" position
E A
(A) and press Check Home (B).
C locating pin
■ Select the Vertical Motions > Pause
Position Above Reaction Tray position (C)
and press Check Position (D).
B D
■ Adjust this position for a gap of 2 mm

between the cuvette segment and the
reaction tray cover, by changing the number
of steps for the Vertical Motions > Pause
Position Above Reaction Tray position.
grabber downward.
grabber upwards.
2 mm
Make sure that the cuvette segment does not touch the reaction tray cover when you press
the cuvette segment down.
■ When the grabber is in this position, the vertical home flag should not cut the beam of the vertical low
position sensor. For this, make sure that the voltage on the connector C61 Pin 1-3 is < 1 V. If not,
readjust the position by lightly moving the grabber upwards.
vertical home flag

vertical low position sensor
C61

RAA023
■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button (E) and press Check Home (B).
■ Remove the cuvette segment from the grabber.
4.7. Adjustment of new cuvette segment loading (load rack)
Load rack rail adjustment

■ Reassemble in reverse order the load rack. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.
■ Stick a piece of paper on the "new segment available" sensor to avoid the rail movement.
■ Selectthe Cuvette Motion radio button (A)


load rack on its support.
C E
(C) and press Motor Off (D).
button (E) and press Motor Off (D).
D

RAA023
■ Install the "Test segment Pentra 400"on the

grabber.
■ Manually move the grabber above the load
rack rail.
■ Adjust the load rack so that the rail does not
touch the "Test segment Pentra 400".
3 1 5
■ Once the load rack is adjusted, tighten the

6 CHC screws maintaining the load rack on
its support by following the order of screws
indicated on the picture.
6 4 2

RAA023
"Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position" position
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions radio button C A

(C) and press Check Home (B). D
■ Selectthe Vertical Motions > New

Cuvette Holder Position position (D) and
press Check Position (E). B E F
After a Vertical Motions > Check Home, the grabber moves to the Vertical Motions > New
Cuvette Holder Position position, then the grabber does not move when you select the
Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position and press Check Position.
■ Disablethe cuvette changer horizontal motor as follows:

Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (F).
■ Manually move the grabber above the load

rack rail.
■ Adjust this position to have the end of the
load rack rail aligned with the upper mark of
the "Test segment Pentra 400", by changing
the number of steps for the Vertical
Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position
position.
grabber downward.
grabber upwards.
C A
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions radio button


RAA023
"Horizontal Motions > Taking New Segment Pos" position

■ Install a cuvette segment on the load rack, in position to be loaded by the grabber.

C A
■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button
■ Select the Vertical Motions > New D F
■ Selectthe Horizontal Motions > Taking
B E
New Segment Pos position (F) and press
Check Position (E).
■ Make sure that the grabber is against the

cuvette segment and adjust this position for
a gap of 0 to 0.1 mm between the load rack
rail and the cuvette segment, by changing
the number of steps for the Horizontal
Motions > Taking New Segment Pos
position.
grabber forward.
grabber backwards.
C A
■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button
■ Remove the cuvette segment from the load
rack.
B

RAA023
4.8. Adjustment of used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack)
Unload rack rail adjustment

■ Install the "Test segment Pentra 400" on the grabber.
■ Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the locating

pin.
■ Put the unload rack back.
■ Tighten the 2 CHC screws of the locating
pin.
A C
button (C) and press Motor Off (B).
B

unload rack rail.

RAA023
■ Manually move the grabber above the

unload rack rail.
■ Adjustthe unload rack rail so that the rail
does not touch the "Test segment Pentra
400".
■ Once the unload rack rail is adjusted,

tighten the 3 CHC screws maintaining the
2
unload rack rail by following the order of
screws indicated on the picture.
■ Check the adjustment by manually moving
the grabber back and forth above the
unload rack rail.
3

RAA023
"Vertical Motions > Used Cuvette Holder Position" position

■ Selectthe Vertical Motions radio button C A
■ Selectthe Vertical Motions > Used
D F
■ Disable the cuvette changer horizontal
motor as follows: B E G
Select the Horizontal Motions radio button
(A) and press Motor Off (G).
■ Manually move the grabber above the

unload rack rail.
■ Adjust this position to have the end of the
unload rack rail aligned with the lower mark
of the "Test segment Pentra 400", by
changing the number of steps for the
Vertical Motions > Used Cuvette Holder
Position position.
grabber downward.
grabber upwards.
C A


RAA023
"Horizontal Motions > Load Used Segment Position" position

■ Install a cuvette segment on the unload rack.
A C
button (C) and press Motor Off (B).
B
■ Manually move the grabber so that the grabber between

grabber moves between 2 cuvettes without 2 cuvettes
rubbing.
If you cannot do this preliminary adjustment correctly, readjust the unload rack rail.
See Unload rack rail adjustment, page 43.

(C) and press Check Home (D). A C
■ Select the Horizontal Motions > Load
Used Segment Position position (E) and
press Check Position (F). E
■ Push the cuvette segment against the
grabber.
■ Select the Horizontal Motions radio button D F B
(C) and press Check Home (D).

RAA023
■ Adjust this position for a gap of 2.5 mm

between the end of the unload rack rail and
the cuvette segment, by changing the
number of steps for the Horizontal Motions
> Load Used Segment Position position.
grabber forward.
grabber backwards.
■ Remove the cuvette segment from the unload rack.
If the gap between the end of the unload rack rail and the cuvette segment is higher than
2.5 mm, the unload rack will not be able to store 30 cuvette segments.
4.9. Adjustment check
■ Remove the piece of paper on the "new segment available" sensor.
C A D
■ Select the
Cuvette Motion radio button (D)
B
A
■ Disable the reaction tray as follows:
Select the Reaction radio button (A) and
in the reaction tray. If necessary, manually
remove the cuvette segments.
■ Selectthe Reaction radio button (A) and C B
press Check Home (C).

RAA023
■ Check the adjustments by loading and

unloading a cuvette segment in each sector
of the reaction tray as follows:
- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette
Changer.
- Select the Segment radio button.
- Select a sector of the reaction tray and
press Load.
- Check if the cuvette segment loading is
correct, then press Unload.
- Check if the cuvette segment unloading is
correct.
■ Repeat the procedure above for each
sector of the reaction tray.
Repeat the adjustment check procedure above several times.
■ If there is no problem during the cycles, put the covers back.

RAA023
RAS392G
Internal computer
RAS392: Internal computer
Concerns
Computer dismantling
Ferrites installation (for computer models from "CCC014H")
Computer parts replacement
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Open-end wrench
Flat screwdriver
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Internal computer ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Computer dismantling
- Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover and the optic hatch.
- Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC

screws of the left arm cover.
- Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the
reagent cover, the cuvettes hatch, the
connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.
■ Open the computer fan box as follows:

Slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the
cover.

inside the computer fan box, remove the
deflector PC/BO and remove the blue tube
from the computer fan box.
■ Disconnect the mouse and the keyboard as well as the other computer connections.
RAS392G - 2 COMPUTER Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Internal computer
■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws under the frame

and the 2 CHC screws maintaining the load
rack of the cuvette changer.
■ Carefully
pull, then lift the computer
assembly.
■ Unscrew the CHC screw and washer
maintaining the power supply cable.
Computer models from 1300013734
1 2 3
■ Disconnect the power supply cable (1), the
mother board cable (2), the RS232 cable (3)
and, if necessary, the printer cable (4).
■ Then, remove the computer assembly. Computer models < 1300013734
1 2 3
For computer models from "CCC014H", please ensure that the power supply cable is
equipped with two ferrites (one close to the computer assembly and another close to the
power supply).
See 2. Ferrites installation (for computer models from "CCC014H"), page 5.
Technical Manual COMPUTER RAS392G - 3

RAA023
■ Dismantlethe computer fan box as follows:

Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers
and remove the computer fan box.
■ Unscrewthe 6 CHC screws, then remove

the computer assembly from its cover.
computer model).
Please note that computer models from 1300013734 are no longer equipped with PS/2 ports
(mouse, keyboard) or parallel port (printer).
All the peripherals (mouse, keyboard, printer) should be connected into the USB ports.

RAA023
2. Ferrites installation (for computer models

from "CCC014H")
- Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover and the optic hatch.
- Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC

screws of the left arm cover.
- Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the
reagent cover, the cuvettes hatch, the
connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.
2.1. Ferrite installation close to the computer assembly
■ Follow the computer dismantling procedure. See 1. Computer dismantling, page 2.

■ Install one ferrite on the power supply cable as follows:
You can find two types of power supply cables:

- new shielded power supply cable
- old unshielded power supply cable.
ferrite
■ New shielded power supply cable
- Open the ferrite.
- Place the power supply cable in the ferrite.
- Make a loop with the power supply cable,
then close the ferrite.

RAA023
■ Old unshielded power supply cable ferrite

- Open the ferrite.
- Place the power supply cable in the ferrite,
2.2. Ferrite installation close to the power supply
■ Disconnectthe power supply connector

from the power supply.
If needed, to access the power supply cable, dismantle the power supply by referring to the
procedure RAS390: Power supply replacement, page 1.
■ Find the cable connected to the computer assembly.

■ Install one ferrite on the power supply cable as follows:
You can find two types of power supply cables:

- new shielded power supply cable
- old unshielded power supply cable.

RAA023
■ New shielded power supply cable ferrite

- Open the ferrite.
- Place the power supply cable in the ferrite.
- Make a loop with the power supply cable,
■ Old unshielded power supply cable

- Open the ferrite. ferrite
- Place the power supply cable in the ferrite,
■ Reconnect the power supply connector on the power supply.


RAA023
3. Computer parts replacement
As several computer models are available, a label, stuck on the rear plate, allows you to identify the
computer model.
This label can be read from the optic hatch opening with the help of a flashlight, without
dismantling the computer assembly first.
The table below lists the computer assembly spare parts and indicates their compatibility with the
different computer models in the field.
since LCD touch Sound

instrument Touch screen
PC assembly screen CD-ROM drive Hard drive SD RAM board Mother board amplification
(separately)
serial #1 (complete) board
XAA511BS XEC074AS
CCC014A->F N/A N/A CBT018A N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511) (1209179074)2
XAA511BS XEC074AS
CCC014G->H P4-0853 N/A CBT018A N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511) (1209179074)2
XAA511BS
CCC014J P4-2166 N/A CBT018A 1201772017 N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511)
XAA511BS
CCC014K P4-2349 N/A CBT018A 1201772017 N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511)
XAA511BS CBT021A
CCC014L P4-3214 N/A 1201772017 N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511) (1201771021)
XAA511BS CBT021A
CCC014M P4-3391 N/A 1201772017 N/A N/A N/A
(1209109511) (1201771021)
P4-4000 / XAA511BS CBT021A
CCC014N N/A 1201772017 N/A N/A N/A
C4-0110 (1209109511) (1201771021)

RAA023
since LCD touch Sound

instrument Touch screen
PC assembly screen CD-ROM drive Hard drive SD RAM board Mother board amplification
(separately)
serial #1 (complete) board
P4-4072 / XDB355A
1300013734 N/A N/A 1201772017 1300014030 1300023975 1300018920
C4-0473 (1209141355)
1Please note that the computer assembly may have been changed on the instrument. In this case, do
not take into account the instrument serial # mentioned above.
2
Obsolete when sold out.
3.1. Computer models from 1300013734
■ Loosen the three CHC screws located on

the right side (close to the fan).
■ Unscrew the seven CHC screws, then
remove the rear plate.
■ Take care of the USB port cable, disconnect
it.
3.1.1. To dismantle/replace the SD RAM board
■ Open the two latches to free the SD RAM

board (A). B
■ Gently pull the SD RAM board to
disconnect it (B).

RAA023
3.1.2. To dismantle/replace the mother board
■ Dismantle the SD RAM board.

■ Disconnect all the cables from the mother
board.
■ Unscrew the four CHC screws to remove
the mother board.
3.1.3. To dismantle/replace the hard drive
■ Dismantle the mother board.

■ Unplug the connector from the hard drive.
■ Unscrew the four CHC screws to remove
the hard drive.
■ The hard drive is not loaded with the Windows master P400/C400.
Therefore, you have to install the Windows master P400/C400 by referring to the procedure
RAS533: Windows master installation, page 1.
■ Then, you have to install the software version and the reagent applications by referring
respectively to the procedures RAS517: Software version installation, page 1 and RAS518:
Reagent applications installation, page 1.

RAA023
3.1.4. To dismantle/replace the LCD touch screen
■ Unscrew the four CHC screws.
■ Unplug the three connectors at the back of

the screen.
Touchscreen calibration (if necessary)

■ Check that the touchscreen is properly calibrated.
■ If this is not the case, open C:\Program Files\eGalaxTouch directory and run the eGalaxTouch.exe
file.
■ From the Tools tab, select 4 Points Calibration.
■ Press OK.

RAA023
■ Touch each of the four corners of the screen to calibrate the touchscreen.
■ Press Apply, then OK.
Brightness adjustment (if necessary)

Touchscreen brightness can be changed in the Windows 7 operating system. If needed:
■ Enter Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options.
■ Move the cursor at the bottom of the screen to change the brightness percentage (from 0% to 100%,
default is 45%).
3.2. Computer models < 1300013734
3.2.1. Hard drive replacement
Please note that:

■ computer models from "CCC014J" are equipped with a SATA hard drive,
■ computer models before "CCC014J" are equipped with an IDE hard drive.
■ Loosen the 3 CHC screws located on the

right side (close to the fan).
■ Unscrew the 10 CHC screws, then remove Loosen
the rear plate.
■ Remove the left angle plate as follows:

- Unscrew the 6 CHC screws.

RAA023
A B
- Disconnect the flat cable (A) and the

connector CN12 (B, use a flat screwdriver)
from the left angle plate.
- Disconnect the audio connector CN2 from

the mother board and remove the left angle
plate.
Specific computer models before

"CCC014H"
For computer models before "CCC014H",
you cannot disconnect the audio connector
from the board.
So, you have to unscrew the nut and remove
the audio connector from the left angle plate.
■ Remove the bottom angle plate as follows:

- Unscrew the 5 CHC screws.

RAA023
- Disconnect the connector (A) and the flat

cable (B) from the bottom angle plate, then
remove the bottom angle plate.
A B
When you disconnect (or reconnect) the flat cable (B) from the bottom angle plate, take care
not to disconnect this flat cable from the daughter board or the daughter board from the
mother board.
■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and washers maintaining the "hard drive + CD-ROM drive" assembly.
SATA hard drive IDE hard drive

maintaining the CD-ROM drive on the hard drive
maintaining the CD-ROM drive on the hard drive
support and disconnect the hard drive connector
support.
(A).

RAA023
SATA hard drive IDE hard drive
■ Turn the hard drive support over, disconnect

■ Turn the hard drive support over and unscrew
the flat cable from the CD-ROM drive and
the 4 CHC screws to release the hard drive from
unscrew the 4 CHC screws to release the hard
its support.
drive from its support.
■ Then, disconnect the flat cable from the hard

drive.
■ Replace the hard drive and reassemble in reverse order.
When reassembling, do not tighten the different screws too much in order not to damage the
hard drive or the CD-ROM drive.
For the IDE hard drive, ensure that the flat cable is correctly plugged into the hard drive
because 4 pins must be free.

RAA023
■ The hard drive is not loaded with the Windows master P400/C400.
Therefore, you have to install the Windows master P400/C400 by referring to the procedure
RAS533: Windows master installation, page 1.
■ Then, you have to install the software version and the reagent applications by referring
respectively to the procedures RAS517: Software version installation, page 1 and RAS518:
Reagent applications installation, page 1.
WARNING! Take care to clear the way of the 2 fans: no flat cables in front of the fans
(overheating risk).
3.2.2. CD-ROM drive replacement

■ Follow the hard drive replacement procedure to access the CD-ROM drive.
■ Unscrew
the 2 CHC screws to release the
CD-ROM drive.

support plate.

RAA023

board from the CD-ROM drive (take care not
to lose the 2 crosspieces between the CD-
ROM drive and the board).
■ Replace the CD-ROM drive and reassemble
in reverse order.
■ Ensure that the flat cable is correctly plugged into the hard drive because 4 pins must be
free.
■ Do not tighten the different screws too much in order not to damage the hard drive or the
CD-ROM drive.
3.2.3. Touch screen replacement
Touch screen dismantling

■ Disconnect the flat cable from the touch

screen board as follows:
- Pull gently on the black part of the
connector (A). A
- Pull on the flat cable (B).
The touch screen is fixed on the screen with

13 copper strips and 4 pieces of tape.
■ Remove the 13 copper strips.
■ Cut and remove the 4 pieces of tape.
■ Then, remove the touch screen.

RAA023
New touch screen installation

■ Clean the screen and the touch screen with soft paper and 70% alcohol.
■ Remove any dust from the screen and the touch screen using a dusting spray.
■ Put the touch screen on the 2 blank

supports, the flat cable should be on the
right side.
■ Adjust
the touch screen position to have its
window centered with regards to the
window of the screen.
■ Fix the touch screen using the 13 copper flat cable
strips included in the kit.
■ Reconnect the flat cable to the touch
screen board.
blank supports
■ Ensure that the brown band on the flat cable is in the correct position.
■ Do not forget to block the connector.
■ Carefully hide the flat cable behind the screen.

■ Reassemble the computer in reverse order.
Touch screen calibration

■ Go to C:\FIDTSERV and launch the

calwin.exe file.
A white windows appears, with a red cross in the left upper corner.
■ Press this cross, it will move to the next position.
■ Pressthe red cross for the 9 positions, then press Enter twice.
The touch screen is calibrated.

RAA023
RAS390D
Power supply replacement
RAS390: Power supply replacement
Concerns
Power supply replacement
Power supply LEDs check
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Voltmeter
Required products
None
Intervention time
0 h 30
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Power supply replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Power supply replacement
■ Remove the sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See
■ Remove the left gusset plate by unscrewing

the 3 CHC screws on the side and loosening
the 4 CHC screws at the rear of the
instrument.
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC back screws.
RAS390D - 2 ELECTRICITY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Power supply replacement
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC front screws (one with

metallic collar maintaining the ISE ground
wire and the reinforced cable).
■ Remove the power supply and the
recuperation jar stuck to it.

ABX Pentra 400 V1 are not equipped with a recuperation jar.
■ Ifnecessary slightly lift the reagent tray up

as follows:
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws and washers of
the left reagent tray foot.
- Loosen the 2 CHC screws (one with

washer and one with a ground wire) of the
right reagent tray foot.
- Carefully lift the reagent tray up.
■ Disconnect, on the power supply, the

three supply connectors.
Technical Manual ELECTRICITY RAS390D - 3

RAA023
If the ABX Pentra 400 is not equipped with reinforced power supply cable:
■ Unscrew the 2 CHC front screws (one with

ISE ground wire).
■ Disconnect, on the power supply, the

three supply connectors.
■ Remove the power supply and the
recuperation jar stuck to it.
■ Remove the recuperation jar from the old power supply.

■ Usethe double-sided adhesive tape stuck on the top of the new power supply to stick the
recuperation jar in the same position as on the old power supply.
■ Connect the three supply connectors.
If the ABX Pentra 400 is not equipped with reinforced power supply cable, connect the three
supply connectors after power supply installation.
Reagent tray motor
■ Install
the new power supply with the
recuperation jar. The larger part of the
recuperation jar is positioned under the
reagent tray motor.
Recuperation jar
If the reagent tray has been lifted up, check all the centering positions of the reagent and
sample arms using the "Reag tray adjusting tool", the "Dummy reagent needle" and the
"Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, page 1.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Power supply replacement
2. Power supply LEDs check
■ Check on the mother board that the 4 LEDs

are lit:
Checking LEDs is enough. It is recommended not to check voltages with a voltmeter in order
not to damage the board (in fact, the test points are really small and the risk of a shortcut is
high).
The following voltages are given for information only:

- DS 13, - 5 V.
- DS 14, + 5 V.
- DS 15, VCC (+ 5 V).
- DS 16, + 24 V.
Technical Manual ELECTRICITY RAS390D - 5

RAA023
Ground
■ If
one of the LEDs is not lit, use a voltmeter
point to check the corresponding voltage on
the connector.
-5V
+ 24 V
+5V +5V

RAA023
RAS391E
Mother board replacement
RAS391: Mother board replacement
Concerns
Parameters backup and software version check
Mother board replacement
Embedded software version installation
Restore parameters
Check up
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Mother board replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Parameters backup and software version

check
Before changing the board, to save all mechanical parameters (offset values, stepper motor values, etc.),
proceed as follows:
■ Goto Services > Diagnostics and press

Back.
■ When the following screen appears, click
OK.
The parameters are saved under
D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin.
Check the software version currently installed on the instrument. At the end of the procedure, you will
need to install the same software version.
2. Mother board replacement
■ Carefully disconnect all the connectors from the mother board.
■ Unscrew the 9 CHC M4 screws to remove the board from its plate.
■ Install the new mother board on the plate and fasten the 9 CHC M4 screws.
■ Connect all the connectors on the board (see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 1.4. Mother
board connections, page 4-9).
RAS391E - 2 ELECTRICITY Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Mother board replacement
3. Embedded software version installation
It is necessary to reinstall the software version embedded on the mother board (flash memory
Eprom) because the latest software version has not been loaded on the new mother board.
■ Afterthe boot of the operating system (Windows progress bar), the screen becomes black, then blue.
When the screen is blue, press Shift until the Windows login screen appears.
The left Shift key used to skip the automatic logon is no more functional under Windows 7.
Press CTRL+ALT+DEL keys to logoff and change current user.

■ Install the software version checked at chapter 1 by following the procedure RAS517: Software version
■ Makesure that the following options are selected, if not select them:
Download P400 Eprom
Create a desktop icon.
■ When choosing the type of installation, select Update in order not to lose the configuration
(applications, calibrators, controls, settings, etc.) neither the patient results.
■ Shut down and restart the instrument.
4. Restore parameters
To restore all mechanical parameters on the new board, please proceed as follows:
■ At the end of the instrument start, an error message appears which demands to restore the
parameters.
The following screen appears:
■ Click Default Restore File.

The Default Restore File button allows you
to restore the default file:
D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin.
This is the last parameters backup file.
Technical Manual ELECTRICITY RAS391E - 3

RAA023
Mother board replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
■ Itis possible to select a previous

parameters backup file and to do so:
- Click Restore File.
- Select the backup file you want to restore.
- Click Open.
■ When the following screen appears, click

OK.
■ Click
OK on the following screen.
The parameters are restored.
5. Check up
■ Afterhaving restored parameters, it is advisable to check the mechanical adjustments. See RAS378:
6 month maintenance, 6. To check the mechanical adjustments, page 5.
■ Follow the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

RAA023
RAS394E
Sensors check and adjustment
RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment
Concerns
Reagent and sample syringes home sensors
Reagent tray home sensor
Sample tray home sensor
Reaction tray home sensor
Mixer assembly motor home sensor
"Mixer present switch"
Reagent and sample arms home sensors
Rack used segment (in position/full) sensors
"New segment available" sensor
Cuvette motion home sensor
Cuvette changer horizontal motions home sensor
Cuvette changer vertical motions home sensor
"Handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor
"Main cover closed" sensor
Needle heating sensor
Reaction heating sensor
Refrigerated area sensor
Inner temperature sensor
"Handling cover reagent closed" sensor
Water tank empty sensor
Waste tank full sensor
Sample arm shock detection switch
Computer wake up sensor
Lamp power standby
Lamp power full
Low liquid level (cooling unit)
Power correct
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver

operations.
Sensors check and adjustment ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Reagent and sample syringes home sensors
■ Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the 4 sample syringe reagent syringe
CHC screws to access the syringes home home sensor home sensor
sensors.
No adjustment available.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe. A

■ Select the Reagent radio button (A), then
press Check Home to move the reagent
syringe to its home position.
■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes B
green.
C
■ Select the Sample radio button (C), then
press Check Home to move the sample
syringe to its home position.
■ Make sure that the Home light (D) becomes D
green.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Sensors check and adjustment
2. Reagent tray home sensor
■ Thereagent tray home sensor is located


B
■ Select the Reagent radio button (A), then
press Check Home to move the reagent
■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes
green.

RAA023
3. Sample tray home sensor
■ The sample tray home sensor is located

under the sample tray.

B
■ Select the Sample radio button (A), then
press Check Home to move the sample
green.

RAA023
4. Reaction tray home sensor
■ Thereaction tray home sensor is located

under the reaction tray.
B
■ Select the Reaction radio button (A), then
press Check Home to move the reaction
green.

RAA023
5. Mixer assembly motor home sensor
■ The mixer assembly motor home sensor is

located at the rear of the mixer assembly,
under its cover.

■ Select the Mixer radio button (A), then
press Check Home to move the mixer to its B
home position.
green.

RAA023
6. "Mixer present switch"

CHC screws to access the "mixer present
switch".
■ The "mixer present switch" is located under

the mixer assembly motor home sensor.
The "mixer present switch" must be
activated when the mixer assembly is in
"present" position (i.e. low position).
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Manually pull the mixer assembly up to its
high position to deactivate the "mixer
present switch".
■ Press Read Sensor State.
■ Makesure that the Mixer Present light (A) A
becomes red.
■ Manually push the mixer assembly down to B
its low position to activate the "mixer
present switch".
■ Makesure that the Mixer Present light (B)
becomes green.
If one of the positions is not correct, adjust the "mixer present switch" as follows:
Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the switch, then move it up if the mixer assembly is
not detected in low position (red light) or move it down if the mixer assembly is detected in
high position (green light).

RAA023
7. Reagent and sample arms home sensors
rotation home
sensor
■ The reagent and sample arms home

sensors are located on the arms assembly.
vertical home
sensor
■ Make sure that the reagent arm is in low position in the wash tower before moving the
sample arm.
■ Make sure that the sample arm is in its upper position (vertical home position) before
moving the reagent arm.
■ Make sure that the sample and reagent arms are in their upper positions (vertical home
position) before moving any tray.

(1), then press Check Home to move the
sample arm to its vertical home position. 2
■ Make sure that the Home light (2) becomes
green.
■ Select the sample arm Rotation radio
button (3), then press Check Home to move
the sample arm to its rotation home
position. 3
green.
4

RAA023
■ Select the reagent arm Vertical radio 5

the reagent arm to its vertical home
position. 6
green.
■ Select the reagent arm Rotation radio
the reagent arm to its rotation home
position. 7
green.
8
8. Rack used segment (in position/full) sensors
■ The rack used segment sensors are located A

as follows:
A: Rack used segment in position
B: Rack used segment full

■ Remove the unload rack, then press Read
Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Rack Used Segment In A
Position and the Rack Used Segment Full
lights (A/B) become red.
■ Put
the unload rack back, then press Read B
Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Rack Used Segment In
Position light (A) becomes green.

RAA023
If the Rack Used Segment In Position light (A) stays red, it is possible to adjust the switch
Loosen the 2 CHC screws maintaining the switch, then adjust it. The switch must be
activated when the unload rack is in position and deactivated when the rack is not in position.
■ Put your finger on the "rack used segment full" sensor and press Read Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Rack Used Segment Full light (B) becomes green.
The "rack used segment full" sensor depends on the "rack used segment in position" sensor.
If the unload rack is not in position, the Rack Used Segment Full light stays red.
9. "New segment available" sensor
■ The "new segment available" sensor is located on the load rack to check the presence of a new
segment.

■ Remove the unload rack, then empty the
load rack of all its cuvette segments.
■ Make sure that the New Segment
Available light becomes red.
■ Manually place a cuvette segment in

loading position.
■ Make sure that the New Segment
Available light becomes green.

RAA023
"New segment available" sensor adjustment

■ Remove the unload rack, then empty the load rack of all its cuvette segments.
■ Cross off the first cuvette of a cuvette segment.
■ Manually place the cuvette segment in loading position. Place it in its two extreme positions as shown
on the following pictures.
Extreme position 1 Extreme position 2
Pressure point Pressure point

of cuvette edge of cuvette edge
Cuvette segment Cuvette segment
Pressure point Pressure point

of cuvette edge of cuvette edge
■ Refer to the beam impact on the two cuvette segment extreme positions.
■ Using the 2 CHC screws maintaining its support plate (A), adjust the angle of the "new segment
available" sensor. The impact points of the beam have to be symmetric regarding to the edge of the
cuvette placed in the extreme positions (B).
A B
Cuvette
L1 ~
~ L2
L1 L2
Beam

RAA023
10. Cuvette motion home sensor
■ The cuvette motion home sensor is located

under the load rack, right behind the motor.

Changer. A
■ Select the Cuvette Motion radio button (A),
then press Check Home to move the
cuvette motion to its home position.
B
green.
11. Cuvette changer horizontal motions home

sensor
■ The cuvette changer horizontal motions

home sensor is located as shown on the
following figure.

RAA023
■ Goto Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette

Changer. A
(A), then press Check Home to move the
cuvette changer to its horizontal home
position. B
green.
12. Cuvette changer vertical motions home sensor
■ Thecuvette changer vertical motions home sensor is located as shown on the following picture and is
not adjustable. The cuvette changer doesn’t stay in vertical home position (light is red).
No check available.

RAA023
13. "Handling cover cuvette segment closed"

sensor
■ The "handling cover cuvette segment

closed" sensor is a switch located under the
reaction tray door.
■ Open the reaction tray door.
■ Make sure that the Handling Cover A
Cuvette segment closed light (A) becomes
red.
■ Closethe reaction tray door, then press
Read Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Handling Cover
Cuvette segment closed light (A) becomes
green.
It is possible to adjust the "handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor by unscrewing
the 2 CHC screws maintaining its support plate.
14. "Main cover closed" sensor
■ The "main cover closed" sensor is a switch

located under the main cover. A
■ Open the main cover.
■ Make sure that the Main Cover Closed
light (A) becomes red.
■ Closethe main cover, then press Read
Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Main Cover Closed
light (A) becomes green.
It is possible to adjust the "main cover closed" sensor by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws
maintaining its support plate.

RAA023
15. Needle heating sensor
■ The needle heating sensor is located within

the reagent needle.
■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

■ In the Needle Heating area:
- the Assigned Value should be adjusted to
37°C
- the Current temperature should be 37°C
+/- 0.5°C
- the light (A) must be green.
A

RAA023
16. Reaction heating sensor
■ The reaction heating sensor is located

within the reaction tray.

■ In the Reaction Heating area:
37°C
- the Current temperature should be 37°C
+/- 0.2°C
A

RAA023
17. Refrigerated area sensor
■ Therefrigerated area sensor is located


■ In the Refrigerated Area area:
6°C
- the Current temperature should be
between 4°C and 10°C
A

RAA023
18. Inner temperature sensor
■ The inner temperature sensor is located on

the frame of the instrument, near the arms
assembly.

A
■ Check the inner temperature in the Current
field (A).
19. "Handling cover reagent closed" sensor
■ The "handling cover reagent closed" sensor

is a magnetic sensor located in the reagent
tray foam.
No adjustment available. A
■ Open the reagent cover.
Reagent Closed light (A) becomes red.
■ Closethe reagent cover, then press Read
Sensor State.
Reagent Closed light (A) becomes green.

RAA023
20. Water tank empty sensor
■ Remove the water detector from the water

container.
B
■ Make sure that the Water Tank Empty light
(A) becomes green.
■ Movethe sensor up, then press Read
Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Water Tank Empty light
(B) becomes red. A
21. Waste tank full sensor
■ Remove the waste detector from the waste

container. B
■ Make sure that the Waste Tank Full light (A)
stays red.
■ Movethe sensor up, then press Read
Sensor State.
■ Make sure that the Waste Tank Full light (B)
becomes green. A

RAA023
22. Sample arm shock detection switch
■ No adjustment available.
See RAS385: Arms, 8. Shock detection
check, page 59.
23. Computer wake up sensor
■ The computer wake up push-button is

located on the right of the instrument.
■ Make sure that the PC Wake up light (A)
stays red.
■ Simultaneously press the computer wake
up push-button and the Read Sensor State
button.
■ Make sure that the PC Wake up light (A)
becomes green.
A
24. Lamp power standby
■ No check available.

RAA023
25. Lamp power full
■ In
Services > Diagnostics > Sensors, the Lamp Power Full light must be green.
That means the lamp is functioning properly.
26. Low liquid level (cooling unit)

■ Make sure that the Low Liquid Level (Cooling Unit) light becomes red.
■ Manually push the liquid level (red mark) down and press Read Sensor State simultaneously.
■ Make sure that the Low Liquid Level (Cooling Unit) light becomes green.
27. Power correct
■ In
Services > Diagnostics > Sensors, the Power Correct light must be green.
That means the power supply is functioning properly.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS387D
Syringe block assembly replacement
RAS387: Syringe block assembly replacement
Concerns
Syringe block assembly dismantling (reagent or sample)
Syringe block assembly mounting (reagent or sample)
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Required products
Distilled water
Intervention time
0 h 15
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Syringe block assembly replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Syringe block assembly dismantling (reagent

or sample)

■ Remove the syringe cables from the

adhesive holder located on the left side of
the mother board.
D D
■ Push the syringes halfway down (A).

■ Loosenthe screw (B), then carefully
unscrew and remove the glass barrel (C).
■ Loosen the 4 silent-block screws (D) to
remove the syringe block assembly.
A
D D
RAS387D - 2 HYDRAULICS Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Syringe block assembly replacement
■ Gentlypull the syringe block assembly and

disconnect the motor, the switch and the
ground wire.
■ Remove the syringe block assembly.
2. Syringe block assembly mounting (reagent or

sample)
■ Follow the syringe block assembly dismantling procedure in reverse order.
■ Before reinstalling the glass barrel, pump distilled water several times and ensure that the
glass barrel is filled with water and no air bubbles are visible in the syringe.
■ Be very careful to correctly stretch the syringe cables again and replace them correctly on
the adhesive holder.
■ Switch the instrument on and wait for the end of initialization.

■ Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.
■ Run a Priming Cycle, then make sure that there are no air bubbles in the hydraulic circuit.
■ Perform the pressure sensors (reagent and sample) calibration. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3.
To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.
Technical Manual HYDRAULICS RAS387D - 3

RAA023
Syringe block assembly replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

RAA023
RAS389F
Waste and water pumps replacement

versions:
RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement
Concerns
Pumps dismantling
Pumps replacement
Water pump pressure check
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver
TOOL, BARFLEX (PRESS. 0-10BARS) MAM013AS
(1207899013)
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Waste and water pumps replacement ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Pumps dismantling
■ Before starting the pumps dismantling

procedure, drain the hydraulic circuit as B A
follows:
- Go to Services > Customer Services >
Cycles.
- Press Draining (A), disconnect the water
tank and press OK.
- Then, press Priming Cycle (B).

CHC screws.
water pump
■ Loosenthe 4 CHC screws maintaining the

pumps assembly and disconnect the
ground wire.
waste pump
RAS389F - 2 HYDRAULICS Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Waste and water pumps replacement
waste pump
black connector
■ Disconnect the water pump connector P56
(P56) at the rear of the instrument.
■ Disconnect the waste pump connectors
(black and red wires).
waste pump red connector
P55
■ Disconnect the water pump connector (P56)
at the rear of the instrument.
■ Disconnect the waste pump connector
(P55).
P56
■ Mark the pumps tubings, then disconnect

the front and rear tubings of the water pump
and the 2 rear tubings of the waste pump.
■ Remove the pumps assembly.
Technical Manual HYDRAULICS RAS389F - 3

RAA023
2. Pumps replacement
The waste and water pumps are factory adjusted and do not require further adjustment.
The waste and water pumps are both provided with the pump support which is compatible with the old
references of waste and water pumps.
Please refer to the picture below to fasten the waste and water pumps to their dedicated
location on the pump support.
Old waste pump

XBA528B
(1209112528) New water pump
XEC202AS
(1209179202)
Not used
New waste pump

XCA216BS
(1209129216)
Old water pump

XBA529D
(1209114529)
■ Stick the conductive fabric on the pump support (both provided in the kit).
15 mm
conductive fabric

RAA023
■ Fasten the ground wire support (provided in

the kit) on the pump support.
■ Remove the pump that you do not replace

from the old pump support by unscrewing
the 4 CHC screws.
■ Fasten this pump to its dedicated location
on the pump support.
■ Reinstall the pumps assembly.
IN
OUT
■ Remove the protections from the fittings of

the new pump.
■ Connect the front and rear tubings of the
water pump and the 2 rear tubings of the
waste pump by following the arrows marked IN
on the top of the pumps.
OUT
It might be necessary to cut the tubings to ensure a better connection with the fittings of the
new pump.

RAA023
waste pump
black connector
■ Connect the water pump connector (P56) at P56

the rear of the instrument.
■ Connect the waste pump connectors (black
and red wires).
waste pump red connector
P55

■ Connect the water pump connector (P56) at
the rear of the instrument.
■ Connect the waste pump connector (P55).
P56

If you have replaced the waste pump, use the CABLE, WST PUMP CONNECT ADAPTOR
(provided in the kit) to connect the waste pump connectors to the connector P55.

RAA023
3. Water pump pressure check
■ Fill
up the hydraulic circuit as follows:
B A
- Go to Services > Customer Services >
Cycles.
- Reconnect the water tank, press Filling up
(A) and press OK.
- Then, press Priming Cycle (B) and make
sure that there is no leak.
■ Check the water pump pressure as follows:

- Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe.
- Open, then close the valves V1 to V5.
- Open the valves V1 and V5.
- Connect a manometer to the water tank as

shown on the following picture.
- Switch the waste and water pumps on.
- Make sure that the water pump pressure is
about 2.1 bars ± 0.1.
- Switch the water and waste pumps off.
- Disconnect the manometer from the water
tank and reconnect the water tank tubing.
- Close the valves V1 and V5.
■ Perform the water pump flow check. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the sample
needle throughput, page 8.
■ Perform the pressure sensors (reagent and sample) calibration. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3.
To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.
■ Follow the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS442D
Pressure sensors
Concerns
To replace the pressure sensors and board
To adjust the pressure board voltage
Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Flat screwdriver
Voltmeter
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

KIT, WIRED PRESSURE SENSORS WITH PCB 1300015280

operations.
Pressure sensors ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. To replace the pressure sensors and board
For instruments with a serial number lower than P4-4064 / C4-0305, if you need to replace
the pressure sensors or the pressure board, you will have to replace both the pressure
sensors and board for compatibility reasons.
1. Switch the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.
2. Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the

four CHC screws.
J2 J1
3. Disconnect the reagent and sample

pressure sensors (J1 and J2), as well as
the flat cable (J3), from the pressure
board.
J3

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Pressure sensors
4. Open the arms main cover.
5. Unscrew the four CHC screws to remove

the pressure sensors spacers from each
side of the syringe block support.
6. Remove the pressure sensors.
7. Install the new pressure sensors.
Make sure that the new pressure sensors are positioned correctly. The red square on the
pressure sensor must be in front of the white square on the syringe block support.
8. Unscrew the five CHC screws to remove

the pressure board.
9. Install the new pressure board and reassemble in reverse order.

10. Adjust the pressure board voltage. See 2. To adjust the pressure board voltage, page 4.
11. Perform the pressure sensors activation (if necessary), configuration and calibration.
See 3. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration, page 5.

RAA023
2. To adjust the pressure board voltage
1. Connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.
2. Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the four CHC screws.
The pressure board voltage adjustment has

to be made without water in the hydraulic
B A
circuit.
3. Drain the hydraulic circuit as follows:
- Go to Services > Customer Services
> Cycles.
- Press Draining (A), disconnect the
water tank and press OK.
Ground
TP3
4. Adjust, with the potentiometer R16, the

voltage between TP3 and the ground to
3.8 V DC +/- 0.05.
R16
5. Fill up the hydraulic circuit as follows: B C

- Reconnect the water tank, press Filling
up (C) and press OK.
6. Put the rear plate back.

RAA023
3. Pressure sensors activation, configuration,

calibration
3.1. To activate the pressure sensors
1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser.

2. Activate the reagent and sample pressure sensors.

RAA023
3.2. To configure the pressure sensors

2. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the sample pressure sensor and
3. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the reagent pressure sensor and

RAA023
3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors

2. Select the Sample radio button (A).
3. Press Set Pressure (B).
The system primes the fluids, then runs a 10 aspirations repetition with the syringe, alternating
between low and high volumes.
At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water are displayed in the left
window.
4. Note these results.

5. Perform this operation 3 times.
6. Make sure that the results of the factor A are between 4000 and 8000, and make sure that the
difference between the 3 results of the factor A is not > 500.
7. If the results are correct, press OK to validate the calibration. The new factors are then displayed in
the right window.
8. Select the Reagent radio button (C) and follow the same procedure as for the sample syringe.
9. Make sure that the results of the factor A are between 2500 and 3900, and make sure that the
difference between the 3 results of the factor A is not > 500.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS533H
Windows master installation
RAS533: Windows master installation
Concerns
Computer model check
Windows master CD-ROM burning procedure
Windows master installation
Required tools
None
Required products
None
Intervention time
1 h 00
Frequency
On request

KIT, WINDOWS MASTERS P400/C400 1300023765

operations.
Windows master installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
■ The Windows master must be used only in case of stability problems with Windows or to
make functional new specifications.
■ This procedure will erase the data on drive C:\ or on drives C:\ and D:\ (instrument software
and customer data will be deleted).
■ Then, you will have to install the software version (RAS517: Software version installation)
and the reagent applications (RAS518: Reagent applications installation).
1. Computer model check
As several computer models are available, a label, stuck on the rear plate, allows you to identify the
computer model.
This label can be read from the optic hatch opening with the help of a flashlight, without
dismantling the computer assembly first.
The table below indicates the Windows master to be used depending on the computer model.
Windows master
Computer assembly since instrument serial #1
Ref. Version2
CCC014A->F N/A NAJ047C (1207953047) 2005/12/20
CCC014G->H P4-0853 NAJ047D (1207954047) August 2007
CCC014J P4-2166 NAJ047D (1207954047) August 2007
CCC014K P4-2349 NAJ119A (1207951119) July 2011
CCC014L P4-3214 NAJ119A (1207951119) July 2011
CCC014M P4-3391 NAJ119B (1207952119) V1.0.0
CCC014N P4-4000 / C4-0110 NAJ119B (1207952119) V1.0.0
1300013734 P4-4072 / C4-0473 1300021186 V1.0.0.6
1
Please note that the computer assembly may have been changed on the instrument. In this case, do
not take into account the instrument serial # mentioned above.
2
How to know the Windows master version you have on your instrument? Open the C:\ghost.ini file.
RAS533H - 2 SOFTWARE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Windows master installation
2. Computer models from 1300013734
2.1. Windows master bootable USB flash drive
The Windows masters for ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400 are available for download. The files to be
downloaded have a *.zip extension and are named "Master_P400_PC400_V_1.0.0.6" for example.
1. Download the Windows master version you need depending on the computer model of the
instrument.
2. Save the *.zip file on your laptop (do not save it on the instrument).
3. Insert a blank USB flash drive (4 GB minimum) into a USB port.
4. Press the Windows Start button and launch the cmd.exe file.
5. Enter "diskpart" and press Enter.
6. Enter "list disk" and press Enter to list the disks available on your laptop.
7. Select the blank USB flash drive (enter "select disk 1" for example) and press Enter.
Be careful to select the blank USB flash drive and not to select another disk because you will
erase all data on the selected disk.
8. Enter "clean" and press Enter.

9. Enter "create partition primary" and press Enter.
10. Enter "active" and press Enter.
11. Enter "format fs=ntfs quick" and press Enter.
12. Enter "exit" and press Enter.
13. Copy and unzip the *.zip file on the bootable USB flash drive.
Technical Manual SOFTWARE RAS533H - 3

RAA023
2.2. Boot sequence modification
1. Insert the Windows master USB flash drive into a USB port.
To authorize the computer to boot on the USB flash drive, modify the System Boot into the BIOS as
follows:
2. Switch the instrument on and press DEL when the following message appears: "Press DEL to run
setup".
3. When the BIOS window appears, enter in the Boot menu.
4. Select Hard Drive BBS Priorities and press Enter.
5. Press Enter to change the Boot Option #1.

6. Select the connected USB flash drive and press Enter.
The USB flash drive is named according to the manufacturer (ex: VERBATIM...).
Do not select the line starting by "UEFI: ".
Hard Drive BSS Priorities

7. Press ESC to go back to the previous screen.
8. Change the Boot Option #2 to Disabled option.
Boot Menu
9. Press ESC and check the boot order:
- Boot Option #1 [USB flash drive name]
- Boot Option #2 [Disabled]
10. Press F4 to save modifications and choose YES to restart the computer.
The computer automatically boots on the USB flash drive.

RAA023
2.3. Master installation
1. After the booting period, the following screen appears:
2. The following options are available:

- Option 1 allows to install the Windows 7 operating system on C:\ partition and keeps the files of
D:\ partition.
- Option 2 allows to install the Windows 7 operating system on C:\ partition and to format the D:\
partition.
- Option Q allows to cancel the image installation. Type "exit" to go back to system screen.
3. Type your choice (1, 2 or Q) and press Enter.
To cancel, press Q with the AZERTY keyboard and press A with the QWERTY keyboard.
4. At the end of the installation, the following screen appears.
5. Follow the instructions displayed:

- Press any key from keyboard,
- Wait for the screen to turn black,
- Switch the instrument off,
- Remove the USB key,
- Switch the instrument on.
At first restart, after performing the disk image installation, the operating system needs to load the
proper drivers (USB peripherals).
Wait for the full completion of drivers installation before going to next step. You can check it in the
notification bar, on lower right corner of the screen.

RAA023
2.4. Master installation check
1. Open the C:\ghost.ini file.

2. Make sure it contains the following informations:
3. Make sure that the Windows desktop wallpaper is the following:
The left Shift key used to skip the automatic logon is no more functional under Windows 7.
Press CTRL+ALT+DEL keys to logoff and change current user.
2.5. Printer installation
The following printer drivers are pre-installed but not loaded in Windows 7 after performing the master
procedure.
These models are the ones supplied by HORIBA Medical over the past years until now:
■ OKI B4600
■ Epson M2000
■ Epson M2400
■ Epson 6200
■ Epson WP4015
■ Epson WF5110
To install a printer:
1. Open the Windows menu, click on Devices and Printers.
2. Connect one of these printers only by USB cable, and power on the printer.
The drivers will be loaded after 1 minute.
3. Enter Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.
4. You must see your printer model appearing in the Printers and Faxes list.

RAA023
5. Right click on the printer icon and select Printing preferences.

6. Change the paper size according to you country (A4, Letter, ...).
For the printer models listed above, printing operations have been tested and fully validated.
Other printer models can be connected but HORIBA Medical cannot guarantee correct
printing operations on all the printer models.
2.6. Touchscreen calibration (if necessary)
1. Check that the touchscreen is properly calibrated.

2. If this is not the case, open C:\Program Files\eGalaxTouch directory and run the
eGalaxTouch.exe file.
3. From the Tools tab, select 4 Points Calibration.
4. Press OK.
5. Touch each of the four corners of the screen to calibrate the touchscreen.
6. Press Apply, then OK.
2.7. Brightness adjustment (if necessary)
Touchscreen brightness can be changed in the Windows 7 operating system. If needed:

1. Enter Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options.
2. Move the cursor at the bottom of the screen to change the brightness percentage (from 0% to 100%,
default is 45%).

RAA023
3. Computer models < 1300013734
3.1. Windows master CD-ROM burning procedure
The Windows masters for ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400 are available for download. The files to be
downloaded have an *.iso extension and are named "Master_P400_PC400_V_1.0.0" for example.
■ Download the Windows master version you need depending on the computer model of the instrument.
■ Save the *.iso file on your laptop (do not save it on the instrument).
■ Insert a blank CD-ROM in the CD writer.
■ Start the CD burning software.
■ Burn the ISO image to the CD-ROM.
3.2. Windows master installation
■ Open the CD-ROM drive of the instrument.

■ Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
It is seriously recommended to wait one minute between the switch off and the switch on of
the instrument, to prevent any damage to the power supply.
■ Press Delete until the BIOS setting screen appears.

■ Select the Advanced BIOS Features option and press Enter.
■ Select CDROM in front of First Boot Device.
■ Press F10 to save and exit.
The instrument restarts and boots on the CD-ROM.
■ When the ABX HARD DRIVE LOADER screen appears, the instrument gives three options: (1), (2),
(Q).
(1) Load image to disk C:\ only <partition 1 must exist>.
(2) Load image to disk C:\ and D:\ <the whole disk will be erased>.
(Q) Quit.
Option (1): erases the data on drive C:\; installs Windows on drive C:\.
Option (2): erases the data on drives C:\ and D:\; installs Windows on drive C:\ and creates a
Backup folder on drive D:\.
Option (Q): enables to quit the program.
■ Enter 1 and wait a few minutes for the following message:

Please remove the CD-ROM and reboot the computer ...
...>

RAA023
■ Enter exit and press Enter.

The instrument reboots automatically.
■ While the instrument reboots, remove the CD-ROM from the drive.
■ At the end of the boot, the instrument asks for user confirmation to restart the computer.
■ Click Yes.
■ Afterthe reboot, you are directly logged in

to Windows, click Start and check if the Log
Off function is displayed.
■ Ifthe Log Off function is not displayed,

follow the procedure below to display it.
- Right-click Start and click Properties.
The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties

window is displayed.
- Click the Start Menu tab.
- Select the Classic Start menu option and
click Customize...
- Select the Display Log Off option and

click OK.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS517C
Software version installation
Concerns
Software version downloading
Software version installation
Required tools
None
Required products
None
Intervention time
0 h 15
Frequency
On request

Software version

operations.
Software version installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Software version downloading
■ Download the P400_SOFT_VX.X.X.zip file on a USB flash drive.

■ Unzip the file.
2. Software version installation
■ Log in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password.

■ Press the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off.
■ Insert the USB flash drive in a free USB port.
■ Press the Windows Start button to open the menu and press Run.
■ Enter "explorer" in the Open: field and press OK.
■ Open the My Computer folder and select the USB flash drive.
■ Execute the Setup.exe file by double-clicking it.
■ The following message will appear:
"This will install P400 Software. Do you wish to continue?".
■ Press Yes.
■ Press successively Next and Next.
■ Make sure that the following options are selected. If not, select them:
Download P400 Eprom
Create a desktop icon.
■ Select one of the two available types of installation:
Update
Full installation.
■ If Full installation is selected when installing the software version, the complete
configuration (applications, calibrators, controls, settings, etc.) will be lost.
Then, you have to install the reagent applications again. See RAS518: Reagent applications
■ If Update is selected, you will not lose the configuration (applications, calibrators, controls,
settings, etc.) neither the patient results.
■ Press Next.
■ Press Install.
■ The instrument will ask you: "Ready to Install?", press Yes.
■ The Eprom will be updated automatically and then the software as well (it will take a few minutes).
RAS517C - 2 SOFTWARE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Software version installation
If Full installation is selected, the following message will appear during the update:
"The directory: "C:\Program Files\P400 Software\" already exists.
Continue the task: "Download P400 Eprom", "Create a desktop icon", "Full installation"?".
Press Yes.
■ Press Finish and remove the USB flash drive.

■ Press the Windows Start button, press Shutdown and then press Shutdown.
■ When getting the message "It is now safe to turn off your computer.", switch the instrument off and
wait 10 seconds.
If the following message appears during the start up:

"Transmission not successful, do you want to continue to process queued messages?".
Press Yes.
Technical Manual SOFTWARE RAS517C - 3

RAA023
Software version installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

RAA023
RAS518C
RAS518: Reagent applications installation
Concerns
Reagent applications downloading
Required tools
None
Required products
None
Intervention time
0 h 15
Frequency
On request

KIT, REAGENT APPLICATION P400 / PC400

operations.
Reagent applications installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Reagent applications downloading
■ Download the P400_APPLI_VX.XX.zip file on a USB flash drive.

■ Unzip the file.
2. Reagent applications installation
2.1. On the ABX Pentra 400
■ From the Applications list, press Import:
■ Install your reagent applications support (CD-ROM or USB flash drive) on the instrument.
■ Select the support type in the dialog box and press OK.
■ The applications update screen is displayed

(refer to the following example).
The applications for which an update is available on your support are listed in two tables: one for major
parameter updates, another for minor parameter updates.
■ When a major parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is lost. A new
calibration must be performed. If the number of calibrator levels or the calibration predilution is
modified, the calibrator target values for this test are also deleted and must be reconfigured.
■ When a minor parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is kept in
memory. A new calibration is not required.
For detailed information concerning major and minor parameters, refer to the ABX Pentra 400 user
manual.
Each table indicates the application code, the current application version number and modification date
and time, the update application version number, if the application is selected to be updated.
■ Press Edit.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Reagent applications installation
■ By default, all applications are selected to be updated. If necessary, deselect the applications that
should not be updated.
If an application is already present on the instrument with the same test name, the same
application code or the same application local code but a different channel number, then the
application is unselected by default and cannot be updated. The following message is
displayed: "At least one application has the same name or code with different channel in the
media." In this case, the test name, the application code or the application local code must
be modified before updating this application.
When an update of the reagent online help is available on your support and at least one application is
unselected, a dialog box informs the user that the whole reagent online help is going to be updated
whereas at least one application will not be updated.
■ Press Cancel to cancel the applications update.
The selected applications are updated as well as:

- the reagents used in these applications,
- all diluents and cleaners,
- the incompatibilities related to these applications and configured by HORIBA Medical,
- the reagent online help (when an update is available on your support).
It takes a few minutes.
A dialog box informs you when the update is completed.
■ Press OK.

RAA023
2.2. On the Pentra C400
■ From the Applications list, press Import:
■ Install your reagent applications support (CD-ROM or USB flash drive) on the instrument.
■ Select the support type in the dialog box and press OK.
■ The applications update screen is displayed

(refer to the following example).
The applications for which an update is available on your support are listed in two tables: one for major
parameter updates, another for minor parameter updates.
■ When a major parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is lost. A new
calibration must be performed. If the number of calibrator levels or the calibration predilution is
modified, the calibrator target values for this test are also deleted and must be reconfigured.
■ When a minor parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is kept in
memory. A new calibration is not required.
For detailed information concerning major and minor parameters, refer to the Pentra C400 user manual.
Each table indicates the application code, the current application version number and modification date
and time, the update application version number, if the application is selected to be updated.
■ Press Edit.
■ By default, all applications are selected to be updated. If necessary, deselect the applications that
should not be updated.
If an application is already present on the instrument with the same test name, the same
application code or the same application local code but a different channel number, then the
application is unselected by default and cannot be updated. The following message is
displayed: "At least one application has the same name or code with different channel in the
media." In this case, the test name, the application code or the application local code must
be modified before updating this application.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Reagent applications installation
The restrictions below apply when updating the applications.

- If an application is linked to a ratio and the parameters modified in this application are incompatible
with the ratio, the application cannot be updated. In this case, the ratio must be deleted before
updating the applications.
Modification of the following method parameters could affect the ratio consistency:
■ pre-dilution parameters (diluent solution, factor, delay)
■ cleaning parameters
■ analysis cycles parameters
The following modifications always affect the ratio consistency:
■ modification of the specimen type in the method parameters
■ modification of the basic unit
■ creation of an incompatibility for the methods used in the same ratio
For detailed information, refer to the "Settings > Application Configuration" chapter of the
Pentra C400 user manual.
- If an application is linked to a profile and the sample type is modified in this application, the
application cannot be updated. In this case, the profile must be deleted before updating the
applications.
- If a reagent is already present on the instrument with the same reagent short name but a different
reagent number, the reagent cannot be updated. In this case, the reagent short name must be modified
before updating the applications.
- If the container type for a solution with a reagent number between 600 and 799 is changed, a dialog
box informs the user that the solution will be deleted from the Reagent Configuration menu.
■ Press OK to validate. In this case, after the applications update, the container type must be
reconfigured in Services > Application Configuration > Reagents and the solution in the
Reagent Configuration menu.
- When an update of the reagent online help is available on your support and at least one application
is unselected, a dialog box informs the user that the whole reagent online help is going to be updated
whereas at least one application will not be updated.
The selected applications are updated as well as:

- the reagents used in these applications,
- all diluents and cleaners,
- the incompatibilities related to these applications and configured by HORIBA Medical,
- the reagent online help (when an update is available on your support).
It takes a few minutes.
A dialog box informs you when the update is completed.
■ Press OK.

RAA023

RAA023
RAS542F
Printer installation
RAS542: Printer installation
Concerns
Overview
Printer installation
Preliminary
Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for
example)
Printer selection
Printer properties setup
Printer connection
Required tools
Driver delivered with the printer
Required products
One of the listed printers
Intervention time
0 h 20
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Printer installation ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Overview
Instrument OS Connection Printers Procedure

EPL 5700/5800/5900
ABX Pentra LPT1 OKI B4200/4350/4600
400 / Pentra XP EPSON M2000D/M2010D/M2400D 2. Printer installation, page 2
C400
USB EPSON WP-4015DN/WF-5110DW
2. Printer installation
2.1. Preliminary
From the instrument application (Services > System Configuration > Printer), make sure that the
printer is listed.
■ If it is, go directly to 2.3. Printer selection, page 5
■ If not, go to 2.2. Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for example), page 2
2.2. Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for example)
In order to install an EPSON WF-5110DW printer on your instrument, you need to perform the following
steps.
■ Copy the driver to a USB flash drive.
■ Go to Services > System Configuration > Printer.
■ Press Edit and then Add Printer.
■ Click Next.
RAS542F - 2 SOFTWARE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Printer installation
■ Select Local printer and click Next.
■ Select the USB001 port and click Next.
■ Click Have Disk.
■ Insert
your USB flash drive and click
Browse.
Technical Manual SOFTWARE RAS542F - 3

RAA023
■ Select the E_JF1KKE.INF file and click

Open.
■ Click OK and then Next.
■ Select Yes and click Next.
■ Select Do not share this printer and click

Next.

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Printer installation
■ Select No and click Next.
■ Click Finish and remove the USB flash

drive.
Your printer has been installed.
2.3. Printer selection
After installing your printer, check if it is set as default. To do that, you need to perform the following
steps.
■ Press Edit.
■ From the Printer List, select the printer you want to set as default.
■ Press Set Default Printer.
Technical Manual SOFTWARE RAS542F - 5

RAA023
2.4. Printer properties setup

■ Press Edit.
■ Press Printer Properties.
■ Select:
- Paper Source: Auto Select
- Document Size: A4
- Paper Type: Plain paper
- Color: Grayscale
■ Click OK.
2.5. Printer connection
■ Exit the application and reboot the system.

■ Connect the printer and switch it on.
Please note that a USB cable, ref. DAC051A (1201891051), is delivered with the instrument
in order to connect the printer to the instrument.
In addition, a US power cable, ref. DAC012A (1201891012), is also delivered with the
instrument for the printer connection (only for US).
■ Print a test page.

RAA023
RAS814A
External barcode reader
RAS814: External barcode reader
Concerns
To install the barcode reader
Barcode reader default configuration
To set up the barcode reader
To test the barcode reading
Required tools
None
Required products
None
Intervention time
0 h 20
Frequency
On request

KIT,INST.BARCODE PS2 TOUCH 65 XBA453D (1209114453)

operations.
External barcode reader ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. To install the barcode reader
1. Exit the application and switch the instrument off.

2. The barcode reader is equipped with a "Y" connection. Connect the female end to the male end of
the keyboard and connect the remaining end to the instrument.
3. Switch the instrument on.
2. Barcode reader default configuration
The barcode reader has been set up so that it can read the following types of barcodes:
■ ITF 2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved) without check digit (16 characters max.)
■ Code 39 without check digit (16 characters max.)
■ Code 128 (99 characters max.)
■ Codabar (16 characters max.)
This default configuration has been already done on the barcode reader. However, if you need to reset
the barcode reader to the default configuration, you can follow the default configuration procedure (see
below).
RAS814A - 2 SOFTWARE Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 External barcode reader
Enter or Exit Configuration
Factory Default Settings
KBD-AT-ALT
Global Suffix: NULL
GS1-AIM ID: Disable, Do not transmit GS1-128 labels
Code 39 Set Length
I 2 of 5 Set Length
Code 128 Set Length
Codabar Enable, Set Length
Codabar ST-SP Char not Xmit
UPC-A & UPC-E Disable
EAN 8 & EAN 13 Disable
Technical Manual SOFTWARE RAS814A - 3

RAA023
3. To set up the barcode reader
3.1. ITF 2/5 with check digit (optional)
1. If the ITF 2/5 with check digit is used in the laboratory, you must set up the barcode reader as follows.
I2of5 Check Character Calc = Check Std (Modulo 10)
I2of5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
2. To reset the barcode reader to the ITF 2/5 without check digit configuration (see below).
I2of5 Check Character Calc = Don't Calculate

RAA023
3.2. Code 39 with check digit (optional)
1. If the Code 39 with check digit is used in the laboratory, you must set up the barcode reader as
follows.
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check
Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
2. To reset the barcode reader to the Code 39 without check digit configuration (see below).
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate

RAA023
4. To test the barcode reading
4.1. ITF 2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved)
With C/D on label Without C/D on label

Barcode checksum: Yes Barcode checksum: No
1224488 121314151617
If "12244881" is displayed, disable the check

digit transmission (see 3.1. ITF 2/5 with
check digit (optional), page 4).
4.2. Code 39
With C/D on label Without C/D on label

Barcode checksum: Yes Barcode checksum: No
12345ABCDE
If "12345ABCDEW" is displayed, disable the

check digit transmission (see 3.2. Code 39
with check digit (optional), page 5).
4.3. Code 128
Barcode checksum: No

RAA023
4.4. Codabar
Barcode checksum: No
37859 123456/$

RAA023

RAA023
RAS624C
Cooling unit
RAS624: Cooling unit
Concerns
Cooling unit dismantling
Cooling unit parts replacement
Air fan replacement
Float switch replacement
Control board replacement
Pump replacement (for CU401 only)
Bleed screw O-ring replacement (for CU401 only)
Required tools
Hexagonal keys
Open-end wrench
Pliers
Required products
None
Intervention time
N/A
Frequency
On request

None

operations.
Cooling unit ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400
1. Cooling unit dismantling
To avoid any damage (compressor oil into the condenser), do not tilt the cooling unit during
this operation.
Remove the reagents from the reagent tray and place them in a refrigerated area.
■ Switch the cooling unit off and disconnect the power supply cable.
CU400 cooling unit dismantling
■ Remove the cooling unit cover by

unscrewing the 6 cruciform screws.
■ Disconnect the ground wire (located at the

back left) from the cooling unit cover.
RAS624C - 2 COOLING UNIT Technical Manual

RAA023
ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400 Cooling unit
To avoid anything falling into the tank, put the lid on the hole.
CU401 cooling unit dismantling

Remove the cooling unit covers as follows:
■ Press push to open the top lid.
A A
■ Unscrew the 2 cruciform screws and
washers at the top side of the unit (A). Then,
fold away the front cover towards the front C
(B). C
■ Remove the rubber corners (C). B
Technical Manual COOLING UNIT RAS624C - 3

RAA023
■ At the rear side of the unit, unscrew the 3

cruciform screws and washers maintaining
the left side cover.
■ Slide this cover towards the back of the unit
and remove it.
■ Perform the same operation for the right
side cover.
■ Before removing the right side cover,

disconnect the ground wire.
■ Remove the back grid.

RAA023
2. Cooling unit parts replacement
2.1. Air fan replacement
■ First, perform the cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.
CU400 air fan replacement
■ Remove the air fan as follows:

- Unscrew the 2 screws and washers A
located at the bottom of the air fan (A).
- Disconnect the 2 power supply B
connectors from the air fan (B).
- Unscrew the ground wire (C).

- Cut the 2 Ty-Raps™ (D).
■ Replace the air fan and reassemble in Sticker

reverse order.
D
Ensure that the air fan is positioned in the correct direction: the sticker must be visible.
■ To simplify the air fan reassembling, it is better to fasten the right screw first (when you are
in front of the air fan with sticker visible).
■ In case the connectors are too loose, remove them and tighten them a little bit more with pliers.
■ Only fix the sheath and the ground wire with the Ty-Raps™, do not take the 2 power supply
wires.

RAA023
CU401 air fan replacement
■ Cut the 2 Ty-Raps™ (A).

■ Disconnect the 2 power supply connectors B
from the air fan (B).
■ Unscrew the ground wire (C).
A
C
■ Unscrew the 3 screws and washers using an 7-mm open-end wrench and remove the air fan.
■ Replace the air fan and reassemble in reverse order.
Ensure that the air fan is positioned in the correct direction: the sticker must be visible.
Sticker

RAA023
2.2. Float switch replacement
CU400 float switch replacement
C1
GR1
R2
REL1
R1
R3
R4
T1
D2
RC1
TR1
■ On the control board, disconnect the float
switch cable from the SU6 connector.
SK2
S11
SSR1
SK1 SK3 SK4 SK5 SU6
■ Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the float

switch.
■ Unsolder the 2 wires from the old float switch.

■ Solder these wires on the new float switch.
■ Install the new float switch and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
CU401 float switch replacement
■ Cut the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the float

switch cable.
SU6 SK5 SK4 SK3 SK1
SSR1
S11
■ On the control board, lift up and disconnect
SK2
the float switch cable from the SU6
connector.
TR1
T1
D2
RC1
R1
R3
R4
REL1
R2
GR1
C1
■ Unscrew the 2 screws and remove the float

switch.
■ Replace the float switch and reassemble in reverse order.

RAA023
2.3. Control board replacement
CU400 control board replacement
■ From the cooling unit rear, disconnect the

cooling unit cable.

washers supporting the control board
support.

RAA023
■ Slowly slide the control board support to

the left side.
■ Carefully disconnect all the connectors

from the control board.
the control board from its support.
■ Replace the control board and reassemble in reverse order.

Connect all the connectors as shown on the following diagram:
C1
GR1
R2
REL1
R1
R3
R4
D2
T1
RC1
TR1
To instrument
connector
SK2
S11
SSR1
To compressor
To float switch
SK1 SK3 SK4 SK5 SU6
To ON/OFF switch To fan To pump To solenoid valve

RAA023
CU401 control board replacement

■ Unscrew the nut and disconnect the

cooling unit cable located at the back of the
control board (inside the cooling unit).
■ Carefullydisconnect all the connectors

from the control board.
remove the control board.
■ Replace the control board and reassemble in reverse order.

Connect all the connectors as shown on the following diagram:
To solenoid valve To pump To fan To ON/OFF switch
SU6 SK5 SK4 SK3 SK1
To float switch
SSR1
To compressor
S11
SK2
To instrument
TR1
connector
RC1
T1
D2
R4
R3
R1
REL1
R2
GR1
C1

RAA023
2.4. Pump replacement (for CU401 only)
The pump has to be replaced every 2 years.
■ First, drain the cooling unit. See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7.
■ Perform the CU401 cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.
■ At the back of the cooling unit, unscrew the

2 cruciform screws and washers.
Then, slightly pull away the IN/OUT plate
towards the back.
Pay attention not to lose the 2 blue washers located at the back of the IN/OUT plate screws.
■ Remove the top cover as follows:

- At the front of the cooling unit, unscrew the
2 cruciform screws and washers located on
both sides of the top cover.
- Remove the top cover.
■ Cut the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the cables.

RAA023
SU6 SK5 SK4 SK3 SK1
SSR1
S11
■ On the control board, disconnect the float
SK2
switch cable from the SU6 connector and
the pump cable on the SK4 connector.
TR1
T1
D2
RC1
R1
R3
R4
REL1
R2
GR1
C1
B B
■ On the pump:
- Disconnect the ground wire (A).
- Unscrew the 4 cruciform screws and
washers (one with a ground wire) (B).
A
B B
■ Slightly
lift the pump up and towards the
back to access the tubings.
■ Cutand remove the 2 collars. Then,
disconnect the tubings.

RAA023
■ Remove the pump from the cooling unit.

■ Remove the 2 casings from the pump
tubings.
■ Replace the pump and reassemble in
reverse order.
To reconnect the tubings, use the 2 collars provided with the pump.
■ Put the collar on the tubing and plug the tubing into the connector.
■ Then, with pliers, tighten both sides of the square part of the collar.
2.5. Bleed screw O-ring replacement (for CU401 only)
■ First, drain the cooling unit. See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7.
bleed screw
■ Remove the collar located inside the bleed

screw with pliers.
■ Unscrew the bleed screw.
■ Replace the O-ring and reassemble in
reverse order.
collar

RAA023

Technical manual-PC400

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical manual-PC400

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

Section 1: Introduction .....................................................................1 - 1

1. Document update ......................................................................................... 1 - 2

2. Legal information .......................................................................................... 1 - 4

3. Operational conditions ................................................................................. 1 - 6

Section 2: Specifications ..................................................................2 - 1

1. Technical specifications ............................................................................... 2 - 2

2. Physical specifications ................................................................................. 2 - 6

Section 3: Technology ......................................................................3 - 1

1. Optical principles .......................................................................................... 3 - 2

2. Fluidic principles ........................................................................................... 3 - 8

3. Temperature control ................................................................................... 3 - 12

4. Level detection and shock detection ........................................................ 3 - 22

5. Pressure detection ...................................................................................... 3 - 28

Section 4: Electric and electronic principles ..................................4 - 1

1. Mother board ................................................................................................. 4 - 3

2. Optical acquisition ...................................................................................... 4 - 14

3. Level detection ............................................................................................ 4 - 18

4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) .......................................... 4 - 25

5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280) ......................................................... 4 - 27

6. Internal computer 1300013734 .................................................................. 4 - 29

7. Power supply ............................................................................................... 4 - 30

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual i

9. Instrument synoptic .................................................................................... 4 - 82

Section 5: Software description.......................................................5 - 1

1. Services menu overview ............................................................................... 5 - 2

2. Software architecture ................................................................................... 5 - 3

3. Diagnostics menu description ..................................................................... 5 - 7

4. Initialization phases .................................................................................... 5 - 25

Section 6: Troubleshooting ..............................................................6 - 1

1. Error messages ............................................................................................. 6 - 2

Section 7: ISE module.......................................................................7 - 1

1. ISE module description ................................................................................ 7 - 2

2. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7 - 38

Section 8: Exploded views................................................................8 - 1

1. Reagent tray .................................................................................................. 8 - 3

2. Reagent tray closing assy ............................................................................ 8 - 6

3. Sample tray .................................................................................................... 8 - 7

4. Optical bench ................................................................................................ 8 - 8

5. Reaction tray ................................................................................................. 8 - 9

6. Cuvette changer .......................................................................................... 8 - 11

7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly ......................................................... 8 - 15

ii ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

9. Cuvette changer unload rack .................................................................... 8 - 17

10. Ventilation .................................................................................................. 8 - 18

11. Arms assembly .......................................................................................... 8 - 19

12. Sample arm ................................................................................................ 8 - 23

13. Reagent arm .............................................................................................. 8 - 24

14. Arms assembly kits ................................................................................... 8 - 25

15. Mixer assembly ......................................................................................... 8 - 26

16. Syringe assy .............................................................................................. 8 - 28

17. Wash cup assy .......................................................................................... 8 - 29

18. Fluid part .................................................................................................... 8 - 30

19. Covering ..................................................................................................... 8 - 32

20. ISE module ................................................................................................. 8 - 34

21. ISE module electrode holder ................................................................... 8 - 36

22. ISE module syringes ................................................................................. 8 - 37

23. Computer ................................................................................................... 8 - 38

24. Cooling unit ............................................................................................... 8 - 40

Section 9: Additional spare parts ....................................................9 - 1

5. Other consumables ....................................................................................... 9 - 5